SERVICE MANUAL - Toshiba

FILE NO. A05-004-1 Revised: Jan./2006

SERVICE MANUAL R410A System air conditioner The indoor units in the Super Heat Recovery Multi System are common to those used in the Super Modular Multi System air conditioner. Therefore refer to the service manuals A03-009, A03-010, and A03-011 separately issued.

Heat Recovery Type Indoor Unit

Outdoor Unit

4-way Air Discharge Cassette Type

MMU-AP0091H, AP0121H, AP0151H, MMU-AP0181H, AP0241H, AP0271H, MMU-AP0301H, AP0361H, AP0481H MMU-AP0561H 2-way Air Discharge Cassette Type

MMU-AP0071WH, AP0091WH, AP0121WH, MMU-AP0151WH, AP0181WH, AP0241WH, MMU-AP0271WH, AP0301WH, AP0481WH* * CHINA market only


MMU-AP0071YH, AP0091YH, AP0121YH, MMU-AP0151SH, AP0181SH, AP0241SH, MMU-AP0152SH, AP0182SH, AP0242SH

Inverter Unit

MMY-MAP0802FT8 MMY-MAP1002FT8 MMY-MAP1202FT8

Flow Selector Unit (FS unit) RBM-Y1122FE RBM-Y1802FE RBM-Y2802FE

Concealed Duct Standard Type

MMD-AP0071BH, AP0091BH, AP0121BH, AP0151BH, MMD-AP0181BH, AP0241BH, AP0271BH, AP0301BH, MMD-AP0361BH, AP0481BH, AP0561BH Concealed Duct High Static Pressure Type

MMD-AP0181H, AP0241H, AP0271H, MMD-AP0361H, AP0481H Slim Duct Type

MMD-AP0071SPH, AP0091SPH, AP0121SPH, MMD-AP0151SPH, AP0181SPH Under Ceiling Type

MMC-AP0151H, AP0181H, AP0241H, MMC-AP0271H, AP0361H, AP0481H High Wall Type

MMK-AP0071H, AP0091H, AP0121H, MMK-AP0151H, AP0181H, AP0241H, MMK-AP0072H, AP0092H, AP0122H Floor Standing Cabinet Type

MML-AP0071H, AP0091H, AP0121H, MML-AP0151H, AP0181H, AP0241H Floor Standing Concealed Type

MML-AP0071BH, AP0091BH, AP0121BH, MML-AP0151BH, AP0181BH, AP0241BH Floor Standing Type

MMF-AP0151H, AP0181H, AP0241H,AP0271H, MMF-AP0361H, AP0481H, AP0561H

PRINTED IN JAPAN, Jan., 2006 ToMo

WARNINGS ON REFRIGERANT LEAKAGE Important

Check of Concentration Limit The room in which the air conditioner is to be installed requires a design that in the event of refrigerant gas leaking out, its concentration will not exceed a set limit. The refrigerant R410A which is used in the air conditioner is safe, without the toxicity or combustibility of ammonia, and is not restricted by laws to be imposed which protect the ozone layer. However, since it contains more than air, it poses the risk of suffocation if its concentration should rise excessively. Suffocation from leakage of R410A is almost non-existent. With the recent increase in the number of high concentration buildings, however, the installation of multi air conditioner systems is on the increase because of the need for effective use of floor space, individual control, energy conservation by curtailing heat and carrying power etc. Most importantly, the multi air conditioner system is able to replenish a large amount of refrigerant compared with conventional individual air conditioners. If a single unit of the multi conditioner system is to be installed in a small room, select a suitable model and installation procedure so that if the refrigerant accidentally leaks out, its concentration does not reach the limit (and in the event of an emergency, measures can be made before injury can occur). In a room where the concentration may exceed the limit, create an opening with adjacent rooms, or install mechanical ventilation combined with a gas leak detection device. The concentration is as given below. Total amount of refrigerant (kg) Min. volume of the indoor unit installed room (m³) ≤ Concentration limit (kg/m³)

NOTE 2 : The standards for minimum room volume are as follows. (1) No partition (shaded portion)

(2) When there is an effective opening with the adjacent room for ventilation of leaking refrigerant gas (opening without a door, or an opening 0.15% or larger than the respective floor spaces at the top or bottom of the door). Outdoor unit Refrigerant piping Indoor unit

(3) If an indoor unit is installed in each partitioned room and the refrigerant tubing is interconnected, the smallest room of course becomes the object. But when a mechanical ventilation is installed interlocked with a gas leakage detector in the smallest room where the density limit is exceeded, the volume of the next smallest room becomes the object. Refrigerant piping

Outdoor unit

The concentration limit of R410A which is used in multi air conditioners is 0.3kg/m³. NOTE 1 : If there are 2 or more refrigerating systems in a single refrigerating device, the amounts of refrigerant should be as charged in each independent device.

e.g., charged amount (10kg)

Outdoor unit e.g., charged amount (15kg)

Very small room

Indoor unit Small room

Medium room

Large room

Mechanical ventilation device - Gas leak detector

NOTE 3 : The minimum indoor floor area compared with the amount of refrigerant is roughly as follows: (When the ceiling is 2.7m high) 40 m² 35

Room A Room B Room C Room D Room E Room F Indoor unit

For the amount of charge in this example: The possible amount of leaked refrigerant gas in rooms A, B and C is 10kg. The possible amount of leaked refrigerant gas in rooms D, E and F is 15kg.

Min. indoor floor area

30 25

Range below the density limit of 0.3 kg/m³ (countermeasures not needed)

20 15 10

Range above the density limit of 0.3 kg/m³ (countermeasures needed)

5 0

10 20 30 Total amount of refrigerant

kg

CONTENTS SAFETY CAUTION ............................................................................................ 4 1. OUTLINE ................................................................................................... 9 2. WIRING DIAGRAM ................................................................................. 14 3. PARTS RATING ...................................................................................... 30 4. REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEMATIC DRAWING ............................... 48 5. SYSTEM REFRIGERANT CYCLE DRAWING ....................................... 53 6. CONTROL OUTLINE .............................................................................. 60 7. APPLIED CONTROL .............................................................................. 71 8. TEST OPERATION ................................................................................. 86 9. TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................................................... 116 10. CONFIGURATION OF CONTROL CIRCUIT ........................................ 174 11. BACKUP OPERATIONS (EMERGENCY OPERATION)....................... 188 12. OIL LEVEL JUDGMENT DISPLAY ....................................................... 190 13. REFRIGERANT RECOVERY WHEN REPLACING THE COMPRESSOR ........................................... 191 14. LEAKAGE/CLOGGING OF OIL-EQUALIZATION CIRCUIT ................. 197 15. REPLACING COMPRESSOR............................................................... 199 16. REPLACING PROCEDURE OF PARTS ............................................... 206 17. P.C. BOARD .......................................................................................... 217

NOTE Ensure power is isolated from the unit when replacing the high performance filter or when opening the service panel.

SAFETY CAUTION The important contents concerned to the safety are described on the product itself and on this Service Manual. Please read this Service Manual after understanding the described items thoroughly in the following contents (Indications/Illustrated marks), and keep them.

[Explanation of indications] Indication

Explanation

DANGER

Indicates contents assumed that an imminent danger causing a death or serious injury of the repair engineers and the third parties when an incorrect work has been executed.

WARNING

Indicates possibilities assumed that a danger causing a death or serious injury of the repair engineers, the third parties, and the users due to troubles of the product after work when an incorrect work has been executed.

CAUTION

Indicates contents assumed that an injury or property damage (∗) may be caused on the repair engineers, the third parties, and the users due to troubles of the product after work when an incorrect work has been executed.

∗ Property damage : Enlarged damage concerned to property, furniture, and domestic animal/pet

[Explanation of illustrated marks] Mark

Explanation Indicates prohibited items (Forbidden items to do) The sentences near an illustrated mark describe the concrete prohibited contents. Indicates mandatory items (Compulsory items to do) The sentences near an illustrated mark describe the concrete mandatory contents. Indicates cautions (including danger/warning) The sentences or illustration near or in an illustrated mark describe the concrete cautious contents.

[Confirmation of warning label on the main unit] Confirm that labels are indicated on the specified positions (Refer to the Parts disassembly diagram (Outdoor unit).) If removing the label during parts replace, stick it as the original.

DANGER

Turn off breaker.

Execute discharge between terminals.

Turn “OFF” the breaker before removing the front panel and cabinet, otherwise an electric shock is caused by high voltage resulted in a death or injury. During operation, a high voltage with 400V or higher of circuit (∗) at secondary circuit of the highvoltage transformer is applied. If touching a high voltage with the naked hands or body, an electric shock is caused even if using an electric insulator. ∗ : For details, refer to the electric wiring diagram. When removing the front panel or cabinet, execute short-circuit and discharge between highvoltage capacitor terminals. If discharge is not executed, an electric shock is caused by high voltage resulted in a death or injury. After turning off the breaker, high voltage also keeps to apply to the high-voltage capacitor. Do not turn on the breaker under condition that the front panel and cabinet are removed. An electric shock is caused by high voltage resulted in a death or injury.

Prohibition

4

WARNING

Check earth wires.

Before troubleshooting or repair work, check the earth wire is connected to the earth terminals of the main unit, otherwise an electric shock is caused when a leak occurs. If the earth wire is not correctly connected, contact an electric engineer for rework. Do not modify the products. Do not also disassemble or modify the parts. It may cause a fire, electric shock or injury.

Prohibition of modification.

Use specified parts.

Do not bring a child close to the equipment.

For spare parts, use those specified (∗ ∗). If unspecified parts are used, a fire or electric shock may be caused. ∗: For details, refer to the parts list. Before troubleshooting or repair work, do not bring a third party (a child, etc.) except the repair engineers close to the equipment. It causes an injury with tools or disassembled parts. Please inform the users so that the third party (a child, etc.) does not approach the equipment. Connect the cut-off lead cables with crimp contact, etc, put the closed end side upward and then apply a water-cut method, otherwise a leak or production of fire is caused at the users’ side.

Insulating measures

No fire

When repairing the refrigerating cycle, take the following measures. 1) Be attentive to fire around the cycle. When using a gas stove, etc, be sure to put out fire before work; otherwise the oil mixed with refrigerant gas may catch fire. 2) Do not use a welder in the closed room. When using it without ventilation, carbon monoxide poisoning may be caused. 3) Do not bring inflammables close to the refrigerant cycle, otherwise fire of the welder may catch the inflammables. Check the used refrigerant name and use tools and materials of the parts which match with it. For the products which use R410A refrigerant, the refrigerant name is indicated at a position on the outdoor unit where is easy to see. To prevent miss-charging, the route of the service port is changed from one of the former R22. For an air conditioner which uses R410A, never use other refrigerant than R410A. For an air conditioner which uses other refrigerant (R22, etc.), never use R410A. If different types of refrigerant are mixed, abnormal high pressure generates in the refrigerating cycle and an injury due to breakage may be caused.

Refrigerant

Do not charge refrigerant additionally. If charging refrigerant additionally when refrigerant gas leaks, the refrigerant composition in the refrigerating cycle changes resulted in change of air conditioner characteristics or refrigerant over the specified standard amount is charged and an abnormal high pressure is applied to the inside of the refrigerating cycle resulted in cause of breakage or injury. Therefore if the refrigerant gas leaks, recover the refrigerant in the air conditioner, execute vacuuming, and then newly recharge the specified amount of liquid refrigerant. In this time, never charge the refrigerant over the specified amount. When recharging the refrigerant in the refrigerating cycle, do not mix the refrigerant or air other than R410A into the specified refrigerant. If air or others is mixed with the refrigerant, abnormal high pressure generates in the refrigerating cycle resulted in cause of injury due to breakage. After installation work, check the refrigerant gas does not leak. If the refrigerant gas leaks in the room, poisonous gas generates when gas touches to fire such as fan heater, stove or cocking stove though the refrigerant gas itself is innocuous. Never recover the refrigerant into the outdoor unit. When the equipment is moved or repaired, be sure to recover the refrigerant with recovering device. The refrigerant cannot be recovered in the outdoor unit; otherwise a serious accident such as breakage or injury is caused.

Assembly/Cabling

After repair work, surely assemble the disassembled parts, and connect and lead the removed cables as before. Perform the work so that the cabinet or panel does not catch the inner cables. If incorrect assembly or incorrect cable connection was done, a disaster such as a leak or fire is caused at user’s side.

5

WARNING

Insulator check

Ventilation

After the work has finished, be sure to use an insulation tester set (500V mugger) to Ω or more between the charge section and the non-charge check the resistance is 2MΩ metal section (Earth position). If the resistance value is low, a disaster such as a leak or electric shock is caused at user’s side. When the refrigerant gas leaks during work, execute ventilation. If the refrigerant gas touches to a fire, poisonous gas generates. A case of leakage of the refrigerant and the closed room full with gas is dangerous because a shortage of oxygen occurs. Be sure to execute ventilation. When checking the circuit inevitably under condition of the power-ON, use rubber gloves and others not to touch to the charging section. If touching to the charging section, an electric shock may be caused.

Be attentive to electric shock

When the refrigerant gas leaks, find up the leaked position and repair it surely. If the leaked position cannot be found up and the repair work is interrupted, pump-down and tighten the service valve, otherwise the refrigerant gas may leak into the room. The poisonous gas generates when gas touches to fire such as fan heater, stove or cocking stove though the refrigerant gas itself is innocuous.

Compulsion

When installing equipment which includes a large amount of charged refrigerant such as a multi air conditioner in a sub-room, it is necessary that the density does not the limit even if the refrigerant leaks. If the refrigerant leaks and exceeds the limit density, an accident of shortage of oxygen is caused. For the installation/moving/reinstallation work, follow to the Installation Manual. If an incorrect installation is done, a trouble of the refrigerating cycle, water leak, electric shock or fire is caused. After repair work has finished, check there is no trouble. If check is not executed, a fire, electric shock or injury may be caused. For a check, turn off the power breaker.

Check after rerair

Check after reinstallation

After repair work (installation of front panel and cabinet) has finished, execute a test run to check there is no generation of smoke or abnormal sound. If check is not executed, a fire or an electric shock is caused. Before test run, install the front panel and cabinet. Check the following items after reinstallation. 1) The earth wire is correctly connected. 2) The power cord is not caught in the product. 3) There is no inclination or unsteadiness and the installation is stable. If check is not executed, a fire, an electric shock or an injury is caused.

CAUTION

Put on gloves

Cooling check

∗) during repair work. Be sure to put on gloves (∗ If not putting on gloves, an injury may be caused with the parts, etc. (∗) Heavy gloves such as work gloves When the power was turned on, start to work after the equipment has been sufficiently cooled. As temperature of the compressor pipes and others became high due to cooling/heating operation, a burn may be caused.

6

• New Refrigerant (R410A) This air conditioner adopts a new HFC type refrigerant (R410A) which does not deplete the ozone layer.

1. Safety Caution Concerned to New Refrigerant The pressure of R410A is high 1.6 times of that of the former refrigerant (R22). Accompanied with change of refrigerant, the refrigerating oil has been also changed. Therefore, be sure that water, dust, the former refrigerant or the former refrigerating oil is not mixed into the refrigerating cycle of the air conditioner with new refrigerant during installation work or service work. If an incorrect work or incorrect service is performed, there is a possibility to cause a serious accident. Use the tools and materials exclusive to R410A to purpose a safe work.

4. Tools (1) Required Tools for R410A Mixing of different types of oil may cause generation of sludge, clogging of capillary, etc. Accordingly, the tools to be used are classified into the following three types. 1) Tools exclusive for R410A (Those which cannot be used for conventional refrigerant (R22)) 2) Tools exclusive for R410A, but can be also used for conventional refrigerant (R22) 3) Tools commonly used for R410A and for conventional refrigerant (R22) The table below shows the tools exclusive for R410A and their interchangeability.

Tools exclusive for R410A (The following tools for R410A are required.)

2. Cautions on Installation/Service (1) Do not mix the other refrigerant or refrigerating oil. For the tools exclusive to R410A, shapes of all the joints including the service port differ from those of the former refrigerant in order to prevent mixture of them. (2) As the use pressure of the new refrigerant is high, use material thickness of the pipe and tools which are specified for R410A. (3) In the installation time, use clean pipe materials and work with great attention so that water and others do not mix in because pipes are affected by impurities such as water, oxide scales, oil, etc. Use the clean pipes. Be sure to brazing with flowing nitrogen gas. (Never use gas other than nitrogen gas.) (4) For the earth protection, use a vacuum pump for air purge. (5) R410A refrigerant is azeotropic mixture type refrigerant. Therefore use liquid type to charge the refrigerant. (If using gas for charging, composition of the refrigerant changes and then characteristics of the air conditioner change.)

Tools whose specifications are changed for R410A and their interchangeability R410A air conditioner installation No.

Usage

Used tool

Conventional air conditioner installation

Existence of Whether convenWhether new equipment new equipment tional equipment can can be used with for R410A be used conventional refrigerant

Flare tool

Pipe flaring

Yes

*(Note 1)

Yes

Copper pipe gauge for adjusting projection margin

Flaring by conventional flare tool

Yes

*(Note 1)

*(Note 1)

Torque wrench

Connection of flare nut

Yes

No

No

Gauge manifold

Evacuating, refrigerant charge, run check, etc.

Yes

No

No

Charge hose

7

3. Pipe Materials

Vacuum pump adapter

Vacuum evacuating

Yes

No

Yes

For the refrigerant pipes, copper pipe and joints are mainly used. It is necessary to select the most appropriate pipes to conform to the standard. Use clean material in which impurities adhere inside of pipe or joint to a minimum.

Electronic balance for refrigerant charging

Refrigerant charge

Yes

Yes

Yes

Refrigerant cylinder

Refrigerant charge

Yes

No

No

Leakage detector

Gas leakage check

Yes

No

Yes

Charging cylinder

Refrigerant charge

(Note 2)

No

No

(1) Copper pipe

The pipe thickness, flare finishing size, flare nut and others differ according to a refrigerant type. When using a long copper pipe for R410A, it is recommended to select “Copper or copper-base pipe without seam” and one with bonded oil amount 40mg/10m or less. Also do not use crushed, deformed, discolored (especially inside) pipes. (Impurities cause clogging of expansion valves and capillary tubes.)

Use the flare nuts which are attached to the air conditioner unit.

(2) Joint The flare joint and socket joint are used for joints of the copper pipe. The joints are rarely used for installation of the air conditioner. However clear impurities when using them.

(Note 1) When flaring is carried out for R410A using the conventional flare tools, adjustment of projection margin is necessary. For this adjustment, a copper pipe gauge, etc. are necessary. (Note 2) Charging cylinder for R410A is being currently developed.

General tools (Conventional tools can be used.) In addition to the above exclusive tools, the following equipments which serve also for R22 are necessary as the general tools. (1) Vacuum pump Use vacuum pump by attaching vacuum pump adapter. (2) Torque wrench (3) Pipe cutter (4) Reamer (5) Pipe bender (6) Level vial

(7) Screwdriver (+, –) (8) Spanner or Monkey wrench (9) Hole core drill (10) Hexagon wrench (Opposite side 4mm) (11) Tape measure (12) Metal saw

Also prepare the following equipments for other installation method and run check. (1) Clamp meter (3) Insulation resistance tester (Megger) (2) Thermometer (4) Electroscope (Volt meter)

5. Recharge of Refrigerant When recharge of the refrigerant is required, charge the new refrigerant with the specified amount in the procedure as described below. Recover the refrigerant and check there is no refrigerant in the equipment.

Leave it as it is for 1 to 2 minutes and check the indicator of the compound gauge does not return.

Connect the charge hose to the packed valve service ports at gas side, liquid side, and balance side of the outdoor unit.

Set the refrigerant cylinder on the electronic balance, connect the charge hose to connecting ports of the cylinder and the electronic gauge, and then charge the liquid refrigerant from the service port at liquid side. (Shield with the gauge manifold so that refrigerant does not flow to gas side.)

Connect the charge hose to vacuum pump adaptor.

Open the packed valves of the balance pipe fully at liquid and gas sides, and then return the valve at gas side a little to the closed side.

Open fully PMV of the outdoor unit. • Turn on power of the outdoor unit. • Short CN30 on I/F P.C. board of the outdoor unit. • Turn off power of the outdoor unit within 2 minutes after shorting CN30.

(Charge the refrigerant as below.)

LowHighpressure gauge pressure gauge Connected to indoor unit

Valve fully closed (gas side) Main Center unit pipe

Open fully the handle on the Low side of the gauge manifold, and then turn on the power of vacuum pump for vacuuming.

Brazed

Fully tightened

When the pressure has lowered until indication of the compound gauge pointed –0.1MPa (–76cmHg), open fully the handle Low and turn off the power of vacuum pump.

Q R

Q R

Service port Ø6.4 Copper pipe

VL

VH Gauge manifold

Reducing valve

Service port Valve fully closed (liquid side) Fully tightened

Never charge the refrigerant over the specified amount. Do not charge the additional refrigerant. If charging refrigerant additionally when refrigerant gas leaks, the refrigerant composition in the refrigerating cycle changes resulted in change of air conditioner characteristics or refrigerant over the specified standard amount is charged and an abnormal high pressure is applied to the inside of the refrigerating cycle resulted in cause of breakage or injury.

Nitrogen gas Ø6.4 Copper pipe

Valve fully closed (balance) Connected to other terminal units

4mm-hexagonal wrench is required.

Set the equipment so that liquid refrigerant can be charged. When using a cylinder with siphon pipe, liquid can be charged without inverting the cylinder. [ Cylinder with siphon ]

[ Cylinder without siphon ]

Gauge manifold

Gauge manifold OUTDOOR unit

Electronic balance

6. Environmental concern



Siphon OUTDOOR unit

Electronic balance

R410A refrigerant is consisted with HFC mixed refrigerant. Therefore if the refrigerant gas is charged, the composition of the charged refrigerant changes and characteristics of the equipment changes.

Use “Vacuum pump method” for an air purge (Discharge of air in the connecting pipe) in installation time. • Do not discharge flon gas into the air to protect the earth environment. • Using the vacuum pump method, clear the remaining air (Nitrogen, etc.) in the unit. If the air remains, the pressure in the refrigerating cycle becomes abnormally high and an injury could occur through failure of the product.

8

1. OUTLINE “Super Heat Recovery Multi System” is a multi air conditioning system which enables each indoor unit in a refrigerant line to independently select cooling or heating operation. As it is able to operate simultaneously in cooling and heating modes, further heat recovery becomes possible. This system is most suitable for a building etc. where cool and hot air are mixed, such as a building where there are large temperature differences between rooms, caused by the influence of daylight or where used in a server room and permanent cooling is required. Heating and cooling operation are automatically selected in individual unit; You can save time for operation. For example, when heating is required for early morning and cooling for daytime, a Flow Selector Unit provides automatically a smooth selection of heating or cooling operation. Therefore you can obtain a comfortable room environment without feeling somewhat out of place and moreover you can save time to select heat/cool operation.

INFORMATION The Super Heat Recovery Multi system is different from that of the conventional Multi air conditioner in several ways such as the heating and cooling operations are mixed and only a part of the air conditioning system operates in cooling function. For this reason, the following table explains the operation modes of this air conditioner. The following table explains the representation of the operation modes within this Manual.

Operation mode Operation mode

Outline

1. All Cooling

All indoor units are under cooling operation only. Outdoor heat exchanger (Main heat exchanger) is used as condenser.

2. All Heating

All indoor units are under heating operation only. Outdoor heat exchanger (Main heat exchanger) is used as evaporator.

3. Simultaneous operation

MIU for simultaneous operation

3-1. Mainly cooling, partly heating operation

Indoor units are under heating/cooling simultaneous operation with subjective cooling operation Outdoor heat exchanger (Sub heat exchanger) is used as condenser.

3-2. Mainly heating, partly cooling operation

Indoor units are under heating/cooling simultaneous operation with subjective heating operation Outdoor heat exchanger (Main heat exchanger) is used as evaporator.

4. Defrost

Using the reversing operation of the 4-way valve, ice on the outdoor heat exchanger is dissolved within single cooling cycle.

9

1-1. Component Multi Using High-efficiency Refrigerant R410A 1. Outdoor units Inverter unit Corresponding HP

Appearance 8 HP

10 HP

12 HP

MAP0802FT8

MAP1002FT8

MAP1202FT8

Cooling capacity (kW)

22.4

28.0

33.5

Heating capacity (kW)

25.0

31.5

37.5

13

16

20

Model name

Heat pump

MMY-

No. of connectable indoor units

2. Combination of outdoor units Corresponding HP Combined Model

MMY-

Cooling capacity (kW) Heating capacity (kW) Combined outdoor units No. of connectable indoor units

16 HP

18 HP

20 HP

24 HP

26 HP

28 HP

30 HP

AP1602FT8

AP1802FT8

AP2002FT8

AP2402FT8

AP2602FT8

AP2802FT8

AP3002FT8

45.0

50.4

56.0

68.0

73.0

78.5

84.0

50.0

56.5

63.0

76.5

81.5

88.0

95.0

8 HP

10 HP

10 HP

8 HP

10 HP

10 HP

10 HP

8 HP

8 HP

10 HP

8 HP

8 HP

10 HP

10 HP

—

—

—

8 HP

8 HP

8 HP

10 HP

27

30

33

40

43

47

48

3. Branching joints and headers Model name RBM-BY53FE

Y-shape branching joint (∗3)

4-branching header (∗4)

8-branching header (∗4)

T-branch joint

∗1 ∗2 ∗3 ∗4 ∗5 ∗6

Usage Indoor unit capacity code (∗1)

Total below 6.4

RBM-BY103FE Indoor unit capacity code (∗1)

Total below 14.2

RBM-BY53E

Indoor unit capacity code (∗1)

Total below 6.4

RBM-BY103E


Total below 14.2


Total below 25.2


Total below 25.2

RBM-BY203E


Total below 25.2

RBM-BY303E


Total below 25.2

RBM-1043FE


Total below 14.2

RBM-2043FE


Total below 25.2

RBM-1043E


Total below 14.2

RBM-2043E


Total below 25.2

RBM-1083FE


Total below 14.2

RBM-2083FE


Total below 25.2

Appearance For 3 piping For 2 piping (∗5) For 3 piping For 2 piping (∗5) For 3 piping For 2 piping (∗5) For 3 piping

RBM-1083E


Total below 14.2

RBM-2083E


Total below 25.2

BT13-FE

The following 3 types of T joint pipes are supplied as 1 set. • Balance pipe (Ø9.5) × 1 • Liquid side (Corresponded dia. Ø12.7 to Ø19.1) × 1 • Suction gas side (Corresponded dia. Ø22.2 to Ø34.9) × 1 • Discharge gas side (Corresponded dia. Ø19.1 to Ø22.2) × 1

For 2 piping (∗5)

“Capacity code” can be obtained from page 11, 12. (Capacity code is not actual capacity) If the total capacity code value of indoor unit exceeds that of the outdoor unit, apply capacity code of the outdoor unit. When using a Y-shape branching joint for 1st branching, select according to the capacity code of the outdoor unit. Max. 6.0 capacity code in total can be connected. This is used for branching to “cooling only” indoor unit. Model names for outdoor described in this guide are shortened because of the space constraint.

10

4. Flow selector units (FS unit) Model name

Usage

RBM-Y1121FE

Capacity rank for indoor unit : Type 007 to 030

RBM-Y1801FE


RBM-Y2802FE


Appearance

* Accessory part (Sold separately): Connection cable kit (RBC-CBK15FE), up to 15m.

5. Indoor units Type

Appearance

Model name MMU-AP0091H




Concealed Duct Standard Type

Capacity rank Capacity code 009 type

1



2.8

3.2

MMU-AP0121H

012 type

1.25

3.6

4.0

MMU-AP0151H,

015 type

1.7

4.5

5.0

MMU-AP0181H

018 type

2

5.6

6.3

MMU-AP0241H

024 type

2.5

7.1

8.0

MMU-AP0271H

027 type

3

8.0

9.0

MMU-AP0301H

030 type

3.2

9.0

10.0

MMU-AP0361H

036 type

4

11.2

12.5

MMU-AP0481H

048 type

5

14.0

16.0

MMU-AP0561H

056 type

6

16.0

18.0

MMU-AP0071WH

007 type

0.8

2.2

2.5

MMU-AP0091WH

009 type

1

2.8

3.2

MMU-AP0121WH

012 type

1.25

3.6

4.0

MMU-AP0151WH

015 type

1.7

4.5

5.0

MMU-AP0181WH

018 type

2

5.6

6.3

MMU-AP0241WH

024 type

2.5

7.1

8.0

MMU-AP0271WH

027 type

3

8.0

9.0

MMU-AP0301WH

030 type

3.2

9.0

10.0

MMU-AP0481WH (CHINA only)

048 type

5

14.0

16.0

MMU-AP0071YH

007 type

0.8

2.2

2.5

MMU-AP0091YH

009 type

1

2.8

3.2

MMU-AP0121YH

012 type

1.25

3.6

4.0

MMU-AP0151SH

015 type

1.7

4.5

5.0

MMU-AP0181SH

018 type

2

5.6

6.3

MMU-AP0241SH

024 type

2.5

7.1

8.0

MMU-AP0152SH

015 type

1.7

4.5

5.0

MMU-AP0182SH

018 type

2

5.6

6.3

MMU-AP0242SH

024 type

2.5

7.1

8.0

MMD-AP0071BH

007 type

0.8

2.2

2.5

MMD-AP0091BH

009 type

1

2.8

3.2

MMD-AP0121BH

012 type

1.25

3.6

4.0

MMD-AP0151BH

015 type

1.7

4.5

5.0

MMD-AP0181BH

018 type

2

5.6

6.3

MMD-AP0241BH

024 type

2.5

7.1

8.0

MMD-AP0271BH

027 type

3

8.0

9.0

MMD-AP0301BH

030 type

3.2

9.0

10.0

MMD-AP0361BH

036 type

4

11.2

12.5

MMD-AP0481BH

048 type

5

14.0

16.0

MMD-AP0561BH

056 type

6

16.0

18.0

11

Type

Concealed Duct High Static Pressure Type

Slim Duct Type

Under Ceiling Type

High Wall Type

Floor Standing Cabinet Type

Floor Standing Concealed Type

Floor Standing Type

Appearance

Model name

Capacity rank Capacity code



MMD-AP0181H

018 type

2

5.6

6.3

MMD-AP0241H

024 type

2.5

7.1

8.0

MMD-AP0271H

027 type

3

8.0

9.0

MMD-AP0361H

036 type

4

11.2

12.5

MMD-AP0481H

048 type

5

14.0

16.0

MMD-AP0071SPH

007 type

0.8

2.2

2.5

MMD-AP0091SPH

009 type

1

2.8

3.2

MMD-AP0121SPH

012 type

1.25

3.6

1.0

MMD-AP0151SPH

015 type

1.7

4.5

5.0

MMD-AP0181SPH

018 type

2

5.6

6.3

MMC-AP0151H

015 type

1.7

4.5

5.0

MMC-AP0181H

018 type

2

5.6

6.3

MMC-AP0241H

024 type

2.5

7.1

8.0

MMC-AP0271H

027 type

3

8.0

9.0

MMC-AP0361H

036 type

4

11.2

12.5

MMC-AP0481H

048 type

5

14.0

16.0

MMK-AP0071H

007 type

0.8

2.2

2.5

MMK-AP0091H

009 type

1

2.8

3.2

MMK-AP0121H

012 type

1.25

3.6

4.0

MMK-AP0151H

015 type

1.7

4.5

5.0

MMK-AP0181H

018 type

2

5.6

6.3

MMK-AP0241H

024 type

2.5

7.1

8.0

MMK-AP0072H

007 type

0.8

2.2

2.5

MMK-AP0092H

009 type

1

2.8

3.2

MMK-AP0122H

012 type

1.25

3.6

4.0

MML-AP0071H

007 type

0.8

2.2

2.5

MML-AP0091H

009 type

1

2.8

3.2

MML-AP0121H

012 type

1.25

3.6

4.0

MML-AP0151H

015 type

1.7

4.5

5.0

MML-AP0181H

018 type

2

5.6

6.3

MML-AP0241H

024 type

2.5

7.1

8.0

MML-AP0071BH

007 type

0.8

2.2

2.5

MML-AP0091BH

009 type

1

2.8

3.2

MML-AP0121BH

012 type

1.25

3.6

4.0

MML-AP0151BH

015 type

1.7

4.5

5.0

MML-AP0181BH

018 type

2

5.6

6.3

MML-AP0241BH

024 type

2.5

7.1

8.0

MMF-AP0151H

015 type

1.7

4.5

5.0

MMF-AP0181H

018 type

2

5.6

6.3

MMF-AP0241H

024 type

2.5

7.1

8.0

MMF-AP0271H

027 type

3

8.0

9.0

MMF-AP0361H

036 type

4

11.2

12.5

MMF-AP0481H

048 type

5

14.0

16.0

MMF-AP0561H

056 type

6

16.0

18.0

12

n Remote controllers Name

Wired remote controller

Simple wired remote controller

Weekly timer

CODE No.

SuMoTuWeTh Fr Sa

SET DATA SETTING TEST

TEST

UNIT No.

SETTING R.C.

H

No.

PROGRAM1

˚C ˚F

PROGRAM2

ERROR

PROGRAM3

TEMP.

Appearance

ON / OFF WEEKLY TIMER

FILTER RESET TEST

Model name

TIMER SET

FAN

MODE

TIME

SWING/FIX

VENT

SET

CL

UNIT

RBC-AMT31E

RBC-AS21E

RBC-EXW21E

Wireless remote controller kit

Name Receiver section

ADR

Receiver section mounted separately ADR

Receiver section

ADR

Appearance

Model name

RBC-AX2U (W)-E

RBC-AX22CE

TCB-AX21E

Type

4-way Air Discharge Cassette type

Under Ceiling type 1-way Air Discharge Cassette type (MMU-AP✽✽✽2SH Series)

Separate sensor type

Name

Central remote controller

ZONE ALL ZONE GROUP

CODE No. 1234 SET DATA SETTING

R.C.

UNIT No.

TEST

No.

Appearance GROUP SELECT

ZONE

CL

SET

Model name

TCB-SC642TLE

Type

64 system center controller

13

1 CN304 (GRY) 2 3 RED

Motor drive circuit

RY303

~

1 1

Fuse T3.15A 250V~

+

Power supply circuit

P301

CN66 1 (WHI) 2 CN44 1 (BLN) 2

CN50 (WHI)

1 2 3 4 5

Earth screw

1 2

Parts name Fan motor Indoor temp sensor Temp sensor Temp sensor Temp sensor Louver motor Drain pump motor Float switch Drain control relay Pulse Motor Valve

CN60 (WHI)

CN81 (BLK)

CN40 (BLU)

CN41 (BLU)

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 1 2

1 2 3 1 2 3

CN61 (YEL) T10 1 2 3 4 5 6

(Option)

(Fandrive)

Power supply Single phase 220-240V 50Hz 220V 60Hz

Symbol FM TA TC1 TCJ TC2 LM1, LM2 DM FS RY302 PMV

CN32 (WHI)

CN309 (YEL)

CN104 (YEL)

1 1 2 2

CN102 (RED)

1 1 2 2

CN101 (BLK)

1 1 2 2

CN100 (BRN)

1 1 2 2 3 3

CN80 (GRN)

1 2 PNL 3

CN73 (RED)

1 EXCT 2

CN20 CN70 (BLU) (WHI)

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 1 2 3

BLK

R(L) S(N)

Closed end connector

~

DC20V DC15V DC12V DC7V

BLU BLU

14

RED WHI

Indoor unit

3 3

Indoor control P.C. board MCC-1402

BLK

Flow selector unit earth screw

3 1 CN34 3 2 1 (RED)

RY302

Fuse T6.3A 250V~

BLK

1 2 3 4 5 CN33 1 2 3 4 5 (WHI)

1 2 3 4 5 6 CN82 1 2 3 4 5 6 (BLU)

CN67 (BLK) 2 2

WHI

FS

TR

1.

indicates the terminal block, letter at inside indicates the terminal number. 2. A dotted line and broken line indicate the wiring at site. 3. indicates the control P.C. board.

U1 U2

CN01 1 2 Network adaptor (WHI) 1 2 (Option)

A B BLK

WHI

U1 U2 Outdoor unit WHI

BLK CN1 (WHI)

Color identification RED WHI YEL BLU BRN

: RED : WHITE : YELLOW : BLUE : BROWN

BLK GRY PNK ORN GRN

: BLACK : GRAY : PINK : ORANGE : GREEN

WHI

BLK CN001 (WHI)

1 2 1 2

1 2 1 2


Adaptor for wireless remote controller

3 3 2 2 1 1 CN02 (BLU)

Network adaptor P.C. board

MCC-1401

1 2 CN03 1 2 (RED) X Y

TA TCJ TC2

TC1

1 Filter input 2

2. WIRING DIAGRAM

1 1 2 2 3 3

DM

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

2-1. Indoor Unit

5 4 3 2 1 CN334 1 2 3 4 5 CN333 5 4 3 2 1 (BLU) 1 2 3 4 5 (WHI)

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

2-1-1. 4-way Air Discharge Cassette Type

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

6 4 3 1 2 5 6 4 3 1 2 5 CN68 (BLU)

LM1

LM2

FM

Model: MMU-AP0091H, AP0121H, AP0151H, AP0181H, AP0241H, MMU-AP0271H, AP0301H, AP0361H, AP0481H, AP0561H

PMV

RC

LM

1 2 1 2

DM YEL

BLU

ORN

BLK

RED FAN 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CN083(WHI) 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

9

H

Color indication

M

L

PMV

6 4 3 1 2 5 6 4 3 1 2 5

FS

DP

LM

FS

1 2 3 (BLU) 1 2 3 (GRN) 1 2 3 (RED) 1 2 3 CN068 1 2 3 CN033 1 2 3 CN030

PMV

1 2 3 4 5 6 (BLU) 1 2 3 4 5 6 CN082

UL

RY007

RED : RED WHI : WHITE YEL : YELLOW BLU : BLUE BLK : BLACK GRY : GRAY PNK : PINK ORN : ORANGE BRW : BROWN GRN : GREEN

P301

(BLK)

RY002

RY001

RY006

1

CN304 (GRY) 2

RY005

Fuse T5.0A

15 CN066 1 (WHI) 2


CN044 1 (BRW) 2

CN040 CN041 (BLU) (BLU)

Indoor unit Earth screw R(L) S(N)

1 2 3 1 2 3 BLK

BLU BLU

1 2 1 2

CN050 (WHI)

CN075 (WHI)

CN074 (WHI)

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 1 2 3

BLK

Flow selector unit earth screw TR

CN102 (RED)

1 1 2 2

CN101 (BLK)

1 1 2 2

CN100 (BRW)

1 1 2 2 3 3

CN080 (GRN)

1 2 PNL 3

CN073 (RED)

1 EXCT 2

CN070 (WHI)

1 1 2 2

CN081 (BLK)

1 2 3 4 5

Indoor control P.C. board

1 1 2 2 3 3

1 1 2 2 CN067 250V~ (BLK) 3 3


1 1 2 2

RY004

3

CN039 (YEL)

CN104 (YEL)

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

CN061 (YEL)

1 2 3 4 5 6

A B X Y

Network CN01 1 2 adaptor (WHI) 1 2 (Option)

3 3 2 1 1

U1 U2 CN1 (WHI)

Outdoor unit

1 2 1 2 Remote controller

1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6

TCJ TC2

Option

1 2 3 4 5 6 CN02 1 2 3 4 5 6 (YEL)

Line Filter

U1 U2

CN060 (WHI)

Fan drive

Sub P.C. board MCC-1520


CN032 (WHI)

TA

CN02 (BLU)

1 1 2 2 MCC-1401

1 2 3 4 5 6 CN01 1 2 3 4 5 6 (WHI)

TR

CN03 (RED)

1.


Symbol FM RC TR LM TA TC1,TC2,TCJ RY001 RY002 RY004 RY005~007 FS DM PMV

Parts name Fan motor Running capacitor Transformer Louver motor Indoor temp sensor Temp sensor Louver control relay Drain control relay Heater control relay Fan motor control relay Float switch Drain pump motor Pulse Motor Valve

TC1

Filter


1 2 RED 3 4 5 6 7

Model: MMU-AP0071WH, AP0091WH, AP0121WH, AP0151WH, AP0181WH, MMU-AP0241WH, AP0271WH, AP0301WH, AP0481WH

FM

WHI

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

YEL

BLU

BLK

ORN

1 2 3 1 2 3

H

M

L

FS

2 1 2 1

2 1 2 1

DP

LM

6 4 3 1 2 5 6 4 3 1 2 5 FS

1 2 3 (BLU) 1 2 3 (GRN) 1 2 3 (RED) 1 2 3 CN068 1 2 3 CN033 1 2 3 CN030

FAN 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CN083(WHI) 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Color indication

PMV LM

RED

RC

DM

PMV

1 2 3 4 5 6 (BLU) 1 2 3 4 5 6 CN082

UL

RY007 CN301 (BLK)


RY002

RY001

RY006

Heater

1

CN304 (GRY) 2

RY005

3 3 1 1 2 2 CN067 Fuse (BLK) T5.0A 3 3

16 CN066 1 (WHI) 2

Power supply circuit CN044 CN040 CN041 (BRW) (BLU) (BLU)

1 2 1 2

WHI

RED

TR Flow selector unit earth screw

1 2 1 2

1 2 3 1 3

1 1 2 2

CN101 (BLK)

1 2

CN100 (BRW)

1 1 2 2 3 3

CN080 (GRN)

1 2 PNL 3

CN073 (RED)

1 EXCT 2

CN070 (WHI)

1 1 Filter 2 2

CN081 (BLK)

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 1 2 3


1 1 2 2

BLK

BLK

BLU

BLU

WHI

U1 U2

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

CN061 (YEL)

1 2 3 4 5 6

A B X Y AI-NET central control terminal


CN060 (WHI)

1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6

Fan drive

CN03 (RED)


1 2 3 4 5 6 CN01 1 2 3 4 5 6 (WHI)


TR

3 2 1 CN02 3 2 1 (BLU)

U1 U2 CN1 (WHI)

Outdoor unit

CN032 (WHI)

TCJ

TC1

Option

MCC-1401

Line Filter

BLU

CN075 (WHI)

CN074 (WHI)

TA

1 2 3 4 5 6 CN02 1 2 3 4 5 6 (YEL) BLU

Indoor unit Earth screw R(L) S(N)

CN050 (WHI)

BLU


CN102 (RED)


1 1

CN309 (YEL) 2 2

RED

1 1 2 2

RY004

3

AC IN

CN104 (YEL)

1 2 1 2 Remote controller

1.

indicates the terminal block, letter at inside indicates the terminal number.

2. A dotted line and broken line indicate the wiring at site. 3.

indicates the control P.C. board.

Symbol FM RC TR LM TA TC1,TCJ RY001 RY002 RY004 RY005~007 FS DM PMV

Parts name Fan motor Running capacitor Power transformer Louver motor Indoor temp sensor Temp sensor Louver motor control relay Drain pump control relay Heater control relay Fan motor control relay Float switch Drain pump motor Pulse Motor Valve

2-1-3. 1-way Air Discharge Cassette Type (Compact type)

FM

1 2 3 4 5 6

Model: MMU-AP0071YH, AP0091YH, AP0121YH

1 2 3 4 5 6

RC

1 PMV

LM 3 4 5 6

DM 1 2 1 2

H

M

L

LM

DM

RED BLK ORN BLU YEL FAN 7 5 3 1 CN083 9 (WHI) 9 7 5 3 1

CN068 1 (BLU) 1

FS

1 1

3 3

6 4 3 1 2 5 6 4 3 1 2 5

FS

3 CN033 3 (GRN)

1 1

PMV 1 2 3 4 5 6 CN082 1 2 3 4 5 6 (BLU)

3 CN030 3 (RED)

UL

RY007 P301 BLK

RY002 RY004

RY001

RY006

1 (GRY) CN304

3

RY005

1 1

Control P.C. board for Indoor unit MCC-1403

(YEL) CN309

3 3 AC IN 1 1

FUSE (BLK) CN067


BLU

CN050 (WHI)

1 2 3 RC 1 3

TR

Network adapter (Option)

CN01(WHI)

1 2 1 2


CN074 1 (WHI) 1

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 1 2 3 3 2 1 1

3 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

CN101 (BLK)

1 1 2 2

CN100 (BRW)

1 1 2 3 3

CN080 (GRN)

1 2 PNL 3

CN073 (RED)

1 EXCT 2

CN070 (WHI)

1 2

CN081 (BLK)

1 2 3 4 5

U1 U2

A

B

X Y

U1 U2 Outdoor unit

1. 1 2 1 2 CN1

Remote controller

CN060 (WHI)

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6

Fan drive

Option


TR

1 2 1 2

R(L) S(N)

CN032 (WHI)

1 2 3 4 5 6 CN01 1 2 3 4 5 6 (WHI)

CN02 (BLU) CN03(RED)

Power supply single phase 220-240V 50Hz 220V 60Hz

1 1 2 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 CN02 1 2 3 4 5 6 (YEL)

Line Filter Closed-end connector

CN102 (RED)

CN061 (YEL)

CN075 (WHI)

BLK

1 2 1 2

EMG

CN041 (BLU)

BLK

CN040 (BLU)

BLU

17

CN066 (WHI) 1 2 CN044 (BRW) 1 2

Indoor unit earth screw

1 1 2 2

T5.0A 250V~

3 3

MCC-1401

indicates the terminal bolock, letter. Letter at inside indicates the terminal number. 2. A dotted line and broken line indicate the wiring at side. 3. indicates the control P.C. board.

TA

CN104 (YEL)

Symbol FM RC TR LM TA TC1,TC2,TCJ RY001 RY002 RY005~007 FS DM PMV

TCJ

TC2

TC1

Filter

Color indication RED : RED WHI : WHITE YEL : YELLOW BLU : BLUE BLK : BLACK GRY : GRAY PNK : PINK ORN : ORANGE BRW : BROWN GRN : GREEN

Parts name Fan motor Running capacitor Transformer Louver motor Indoor temp sensor Temp sensor Louver control relay Drain control relay Fan motor control relay Float switch Drain pump motor Pulse motor valve

Model: MMU-AP0151SH, AP0181SH, AP0241SH

FM

1 2 3 4 5 6

RED : RED WHI : WHITE YEL : YELLOW BLU : BLUE BLK : BLACK GRY: GRAY PNK : PINK ORN: ORANGE BRN : BRWN GRN: GREEN

PMV

FM

CN68 (BLU) 1 1 DP

CN334 5 4 1 (WHI) 5 4 3 2 1

RY302

CN304 (GRY) RED WHI

CN67 (BLK)

TR 1 1 2 3 3

WHI


5 CN333 5 (WHI)

1 2 3 4 5 6 CN82 1 2 3 4 5 6 (BLU)

RY303

1 1 3 3

A B

Outdoor unit Wired remote controller

BLK

CN01 CN02 (WHI) (BLU) CN03 (RED)

MCC-1401 1 2 1 2 CN001(WHI)

Adapter for wireless remote controller

AI-NET

1 2 1 2

X Y


BLU BLK

BLK

FS

1 2 3 4 5 CN33 1 2 3 4 5 (WHI)

1 2 1 2

1 2

1 2

CN112 (WHI)

CN111 (WHI)

CN110 (WHI)

Fuse T3.15A 250V~

3

18 U1 U2 A B

U1 U2

1 2 1 2

WHI

WHI Closed-end connector

R(L) S(N)

3 3

CN71

(CHK)

CN72

(DISP)



Fuse T6.3A 250V~

1 2

CN66 (WHI)

1 2 1 2

CN40 (BLU)

1 1 2 3 3

CN41 (BLU)

Control P.C. board for indoor unit MCC-1402

CN309 (YEL) 1 1

3 3

CN50 (WHI)

CN061 (YEL)

CN32 (WHI)

CN60 (WHI)

CN81 (BLK)

CN20 (BLU)

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 Fan drive

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

T10

1.

1 3 1 2 3

Option

indicates the terminal bolock letter. Letter at inside indicates the terminal number. 2. A dotted line and broken line indicate the wiring at side 3. indicates a control P.C. board.

GRL

CN34 (RED)

CN104 (YEL)

1 1 2 2

CN102 (RED)

1 1 2 2

CN101 (BLK)

1 1 2 2

CN100 (BRW)

P301

BLK BLU


1 1

1

BLK

RED

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

Motor drive circuit

3 3


LM

High ceiling setup 6 4 3 1 2 5 6 4 3 1 2 5

TA

TCJ

TC2

1 1 3 3

CN80 (GRN)

1 2 PNL 3

CN73 (RED)

1 EXCT 2

CN70 (WHI)

1 2

Filter

TC1


Color indication

Parts name Fan motor Indoor temp sensor Temp sensor Temp sensor Temp sensor Louver motor Drain pump motor Float switsh Drain control relay Pulse motor valve Transformer

Model: MMU-AP0152SH, AP0182SH, AP0242SH

Symbol FM TA TC1 TCJ TC2 LM DP FS RY302 PMV TR

6 4 3 1 2 5 6 4 3 1 2 5

1 2 3 1 2 3 CN68 (BLU)

1 1 2 2 3 3

DM

CN333 1 (WHI) 1

5 4 2 1 5 4 3 2 1

1 1

WHI 1 3 1 2 2

3 1 CN34 3 2 1 (RED)

CN33

1 2 3 4 5 (WHI)

Indoor control P.C. board ~

Fuse T3.15A

+

250V~

250V~

3 3

BLK

1 2 3 4 5 6 CN82 1 2 3 4 5 6 (BLU)

Motor drive circuit

Fuse T6.3A

CN67 (BLK) 2 2

5 5

CN334 (WHI)

RY302

1 CN304 (GRY) 2 3 RED

3 3

FS

~



P301

WHI

CN44 1 (BRW) 2

R(L) S(N)



Earth screw

CN40 (BLU)

CN41 (BLU)

1 2 1 2

1 2 3 1 2 3

BLU BLU

Indoor unit

WHI

Indoor unit power supply Single phase 220-240V 50Hz 220V 60Hz

CN50 (WHI)

CN309 (YEL)

1 2 3 1 2 3

TR

U1 U2

A B BLK

WHI

Outdoor unit

BLK CN1 (WHI)

T10 1 2 3 4 5 6

CN32 (WHI)

CN60 (WHI)

CN81 (BLK)

1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5

(Fan drive)

(Signal output)

WHI


3 3 2 2 1 1

WHI

U1 U2

1 2 3 4 5

CN61 (YEL)

1 1 2 2

CN102 (RED)

1 1 2 2

CN101 (BLK)

1 1 2 2

CN100 (BRN)

1 1 2 2 3 3

CN80 (GRN)

1 2 PNL 3

CN73 (RED)

1 EXCT 2


1 2 3 4 5

BLK

Reactor

RED

BLK

19

CN66 1 (WHI) 2

CN104 (YEL)

CN02 (BLU)


1 2 CN03 1 2 (RED)

BLK

X Y

CN001 (WHI)

1 2 1 2

1 2 1 2


Adaputor for wired remote controller

1.


Color identification RED : RED WHI : WHITE YEL : YELLOW BLU : BLUE BRW : BROWN

Symbol FM TA TC1,TC2,TCJ DM FS RY302 PMV

BLK GRY PNK ORN GRN


Parts name Fan motor Indoor temp sensor Indoor temp sensor Drain pump motor Float switch Drain pump control relay Pulse Motor Valve

1 2

TA TCJ TC2

TC1

2-1-5. Concealed Duct Standard Type

PMV

1 1

Model: MMD-AP0071BH, AP0091BH, AP0121BH, AP0151BH, AP0181BH, AP0241BH MMD-AP0271BH, AP0301BH, AP0361BH, AP0481BH, AP0561BH

FM

5 5 4 4

8

(BLK)

RY007

P301

1

CN304 (GRY) 2

H

RY004

M

L

DP

LM

1 2 3 (BLU) 1 2 3 (GRN) 1 2 3 CN068 1 2 3 CN033

1 2 3 1 2 3 FS CN030 (RED)

UL

RY002

RY006

1 2 1 2

1 2 1 2

1 2 1 2

TC1

1 2 3 CN100 1 2 3 (BRN)

CN104 CN102 CN101 (YEL) (RED) (BLK)

RY001

3

1 1 CN309 2 2 (YEL) 3 3


CN066 (WHI) CN044 CN040 CN041 (BRW) (BLU) (BLU)

1 2

20

TR

1 2 1 2

EMG

OC

CN050 (WHI)

1 2 3 1 3

1 2 3 1 2 3

Network adaptor (Option) MCC-1401 CN01 1 2 (WHI) 1 2

A B

U1 U2 CN1 (WHI)

CN02 (BLU)

Outdoor unit

CN081 (BLK)

1 2 3 4 5

CN082 (BLU)

6 5 4 3 2 1

WHI

43F1

43F1 3

RC BLU

F1

WHI RED

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 GRY FM

F2

F3 BLK

WHI RED GRY


A

5

4

CN032 (WHI)

CN060 (WHI)

6 5 4 3 2 1

5 2 1 3 4 6

5 2 1 3 4 6

PMV

1 2 3 4 5 6 CN02 1 2 3 4 5 6 (YEL)

F4

1. indicates the terminal block, letter at inside indicates the terminal number. 2. A dotted line and broken line indicate the wiring at site. 3. indicates the control P.C. board. 4. When attaching a drain pump, exchange CN030 connector with the connector of the float switch. 5. A part is connected to the terminal block. When exchanging to the outside static pressure necessary at the local site, check the terminal No. and lead color of the fan motor in the below diagram, and then exchange the lead wire indicated by the arrow mark ( ).

BRN

RED RED 6

YEL


1 Filter 2

TR

X Y

Remote controller

Indoor unit Earth screw

CN070 (WHI)

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 Option 1 2 3 4 5 6 T10 Fan drive

1 2 CN03 1 2 (RED)

1 2 1 2


S(N)

1 EXCT 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 CN01 1 2 3 4 5 6 (WHI)

ORN

WHI

F

CN073 (RED)


3 3 2 1 1

RED

CN075 CN061 (WHI) (YEL)

CN074 (WHI)

1 2 3 4 5

RC

U1 U2


T10A,250V~

1 2 PNL 3

Fuse T5.0A

1 2

RED

CN080 (GRN)

Indoor control P.C. board RY005

CN067 (BLK)

1 1 2 2 3 3

R(L)

TC2

RED

7

43F1

FAN 9 8 7 6 4 2 CN083(WHI) 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1


TCJ

Wired for MMD-AP0481 only (BRN Wire)

BLU ORN BRN

BLK WHI GRY RED

Motor over heating protection switch

49F

Sold separately

Symbol FM RC TR TA TC1,TC2,TCJ RY005~007 RY001 RY002 PMV F 43F1 DM FS

Parts name Fan motor Running capacitor Transformer Indoor temp sensor Temp sensor Fan motor control relay Louver motor control relay Drain control relay Pulse Motor Valve Fuse Fan motor control relay Drain pump motor Float switch

2-1-6. Concealed Duct High Static Pressure Type

WHI

Color indication

TA

DP

Model: MMD-AP0181H, AP0241H, AP0271H, AP0361H, AP0481H

(Option) Spark killer

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 FS

1 1 2 2 3 3

DM

CN304 1 (GRY) 2

RED WHI

BLK

RY303

Indoor control P.C. board ~

Earth screw

21

RED WHI

R(L) S(N)

CN66 (WHI)

BLU 1 1 BLU

CN40 (BLU)

2 2

Closed end terminal


Fuse T6.3A 250V~ P301

1 2


Indoor unit

BLK

1 1 2 BLK 3 3

Fuse T3.15A

+


~

CN41 (BLU)

CN309 (YEL)

1 2 3 1 2 3

CN50 (WHI)

CN61 (YEL)

1 2 3 4 5

TR

U1 U2 A B BLK

WHI

Outdoor unit

BLK CN1 (WHI)

1 2 1 2


WHI

CN60 (WHI)

CN81 (BLK)

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5

T10

Fandrive

Option

BLK

1 1 2 2

CN101 (BLK)

1 1 2 2

CN100 (BRW)

1 1 2 2 3 3

TA TCJ

CN80 (GRN)

1 2 PNL 3

CN73 (RED)

1 EXCT 2

CN70 (WHI)

1 FILTER 2

TC1

CN20 (BLU)

1 2 3 4 5

Color identification


BLK GRY PNK ORN GRN


1 2 CN03 1 2 (RED) X Y

indicates the terminal block, letter at inside indicates the terminal number. 2. A dotted line and broken line indicate the wiring at site. Adaptor for wireless 3. indicates the control P.C. board. remote controller

CN102 (RED)

RED : RED WHI : WHITE YEL : YELLOW BLU : BLUE BRW : BROWN

CN001 (WHI)

1 2 1 2

1 1 2 2

GRL


CN02 (BLU)

CN104 (YEL)

TC2


CN32 (WHI)

3 3 2 2 1 1

WHI

U1 U2

1 3 CN34 1 2 3 (RED)

Motor drive circuit

1 1 3 3

1 2 3 4 5 CN33 1 2 3 4 5 (WHI)

RY302

3 CN67 (BLK) 2 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 CN82 1 2 3 4 5 6 (BLU)

5 4 1 CN334 1 2 3 4 5 CN333 5 4 3 2 1 (WHI) 1 2 3 4 5 (WHI)

CN68 (BLU)

1.

Sold separately

Symbol FM TA TC,TC2,TCJ LM RY302 DM FS

Parts name Fan motor Indoor temp sensor Temp sensor Louver motor Drain control relay Drain pump motor Float switch

2-1-7. Under Ceiling Type

LM

6 4 3 1 2 5 6 4 3 1 2 5

Model: MMC-AP0151H, AP0181H, AP0241H, AP0271H, AP0361H, AP0481H

PMV

FM

1 2 3 1 2 3 CN334 5 4 2 1 (WHI) 5 4 3 2 1 1

CN68 (BLU)

CN333 1 (WHI) 1

3 3

TA

TCJ

TC2

TC1

1 1 2 2

1 1 2 2

1 1 2 2

1 3 1 2 3

6 4 3 1 2 5 6 4 3 1 2 5 5 5

RY302

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5

CN82 (BLU)

CN33 (WHI)

1 1

3 3

CN34 (RED)

CN104 CN102 CN101 (YEL) (RED) (BLK)

3 Motor drive circuit

1 1 3 3 CN304 (GRY) 1 1

WHI

3 3 CN67 (BLK)

CN080 (GRN)

RY303

LM

RED

CN100 (BRW) CN103 (GRN)

FUSE

FUSE

T6.3A 250V~

T3.15A 250V~

Control P.C. board for Indoor unit MCC-1402 Power supply circuit


1 2 1 2 3

CN73 (RED)

1 2 EXCT

CN70 (WHI)

1 2

22

P301 BLK Flow selector unit earth screw

1 2 CN66 (WHI)

RED Closed-end connector WHI

CN40 (BLU)

CN41 (BLU)

1 2 1 2

1 2 3 1 3

1 1

3 CN309 3 (YEL)

CN50 (WHI)

CN61 (YEL)

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5 6

CN32 (WHI)

CN60 (WHI)

CN81 (BLK)

CN20 (BLU)

1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

Fandrive

Option

BLU BLU

R(L) S(N)

BLK BLK


GRY

TR

GRY

Indoor unit

BLK

U1 U2

A

B

X

Y

Earth screw

WHI

3 3 2 1 1

1 2 1 2

CN03(RED) WHI

U1 U2 Outdoor unit

BLK WHI

1 2 1 2 CN1 (WHI)

BLK

1 2 1 2 CN001 (WHI)

Wired remote Adaptor for controller wireless remote controller

1.

CN01(WHI) CN02 (BLU)

1 2 1 2

Network adaptor (Option) MCC-1401


indicates the terminal bolock. Letter at inside indicates the terminal number. 2. A dotted line and broken line indicate the wiring at side. 3. indicates the control P.C. board. Symbol FM TA TC1,TC2,TCJ PMV LM RY303

Parts name Fan motor Indoor temp sensor Temp sensor Pulse motor valve Louver motor Louver control relay

2-1-8. High Wall Type

PMV

1 1

Model: MMK-AP0071H, AP0091H, AP0121H, AP0151H, AP0181H, AP0241H

FM

5 5 4 4

BLK

RED

5 4 3 2 1

S HBS CN22

1 2 3 4 5

6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1

6 5 4 3 6 5 4 3

1 1

CN82 (BLU)

6 5 4 3 2 6 5 4 3 2 1

CN33 (WHI)

CN210 (WHI)

CN44 CN40 (BRW) (BLU)

DC 15V

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

Flow selector unit (Sold separately)


CN213 (WHI)

Infrared rays receive and indication parts (MCC-861)

(MCC-1510) Control P.C.board for indoor unit

(BRW)

CN101 (BLU)

BLK 1 1 2 2 BLK

Heat exchanger sensor (TC2)

CN103 (GRN)

1 2

CN102 (YEL)

BLK 1 1 BLK 2 2

Heat exchanger sensor (TCJ)

BLK 1 1 BLK 2 2

Thermo sensor (TA)

CN104 CN80 (WHI) (GRN)

CN61 (YEL)

CN60 (WHI)

1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3

Option

PNL/EMG

1 2 3 4

HA

BLK 3 3 2 WHI 1 1

Heat exchanger sensor (TC1)

CN32 (WHI) Fan drive

BLU 1 1 2 2 BLU

BLK 1 1 2 BLK 3 3

DC 7V

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 7 8 9 10

9 7 6 5 4 3 2 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

CN41 (BLU)

DC 0V CN100 DC 12V

GRY ORN RED BLU

3 3

WHI BRW YEL GRY PNK

RED

CN309 1 (YEL) 1 GRN & YEL

WHI

CN81 (BLK)

WHI BRW YEL

5 CN67 (BLK)

GRN & YEL

23

GRN & YEL

Outdoor unit 1 2

F301 Fuse T3. 15A 250V~

1 1

WHI 3 3

Power Supply Single phase 220-240V 50Hz 220V 60Hz


F

CN50 (WHI) Heat exchanger

1.

Fan motor YEL YEL YEL YEL WHI

:

Louver motor

Pulse motor valve

RED

GRN

BROWN RED WHITE YELLOW BLUE BLACK GRAY PINK ORANGE GREEN & YELLOW GREEN

BLU YEL WHI BLK

: : : : : : : : : :

RED BRW BLU ORN YEL WHI

BRW RED WHI YEL BLU BLK GRY PNK ORN GRN & YEL

TF

WHI

BLK

1 2 1 2 CN1(WHI)

Wierd remote controller (Sold separately)

Model: MMK-AP0072H, AP0092H, AP0122H

Color identification

RC

6 4 3 1 2 5 6 4 3 1 2 5 RED BLK ORN BLU YEL FAN 7 5 3 1 CN083 9 (WHI) 9 7 5 3 1 H

M

L

CN068 (BLU) 1

DP 3

LM 1

PMV 1 2 3 4 5 6 CN082 1 2 3 4 5 6 (BLU)

CN033 3 (GRN)

UL

RY007 P301 (BLK)

RY002 RY004 (GRY) CN304

3 3

RY005

1 1

AC IN

RED


(YEL) CN309

3 3 1 1

1 1 2 2

CN102 (RED)

1 1 2 2

CN101 (BLK)

1 1 2 2

CN100 (BRN)

1 1 2 2

CN080 (GRN)

1 2 PNL 3

CN073 (RED)

1 EXCT 2

CN070 (WHI)

1 2

CN081 (BLK)

1 2 3 4 5

FUSE

24

CN066 (WHI) 1 1 2 2 Power supply circuit CN050 (WHI)

1 2 3 RC 1 3

TR


3 3 2 1 1

CN032 (WHI)

CN060 (WHI)

3 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6 T10

1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6

Fan drive

Option

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

CN02 (YEL)


CN01(WHI)

Flow selector unit earth screw Line filter

CN02 (BLU)

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

CN01 (WHI)

CN03(RED)

U1 U2

A

B

X Y

U1 U2 Outdoor unit

1 2 1 2 CN1

TR

1 2 1 2

R(L) S(N) Power supply single phase 220-240V 50Hz 220V 60Hz

CN074 1 (WHI) 1

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 1 2

CN061 (YEL)

CN075 (WHI)

BLK

BLU

BLU

1 2 1 2

CN041 (BLU)

BLK

CN040 (BLU)


TCJ

TC2

TC1

T5.0A 250V~

3 3 WHI CN067 (BLK)

RED Closed-end connector WHI

TA

CN104 (YEL) RY001

RY006

1 1

FS 1 3 CN030 1 2 3 (RED)

MCC-1401

1. Remote controller

indicates the terminal block. Letter at inside indicates the terminal number. 2. A dotted line and broken line indicate the wiring at side. 3. indicates the control P.C. board.

Symbol FM RC TR TA TC1,TC2,TCJ RY001 RY002 RY004 RY005~007 PMV

Filter


Parts name Fan motor Running capacitor Transformer Indoor temp sensor Temp sensor Louver control relay Drain control relay Heater control relay Fan motor control relay Pulse motor valve

2-1-9. Floor Standing Cabinet Type

FM

PMV

2 3 4 5 6

Model: MML-AP0071H, AP0091H, AP0121H, AP0151H, AP0181H, AP0241H

2 3 4 5 6

WHI RED

RC

2 4 5 6 3

FM WHI

GRN

RED

PMV

2 4 5 6 3

6 4 3 1 2 5 6 4 3 1 2 5

RC


RED BLK ORN BLU YEL FAN 7 5 3 1 CN068 1 CN083 9 (WHI) 9 (BLU) 1 7 5 3 1 H

For AP0071BH,AP0091BH,AP0121BH

M

L

3 3

1 1

3 CN033 3 (GRN)

1 3 1 2 3 CN030 (RED)

UL

RY007 R301 (BLK)

RY002 RY004

RY006

1 3

(GRY) CN304 RY005

1 1 3 3 AC IN 1 1

RY001

Control P.C. board for undoor unit MCC-1403

(YEL) CN309 FUSE

3 3

1 2 1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 PMV 1 1 2 2

CN102 (RED)

1 1 2 2

CN101 (BLK)

1 1 2 2

CN100 (BRW)

1 1 2 3 3

CN080 (GRN)

1 2 PNL 3

CN073 (RED)

1 EXCT 2

CN070 (WHI)

1 2

CN081 (BLK)

1 2 3 4 5

T5.0A 250V~

(BLK) CN067

CN066 (WHI) CN044 (BRW)

EMG

25

CN082 (BLU) CN104 (YEL)


CN040 (BLU)

CN041 (BLU)

CN050 (WHI)

1 2 1 2

1 2 3 1 3

1 2 3 4 5

CN075 (WHI) CN074 1 (WHI) 1

3 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

CN061 (YEL)

1 2 3 4 5 6

CN032 (WHI)

CN060 (WHI)

1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6

Fan drive

Option


WHI

RED

1 2 3 4 5 6 CN01 1 2 3 4 5 6 (WHI)

1 2 1 2

TR

Network adaptor (Option)

TR

CN01(WHI)

Flow selector unit earth screw RED

U1 U2

R(L) S(N) Power supply single phase 220-240V 50Hz 220V 60Hz

B

X

Y

3 3 2 1 1

CN02 (BLU)

1 1 2 2 CN03 (RED)

CN03(RED)

Closed-end connector

MCC-1401

WHI


A

U1 U2

1 2 1 2 Outdoor unit CN1 Remote controller

1.

indicates the terminal block. Letter at inside indicates the terminal number. 2. A dotted line and broken line indicate the wiring at side. 3. indicates the control P.C. board.


Symbol FM RC TR TA TC1,TC2,TCJ RY001 RY002 RY004 RY005~007 PMV

TCJ

TC2

Filter

1 2 3 4 5 6 CN02 1 2 3 4 5 6 (YEL) 1 2 1 2

TA

Parts name Fan motor Running capacitor Transformer Indoor temp sensor Temp sensor Louver control relay Drain control relay Heater control reley Fan motor control relay Pulse motor valve

TC1

2-1-10. Floor Standing Concealed Type

FM

1 3 2 4 5 6

Model: MML-AP0071BH, AP0091BH, AP0121BH, AP0151BH, AP0181BH, AP0241BH

GRN

1 3 2 4 5 6

FM

BRW

3 4 5 6 7

PMV

LM 2 1 2 1

M

H

L

6 4 3 1 2 5 6 4 3 1 2 5 LM


CN068 (BLU) 1

DP

1 1

3

FS

3 CN033 3 (GRN)

PMV 1 2 3 4 5 6 CN082 1 2 3 4 5 6 (BLU)

1 3 CN030 1 2 3 (RED)

UL

RY007 P301 (BLK)

RY002 RY004

RY001

RY006

1 (GRY) CN304

3

RY005

1 1

FUSE

CN066 (WHI) 1 2 CN044 (BRW) 1 2

Power supply circuit CN050 (WHI)

1 2 3 RC 1 3

CN075 (WHI) CN074 1 (WHI) 1

1 2 3 4 5

BLK

BLU

1 2 1 2

CN041 (BLU)

BLK

CN040 (BLU)

BLU

WHI

26

RED

(BLK) CN067

EMG

1 2 1 2 TR


CN102 (RED)

1 1 2 2

CN101 (BLK)

1 1 2 2


3 3 2 1 1

Line filter

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6

CN02 (BLU)

TCJ

TC2

1 1

TC1

3 3 1 2 PNL 3

CN073 (RED)

1 EXCT 2

CN070 (WHI)

1 Filter 2

CN081 (BLK)

1 2 3 4 5

CN032 (WHI)

CN060 (WHI)

1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6

Fan drive

Option

1 2 3 4 5 6 CN02 (YEL) 1 2 3 4 5 6


CN01(WHI)

1 2 1 2

3 3

CN061 (YEL)

TA

CN080 (GRN)

T5.0A 250V~

3 3


1 1 2 2

CN100 (BRW)


(YEL) CN309

3 3 AC IN 1 1

CN104 (YEL)

1 2 3 4 5 6 CN01 1 2 3 4 5 6 (WHI)


CN03(RED) Closed-end connector

U1 U2

A

B


X Y

U1 U2 Outdoor unit

1 2 1 2 CN1

TR

1 2 1 2

R(L) S(N)

MCC-1401

Remote controller

1.

indicates the terminal block, letter. Letter at inside indicates the terminal number. 2. A dotted line and broken line indicate the wiring at side. 3. indicates the control P.C. board.

Symbol FM RC TR LM TA TC1,TC2,TCJ RY001 RY002 RY005~007 PMV

Parts name Fan motor Running capacitor Transformer Louver motor Indoor temp sensor Temp sensor Louver control relay Drain control relay Fan motor control relay Pulse motor valve

2-1-11. Floor Standing Type

RC 3 4 5 6 7 8

Model: MMF-AP0151H, AP0181H, AP0241H, AP0271H, AP0361H, AP0481H, AP0561H

1 1

1 3

: RED : WHITE : YELLOW : BLUE : BLACK : GRAY : PINK : ORANGE : BRWN : GREEN

5 4 1 CN334 5 4 3 2 1 (WHI)

1 1

3 3

5 CN333 5 (WHI)

1 3 1 2 3

(External static pressure setup)

1 2 3 4 5 6 CN82 1 2 3 4 5 6 (BLU)

Drain pump type ("SPH" Type) CN68 (BLU) 1 1

CN34 (RED)

CN33

1 2 1 2

1 2

1 2

CN112 (WHI)

CN111 (WHI)

CN110 (WHI)

1 2 3 4 5 (WHI)

CN71

(CHK)

CN72

(DISP)

FS

1 3 1 2 3

RY302

DM 3 3

Motor drive circuit

1 CN304 (GRY)

3

RED WHI

Fuse T3.15A 250V~

Fuse T6.3A 250V~ 1 1


3 3

27

CN67 (BLK) P301

BLK 1 2

Flow Selector unit

Indoor unit

R(L) S(N)

Earth screw

Earth screw

Power supply 220-240V~, 50Hz 220V~, 60Hz

CN309 (YEL)

1 2 1 2

1 2 3 1 3

1

3

1. U1 U2

U1 U2

A

A

B

Outdoor unit


CN102 (RED)

1 1 2 2

CN101 (BLK)

1 1 2 2

TC2

1 1 3 3

CN73 (RED)

1 EXCT 2

CN70 (WHI)

1 2

CN60 (WHI)

CN81 (BLK)

CN20 (BLU)

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 Fan drive

1 2 3 4 5 6 Option

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

Parts name Fan motor Indoor temp sensor Temp sensor Drain control relay Pulse motor valve Drain pump motor Float switch

TCJ

1 2 PNL 3

CN32 (WHI)

Symbol FM TA TC1,TC2,TCJ RY302 PMV DM FS

TA

CN80 (GRN)

CN61 (YEL)

indicates the terminal bolock. Letter at inside indicates the terminal number. 2. A dotted line and broken line indicate the wiring at side 3. indicate a control P.C. board.

B

1 1 2 2

CN50 (WHI)

BLK

CN41 (BLU)

BLU

RED

CN40 (BLU)

BLU BLK

WHI

Closed-end connector

CN66 (WHI)

CN44 1 (BRW) 2

CN104 (YEL)

CN100 (BRW)

Control P.C. board for undoor unit MCC-1402


CN34 (RED)

TC1

2-1-12. Slim Duct Type

6 4 3 1 2 5 6 4 3 1 2 5

Model: MMD-AP0071SPH, AP0091SPH, AP0121SPH, AP0151SPH, AP0181SPH

RED WHI YEL BLU BLK GRY PNK ORN BRN GRN

Drain pump type ("SPH" Type)

FM

CN68 (BLU) Color indication

Non Drain pump type ("SH" Type)

PMV

Non Drain pump type ("SH" Type)

CN311(BLU) SV41

BLU

4 3 2 4 3 2 1

4 3 1 4 3 2 1

4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1

4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1

4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1

5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1

4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1

CN302 (RED)

CN500 (WHI)

CN501 (RED)

CN508 (RED)

CN509 (BLK)

CN510 (WHI)

CN513 (BLU)

CN512 (BLU)

1 1

3 3

CN306 (WHI)

1 1

3 3

CN308 (BLU) CN502 (WHI) CN503 (PNK)

RY500

1 1

Interface Control P.C. Board MCC-1429

7 7 CR503

RY503

CN504 (WHI) ON

CN522 (BLK)

SW30

3 3 CR502

RY502

CR504

RY504

CN505 (GRN)

1 1

4 3 SV51 BLU 2 2 BLU 1 1 CN312(WHI) BLU 3 3 SV2 BLU 1 1 CN324(RED)BLU 3 3 SV3A BLU 1 1 CN313(YEL) BLU 3 3 SV3B BLU 1 1 CN314(BLK) BLU 3 3 SV3C BLU 1 1 CN322(WHI) BLU 4 4 SV11 BLU 3 3 2 1 CN319(WHI) BLU 1 1 SV12 BLU 3 3

CN507 (YEL)

CN310(WHI)

CR507

RY507

CR508

1 2 3 (Srvice) 4 5 6

RY508

ON 1 2 3 4

ON 1 2 3 4

ON 1 2 3 4

ON 1 2 3 4

SW11

SW12

SW13

SW14

ON 1 2 3 4

ON 1 2 3 4

SW06

SW07

ON 1

ON 1 2 3 4

CN515 (GRN)

ON 1 2 3 4

SW09

SW08

CN516 (RED)

SW10

CN31 CN523 (YEL)

CN800 CR509

CR513

CR514

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

RY509

RY513

RY514

CN32

D600 D601 D602 D603 D604 SW01

SW02

RY510

1 1 3 3 1 1 3 3 1 1

BLU(BLK)

BLU(BLK)

1 1

YEL

5 4 3 2 1

CR511

CR521

CR519

Accumulator heater

SV 3D

SV 3E

ORN ORN

BLK (PNK)

CN305(RED) 7 7

BLU

3 CN317 4 3 2 1 3 (BLU) 2 1

BLK (PNK)

1 2 3 4 CN323 1 1 2 3 4 (WHI) 1

2 CN321 2 (RED)

BLK BLK BLK BLK

1 1

T6.3A FUSE

5 5

4WV1

CN25 3 (WHI) 3

TO (BLK)

YEL

1 1 2 2 3 3 BLK WHI CM1 RED YEL BLU

BLU

TK1 (BLK) TK2 (BLU)

Interface control P.C. board (I/F) MCC-1429

OCR

L1 L2 L3 N Comp. IPDU No.1 MCC-1502

5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

CN06 (WHI)

CN18 (RED)

CN26 (BLU)

BLU

RED 3 3

1 1

CN17 (BLK)

IPDU P.C. Board (1) MCC-1502 CN11

W V U

CN10 CN09 CN22 CN23

TL (WHI) BLK

BLK WHI RED

CN03 L1 CN02 L2 CN01 L3

CN15 CN13

CN20 WHI

Reactor

Noise filter P.C. board MCC-1366

Option board

PTC Themistor RED

CN21

BLU

RED

BLU

WHI

CN402 Transformer WHI CN401 RED CN600(WHI) 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1

CN01

CN17

CN02

CN18

WHI BLK BLK GRY GRY GRY

CN04 CN20 CN22(WHI) CN23(BLU) 3 3

1 1

Mg-SW 1 2

RED RED

CN19

CN03

1 1

CN25 3 (WHI) 3

L1

U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 Fan IPDU MCC-896 Connecting terminal

Power supply terminal

1 1

BLK

1

MGSW

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

RED OCR 2

3

4

4

5

6

6

A1 A2

3 3

1 1

Parts layout

Power supply for fan MCC-1439

RED

1 1

+ – + – BLK HVC1 HVC2

1 1 CN26 (BLU)

3

Noise filter P.C. board MCC-1366

GRY

3 3

CN21 WHI

TK4 (GRN)

Earth screw

: RED : WHITE : YELLOW : BLUE : BLACK : GRAY : PINK : ORANGE : BRWN : VIOLET

CN504

BLU

Comp1

RED WHI YEL BLU BLK GRY PNK ORN BRN VLT

5 5

CN501 (RED) CN505(RED)

TK3 (BLU)

Comp2

Color indication

1 1

YEL

TE1 (BLK)

1 2 3 4 CN400 3 1 1 2 3 4 (WHI) CN325 (YEL) BLK BLK Option 3 1 3 1 ORN ORN 3 3

CN503 (WHI)

BLU(BLK) BLU(BLK)

3 3

Power supply P.C. board for FAN MCC-1439

TS2

BLK

T6.3A FUSE

CN500 (WHI)

PNK RED BLU WHI BLK

CR 510

5 4 3 2 1

3 3

CN506(BLK) CN502 (BLU)

1 2 3 4 5

RED WHI BLK GRY

CR 518

5 4 3 2 1

BLU(BLK) BLU(BLK)

BLU

WHI

BLK

5 4 3 2 1

1 1

BLK WHI BLU RED PNK

TS1 (GRY)

BLU(BLK)

4 3 2 1

3 3

TD2 (RED)

3 3

YEL

CN01 (WHI)

RY519

RY521

CN307(WHI)

4-way valve coil Compressor case thermo. Pipe temp. sensor (Inlet) Pipe temp. sensor (Outlet) Heat exchange temp. sensor Air temp. sensor Oil temp. sensor Liquid temp. sensor Case heater, 230V, 26W Fan motor (DC) Low pressure sensor High pressure sensor High pressure switch Magnetic switch Overcurrent relay High voltage capacitor

3 3

– +

W

L1 L2 L3 N

RY517

2-way valve coil

BLU(BLK)

BLK 2 2 BLK 1 1 BLK 2 2 BLK 1 1 BLK 2 2 BLK 1 1 BLK 2 2 BLK 1 1 BLU(BLK) 3 3 1 1

V

FAN IPDU P.C. Board MCC-896, 897

BLU(BLK)

CN511 (GRN)

RY516

Parts name Compressor Pulse motor valve

1 1

TD1 (YEL)

GRY

1 1 T Heater 2

Symbol CM1, CM2 PMV1, PMV2, PMV3 SV2, SV41, SV42, SV51, SV3A, SV3B, SV3C, SV3D, SV3E, SV61, SSV11, SV12 4WV1 COMP1, COMP2 TS1, TS2 TD1, TD2 TE1 TO TK1, TK2, TK3, TK4 TL HEATER1, HEATER2, ACCUM HEATER FM PS PD 63H1, 63H2 MG-SW OCR HVC1, HVC2

3 3

BLU(BLK)

4 3 2 1

T6.3A FUSE CR517

1 1

BLU(BLK)

BLK 2 2 BLK 1 1

CN100 (BLK)

RY511

U 3 3

CN521 (WHI)

SW03

CN802 Flash RY518

CR516

CN30

SW04 SW05 SW06

RED

1 1 Heater 1 CN315(BLU) 3 3 BRW

RY506

BRN

28

CN316(WHI) 3 3 BRW

CN514 (BLK)

CR506

RED

WHI

RED BLK

RED BLK WHI

RED BRN BLU ORN YEL WHI



6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1

CN301 (WHI)

3 3

BLU 5 5 BLU

6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1

CN300 (WHI)

1 1 BLU

PNK RED BLU WHI BLK

SV42

6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1

5

CR500

63H2

BLU


BLU

63H1

Comp. IPDU No.2 MCC-1502

Power Supply 3phase 380-415V 50Hz

L2 L3 N

RED WHI BLK

BLK WHI CM2 RED YEL BLU

W V U

5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1

5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1

CN06 (WHI)

CN18 (RED)

RED

U1 U2 U3 U4

BLU

Option Board

BLK WHI BLU RED PNK

U5 U6

Outdoor unit

Option Board

BLK

U1 U2

Indoor unit

Option Board

YEL YEL

SV61

Option Board

BLK WHI BLU RED PNK

BLU

3 2 1 3 2 1


PMV3

Option Board

BLK WHI BLU RED PNK

CN309(WHI)

WHI WHI

BLU BLU

2 1 2 1 7

PMV2

Pressure Sensor PD

3 3

IPDU Board (2) MCC-1502

CN11 CN10 CN09 CN22 CN23

CN15 CN13 YEL BLU

1 1

CN17 (BLK)

CN03 L1 CN02 L2 CN01 L3

CN08 WHI

BLK WHI RED

CN07 WHI

GRY Reactor

1. The two-dot chain line indicates wiring at the local site, and the dashed line indicates accessories sold separately and service wires, respectively. 2. , , and indicate the terminal board and the numerals indicate the terminal numbers. 3. indicates P.C. board. * Be sure to fix the electric parts cover surely with two screws. (Otherwise water enters into the box resulting in malfunction.)

2-2. Outdoor Unit

PMV1

U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6

Pressure Sensor PS

Model: MMY-MAP0801FT8, MAP1001FT8, MAP1201FT8

–

+ FM

1 2 1 2

Supplied wire (Power supply)

Earth screw

SVD SVD

1 1

29

1 1

3 3

CN01 (RED)

COM SVD SVS SVDD SVSS BRW BLU YEL WHI ORN

1 1

3 3

5 5

7 7

CN10 (WHI)

Control P.C. board MCC-1431 CN02 (GRN)

9 9

Control P.C. board for indoor unit

3 3

CN67 (BLK)

1 2 3 4 5 CN81 1 2 3 4 5 (BLK)

R(L) S(N)

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

Power supply single phase 220-240V 50Hz Supplied wire (Control wiring)


2-3. Flow Selector Unit (FS Unit)

Indoor unit

RBM-Y1802FE only RBM-Y2802FE RBM-Y2802FE only only

SVS SVS SVS SVSS SVDD

Model: RBM-Y1122FE, Y1802FE, Y2802FE

Flow Selector unit

3. PARTS RATING 3-1. Indoor Unit 4-way Air Discharge Cassette Type Model

MMU-AP

0091H

0121H

0151H

0181H

Fan motor

0241H

0271H

Drain pump motor

ADP-1409

Float switch

FS-0218-102

TA sensor

Lead wire length : 155mm

TC1 sensor

Ø4 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Blue)

TC2 sensor

Ø6 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Black)

TCJ sensor

Ø6 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Red)

Pulse motor

EDM-MD12TF-3

Pulse motor valve

EDM-B25YGTF

EDM-B40YGTF

Louver motor (panel) Model

0301H

SWF-230-60-1

MP24GA MMU-AP

0361H

0481H

Fan motor

0561H

SWF-200-90-1

Drain pump motor

ADP-1409

Float switch

FS-0218-102

TA sensor


TC1 sensor


TC2 sensor


TCJ sensor


Pulse motor

EDM-MD12TF-3

Pulse motor valve

EDM-B60YGTF-1

Louver motor (panel)

MP24GA

2-way Air Discharge Cassette Type Model

MMU-AP

0071WH

Fan motor Running capacitor for fan motor

0091WH

0121WH

0151WH

AF-230-53-4G

AF-230-39-4B

AC 400V, 1.0µF

AC 450V, 2.0µF

Drain pump motor

PJD-05230TF-1

Float switch

FS-0208-608

Control P.C. board transformer

TT-13

Pulse motor

EDM-MD12TF-3

Pulse motor valve

EDM-B25YGTF

TA sensor

EDM-B40YGTF


TC1 sensor


TC2 sensor


TCJ sensor


Model

MMU-AP

Fan motor Running capacitor for fan motor

0241WH

0271WH

0301WH

AF-200-53-4F

0481WH AF-200-92-4B

AC 450V, 2.5µF

Drain pump motor

AC 450V, 3.5µF

AC 500V, 5µF

PJD-05230TF-1

Float switch

FS-0208-608


TT-13

Pulse motor Pulse motor valve

0181WH

EDM-MD12TF-3 EDM-B40YGTF

TA sensor


TC1 sensor


TC2 sensor


TCJ sensor


30

EDM-B60YGTF-1

1-way Air Discharge Cassette (Compact type) Type Model

MMU-AP

0071YH

0091YH

Fan motor

0121YH

AF-200-22-4N-1

Running capacitor for fan motor

AC 400V, 1µF

Drain pump motor

PJD-05230TF-1

Float switch

FS-0208-602


TT-13

Pulse motor

EDM-MD12TF-3

Pulse motor valve

EDM-B25YGTF

TA sensor


TC1 sensor


TCJ sensor


Model

MMU-AP

0151SH

Fan motor

0181SH

0241SH

0152SH

0182SH

AF-200-34-4D


SWF-280-60-1

AC 450V, 1.5µF

Drain pump motor Float switch Control P.C. board transformer

0242SH

AC 500V, 2.5µF

—

PJD-05230TF-2

ADP-1409

FS-0208-603

FS-0218-103

TT-13

—

Pulse motor

EDM-MD12TF-3

Pulse motor valve

EDM-B40YGTF

TA sensor

EDM-B40YGTF-3 Lead wire length : 155mm Vinyl tube

TC1 sensor


TC2 sensor


TCJ sensor


Concealed Duct Standard Type Model

MMD-AP

0071BH

0091BH

Fan motor

0121BH

0151BH

Drain pump motor

ADP-1409

Float switch

FS-0218-102

Pulse motor

EDM-MD12TF-3

Pulse motor valve

EDM-B25YGTF

TA sensor

EDM-B40YGTF Lead wire length : 618mm

TC1 sensor


TC2 sensor


TCJ sensor


Model Fan motor

MMD-AP

0241BH

0271BH

0301BH

0361BH

ICF-280-120-1

0481BH ICF-280-120-2

Drain pump motor

ADP-1409

Float switch

FS-0218-102


0181BH

ICF-280-120-2


EDM-B60YGTF-1

TA sensor


TC1 sensor


TC2 sensor


TCJ sensor


31

0561BH

Concealed Duct High Static Pressure Type Model

MMD-AP

Fan motor

0181H

0241H

0271H

0361H

0481H

STF-200-160-4B

STF-200-160-4A

STF-200-260-4C

STF-200-260-4B

AC 500V, 4µF

AC 400V, 8µF

AC 450V, 6µF

AC 400V, 8µF

Running capacitor for fan motor Drain pump motor

ADP-1409

Float switch

FS-0218-102-6

Pulse motor

EDM-MD12TF-3

Pulse motor valve

EDM-B40YGTF

TA sensor

EDM-B60YGTF-1


TC1 sensor


TC2 sensor


TCJ sensor


Slim Duct Type Model

MMD-AP

0071SPH(SH)

0091SPH(SH)

0121SPH(SH)

Fan motor

0151SPH(SH)

Pulse motor

EDM-MD12TF-3

Pulse motor valve

EDM-B25YGTF

EDM-B40YGTF

Drain pump motor ∗

ADP-1409

Float switch ∗

FS-0218-102

TA sensor


TC1 sensor


TC2 sensor


TCJ sensor


∗

0181SPH(SH)

SWF-280-60-1

“SPH” series only.

Under Ceiling Type Model

MMC-AP

0151H

Fan motor

0181H

0241H

SWF-280-60-1

0271H

Louver motor

MP24GA1

Pulse motor

EDM-MD12TF-3

Pulse motor valve

0361H

SWF-280-60-2

EDM-B40YGTF

TA sensor

0481H

SWF-280-120-2

EDM-B60YGTF-1 Lead wire length : 155mm Vinyl tube

TC1 sensor


TC2 sensor


TCJ sensor


High Wall Type Model

MMK-AP

0071H

0091H

0121H

Fan motor Louver motor

0151H

0181H

TA sensor

0072H

0092H

ICF-280-120-3

ICF-340-30 or MF-340-30

MT8-3-6

MP24Z


0241H

0122H


EDM-B40YGTF

EDM-B25YGTF-3

Lead wire length : 818mm Vinyl tube


TC1 sensor



TC2 sensor



TCJ sensor



32

Floor Standing Cabinet Type Model

MML-AP

0071H

0091H

0121H

0151H

0181H

0241H

Fan motor

AF-200-19-4F

AF-200-45-4F

AF200-70-4K


AC450V, 1.2µF

AC400V, 1.8µF

AC450V, 2µF

Transformer

TT13

Pulse motor

EDM-MD12TF-3

Pulse motor valve

EDM-B25YGTF

EDM-B40YGTF

TA sensor


TC1 sensor


TC2 sensor


TCJ sensor


Floor Standing Concealed Type Model

MML-AP

0071BH

0091BH

0121BH

Fan motor

AF-200-19-4G


AC450V, 1.5µF

0151BH

AC450V, 1µF TT-13

Pulse motor


TA sensor

0241BH

AF-200-70-4K

Transformer

Pulse motor valve

0181BH

AC450V, 2µF

EDM-B40YGTF Lead wire length : 818mm Vinyl tube

TC1 sensor


TC2 sensor


TCJ sensor


Floor Standing Type Model

MMF-AP

0151H

0181H

0241H

0271H

Fan motor

AF-200-37R

AF-200-63T


AC500V, 3µF

AC500V, 3.5µF

Transformer

TT-13

Pulse motor

EDM-MD12TF-3

Pulse motor valve

0481H

AF-200-110M-1

EDM-B40YGTF

Louver motor TA sensor

0361H

AF-200-160H-1 AC500V, 4µF

EDM-B60YGTF-1 MT8-3-9


TC1 sensor


TC2 sensor


TCJ sensor


33

0561H

3-2. Outdoor Unit Model

MMY-

Compressor

MAP0802FT8

MAP1002FT8

DA421A3FB-23M

MAP1202FT8

Output: : 3.75kW × 2

4-way valve coil (Heat pump only)

LB64046

AC220-240V 50Hz

Pulse motor valve coil

VPV-MOAJ524C0

HAM-MD12TF-3

2-way valve coil

VPV

SV2, SV3A, SV3B, SV3C, SV3D, SV3E SV41, SV42, SV5, SV6, SV11, SV12

VPV-122DQ1

SV2, SV3C, SV3D, SV3E, SV6, SV12

VPV-303DQ1

SV3A, SV41, SV42, SV5

VPV-603DQ2

SV3B

VPV-1204DQ50

SV11

DC12V

AC220–240V 50Hz

2-way valve

High-pressure SW

ACB-JB215

OFF : 3.73MPa, ON : 2.9MPa

Pressure sensor (For high pressure) 150XA4-H3

0.5 to 3.5V / 0 to 0.98MPa

Pressure sensor (For low pressure)

150XA4-L1

0.5 to 4.3V / 0 to 3.73MPa

Fan motor

MF-230-600-2

DC280V, 600W

Case heater

AC240V, 29W × 3

Compressor case thermo.

US-622KXTMQO-SS

OFF : 125°C, ON : 90°C × 2

3-3. Outdoor Control Unit Heat Recovery Model Model

MAP0802FT8

MMY-

MAP1002FT8

Power supply terminal block

JXO-3004

AC600V / 30A, 4P

Communication line terminal block

JXO-B2H

AC30V (or DC42V) / 1A, 6P

MAP1202FT8

Inductor

CH-44FK

1.45mH / 25A

Smoothing condenser (For compressor)

400LRSN 1500M

1500µF / 400V

Power supply transformer

TT-01-03T

AC230V, 350mA

FKX-240NK-4810US

0.48mH / 30A (MCC-1366 P.C. board)

FKX-220NK-6310US

0.63mH / 25A (MCC-1366 P.C. board)

IPDU-4T62DA1E

6.2kW

P.C. board (Noise filter) Line filter (AC)

MCC-1366

P.C. board (Control board) P.C. board (IPDU for compressor)

MCC-1429

P.C. board (Power supply board)

MCC-1502

MCC-1439

P.C. board (IPDU for fan)

IPDU-2D16DA1

800W

Power complex module

6MBR25UA120

25A/1200V (MCC-1502 P.C. board)

MCC-896, MCC-897

Pipe temp. sensor (TD)

—

–30°C to 135°C (Ambient temp. range)

Pipe temp. sensor (TS)

—


Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TE)

—


Outside temp. sensor (TO)

—


Oil temp. sensor (TK)

—


Liquid temp. sensor (TL)

—


Smoothing capacitor (For fan)

400LRSN1000M

1000µF / 400V

Magnet SW

FC-2S

400V / 38A

Thermistor

ZPROYCE101A500

100Ω, 13A, 500V

3-4. Flow Selector Unit (FS Unit) Model

RBM-Y1122FE

RBM-Y1802FE

P.C. board (Control board)

MCC-1431

2-way valve coil

VPV

AC220-240V 50Hz

VPV-122DQ1

SVSS, SVDD

VPV-1204DQ50

SVS, SVD

2-way valve

34

RBM-Y2802FE

TE sensor

TS2 sensor Check joint (Low pressure)

Low pressure sensor

SV2 valve SV42 valve SV3D valve

SV3E valve

35

SV3C valve

SV11 valve

SV41 valve SV5 valve

SV6 valve SV3A valve

TK1, TK2 sensor

TS1 sensor

High pressure SW1

SV12 valve TD1 sensor

PMV 4-way valve

High pressure SW2

SV3B valve

TD2 sensor

TL sensor Check joint (High pressure)

TK3 sensor TK4 sensor

High pressure sensor Check joint (Liquid pipe)

Front side

Rear side

3-5. Parts Layout in Outdoor Unit

TO sensor

3-6. Name of Each Part

[Concealed Duct Type]

Earth screw Situated inside the electric parts box.

2-way discharge/3-way discharge 2-way discharge or 3-way discharge can be selected according to the shape or arrangement of the room. For details, consult with the dealer from which you have purchased the air conditioner.

Air filter Filters dust and other trash. (Air filter is situated in the air grille.)

Clip To open/close the air inlet grille.

Air inlet grille

Main remote controller RBC-AMT31E

Air outlet/Air outlet louver Select air flow direction in cooling or heating operation.

Air filter Filter dust and other trash. (Air filter is situated in the air inlet grille.)

Air inlet

Air filter Filters dust and other trash. (Air filter is situated in the air grille.)

R.C.

H

No.

TEMP.

FILTER RESET TEST

ON / OFF

TIMER SET

FAN

MODE

TIME

SWING/FIX

VENT

SET

CL

Air outlet/Air outlet louver Select air flow direction in cooling or heating operation. Earth screw Situated inside the electric parts box.

Earth screw Situated inside the electric parts box. Air outlet/Air outlet louver Select air flow direction in cooling or heating operation.

Air outlet Discharge duct connection.

Drain pan

[Slim Duct Type]

Earth screw Situated in the electric parts box.

˚C

SETTING

Air inlet grille

Air filter Filters dust and other trash. (Air filter is situated in the air inlet grille.)


MMU-AP0152SH, AP0182SH, AP0242SH Button Button to open/close suction port

Air filter Filters dust and other trash. (Air filter is situated in the air grille) Air inlet grille. Earth screw Situated inside the electric box.

Air outlet/Air outlet louver Select air flow direction in cooling or heating operation mode.

Air filter Filters dust and other trash. (Provided on the suction port.)

Air outlet Discharge duct connection.

[Under Ceiling Type] Button Button to open/close the inlet grille.

Air filter Air filter is situated in the air grille. (Filters dust and other trash.)

Air inlet grille

ERROR

PROGRAM2 PROGRAM3

WEEKLY TIMER

Air inlet Suction duct connection.

Earth screw Earth screws situated in the electric parts box.

Air filter (Air filter is not supplied on certain models within the series.) TEST

SuMoTuWeTh Fr Sa PROGRAM1

UNIT

Air inlet Suction duct connection.

Wireless remote controller kit TCB-AX21E2 RBC-AX22CE2 RBC-AX21U(W)-E2

36

[1-way Air Discharge Cassette Type] MMU-AP0071YH to AP0121YH MMU-AP0151SH to AP0241SH

Air inlet Air filter is situated in the air grille.

[Concealed Duct, High Static Pressure Type]

UNIT No.

Air outlet/Air outlet louver Select air flow direction in cooling or heating operation.

Sub-remote controller RBC-AS21E2

Center panel

Earth screw Earth screws are situated inside the electric parts box.

CODE No. SET DATA SETTING TEST

[2-way Air Discharge Cassette Type] Earth screw Situated inside the electric parts box.

Air outlet flange Discharge duct connection.

Weekly timer RBC-EXW21E2

Sold Separately Parts

[4-way Air Discharge Cassette Type]

[High Wall Type] MMK-AP0071H to AP0241H Air inlet grille


Air inlet grille

Earth screw Situated inside the electric parts box. Air outlet/Air outlet louver Change the direction of the air to be discharged according to cool/heat mode. Earth screw Situated inside the electric parts box.

Air outlet/Air outlet louver Change the direction of the air to be discharged according to cool/heat mode.

MMK-AP0072H to AP0122H Air inlet grille



Air outlet/Air outlet louver Change the direction of the air to be discharged according to cool/heat mode.

Central remote controller TCB-SC642TLE2

3-6-1. Indoor Unit

ZONE ALL ZONE GROUP


R.C.

UNIT No.

TEST

No.

GROUP SELECT

ZONE

CL

SET

3-7. Parts Name of Remote Controller

[Floor Standing Cabinet Type] Air outlet/Air outlet louver Changes the direction of the air flow.


Air filter Filters dust and other trash. (Situated inside the air grille.)

Display section In the illustration, all of the indicators are displayed for the purpose of explanation. In normal operation, only the icons relevant to the mode of operation would be displayed. • When turning on the power breaker switch for the first time, [SET DATA] flashes on the display part of the remote controller. While this display is flashing, the system is performing a self-check function. Wait until this check has been completed and the [SET DATA] display has disappeared before using the remote controller.

2 3 4 5 6 15 1

Air outlet port

Drain pan (With drain filter) This accessory is installed at the local site.

Air inlet grille

Front panel (Lower side)

Air filter Filters dust and other trash. (Situated inside the suction port.)

1

37

Horizontal louver/Air outlet port Changes the direction of the air flow.

Vertical louver The air can automatically be discharged rightward/leftward at stated periods.

Air inlet grille

Air filter Filters dust and other trash.


3 4

H

SET DATA display

12

6 7

13

Timer time display

Timer SETIN setup display

Filter display ” is displayed, clean the air filter.

14

VENT

SET

CL

Operation section

UNIT

Louver position display (for 4-Way Air Discharge Cassette Type and Under Ceiling Type model only) Louver swing display Indicates the movement of the louver.

10

Setpoint temperature display The selected set up temp. is displayed.

11

10

Remote controller sensor display Displayed while the sensor of the remote controller is used.

16 11 13 12 14 PRE-HEAT display

Operation ready display

No function display Displayed when the selected function is not available.

15

Fan mode display The selected Fan mode is displayed. (AUTO) (HIGH) (MED.) (LOW) In the Concealed Duct High Static Pressure type models, [HIGH] only is displayed for the air speed.

16

Mode select control display Displayed when pushing “Operation mode select ” button while the operation mode is fixed to heating or cooling by the system manager of the air conditioner.

TEST run display

Displays louver position.

9

Refrigerant pipe access for connection

SWING/FIX

Displayed when cooling or heating operation is impossible because the outdoor temperature goes outside the operating range.

Displayed during a test run.

8

Power source aperture

MODE

TIME

Displayed when the heating or defrost operation is carried out. While this indication is displayed, the indoor fan stops or the runs in LOW fan speed.

By pressing the Timer Set button, the display of the timer is shown in the following order: → [OFF] repeat OFF timer → [OFF] → No display. [ON]

Air outlet (Discharge) Hot air is discharged when cooling operation is performed. Cold air is discharged when heating operation is performed.

Fixing leg

CHECK display

If “FILTER

Air inlet Situated at front, rear, left, and right sides.

FAN

17

No.

Operation mode select display

Displays the selected delay time. (When a malfunction occurs, a check code is displayed in place of the time display.)

Drain pan Water accumulated in the drain pan is drained through the drain pipe.

3-6-2. Outdoor Unit

FILTER RESET TEST

ON / OFF

TIMER SET

UNIT No.

R.C.

Will be displayed when a error condition occurs or a protection device operates.

5

Fixing metal holder (Right and left)

TEMP.

SET DATA SETTING TEST

The selected operation mode is displayed. Fixing metal holder

No.

CODE No.

Displayed during initialization of controller.

2 [Floor Standing Type]

Display section

UNIT No.

R.C.

H

78 9

Air inlet grille

[Floor Standing Concealed Type]


CODE No. SET DATA SETTING TEST

17

Central control display Displayed when using the remote controller with a central control remote controller, etc. If the remote controller is prohibited on fan the flashes when operating the centralcontrol side, ON / OFF

MODE

, , / buttons and following the function is not accepted. (The different settings available on the remote controller when in use with a central controller, can be referred to in the owners manual of the central controller.)

3-8. Correct Usage

Operation section Push each button to select the desired operation. This remote controller can operate up to a maximum 8 indoor units. • The remote controller can memorize user settings and can be recalled and activated by a single press of ON / OFF button. the

Preparation

1 7 TEMP.

10 2 5

FILTER RESET TEST

ON / OFF

TIMER SET

FAN

MODE

TIME

SWING/FIX

VENT

SET

CL

When the product is operated for the first time, or after the SET DATA value has been changed, the procedure below should be followed. The remote controller can memorize user settings and can be recalled and acti ON / OFF button. vated by a single push of the

UNIT

8 9 4 6

Power the system by switching the electrical isolation device on and by pushing the ON/OFF button on the remote controller. • When the power is switched on, a partition line is shown on the remote controller display. • The remote controller performs a self-check function for approximately 1 minute during which user input will not be accepted.

REQUIREMENT ON / OFF • While using the air conditioner, operate it only with button without turning off the main power switch and the leak breaker. • Do not turn off the earth leakage breaker while the air conditioner is in use. • When the air conditioner has not been operated for a period of time, ensure the earth leakage breaker is turned on for 12 or more hours prior to the start up of operation.

3 1

38

2 3 4

5

Timer set button Used for setting the timer function. Check button The CHECK button is used for the check operation. During normal operation, do not use this button. Fan button When an after-market fan device is connected to the system, this button activates the device. is displayed on the remote controller • If when pushing the FAN button, a fan is not connected.

7

8

ON / OFF

9

Operation select button Selects the desired operation mode.

10

FILTER RESET TEST

button

Push to cycle between ON and OFF mode. When the unit is OFF, the Operation Lamp and the display will turn OFF.

Set up temperature button Adjusts the temperature set point for the room. Set the desired temperature by pressing the or .

1 2

3

” display.

:

Select the desired indoor unit by pressing the unit button. SWING/FIX

:

Press the button to set the louver into Auto mode. • This function is not available on the Concealed Duct Standard Type, High Static Pressure Type, Floor standing Cabinet Type, Floor Standing Concealed Type, or Slim Duct Type.

TIMER SET

FAN

MODE

TIME

SWING/FIX

VENT

SET

CL

3

1 2

UNIT

ON / OFF

Push button. The operation lamp goes on, and the operation starts. MODE

Select an operation mode with the button. One push of the button, and the display changes in the order shown on the right. • “DRY mode” function is not available on the Concealed Duct High Static Pressure Type.

AUTO

HEAT

DRY

COOL

FAN

(Dehumidity)

AUTO

HIGH

MED.

LOW

Select air volume with FAN button. One push of the button, and the display changes in the order shown on the right. • When air volume is “AUTO ”, air volume differs according to the temperature difference between the set temperature and the room temperature. ” is displayed and the air volume is LOW. • In DRY mode, “AUTO

Unit and Auto louver buttons UNIT

ON / OFF

4

Operation lamp Lit during normal product operation. Flashes to indicate malfunction or incorrect timer setting.

Filter reset button Resets the “FILTER

6

TEMP.

Fan mode select button Selects the desired air speed. The Concealed Duct High Static Pressure type models cannot be operated.

• In heating operation, if the room temperature is not heated sufficiently with volume “LOW select “MED. ” or “HIGH ” operation.

OPTION : Remote controller sensor The temperature sensor in the indoor unit measures the room temperature. The remote controller can also measure the room temperature. For details of this feature, contact the dealer from whom you purchased the product.

” operation,

• The temperature which the temperature sensor detects is one near the air inlet of the indoor unit. Therefore it slightly differs from the room temperature according to the installation status. The setup value is a criterion of the room temperature. (Automatic air speed cannot be selected in FAN mode.) • Air volume of function is not available on “Concealed Duct High Static Pressure Type” air speed “HIGH ” only is displayed.

4

Determine the set up temperature by pushing the “TEMP.

Stop Push

ON / OFF

button.

The operation lamp goes off, and the operation stops.

” or “TEMP.

” button.

REQUIREMENT

How to set up the air direction Push SWING/FIX button.

[In Cooling operation] • The operation starts after approximately 1 minute.

[In Heating operation] • In heating operation, the fan operation may continue for approximately 30 seconds after the air conditioner has stopped. • The indoor fan continues in preheat operation for 3 to 5 minutes, and then blows out the hot air. symbol is displayed on the remote controller.) ( • When the temperature of the room has reached the set point temperature and after the unit has stopped, the air speed is lowered and the air volume is greatly reduced. is displayed. • In defrost mode, the fan stops so that cool air is not discharged. PRE-DEF symbol

[In Automatic operation] • Using the difference between the set point temperature and the room temperature, the heating and cooling operations are automatically performed.

1

Every push of the button, the air direction changes.

In Heating operation Set the air outlet louver downward. If directing it upward, the hot air may not reach the floor. Initial setup

In Cooling / Dry operation Set the air outlet louver upward. If directing it downward, dew condensation may fall on or near the air discharge port. Initial setup

How to start louvre swinging

3-9. Adjustment of Wind Direction

2

To increase the cooling or heating effect, be sure to make proper use of the discharge louver for cooling or heating operation. As the characteristics of the air, cool air collects at lower levels, and hot air collects at higher levels.

39

CAUTION

Push SWING/FIX button. Set the louver direction to the lowest position, and then push SWING/FIX again. • [SWING ] is displayed and the air direction automatically changes upward/downward. In cases where one remote controller controls the multiple indoor units, each indoor unit can be selected and its air direction can be set up.

TEMP.

FILTER RESET TEST

ON / OFF

TIMER SET

FAN

MODE

TIME

SWING/FIX

VENT

SET

CL

UNIT

Set the louver so that air blows out horizontally. If cooling operation is performed with the louver blowing air downwards, the air outlet or surface of the louver will be wet with dew, which may drip.

How to stop louver swinging

3 4-way Air Discharge Cassette Type • While the air conditioner stops, the discharge louver directs downward automatically. state, the louver is directed upward. • When the heating operation is in PREHEAT/DEFROST The rotation of the louver starts after PREHEAT/DEFROST status cleared , is displayed status. on the remote controller even if the heating operation is in PREHEAT/DEFROST

[In Cooling operation] Use the discharge louver with horizontal set point.

[In Heating operation] Use the discharge louver with downward set point.

4

1, 2, 3

4

SWING/FIX

Push button again while the louver is operating. • The louver stops at a position when you push SWING/FIX . If pushing SWING/FIX again, the air direction descends from the highest position. * In COOL/DRY operation, the louver does not stop at the lowest position. If stopping the louver as it directs downward during operation, it stops after moving to the 3rd position from the highest position.

In FAN operation

In all modes

Series of operation Initial setup

Display when stopping the swing

UNIT UNIT

• Push to set up the air direction individually in each indoor unit. Then the indoor unit No. in a group control is displayed. For the displayed indoor unit, set up the air direction. • If the unit No. is not displayed, all the indoor units are operated at the same time. UNIT pushed, the display is • Every time is exchanged as follows:

Fan/Heat operation

No display

Cool/Dry operation

Unit No. 1-1

Unit No. 1-4

Unit No. 1-2

Unit No. 1-3

2-way discharge or 3-way discharge can be selected according to the configuration of the room. For details, consult with the dealer from which you have purchased the air conditioner.

INFORMATION • If cooling operation has been selected while the louver is in a downward position, the cabinet or surface of the louver may become wet with dew. • If heating operation has been selected while the louver is in a horizontal position, the room temperature may not be even. • Never handle the louver directly with hands as a malfunction or injury may occur. Use the louver operation functions on the remote controller to change direction of the louver.

2-way Air Discharge Cassette Type [In Cooling operation] Use the air outlet louver with horizontal set point.

[In Heating operation]

Under Ceiling Type, 1-way Air Discharge Cassette Type (2SH Series) • When the air conditioner is stopped, the horizontal louver (Up/Down air direction adjustment plate) automatically directs upward. • When the air conditioner is in stand-by status waiting to heat, the horizontal louver (Up/Down air direction adjustment plate) directs upward. The swinging operation starts upon the heating operation starting, but “SWING ” is displayed on the remote controller even when in heating operation.

How to set up the air flow direction Push

SWING/FIX

button during operation.

1

Every pushing of the button, the air direction changes.

In Heating operation

In Cooling / Dry operation

Set the horizontal louver (Up/Down air direction adjustment plate) downward. If directing it upward, the hot air may not reach the floor.

Set the horizontal louver (Up/Down air direction adjustment plate) upward. If directing it downward, dew condensation may fall on or near the air discharge port.

Initial setup

Initial setup

Use the air outlet louver with downward set point.

How to start swinging

How to set up the air direction

1 2 40

3

SWING/FIX

Push button during operation. • [SWING ] is displayed and the air direction automatically changes upward/downward. In case when one remote controller controls multiple indoor units, each indoor unit can be selected and the air direction can be set up. SWING/FIX

Push button again during swinging of the air outlet louver. • The air outlet louver can be stopped at the required position.

TEMP.

2

ON / OFF

TIMER SET

FAN

MODE

TIME

SWING/FIX

VENT

TEMP.

SWING/FIX

Push button. Set the direction of the horizontal louver (Up/ Down air direction adjustment plate) to the lowest position and then push SWING/FIX button again. • [SWING ] is displayed and the air direction automatically changes upward/downward. In cases where one remote controller controls the multiple indoor units, each indoor unit can be selected and air flow direction set up.

UNIT

FILTER RESET TEST

UNIT

• To set up the air direction individually, push button to display each indoor unit No. in a group control. Then set the air direction on the displayed indoor unit. • If there is no display, all the indoor units can be operated collectively. UNIT button, the display will • Every pushing of the change as shown in the figure.

SET

CL

How to stop swinging

UNIT

3

1, 2 No display

3

Unit No. 1-1

Unit No. 1-4

Unit No. 1-2

Unit No. 1-3

1-way Air Discharge Cassette Type (1H Series)

Adjustment of air direction upward/downward [In Cooling operation] In cooling operation, use the air outlet louver in a position that will defuse cool air throughout the room.

[In Heating operation] In heating operation, use the air outlet louver in a downward position so that the air is directed to the floor.

Adjustment of air the direction rightward/leftward To change the discharge direction from the right or left position, set the vertical grille inside of the air outlet louver to the required direction.

4

SWING/FIX

Push button again during swinging of the horizontal louver. • The horizontal louvre can be stopped at the desired position. The air direction can be again set up from the uppermost position by pushing SWING/FIX button. * While the horizontal louver is set downward in cooling/drying operation, it does not stop. If stopping the horizontal louver which directs downward during swinging, it will stop after reaching the 3rd position from the upper position. UNIT

TIMER SET

FAN

MODE

TIME

SWING/FIX

VENT

SET

CL

1, 2, 3 In FAN operation

No display

Unit No. 1-1

Unit No. 1-2

Unit No. 1-4

Unit No. 1-3

UNIT

4 In all modes

Series of operation Initial setup

Display when stopping the swing

Fan/Heat operation

UNIT

• Push to set up the air direction individually in each indoor unit. Then the indoor unit No. in a group control is displayed. For the displayed indoor unit, set up the air direction. • If the unit No. is not displayed, all the indoor units are operated at the same time. UNIT is pushed, the display is ex• Every time changed as follows:

Setup the air flow direction and swinging Refer to the description of the “2-way Air Discharge Cassette Type”.

FILTER RESET TEST

ON / OFF

Cool/Dry operation

Right/Left air direction adjustment


To change the air outlet direction to the right or left side, set the vertical louver located behind the horizontal louver to the desired direction.

[In Cooling operation]

INFORMATION • If cooling operation is performed with a donwards discharge, dew may form on the surface of the cabinet or the horizontal louver resulting in possible dripping. • If heating operation is performed with a horizontal discharge, the room temperature may not be equal i.e. there may be a large variance between one side of the room with the other.

In cooling operation, set the air outlet louver with a horizontal set point so that the cold air diffuses the whole room.

[In Heating operation] In heating operation, set the air outlet louver with a downwards set point so that the hot air blows towards the floor.

High Wall Type

Adjustment of air Flow direction Upwards/Downwards [In Cooling operation]

How to change the air outlet port

In cooling operation, use the horizontal louver with a horizontal set point so that the cold air diffuses the whole room.

Change the air outlet port using the following procedure.

1

[In Heating operation]

Remove the two fixing screws on the air outlet port. (The fixing screws are reused.)

In heating operation, use the horizontal louver with a downwards set point so that the hot air blows towards the floor.

41

REQUIREMENT • If cooling operation is performed with the louver set at a downwards position, dew may form on the surface of the cabinet or the horizontal louver resulting in possible dripping. • If heating operation is performed with the louver set in a horizontal position, the room temperature may not be equal i.e. there may be a large variance between one side of the room with the other. • Do not move the horizontal louver directly with your hands; otherwise a fault maybe caused. Select the direction of the SWING/FIX button on the remote controller. horizontal louver using the The horizontal louver will not stop immediately even if the switch is pushed. Note pushing the switch again when the required louver direction has been reached will stop the louver.

Adjustment of air Flow direction rightwards/leftwards To change the air outlet direction to the right or left side, set the vertical louver located behind the horizontal louver to the desired direction.

Setup of air direction and swinging 1H series: Refer to the description of “2-way Air Discharge Cassette Type”. 2H series: Refer to the description of “Under Ceiling Type, 1-way Air Discharge Cassette Type (2SH Series)”.

2

3 4

5

Remove the discharge port, by pushing up on the rear side, to a point where you can remove it from the rear clip.

Lift the air outlet port upwards and remove it.

Reverse the air outlet port and attach it to the main unit. Pay attention so that four claw hooks (two at rear and two at the lower sides) are hooked on the mounting position.

Be sure to tighten the air outlet port with the removed fixing screws so that the air outlet port does not come off.

3-10. Timer Operation

Floor Standing Type

Adjustment of air Flow direction upwards/downwards

The type of timer operation can be selected from the following three types. OFF timer : The operation stops when the time on the timer has reached the set time. Repeat OFF timer : The unit will stop, every time the set time period has elapsed. ON timer : The unit will start when the time on the timer has reached the set time.

[In Cooling operation] In cooling operation, move the louver with your hands so that the horizontal air outlet points in a direction so that the cold air diffuses the entire room.

Timer operation [In Heating operation] In heating operation, move the louver with your hands so that the horizontal air outlet points in a downward direction, towards the floor. TEMP.

ON / OFF

Adjustment of air Flow direction rightwards/leftwards [In case of using unsymmetrical air directions] Lift up the vertical louver lightly and direct it towards the desired direction once completed lower the louver back down. In this case, do not use the Swing function.

2

1

1

FILTER RESET TEST

[In case of automatic swing]

1

42

2

3

Push the button again whilst the vertical louver is moving will allow you to stop the louver in the desired position.

MODE

TIME

SWING/FIX

VENT

SET

CL

2

UNIT

34 TEMP.

FILTER RESET TEST

ON / OFF

TIMER SET

FAN

MODE

TIME

SWING/FIX

VENT

SET

CL

1

UNIT

2

1, 2

UNIT

Swing button • To set up the air flow the direction individuUNIT ally, push the button to display each indoor unit No. in a group control. Then set up the air flow direction to the desired indoor unit. • If there is no display, all the indoor units can be operated collectively. UNIT button, will change • Every push of the the display as shown in the figure.

FAN

In this case, do not use the swing function.

SWING/FIX

Push the button during operation. • [SWING ] is displayed and the air direction will automatically change rightwards/ leftwards. In cases where one remote controller controls multiple indoor units, it is possible to set each indoor unit individually, so that the air flow direction can be altered. SWING/FIX

TIMER SET

No display

3 Unit No. 1-1

Unit No. 1-4

Unit No. 1-2

• If cooling operation is performed with downward air outlet, dew may form on the surface of the cabinet or the horizontal louver, resulting in possible dripping of water. • If heating operation is performed with the horizontal air outlet actively moving, unevenness of the temperature may increase within the room. • Do not move the louver directly with your hands during swing operation; otherwise a fault may be caused. SWING/FIX button is pushed. The vertical louver does not stop immediately even if the SWING/FIX To adjust the stop position, push the button.

Push the

TIME

OFF

OFF

ON

(OFF timer)

(Repeat OFF timer)

(ON timer)

No display

buttons to select the “SET TIME”.

For every push of the button, the set time increases in the unit of 0.5 hr (30 minutes). The maximum set time is 72.0 hr. button, the set time decreases in the unit of 0.5 hr (30 minutes). For every push of the The minimum set time is 0.5 hr.

3

Unit No. 1-3

INFORMATION

Push the TIMER SET button. • The timer display (type) changes for every push of the button. • SET TIME and timer time displays flash.

Push the SET button. • The SETTING display disappears and the timer time display goes on. (When the ON timer is activated, the chosen time period will be displayed. Once the time has been reached, all displays except the ON light will disappear.)

Cancel of timer operation

4

Push the CL button. • TIMER display will disappear.

NOTICE • When the unit stops after the timer has reached the preset time, the Repeat OFF timer will resume the ON / OFF operation. However by pushing the button the repeat function will stop once the time on the timer has again reached its set time.

3-11. Installation

3-12. Maintenance

Installation location

Cleaning of air filter WARNING

• When [FILTER] is displayed on the remote controller, its is time to check and if necessary clean the filter. • Clogging of air filter decreases the cooling/heating effect.

• Select a location for installation that will be able to safely support the weight of the unit. If the installation location is not strong enough to support the unit and the unit falls, injury could result. CODE No. SET DATA SETTING TEST

CAUTION • Do not install the unit in a location where combustible gases could conceivably leak. Leaking gases that accumulate in the vicinity of the unit could be ignited by the unit.

UNIT No.

FILTER display Notifies that it is time to clean the air filter.

No.

TEMP.

REQUIREMENT • A location that permits the level installation of the unit • A location that provides enough space to service the unit safely • A location where water draining from the unit will not pose a problem

R.C.

H

FILTER reset

FILTER RESET TEST

ON / OFF

TIMER SET

FAN

MODE

TIME

SWING/FIX

VENT

SET

CL

UNIT

Push the FILTER switch after cleaning. The “FILTER” display will disappear.

Avoid the following types of locations :

43

• Locations where salt is present in large amounts (seaside areas), or where sulfuric gases are present in large amounts (hot springs areas) (If the unit is to be used in such areas, special maintenance is necessary.) • Locations that generate oils (including machine oils), steam, oily smoke, or corrosive gases • Locations where organic solvents are used • Locations in the vicinity of equipment that generates high frequency signals • Locations where the outdoor unit will blow in the direction of a neighbor's window • Locations where the noise of the outdoor unit will pose a problem • Locations with poor air circulation

Electric wiring

WARNING Be sure to turn off the main power supply prior to any maintenance. • Please do not intend to do the daily maintenance and/or Air Filter cleaning by yourself. Cleaning of the air filter and other parts of the unit involves dangerous work in high places, so be sure to have a qualified service person do it. Do not attempt it by yourself.

Daily maintenance • For daily maintenance including Air Filter cleaning, please use qualified service personnel, particularly for the following models; 4-way Air Discharge Cassette Type Concealed Duct Type Under Ceiling Type 2-way Air Discharge Cassette Type Slim Duct Type 1-way Air Discharge Cassette Type Concealed Duct, High Static Pressure Type

WARNING

NO GOOD

Ensure that the unit is correctly earthed.

NO GOOD

Grounding is necessary. If earthing is incomplete, an electric shock may be caused.

CAUTION

NO GOOD

Check that the circuit breaker is fitted. Attaching a earth leakage breaker is necessary. Otherwise, an electric shock may be caused.

Make sure that the correct capacity Fuses are used.


Using wire or copper wire may cause a fire or unit fault. Ensure that the power supply to the unit is exclusive and is the correct rated voltage.



NO GOOD

NO GOOD

To disconnect the appliance from the main power supply. This appliance must be connected to the main power supply by means of a circuit breaker or a switch with a contact separation of at least 3mm.

NO GOOD Concealed Duct Type

NO GOOD Under Ceiling Type

Slim Duct Type

Concealed Duct, High Static Pressure Type

Re-installing the air filter • Insert the upper portion of air filter confirming alignment with the right and left edges of the indoor unit until it is located. • Close the air inlet grille. If the FILTER lamp on the indoor unit is lit, push the FILTER button on the remote controller or the TEMPORARY button on the indoor unit to turn off the lamp.

High Wall Type (Model : 1H series) • Push the projection at the center of the air filter. • Undo the clip on the air filter, pull the air filter downwards while pushing it towards the main unit side.

(Model : 2H series)

Push the air filter, and pull it downward.

• Open the air inlet grille. Lift the air inlet grille up in to the horizontal position. • Take hold of the left and right handles of the air filter and lift it up slightly, then pull downwards to remove it from the filter holder.

Filter holder

Cleaning the air inlet grille 1. Remove the air inlet grille. Hold the two sides of the air inlet grille and open in an upwards direction. Move the center arm to the left and remove the grille. 2. Wash it with water using a soft sponge or towel. (Do not use metallic scrubbing brush or other hard brushes.) • Use of such hard objects will cause scratches on the surface of the grille, and the metal coating to peel off. • If very dirty, clean the air inlet grille with a neutral detergent for kitchen use, and rinse it off with water. 3. Wipe the air inlet grille and allow to dry. 4. Fit the left and right arms of the air inlet grille to the shafts on the two sides of the air conditioner and push in completely, then push in the center arm. 5. Check that the center arm has been completely inserted and then close the air inlet grille. • Push the arrow locations (Four) at the bottom of the air inlet grille to check whether the grill is completely closed.

Filter holder


44

• Gently push down the upper part of the suction port, and then pull towards you to remove it. • Take out the air filter inside of the suction port.

Floor Standing Concealed Type • Push down on the hook of the air filter on the front panel (Lower side). • Pull the air filter towards you to remove it. Front panel (Lower) Air filter knob

Floor Standing Type Removal / Attachment of air filter • Pull the air filter towards you. • To attach the air filter, insert it into the main body and push.

Cleaning of main unit / remote controller

CAUTION

NOTE • When cleaning the air filter, use a small brush or cleaning device. If the air filter is heavily stained use a neutral detergent mixed with warm water. • After washing the filter, rinse it out thoroughly and place in the shade to dry. Do not expose to direct sun light. • Once the air filter has dried, place the air filter back into the unit.

• Wipe them with a soft and dry cloth. • A cloth dampened with cold water may be used on the indoor unit if it is very dirty. • Never use a damp cloth on the main unit or remote controller. • Do not use or leave a chemically treated duster on the unit for long periods of time, as it may damage or alter the colour of the unit surface. • Do not use benzine, thinner, polishing powder, or similar solvents for cleaning. These may cause the plastic surface to crack or deform.

Thinner Polishing Benzene powder

Chemical floor-cloth

Do not use.

3-13. Air Conditioner Operations and Performance

If you do not plan to use the unit for more than 1 month 1. Operate the fan for 3 to 4 hours to dry the inside of the unit • Operate “FAN” mode. 2. Stop the air conditioner and turn off the main power supply or the circuit breaker.

Check before operation Wipe with a dry soft cloth

• Check whether earth wire is disconnected or out of place. • Check that air filter is installed to the indoor unit.

Heating capacity

WARNING Turn on the power supply 12 hours or more before starting the air conditioner.

• During heating operation the heat pump system operates by absorbing the heat from the outside air and discharging it into the room. Therefore if the outside temperature drops, the units heating capacity will decrease. • When the temperature of the outside air is low, it is recommended that you use other forms of heating in conjunction with the air conditioner.

Checks before operation 1. Check that the air filters are installed. 2. Check that the air outlet or inlet is not blocked. 3. Turn on the main power switch or the circuit breaker for the main power supply to the air conditioner. When the unit has not been turn on for a long period of time, ensure the unit is dry, as shown above and then operate in fan only mode for 3 to 4 hours.

Defrost operation during heating operation • If the outdoor unit has a build up of frost during the heating operation, the operation mode changes automatically to defrost mode to increase the heating effect (for approximatley 2 to 10 minutes). • During defrost operation, fans of the indoor and the outdoor units will stop.

Protection for 3 minutes

NOTE For an Air conditioning system which is operated regularly, cleaning and maintenance of the indoor/ outdoor units are strongly recommended. As a general rule, if an indoor unit is operated for about 8 hours daily, the indoor/outdoor units will need to be cleaned at least once every 3 MONTHS. This cleaning and maintenance shall be carried out by a qualified person. Failure to clean the indoor/outdoor units regularly will result in poor performance, icing, water leakage and even compressor failure.

• The outdoor unit will not operate for approximately 3 minutes after the air conditioner has been immediately restarted after being stop, or the power supply has been turned on. This is to protect the system.

Main power failure • If a power failure occurs during operation, all operations will stop. • When restarting the unit, push the ON/OFF button again.

Fan rotation of stopped unit

45

• When other indoor units within the same system are in operation, the fan on the indoor units that are on “stand-by” will rotate to protect the machine once per approximately 1 hour for several minutes.

HINTS FOR ECONOMICAL OPERATION

Protective device (High pressure switch)

Maintain room temperature at comfortable level Clean air filters The clogged air filter impairs the performance of the air conditioner. Gee, chilly

Never open doors and windows more than what is necessary

Control

To keep the cool or warm air in the room, never open doors and windows more than what is necessary.

Window curtains In cooling, close the curtains to avoid direct sunlight. In heating, close the curtains to keep the heat in.

Clean, please.

The high pressure switch will stop the unit automatically when excessive load is applied to the air conditioner. If the protective device operates, the operation lamp will stay lit but the operation will stop. When the protective device operates, check characters “ ” on the remote controller display. The protective device may operate in the following cases. • When suction or discharge port on the outdoor unit is blocked. • When strong wind blows continuously against the discharge port of the outdoor unit. • When dust or dirt is excessively adhered to the air filter of the indoor unit. • When the discharge port of the indoor unit is blocked.

Cooling/heating operation of a Heat Recovery Multi air conditioner • When the outdoor temperature goes out of the operating range, the cooling or heating modes may not be performed in order to protect the equipment. In this case, the “ ” light goes on.

Ensure uniform circulation of room air Adjust the air flow direction so that the air is evenly circulated throughout the room.

Ple

ase

clo

se

Characteristics of heating operation

Blows upward

Air flow adjustment

Cool and dry air Warm air

Blows downward

• Hot air will not be blown out immediately from the indoor unit. It will take between 3 to 5 minutes (depending on temperature conditions of the room and the outside) before the indoor heat exchanger warms up sufficiently, to allow hot air to be blown. • During operation, the indoor unit may stop if the outside temperature becomes to high. • When other indoor units are in heating operation, the fan operation of the indoor unit on fan only operation may be stopped temporarily to prevent hot air from being blown out.

Characteristics of cooling/heating simultaneous operation • If the outdoor temperature drops during operation, the fan of the outdoor unit may stop.

3-15. When the Following Symptoms are Found

Air conditioner operating conditions For specified performance, operate the air conditioner under the following temperature conditions: Cooling operation

Room temperature CAUTION Heating operation

Check the points described below before contacting your local service repair center.

Outdoor temperature : –10°C to 43°C (Dry-bulb temp.) Outdoor unit

• White misty cold air or water is blown out. • Sometimes, the noise “Pushu !” is heard.

• The fan on the outdoor unit automatically stops when performing a defrost operation. • Solenoid valve works when defrost operation starts and finishes.

Indoor unit

• “Swish” sound is sometimes heard.

• When the unit is in operation,a sound such as the movement of water from one area to another may be heard. This sound may become larger after a period of 2 to 3 minutes once the unit has begun operation. This is not a cause for concern, but is the movement of the refrigerant or the draining sound of the dehumidifier. • This is sound generated when the heat exchanger, etc. expands and contracts slightly due to the change of temperature. • Various odurs such as those from a carpet, clothes, cigarette, or cosmetics will adhere to the air conditioner. • Has the outdoor temperature gone out of its specified range specified range? • When the manager of the air conditioner has fixed the operation to either COOL or HEAT, but a request/demand contrary to this setup operation is requested. • When the fan operation is stopped to prevent the discharge of hot air. • Since refrigerant is flowed temporarily to prevent the stay of oil or refrigerant in the stand by indoor unit, the sound of flowing refrigerant, “Kyururu” or “Shaa” may be heard. When indoor unit operates in HEAT mode, and cold air in COOL mode white steam may be blown out. • Sound is generated when the expansion valve operates when power supply has been turned on.

Outdoor temperature : –15°C to 21°C (Dry-bulb temp.), –15°C to 15.5°C (Wet-bulb temp.) Room temperature

: 15°C to 28°C (Dry-bulb temp.)

• If the air conditioner is used outside of the above conditions, the units safety protection devices may operate. * Do not use “Super HRM” for other than personal usage where the ambient temperature may go down below –5°C. (For example, OA equipment/Electric device/Food/Animals and plants/Art object)

When outdoor temperature goes out of specified range, “ or ” mark is indicated on the Wired remote controller display and the required operation will stop. “ & ” : When in heating operation. “ ” : When in cooling operation.

Notice : • This indication is not failure. • When outdoor temperature goes back to specified range, “ or ” will disappear and the unit will begin normal operation. • The unit operation may stop if the next operation (request) cannot be fulfilled because it falls outside the specification for Super HRM. See below for the maximum cooling and heating specifications. (Outdoor temp. (DB) < –10°C : Cooling mode, > 21°C : Heating mode)

• Slight “Pishi!” sound is heard.

It is not a failure.

CAUTION

Cause

Symptom

: 21°C to 32°C (Dry-bulb temp.), 15°C to 24°C (Wet-bulb temp.)

Room relative humidity – less than 80 %. If the air conditioner operates in excess of this figure, the surface of the air conditioner may cause dewing.

• Discharge air smells. • “

” indication is lit.

• Sound or cool air is blown from the indoor unit.

DANGER If the unit position is to be changed and re-located to a new position ask your local dealer or installation specialist. Do not attempt to move the air conditioner yourself, as incorrect installation may cause electric shock or fire.

Do not install the air conditioner in the following places • Do not install the air conditioner in any place within 1 m from a TV, stereo or radio set. If the unit is installed in such places, noise transmitted from the air conditioner may affect the operation of these appliances. • Do not install the air conditioner near a high frequency appliance (sewing machine or massager for business use, etc.), as the air conditioner may malfunction. • Do not install the air conditioner in a humid or oily place, or in a place where steam, soot or corrosive gas maybe generated. • Do not install the air conditioner in a salty place such as a seaside area. • Do not install the air conditioner in a place where a great deal of machine oil is used. • Do not install the air conditioner in a place where it is usually exposed to strong change winds such as in a seaside area or on the roof / upper floor of a building. • Do not install the air conditioner in a place where sulfureous gas maybe generated such as in a spa. • Do not install the air conditioner in a vessel or mobile crane.

Be careful with noise or vibrations • Do not install the air conditioner in a place where the noise or the hot air created by the outdoor unit will come into contact with your neighbours. • Install the air conditioner on a solid and stable foundation as this will reduce the transmission of noise and vibration that is produced from the outdoor unit. • If one indoor unit is operating, some sound may be audible from other indoor units that are connected within the same system (even when not in operation)

Check again.

46

• When power of the air conditioner is turned on, “Ticktock” sound is heard.

3-14. Re-Installation

Operates or stops automatically.

• Is the timer “ON” or “OFF”?

Does not operate.

• • • • t Silen

Air is not cooled or warmed sufficiently.

It’s strange.

Is there a power failure to the unit? Has the power supply been turned off? Has the power fuse or breaker blown? Has the protective device operated? (The operation lamp goes on.) • Is the timer “ON”? (The operation lamp goes on.) • Has the outdoor temperature gone out of the specified range for the outdoor unit? • Is the suction port or discharge port of the outdoor unit obstructed? • Are there any doors or windows open? • Is the air filter clogged with dust? • Is the discharge louver of the indoor unit set at appropriate position? • Is the air selection set to “LOW” or “MED” and is the operation mode set to “FAN Only”? • Is the setup temp. the appropriate temperature? • Has the outdoor temperature gone out of the specified range?

When the following symptoms are found, stop the unit operation immediately, turn off the power supply, and contact the dealer from where you have purchased the air conditioner. • Activation of the power supply causing the unit to operate in an unstable fashion (power on, power off, power on, power off etc). • The main power fuse often blows out, or circuit breaker is often activated. • Foreign matters or water have entered the unit by mistake. • When the unit fails to operate after the protective device (circuit breaker) has been removed. Not recommended. • Other unexplained symptoms or unit abnormalities, that cannot be explained.

Confirmation and check When a error has occurred in the air conditioner, the check code and the indoor unit No. will appear on the display part of the remote controller. The check code is only displayed during while the unit is operating. If the display disappears, operate the air conditioner according to the following “Confirmation of error history” for confirmation.

CODE No.

UNIT No.

R.C.

Check code

No.

Indoor unit No. in which an error has occurred

Confirmation of error history When a error has occurred on the air conditioner, the error history can be confirmed with the following procedure. (Up to 4 errors can be stored in the memory of the remote controller.) The history can be confirmed from both operating status and stop status.

TEMP.

2 FILTER RESET TEST

ON / OFF

TIMER SET

FAN

MODE

TIME

SWING/FIX

VENT

SET

CL

UNIT

1

3 Procedure

Description

47

SET

TEST

When pushing the and buttons at the same time for 4 seconds or more, the following display will appear. If [Service check] is displayed, the mode enters into the change error history mode.

1

CODE No.

UNIT No.

• [01 : Order of error history] is displayed in CODE No. window.

R.C.

No.

• [Check code] is displayed in CHECK window. • [Indoor unit address in which the error has occurred] is displayed in UNIT No. For every push of the is displayed in order.

2

,

button used to set temperature, the trouble history stored in memory

The numbers in CODE No. indicate CODE No. [01] (latest) → [04] (oldest). CAUTION Do not push the

3

CL

button because all the error history of the indoor unit will be deleted.

After confirmation, push the

TEST

button to return to the normal display.

1. Check the error codes according to the above procedure. 2. Ask an authorized dealer or qualified service (maintenance) professional to repair or maintain the air conditioner. 3. More details of the service codes are explained in the Service Manual.

4. REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEMATIC DRAWING 4-1. Inverter Unit (8, 10, 12HP) Model: MMY-MAP0802FT8, MAP1002FT8, MAP1202FT8 Propeller fan

FM Fan motor Sensor (TE1)

(Right side)

Strainer Pulse motor valve

(Left side)

Solenoid valve (SV12) (PMV2)

Main heat exchanger

Strainer Strainer

Check valve

Sub heat exchanger (Right side) Sub heat exchanger (Left side)

(PMV3)

4-Way valve

Check valve Solenoid valve (SV11)

Solenoid valve (SV5)

High-pressure sensor Solenoid Capillary Check joint tube valve (SV6) Capillary tube Strainer

Sensor (TL)

Solenoid valve (SV3D)

Highpressure switch Sensor (TD1)

Sensor (TS2) Solenoid valve (SV2)

Oil separator

Check valve

Capillary tube

Compressor 1 (Inverter)

Check joint

Check valve

Check valve

Solenoid valve (SV3C)

Strainer Strainer

Solenoid valve (SV3E)

Check valve

Check valve

Capillary tube

Capillary tube

Solenoid valve (SV42) Highpressure switch Sensor (TD2)

Sensor (TK2) Oil tank

Sensor (TK4)

Capillary tube

Capillary tube

Strainer

Solenoid valve (SV3A) Strainer

Check valve

Solenoid valve (SV3B) Check valve

Service valve of balance pipe

Service valve at liquid side

Service valve at discharge gas side

Check joint

Capillary tube

Sensor (TK3)

Sensor (TK1)

Strainer

LowSensor pressure (TS1) sensor

Strainer

Capillary tube Solenoid valve (SV41)

Liquid tank

Capillary tube


(PMV1)

Sensor (TO)

Main heat exchanger

Service valve at suction gas side

48

Accumulator

4-2. Explanation of Functional Parts Functional part name Solenoid valve SV3A

(Connector CN313: Blue) Open : Allows oil to return to the outdoor unit via the balance pipe.

SV3C

(Connector CN314: Black) Open : Pressurizes the oil tank..

SV3D

(Connector CN323: White) Open : Supplies oil to the compressor from the oil separator.

SV3E

(Connector CN323: White) Open : Turns on during operation and balances oil between compressors.

SV2

(Hot gas bypass) (Connector CN312: White) 1) Low pressure release function 2) High pressure release function 3) Gas balance function during stop time

SV4 1 SV4 2

(Gas balance control for compressor start-up) (Connector CN311: Blue) 1) For gas balance start 2) High pressure release function 3) Low pressure release function

SV5

(Connector CN310: White) 1) Increase of No. of heating indoor units, Gas balance function in defrost time 2) Low-pressure balance function of discharge gas pipe during all cooling operation

SV6

(Connector CN309: White) 1) Liquid bypass function for discharge temp. release (Cooling bypass circuit)

SV11

(Connector CN322: White) 1) For shutdown discharge gas (During all cooling operation and defrost operation)

SV12

(Connector CN319: White) 1) Flow-rate control function of refrigerant to sub heat exchanger during simultaneous operation 2) Flow-rate control function of refrigerant to sub heat exchanger during defrost operation (Connector CN317: Blue) 1) Cooling/Heating selection 2) Reverse defrost 3) Main-/Sub-heat exchanger selection

PMV1, 2

(Connector CN300, 301: White) 1) Super heat control function during all heating operation and mainly heating, partly cooling operation 2) Under-cool adjustment function during all cooling operation 3) Divided flow control function during mainly cooling, partly heating operation

PMV3

(Connector CN302: Red) 1) For flow-rate control of sub heat exchanger during simultaneous operation (Control function of heating divided flow) 2) A function preventive high pressure up during all cooling or all heating operation

Oil separator Temp. sensor

(Connector CN324: Red) Closed : Allows oil to collect/remain in the oil tank. Open : Allows oil to exit the oil tank.

SV3B

4-way valve

Pulse motor valve

Functional outline

1) Prevention for early drop of oil level (Decrease of flow-out of discharge oil to cycle) 2) Reserve function of surplus oil TD1, TD2

(TD1: Connector CN502: White, TD2: Connector CN503: Pink) 1) Protection of compressor discharge temp. 2) Releasing of discharge temp.

TS1

(Connector CN504: White) 1) Controls super heat of PMV1 and 2 during all heating operation and simultaneous operation

TS2

(Connector CN522: Black) 1) Controls indoor oil recovery during all cooling operation and mainly cooling, partly heating operation 2) Detects overheat of cycle.

TE

(Connector CN505: Green) 1) Controls defrost during all heating operation and simultaneous operation. 2) Controls outdoor fan during all heating operation and simultaneous operation.

TK1, TK2, TK3, TK4,

  

TK1: Connector CN514: Black, TK3: Connector CN516: Red,

TK2: Connector CN515: Green,  TK4: Connector CN523: Yellow 

1) Judges oil level of compressor. TL

(Connector CN521: White) 1) Detects under-cool during all cooling operation and simultaneous operation.

TO

(Connector CN507: Yellow) 1) Detects external ambient temperature.

49

Functional part name Pressure High pressure sensor sensor

Low pressure sensor

Heater

Functional outline (Connector CN501: Red) 1) Detects high pressure and uses it to control the capacity of the compressor. 2) Detects high pressure during all cooling operation and uses it to control the fan when cooling with low outside air. 3) Detects under-cool of the indoor unit of which heating thermo.-ON during all heating operation and simultaneous operation. 4) Controls outdoor fan rpm during mainly cooling, part heating operation. (Connector CN500: White) 1) Detects low pressure and uses it to control capacity of the compressor during all cooling operation and simultaneous operation 2) Detects low pressure and uses it to controls super heat during all heating operation and simultaneous operation

Compressor case heater (Compressor 1 Connector CN316: White, Compressor 2 Connector CN315: Blue) 1) Prevents liquid accumulation in the compressor Accumulator case heater (Connector CN321: Red) 1) Prevents liquid accumulation to accumulator

Balance pipe

1) Oil balancing pipe between outdoor unit (This unit does not use this Balance pipe.)

Operation mode Operation mode

Outline

1. All Indoor Unit(s) Operating for Cooling

Only cooling operation without heating operation Outdoor heat exchanger (Main heat exchanger) is used as a condenser.

2. All Indoor Unit(s) Operating for Heating

Only heating operation without cooling operation Outdoor heat exchanger (Main heat exchanger) is used as an evaporator.

3. Simultaneous operation

MIU for simultaneous operation

3-1. Mainly cooling, partly heating operation

Cooling/heating simultaneous operation with subjective cooling operation Outdoor heat exchanger (Sub heat exchanger) is used as a condenser.

3-2. Mainly heating, partly cooling operation

Cooling/heating simultaneous operation with subjective heating operation Outdoor heat exchanger (Main heat exchanger) is used as an evaporator.

4. Defrost

Using the reversing operation of the 4-way valve, ice on the outdoor heat exchanger is dissolved within a single cooling cycle.

For details of operation mode, refer to page 53 to 59.

50

Configuration of outdoor unit heat exchanger

Flow Selector Unit (FS Unit) RBM-Y1122FE Discharge gas pipe

Liquid pipe

Propeller fan

Strainer

Strainer Capillary tube

Capillary tube

Fan motor

Check valve

Suction gas pipe

SVS

Capillary tube

SVD SVDD

SVSS Strainer

To indoor liquid side

Main heat exchanger

To indoor gas side

RBM-Y1802FE Wind

Wind

* RBM-Y1801FE has two “SVS” valves. Discharge gas pipe

Liquid pipe

Strainer

Sub heat exchanger

Sub heat exchanger


Capillary tube Check valve

Suction gas pipe

Capillary tube

SVD

SVS SVS SVDD

SVSS Strainer

Front side (Right)

Rear side (Left)


To indoor gas side

RBM-Y2802FE * RBM-Y2802FE has three “SVS” valves and two “SVD”. Discharge gas pipe

Liquid pipe

Strainer



Suction gas pipe

Capillary tube SVD

SVS SVS SVS SVDD

SVSS Strainer


Functional part name Solenoid valve

To indoor gas side

Functional outline

SVD

(Discharge gas block valve) 1) High pressure gas circuit during heating operation

SVS

(Suction gas block valve) 1) Low pressure gas circuit during cooling operation

SVDD

(Pressure valve) 1) For pressurizing when No. of heating indoor units increases.

SVSS

(Reducing valve) 1) For recovery of refrigerant of the stopped indoor unit of which cooling thermo-OFF 2) For reducing pressure when a No. of heating indoor units decreases.

51

4-3. Indoor Unit

Liquid side Gas side

Strainer

Capillary tube

Air heat exchanger at indoor side

Pulse Motor Valve (PMV) Distributor Sensor (TC2)

Sensor (TCJ)

Fan Sensor (TC1) Sensor (TA)

M

Fan motor

(NOTE) MMU-AP0071YH to AP0121YH type air conditioners have no TC2 sensor.

Functional outline

Functional part name Pulse Motor Valve PMV

(Connector CN082 (6P): Blue) 1) Controls super heat in cooling operation 2) Controls under cool in heating operation 3) Recovers refrigerant oil in cooling operation 4) Recovers refrigerant oil in heating operation

Temp. sensor

1. TA

(Connector CN104 (2P): Yellow) 1) Detects indoor suction temperature

2. TC1

(Connector CN100 (3P): Brown) 1) Controls PMV super heat in cooling operation

3. TC2

(Connector CN101 (2P): Black) 1) Controls PMV under cool in heating operation

4. TCJ

(Connector CN102 (2P): Red) 1) Controls PMV super heat in cooling operation 2) [MMU-AP0071 to AP0121YH only] Controls PMV under cool in heating operation

52

5. SYSTEM REFRIGERANT CYCLE DRAWING 5-1. Refrigerant Piping Systematic Diagram in System Selection of operation mode For the selection of each operation mode, refer to the below table: “Stop Once” this means the system does not operate for 3 minutes after operation before update has stopped. After update All cooling operation (OFF)

All cooling operation (OFF)

Before update

Mainly cooling, partly Mainly heating, partly All heating operation heating cooperation cooling operation (ON) (ON) (ON) Operation continues (OFF à ON)

Mainly cooling, partly heating cooperation (ON)

Operation continues (ON à OFF)

Mainly heating, partly cooling operation (ON)

Stop Once (ON à OFF)

Operation continues (As ON)

All heating operation (ON)

Stop Once (ON à OFF)


Operation continues (OFF à ON)

Stop Once (OFF à ON)





Note) Phrases in the parentheses of the table indicate the status of the 4-way valve.

ON-OFF list of Flow Selector Unit (FS Unit) valve Outline of control valve output of FS unit (Basic operation) Indoor operation mode

SVD (High pressure circuit valve)

SVDD (Pressure valve )

SVS (Low pressure circuit valve)

SVSS (Reducing valve )

1. Stop (Remote controller OFF)

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

2. Cooling thermo-OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

3. Cooling thermo-ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

4. Heating thermo-OFF 5. Heating thermo-ON 6. “E04” error is being detected

53

5-2. All cooling operation (Operation of cooling only) In high outside temperature (10°C or more: Criterion) Header unit

Follower unit

FM

FM

TE1

*

Main heat exchanger

*

Sensor TO

SV12

PMV2

PMV1

PMV3

4-Way valve

*

Main heat exchanger

*

PMV3

OFF

4-Way valve

OFF

SV11 TS1

SV5

Pd sensor

TS2

Pd sensor SV6

TS1

SV2

SV6

TL

Pd sensor

TS2

Pd sensor SV2

OS

OS

SV3D

SV3D

SV41

Liquid tank

SV42

HP

HP SV3C TK3

TK1

SV42

HP

Accumulator

HP SV3C

TD1

TD2



TD1

SV41


Liquid tank

Sensor TO

PMV2

SV11 SV5

TL

Main heat exchanger

TK2

TK3

TK1

Oil tank SV3E

Accumulator

TD2


SV12 PMV1

Main heat exchanger

TE1

TK2 Oil tank

TK4

SV3E

SV3A

TK4

SV3A SV3B

SV3B

Suction gas pipe Discharge gas pipe Liquid pipe

SVS

FS unit

SVS

SVD SVDD SVSS

Indoor unit

SVS

SVD

ST

SVDD SVSS

ST

ST

PMV

TC1

SVD SVDD SVSS

ST

ST

PMV

TC2 TCJ

SVS

SVD

SVDD SVSS

ST

ST

PMV

TC1

TC2 TCJ

ST

PMV

TC2 TCJ

TC1

TC2 TCJ

TC1

Cooling Cooling High pressure gas or condensed liquid refrigerant

Cooling Stop Low pressure gas refrigerant (Refrigerant recovery line)

Low pressure gas refrigerant

High pressure refrigerant (Push-in circuit)

4-way valve SV4 (n) SV5 SV6 SV11 SV12

Outdoor unit OFF SV3A (Note 1) SV3B OFF SV3C Control SV3D ON SV3E OFF PMV1, 2

Outdoor fan

Control

PMV3

Flow selector/Indoor unit Cooling thermo.-ON Stop SVD OFF SVD SVS ON SVS SVDD OFF SVDD SVSS ON SVSS PMV Control PMV

OFF OFF OFF Control ON Control Close

(Note 1) SV4 on the stopped compressor is ON.

54

OFF OFF OFF ON Close

In low outside temperature (15°C or less: Criterion) Header unit

Follower unit

FM

FM TE1

*

Main heat exchanger

*

SV12

PMV2

PMV1

PMV3

4-Way valve

*

Main heat exchanger

*

PMV3

OFF

4-Way valve

OFF

SV11 TS1

SV5

Pd sensor

TS1

TS2

Pd sensor SV6

SV2

SV6

TL

Pd sensor

TS2

Pd sensor SV2 OS

OS SV3D

SV3D

SV41

Liquid tank

SV42

HP

HP SV3C TK3

TK1

SV42

HP

Accumulator

HP SV3C

TD1

TD2



TD1

SV41


Liquid tank

Sensor TO

PMV2

SV11 SV5

TL

Main heat exchanger

TK3

TK1

TK2

TK2

Oil tank

Oil tank

TK4

SV3E

Accumulator

TD2


SV12 PMV1

Main heat exchanger

TE1 Sensor TO

TK4

SV3E

SV3A

SV3A SV3B

SV3B


SVS

SVS

SVD

FS unit

SVDD SVSS

Indoor unit

SVS

SVD

ST

SVDD SVSS

ST

ST

PMV

TC1

SVD SVDD SVSS

ST

ST

PMV

TC2 TCJ

SVS

SVD

SVDD SVSS

ST

ST

PMV

TC1

TC2 TCJ

Cooling

Cooling

ST

PMV

TC2 TCJ

TC1

Cooling

TC1

TC2 TCJ

Stop

High pressure gas or condensed liquid refrigerant

Low pressure gas refrigerant (Refrigerant recovery line)




Outdoor unit OFF SV3A (Note 1) SV3B ON SV3C Control SV3D OFF SV3E OFF PMV1, 2

Outdoor fan

Control

PMV3

Flow selector/Indoor unit Cooling thermo.-ON Stop SVD OFF SVD SVS ON SVS SVDD OFF SVDD SVSS ON SVSS PMV Control PMV

OFF OFF OFF Control ON Control Close


55


5-3. All heating operation (Operation of heating only) Header unit

Follower unit

FM

FM

TE1

*

Main heat exchanger

*

Sensor TO

SV12

PMV2

PMV1

PMV3

4-Way valve

SV11

*

Main heat exchanger

*

PMV3

TS1

4-Way valve

SV11

Pd sensor

TS1

Pd sensor

TS2

Pd sensor

SV2

SV6

TL

SV2

OS

OS

SV3D

SV3D

SV41

Liquid tank

SV42

HP

HP SV3C TK3

TK1

SV42

HP

Accumulator

HP SV3C

TD1

TD2



TD1

SV41


Liquid tank

OFF

SV5

TS2

Pd sensor SV6

Sensor TO

PMV2

OFF

SV5

TL

Main heat exchanger

TK2

TK3

TK1

TK2

Oil tank

Oil tank

TK4

SV3E

Accumulator

TD2


SV12 PMV1

Main heat exchanger

TE1

TK4

SV3E

SV3A

SV3A SV3B

SV3B


SVS

SVS

SVD

FS unit

SVDD SVSS

Indoor unit

SVS

SVD

ST

SVDD SVSS

ST

ST

PMV

TC1

ST

ST

SVDD SVSS

ST

ST

PMV

TC1

TC2 TCJ

Heating

SVD SVDD SVSS

PMV

TC2 TCJ

SVS

SVD

ST

PMV

TC2 TCJ

Heating

TC1

TC1

TC2 TCJ

Heating

Stop






Outdoor unit OFF SV3A (Note 1) SV3B OFF SV3C Control SV3D ON SV3E OFF PMV1, 2

Outdoor fan

Control

PMV3

OFF ON OFF Control ON Control

Heating thermo.-ON SVD ON SVS OFF SVDD OFF SVSS OFF PMV Control

Close


56

Flow selector/Indoor unit Heating thermo.-OFF SVD ON SVS OFF SVDD OFF SVSS OFF PMV Close

Stop SVD SVS SVDD SVSS PMV


5-4. Mainly Cooling, Partly Heating Operation (Cooling/heating simultaneous operation with subjective cooling operation) Header unit

Follower unit

FM

FM

TE1

TE1 Sensor TO

Main heat exchanger

Main heat exchanger

Main heat exchanger

SV12

PMV2

PMV1

PMV2

Operating for condenser

Operating for condenser

PMV3

4-Way valve

SV11

PMV3

ON

TS1

SV5

Pd sensor

TS1

Pd sensor

SV5 TS2

Pd sensor

SV2

SV6

TL

SV2

OS

OS

SV3D

SV3D

SV41

Liquid tank

SV42

HP

HP SV3C TK3

TK1

SV42

HP

Accumulator

HP SV3C

TD1

TD2



TD1

SV41


Liquid tank

ON

SV11

Pd sensor

TS2

SV6

TL

4-Way valve

TK2

TK3

TK1

TK2

Oil tank SV3E

Accumulator

TD2


SV12 PMV1

Sensor TO

Main heat exchanger

Oil tank

TK4

TK4

SV3E

SV3A

SV3A SV3B

SV3B


SVS

SVS

SVD

FS unit

SVDD SVSS

Indoor unit

SVS

SVD

ST

SVDD SVSS

ST

ST

PMV

TC1

ST

ST

SVDD SVSS

ST

ST

PMV

TC1

TC2 TCJ

Cooling

SVD SVDD SVSS

PMV

TC2 TCJ

SVS

SVD

TC1

TC2 TCJ

Cooling

ST

PMV

TC1

TC2 TCJ

Stop

Heating






Outdoor unit ON SV3A (Note 1) SV3B OFF SV3C Control SV3D ON SV3E Control PMV1, 2

Outdoor fan

Control

PMV3

OFF OFF OFF Control ON Close (Note 2)

Cooling thermo.-ON SVD OFF SVS ON SVDD OFF SVSS ON PMV Control

Flow selector/Indoor unit Heating thermo.-ON SVD ON SVS OFF SVDD OFF SVSS OFF PMV Control

Control


(Note 2) May be controlled.

57



5-5. Mainly Heating, Partly Cooling Operation (Cooling/heating simultaneous operation with subjective heating operation) Header unit

Follower unit

FM

FM

TE1

*

Main heat exchanger

*

Sensor TO

SV12

PMV2

PMV1

PMV3

4-Way valve

SV11

*

Main heat exchanger

*

PMV3

TS1

4-Way valve

SV11

Pd sensor

TS1

Pd sensor

TS2

Pd sensor

SV2

SV6

TL

SV2

OS

OS

SV3D

SV3D

SV41

Liquid tank

SV42

HP

HP SV3C TK3

TK1

SV42

HP

Accumulator

HP SV3C

TD1

TD2



TD1

SV41


Liquid tank

ON

SV5

TS2

Pd sensor SV6

Sensor TO

PMV2

ON

SV5

TL

Main heat exchanger

TK2

TK3

TK1

TK2

Oil tank SV3E

Accumulator

TD2


SV12 PMV1

Main heat exchanger

TE1

Oil tank

TK4

TK4

SV3E

SV3A

SV3A SV3B

SV3B


SVS SVD SVDD SVSS

Indoor unit

ST

ST

ST

PMV

ST

SVDD SVSS

ST

ST

ST

PMV

TC1

TC2 TCJ

Heating

SVD SVDD SVSS

PMV

TC1

SVS

SVD SVDD SVSS

TC2 TCJ

ST

PMV

TC1

TC2 TCJ

Heating

TC1

TC2 TCJ

Stop

Cooling





Outdoor unit 4-way valve ON SV3A SV4 (n) (Note 1) SV3B SV5 OFF SV3C SV6 Control SV3D SV11 ON SV3E SV12 Close (Note 2) PMV1, 2 Outdoor fan

SVS

SVS

SVD

FS unit

Control

PMV3

OFF OFF OFF Control ON Control

Cooling thermo.-ON SVD OFF SVS ON SVDD OFF SVSS ON PMV Control

Flow selector/Indoor unit Heating thermo.-ON SVD ON SVS OFF SVDD OFF SVSS OFF PMV Control

Close (Note 2)



58



5-6. Defrost Header unit

Follower unit

FM

FM

TE1

TE1 Sensor TO

Main heat exchanger

Main heat exchanger PMV1

PMV3

4-Way valve

PMV2

PMV3

OFF

SV11 SV5

TS1

4-Way valve

Pd sensor

SV5

SV6

TL

Pd sensor

TS1 TS2

Pd sensor

SV2

SV2

OS

OS

SV3D

SV3D

SV41

Liquid tank

SV42

HP

HP SV3C TK3

TK1

SV42

HP

Accumulator

HP SV3C

TD1

TD2



TD1

SV41


Liquid tank

OFF

SV11

Pd sensor

TS2

SV6

TL

Main heat exchanger

SV12

PMV2

TK2

TK3

TK1

TK2

Oil tank SV3E

Accumulator

TD2


SV12 PMV1

Sensor TO

Main heat exchanger

Oil tank

TK4

TK4

SV3E

SV3A

SV3A SV3B

SV3B


SVS

SVS

SVD

FS unit

SVDD SVSS

Indoor unit

ST

ST

ST

SVD SVDD SVSS

ST

ST

PMV

TC1

SVS

SVD SVDD SVSS

PMV

TC2 TCJ

SVS

SVD

SVDD SVSS

ST

ST

PMV

TC1

TC2 TCJ

Cooling

Heating

ST

PMV

TC1

TC2 TCJ

TC2 TCJ

Heating

TC1

Stop





Defrost operation is carried out during all heating operation or Mainly heating, part cooling operation.

4-way valve SV4 (n) SV5 SV6 SV11 SV12 Outdoor fan

Outdoor unit OFF SV3A (Note 1) SV3B ON SV3C Control SV3D OFF SV3E Close PMV1, 2 Stop (Note 2) PMV3

Flow selector/Indoor unit Cooling thermo.-ON Others SVD OFF SVD SVS ON SVS SVDD OFF SVDD SVSS ON SVSS PMV Control PMV Fan Control Fan

OFF OFF OFF Control ON Control Control



59

OFF ON OFF ON Control Stop

6. CONTROL OUTLINE 6-1. Indoor Unit 6-1-1. Control Specifications No.

Item

Outline of specifications

1

Power supply is reset.

(1) Identification of outdoor unit When the power supply is reset, the outdoor units are individually identified and communication is established. (2) Check code clear When the power supply is reset, the check code is also reset. If an abnormal status is still present upon restart the check code will be displayed again on the remote controller.

2

Operation select

(1) Based upon the operation command received from the remote controller or central controller, the operation mode is selected.

Remarks

Remote controller command

Control outline

STOP

Stops air conditioner.

FAN

Fan only operation

COOL

Cooling operation

DRY

Dry operation ∗

HEAT

Heating operation

COOL/HEAT AUTO

COOL/HEAT AUTO operation

∗ Concealed Duct High Static Pressure type air conditioner cannot operate in drying mode.

Heating operation is automatically selected with difference between the set point temperature and room temperature. 3

Room temp. control

(1) Set point temperature adjustment range on remote controller (°C) Allcooling

All heating

Wired type

18 to 29°C

18 to 29°C

Wireless type

18 to 30°C

16 to 30°C

(2) The set point temperature in heating operation can be offset using item code (DN) 06. Setup data Setup temp. correction

0

2

4

6

+0°C

+2°C

+4°C

+6°C

Heating suction temperature shift

Setup at shipment Setup data

2

4

Automatic capacity control

(1) The difference between the temperature reading taken from the Ta (room) sensor and the Ts (set point) selected on the remote controller is used to determine the demand frequency to the outdoor unit.

5

Air volume control

(1) The remote controller is used to select the modes “HIGH (HH)”, “MED (M)”, “LOW (L)” or “AUTO”. (2) The difference between the temperature reading taken from the Ta (room) sensor and the Ts (set point) selected is used to control the air volume setting when in “AUTO” mode.

60

HH > H+ > H > L+ > L > LL

No. 6


Item Prevention of cold air discharge

(1) In all heating operation, the upper limit of the fan tap is set by one with higher temperature of TC2 sensor and TCJ sensor. • When B zone has continued for 6 minutes, the operation shifts to C zone. • In defrost time, the control point is set to +6°C. (˚C) 32

A zone: OFF B zone: Over 26˚C, below 28˚C, LOW C zone: Over 28˚C, below 30˚C, MED D zone: Over 30˚C, below 32˚C, HIGH E zone: Ultra HIGH

D

30

E

C

28 26 20

Freeze prevention control (Low temp. release)

• In D and E zones, priority is given to remote controller air speed setup. • In A and B zones, “ ” is displayed.

B

16

7

Remarks

A

(1) In all cooling operation, the air conditioner operates as described below based upon temp. detected by TC1, TC2 and TCJ sensors. To prevent the heat exchanger from freezing, the operation stops. • When “J” zone is detected for 5 minutes, the command frequency becomes “S0” to the outdoor unit. • In “K” zone, the timer count is interrupted, and held. • When “1 ” zone is detected, the timer is cleared and the operation returns to the normal operation. • When the command frequency became S0 with continuation of “J” zone, operation of the the indoor fan in LOW mode until it reaches the “1 ” zone. It is reset when the following conditions are satisfied. Reset conditions 1) TC1 > 12°C and TC2 > 12°C and TCJ > 12°C 2) 30 minutes passed after stop. TC1 (˚C)

a

P1

K

Q1 J

P1

10°C (5°C)

Q1

0°C

(2) In all cooling operation, the air conditioner operates as described below based upon temp. detected by TC2 and TCJ sensors. • When “M” zone is detected for 45 minutes, the command frequency becomes “S0” to the outdoor unit. • In “N” zone, the timer count is interrupted and held. • When shifting to “M” zone again, the timer count restarts and continues. • If “L” zone is detected, the timer is cleared and the operation returns to normal operation. Reset conditions 1) TC1 > 12°C and TC2 > 12°C and TCJ > 12°C 2) 30 minutes passed after stop. (˚C)

L

TC2, TCJ

P2 N Q2 M

61

P2

5°C

Q2

–2.0°C

∗ In a Model without TC2, TC2 is not judged.

No.

Item


Remarks

8

Recovery control for cooling refrigerant and oil

(1) The indoor unit which stops operation, thermostat is OFF, or operates in FAN mode opens PMV of the indoor unit by the specified opening degree when cooling refrigerant or oil recovery signal is received from the outdoor unit. (2) Drain pump of 4-way air discharge cassette type and concealed duct type operate during recovery control mode.

• Recovery operation is usually executed every 2 hours.

9

Recovery control for heating refrigerant and oil

The indoor unit which stops operation, thermostat is OFF, or operates in FAN mode performs the following controls when the heating refrigerant/Oil recovery signal is received from the outdoor unit. 1) Opens PMV of the indoor unit by the specified opening degree. 2) Stops the fan. 3) Only 4-way Air Discharge Cassette type air conditioner rotates the indoor fan with intermittent operation for approximately 1 minute after recovery control. 4) Only 4-way Air Discharge Cassette type air conditioner rotates the indoor fan with intermittent operation for approximately 1 minute after recovery control as the outdoor unit. 5) After recovery control, drain pump of 4-way air discharge cassette type and concealed duct type will operate.

• In the indoor unit which thermostat is OFF, or operates in FAN mode, “ ” lamp goes on. • Recovery operation is usually executed every 1 hour.

10

Short intermittent operation compensation control

(1) For 5 minutes after the operation has started, the operation is continued even if entering thermostat-OFF condition. (2) However, if the thermostat has been turned off by changing the set up temp., the thermostat is OFF with even the above condition. The protective control has priority.

11

Drain pump control

(1) During “COOL” operation (including DRY operation), the drain pump operates. (2) While the drain pump operates, if the float switch works, the drain pump continues operation and a check code is displayed. (3) While the drain pump stops, if the float switch works, turn off the capacity demand command, stop the operation, and operate the drain pump. If the float switch continues operating for approx. 5 minutes, the operation stops and the check code is displayed. (4) In heating operation, if humidifier “provided” is judged, compressor “ON”, compressor “ON”, fan “ON”, and MAX (TC2, TCJ) > 33°C, the drain pump operates.

12

Elimination of remaining heat

(1) When the air conditioner stops in the “HEAT” mode, drive the indoor fan with “LOW” mode for approx. 30 seconds.

13

Auto louver control

(1) When the louver signal has been received from the remote controller, the louver operates if the indoor fan is operating. (2) In 4-way Air Discharge Cassette type, the discharge louver automatically directs downward if the operation stops. (3) In 4-way Air Discharge Cassette type, the discharge louver directs upward if the heating operation is being prepared.

14

Filter sign display (None in wireless type) ∗ Provided in the separately laid type TCB-AX21E.

(1) The operation time of the indoor fan is integrated and stored in memory, and the filter exchange signal is sent to the remote controller to display on the remote controller LCD after the specified time. (2) When the filter reset signal is received form the remote controller, time of the integrated timer is cleared. In this time, if the specified time has passed, the measured time is reset and LCD display disappears.

62

Check code [P10]

No.

Item

15

“ ” and “ ” display (Operation and heating stand-by)

Outline of specifications .......... Display on remote controller (1) • “P05” is one of displays of power wire missing. • “P05” of power cable is detected. • “COOL/DRY” operation cannot be performed because the other indoor unit is under “HEAT” operation. • “HEAT” operation cannot be performed because COOL priority is set (Outdoor I/F P.C. board SW11 1-bit is ON) and the other indoor unit is under “COOL/DRY” operation. • “FAN” operation cannot be performed because the system performs “Heat oil/Refrigerant recovery” operation. • There is a unit in which indoor overflow “P10” is detected. • There is a unit in which interlock alarm “P23” is detected. (2) The above indoor units unavailable to operate waits under condition of thermostat OFF.

Remarks • “

” goes on.

• “

” goes on.

.................. Display on remote controller (1) • HEAT thermostat is OFF. • During HEAT operation, the fan rotates with lower air speed than one specified in order to prevent discharge of cold draft or stops. (including case that defrost operation is being performed) • “HEAT” operation cannot be performed because COOL priority is set (Outdoor I/F P.C. board SW11 bit 1 is ON) and the other indoor unit is under “COOL/DRY” operation. (2) “HEAT standby” is displayed until the above conditions are released.

16

Selection of central control mode

(1) The contents which can be changed on the remote controller at indoor unit side can be selected by setup at the central controller side. (2) In case of operation from TCC-LINK central controller (TCB-SC642TLE, etc.) [Central control mode 1] : Cannot operate [Central control mode 2] : Cannot operate, stop, select mode, set up temp. [Central control mode 3] : Cannot select mode, set up temp. [Central control mode 4] : Cannot select mode (3) RBC-AMT21E (Wired remote controller) CENTRAL” While mode is the central control mode, “ lights on the display part of the remote controller.

63

If operation is performed from the remote controller “CENTRAL CONTROL” mode, the status is notified with receiving sound.

6-2. Outdoor Unit 6-2-1. Operation Start/Operation End The compressor, solenoid valve, pulse motor valve (PMV), outdoor fan, etc. are controlled by a command from the indoor controller. The follower outdoor unit starts/stops by a command from the header outdoor unit. No. 1

Item Pulse Motor Valve (PMV) control

Operation explanation and applied data, etc. (1) PMV control (using two PMV, 1 and 2) • Each PMV is controlled between 90 to 1000 pulses during operation. • In cooling operation, PMV opening is dependent upon detected readings from the TL sensor and Pd pressure sensor (sub-cool control). • In heating operation, PMV opening is dependent upon detected readings from the TS and TD sensors and the Ps pressure sensor (super-heat control). • Each PMV will be fully closed when the system is in ‘Standby’ or ‘No demand’ modes and when a malfunction in the system has occurred.

Remarks • During heating operation, PMV2 is 0 pulses and PMV may be controlled with only PMV 1, with a minimum of 45 pulses.

PMV opening

1000 PMV 2 550 500 90 45

PMV 1 Min.

Med.

Max.

(2) PMV3 control 1) PMV3 (Pulse Motor Valve 3) is controlled between 0 to 500 pulses during mainly cooling, part heating or mainly heating, part cooling operation. 2) PMV3 opening is controlled according to the demand capacity difference (HP) between the cooling capacity and the total heating capacity. 3) The PMV will be fully closed when the system is in ‘Standby’ or ‘No demand’ modes and when a malfunction in the system has occurred.

2

Outdoor fan control

(1) Fan control in all cooling operation 1) The outdoor fan speed/mode is determined by the detected Pd pressure value. 2) When cooling operation has started, the outdoor fan speed of the master unit is controlled using the detected Pd pressure value. (2) Fan control in all heating operation 1) The outdoor fan speed/mode is determined by the detected TE sensor value. 2) If a TE value > 25°C has been continuously detected for 5 minutes, the operation may stop. 3) After start up, this control is not available during the specified time after a defrost operation. 4) This operation may start and stop repeatedly when the system is undercharged. (3) Fan control for mainly cooling, part heating operation The outdoor fan speed (mode) is controlled according to the target of the Pd (Discharge pressure).

64

When TE temp. (ambient temperature) exceeds 25°C, Heating operation stops.

• The maximum fan speed differs depending on the outdoor HP.

No.

Item

Operation explanation and applied data, etc.

Remarks

3

Capacity control

1) The capacity request command received from the indoor controller determines the inverter frequency control of the outdoor unit. 2) The two compressors in each outdoor unit swap starting order on successive operation.

• Min. frequency: 26Hz

4

Oil level detection control

1) Measurement of sensors TK1 to TK4 is used to determine whether the correct amount of oil is present in the compressor case. 2) A comparison of measurements taken from TK1/TK2 with that of TK3/TK4 is used to judge whether there is sufficient oil in the compressor case. If there is insufficient oil in the compressor case, the system switches to the oil equalizing control method. 3) This control is performed during compressor operation.

• The detection is performed when one or both compressors are operated. • Adequate oil level (Standard) 1) The oil level of compressor 1 is adequate when TK1 - TK3 > 15°C 2) The oil level of compressor 2 is adequate when TK2 - TK3 > 15°C

(SV2)

Oil separator

(SV3D) OFF

(SV42)

(SV41)

(SV3C) (TD2)

OFF

Compressor 2

Compressor 1

(TD1) (TK3)

(TK1)

(TK2) Oil tank

ON (SV3E)

(TK4)

(SV3A) OFF

Balance pipe Packed valve

(SV3B)

65

No. 5

6

7

Item Oil short protective control

Refrigerant/Oil recovery control

Defrost control (Reverse cycle defrost method)

Operation explanation and applied data, etc. This control is provided to prevent oil shortage occurring in the compressors of each outdoor unit. The control is achieved by ON/OFF operation of the solenoid valves SV3A, SV3B, SV3C and SV3D. (1) Oil-short protective control The oil shortage protection control function stops the outdoor unit, if an oil shortage continues for 30 minutes, after 2 minutes, 30 seconds the outdoor unit restarts. If this function is activated on 3 successive occasions, an error check code (H07) is generated and the outdoor unit is stopped. (1) During cooling operation, this function is executed to regularly to recover the refrigerant/oil from the indoor units and connecting pipe-work back to the outdoor unit. This function is also performed to prevent stagnated refrigerant accumulating in the outdoor heat exchanger during low ambient cooling. The control is managed by the header outdoor unit. 1) Control conditions • Cooling oil recovery operation is executed approximately every 2 hours. 2) Contents of control • The recovery period lasts for approximately 2 or 3 minutes though this is dependant on the system capacity. (2) Refrigerant recovery control in heating room This function is executed regularly to recover the liquid refrigerant from the indoor unit. It is also used to recover oil present in the outdoor heat exchanger during the heating overload operation (except during defrost operation). The control is managed by the header outdoor unit. 1) Heating operation oil, recovery control is executed approximately every hour. 2) The period of recovery lasts for approximately 2 to 10 minutes though this is dependent upon the load condition. (3) Control for refrigerating / whilst oil recovery in simultaneous operation. This function is executed to recover the refrigerating oil accumulated in the low-pressure gas inter-unit piping. (regardless of all cooling operation/all heating operation). 1) Control condition • When the combined time of the compressor-ON has reached 95 minutes in simultaneous operation. 2) Control contents When the conditions have been satisfied, upon changing the indoor unit mode from heating to cooling, (stop the indoor fan) the oil is recovered for a period between 2 minutes 30 seconds to 10 minutes. The indoor unit in cooling operation continues operation. (1) Defrost start condition The defrost function is initiated when the measurement temperature taken from the TE sensor is lower than -2°C for a period of 25 minutes after compressor initial start up and 55 minutes after subsequent start ups. (2) Contents of control • If the outdoor units are combined, the minimum duration for the defrost operation is 2 minutes. (3) Defrost stop condition • The outdoor fan speed and compressor inverter frequency are determined by the measurement of Pd pressure during defrost operation.

66

Remarks

• Oil accumulated in the oil separator is returned to the compressor.

• Control for refrigerant/ oil recovery is performed approximately every 2 hours. • Recovery lasts for approximately 2 or 3 minutes though this is dependent upon the system capacity.

• Heating operation, oil recovery is executed approximately every hour. • Recovery lasts for approximately 2 to 10 minutes though this is dependent upon the load condition.

• During the defrost operation, all solenoid 4-way valves are OFF and all compressors are operating.

No.

Item


8

Release valve control

(1) SV2 gas balance control In order to decrease the starting load on the compressor, SV2 valve is opened during the time the compressor is ‘OFF’, and the gas is balanced. (2) SV2 high pressure release control This function limits the pressure level during the low frequency operation of the inverter. (3) SV2 low pressure release control This function is used to prevent rapid pressure drop during transient operation of the unit. This is performed by the header unit only. The function is performed when required, except during ‘No demand’ status or when the system is in ‘Standby’. (4) SV41, SV42 valves 1) SV41, 42 low-pressure release control This function is used to prevent pressure dropping to low. The function is performed during defrost operation, heat start up, all cooling operation, or mainly cooling or part heating operation. • Control contents (Defrost/heating start pattern) Turn on SV41 and SV42 when PS pressure ≤ 0.1MPa, and turn off SV41 and SV42 when PS pressure ≥ 0.15MPa. • Control contents (All cooling operation, Mainly cooling, part heating operation) Turn on SV41 and SV42 when PS pressure ≤ 0.14MPa and Pd pressure ≤ 1.8MPa, and turn off SV41 and SV42 when PS pressure ≥ 0.24MPa and Pd pressure ≥ 2.2MPa 2) High pressure release control This function is for gas bypass control which emergently prevents the high pressure cut. Turn on SV41 and SV42 when Pd pressure ≥ 3.5MPa, and turn off SV41 and SV42 when Pd pressure ≤ 3.45MPa. (5) SV6 valve 1) Cooling bypass control This function is a liquid refrigerant bypass control to suppress the rise of the discharge temperature or the inside temperature of the compressor. Turn on SV6 valve when the discharge temperature (TD1 or TD2) becomes 96°C or higher and turns off when it drops below 84°C by bypassing liquid refrigerant. (6) PMV3 1) High pressure release control (All heating operation) This function suppresses the rise of high pressure during the inverter low frequency operation when in all heating operation mode. Set up PMV3 opening to 45 pulses when Pd pressure = 3.45MPa. 2) High pressure release control (All cooling operation) Set up PMV3 opening to 60 pulses when Pd pressure = 3.5MPa.

9

Frequency release control

(1) High pressure release control This function is to correct the operation command of the compressor and suppress the rise of high pressure. 1) Control contents The operation frequency is decreased by 1 step when Pd pressure ≥ 3.4MPa. It is decreased by 1 step every 10 seconds until Pd pressure drops below 3.4MPa. 2) Release condition • When Pd pressure ≤ 3.2MPa • When refrigerant recovery control starts in all heating mode • During defrost operation, stop, thermo OFF

67

Remarks

No.

Item


10

Compressor stop due to high pressure release

Each compressor is stopped should the Pd pressure sensor reach a value of 3.5 MPa. This control is performed by the header unit and any follower units.

11

Case heater control

Heating is provided for both the compressor case and accumulator. When the compressor in any outdoor unit is stopped, the heater is switched on to prevent accumulation of refrigerant. After installation of a system, it should be powered for the specified period of time prior to operating a test run to prevent damage to the system. If the system has not been powered for a prolonged period of time, it is important to apply power for the specified period of time before resuming operation. This function is often performed in conjunction with the compressor winding heating control. When this occurs, a noise may be heard which is not an indication of a malfunction. (1) Contents of control • The function is performed during when the compressor is off. • When the TO sensor temp measures 28°C or higher the heater turns off and turns on when it change:measures 25°C or lower • The heater remains ‘ON’ for 10 minutes after the compressor has changed mode from Off to On.

12

IPDU control

The IPDU controls the inverter compressor by communicating a command frequency that controls the compressor speed, depending on any active releases. The main controls of the IPDU P.C. board are: (1) Current release control Feedback from the AC input current sensor (CT) is used to prevent the inverter input current exceeding its specified limit (2) Heat sink temperature detection control • Feedback from the thermistor (TH) on the compressor driving module is used to prevent the IGBT from overheating. The highest value is taken from IPDU 1 and IPDU 2 TH sensors. (3) Over-current protective control • When an over-current condition is detected by the IPDU, the compressor is stopped. (4) Compressor case thermo control • The compressor stops when the compressor case thermostat is activated. • Whenever this condition occurs, a 1 count is added to the system error count. • After a period of 2 minutes and 30 seconds, the compressor is reactivated and the error count cleared if the operation continues without further error for a period of 10 minutes or more. • If the error count reaches 4, the check code [H04] is displayed (for compressor 1) and [H14] (for compressor 2).

13

High pressure prevention control

(1) High pressure SW control • The high pressure switch is connected to the IPDU board and is in the normally closed condition. • When the high pressure switch is activated, the compressor is stopped. • Whenever this condition occurs, a 1 count is added to the system error count. • After a period of 2 minutes and 30 seconds, the drive to the compressor is reactivated and the error count is cleared if the operation continues with further error for a period of 10 minutes or more. • If the error count reaches 4, the check code [P04] is displayed.

68

Remarks

• A TH sensor is provided in each two IPDU.

• The case thermostat is normally closed and connected to interface P.C. board.

Other cautions 1. Cooling operation in low ambient temperatures 1) The indoor unit freeze prevention control system (TC sensor) may decrease the command frequency to the outdoor unit when low coil temperatures are detected. 2) The cooling capacity control may decrease the command frequency to the outdoor unit when low ambient temperature is detected. 3) When the discharge temperature sensor value reaches 60°C or below, the frequency may be increased above the required demand from the indoor unit.

2. PMV (Pulse Motor Valve) for outdoor unit 1) When the system power is turned on an audible “clicking” sound is omitted due to the PMV initialising, this is a normal condition. When the outdoor unit is situated near other sources of noise, this sound may not be noticeable. 2) Do not remove the driving part (head) of the PMV during operation as it may cause the PMV to malfunction. 3) When transporting or replacing the outdoor unit, never keep the driving part (head) removed from the PMV body as the valve will be closed and may result in damage or failure due to sealed liquid compression. 4) When refitting the driving part (head) to the body of the PMV, apply pressure until a “click” sound can be heard, complete the process by resetting the power to the system.

Release control list Release item

Operation

High pressure release

SV2 ON, SV41, SV42 ON PMV3=45 pulses (All heating operation), 60 pulses (All cooling operation) Operation frequency limit

Low pressure release

SV2 ON, SV41, SV42 ON, Operation frequency limit

Discharge temp. release

SV6 ON, Operation frequency limit

Current release

Operation frequency limit

Heat sink release

Outdoor fan speed up, Operation frequency limit

69

Oil equation control schematic diagram

Header outdoor unit (MMY-MAP1202FT8)

Follower outdoor unit (MMY-MAP1202FT8)

Unit to send oil

Unit to received oil FM

FM

TE1

*

Main heat exchanger

*

Sensor TO

SV12

PMV2

PMV1

PMV3

4-Way valve

*

Main heat exchanger

*

PMV3

OFF

4-Way valve

OFF

SV11 TS1

SV5

Pd sensor

TS2

Pd sensor SV6

TS1

Pd sensor

SV2

TL

Pd sensor

TS2

SV6

SV2 OS

OS SV3D

SV3D

SV41

Liquid tank

SV42

HP

HP

TK3

TK1

SV42

HP SV3C

TD1

TD2


TD1

SV41

HP

Accumulator


SV3C


Liquid tank

Sensor TO

PMV2

SV11 SV5

TL

Main heat exchanger

TK3

TK1

TK2 Oil tank

SV3E

TD2


SV12 PMV1

Main heat exchanger

TE1

TK2 Oil tank

TK4

SV3E

TK4

SV3A

SV3A SV3B

SV3B

70

Accumulator

7. APPLIED CONTROL 7-1. Indoor Unit 7-1-1. Setup of Selecting Function in Indoor Unit (Be sure to Execute Setup by a Wired Remote Controller) Execute the setup operation while the unit stops.

TEMP.

3 5 6

FILTER RESET TEST

ON / OFF

TIMER SET

FAN

MODE

TIME

SWING/FIX

VENT

SET

CL

4

UNIT

1

1

Push

SET

,

2

CL

, and

TEST

buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds or more.

The firstly displayed unit No. indicates the master indoor unit address in the group control. In this time, the fan of the selected indoor unit is turned on.

2 3 4

Every pushing UNIT button, the indoor unit numbers in the group control are successively displayed. In this time, the fan of the selected indoor unit only is turned on. Specify the item code (DN) using the setup temperature Select the setup data using the timer time

and

and

buttons.

buttons.

(When selecting the DN code to “33”, change the temperature indication of the unit from “°C” to “°F” on the remote controller.)

5

Push SET button. (OK if display goes on.) • To change the selected indoor unit, return to procedure . • To change the item to be set up, return to procedure .

3

6

Pushing

TEST

2

button returns the status to normal stop status.

71

Table: Function selecting item code (DN) (Items necessary to perform the applied control at the local site are described.) DN

Description

Item

0001 : 150H 0003 : 5000H

At shipment

01

Filter display delay timer

0000 : None 0002 : 2500H 0004 : 10000H

02

Dirty state of filter

0000 : Standard 0001 : High degree of dirt (Half of standard time)

0000 : Standard

03

Central control address

0001 : No.1 unit 0099 : Unfixed

0064 : No.64 unit

0099 : Unfixed

04

Specific indoor unit priority

0000 : No priority

0001 : Priority

0000 : No priority

06

Heating temp shift

0000 : No shift 0002 : +2°C

0001 : +1°C 0010 : +10°C (Up to +6 recommended)

0002 : +2°C (Floor type 0000: 0°C)

to

to

According to type

0d

Existence of [AUTO] mode

0000 : Provided 0001 : Not provided (Automatic selection from connected outdoor unit)

0001 : Not provided

0E

Follows operation mode of the header unit

0000 : Does not follow 0001 : Follows

0000 : Not provided

0F

Cooling only

0000 : Heat pump 0001 : Cooling only (No display of [AUTO] [HEAT])

0000 : Heat pump

10

Type

0000 : (1-way air discharge cassette) 0001 : (4-way air discharge cassette) to 0037

According to model type

11

Indoor unit capacity

0000 : Unfixed

0001 to 0034

According to capacity type

12

Line address

0001 : No.1 unit

to

0030 : No.30 unit

0099 : Unfixed

13

Indoor unit address

0001 : No.1 unit

to

0064 : No.64 unit

0099 : Unfixed

14

Group address

0000 : Individual 0002 : Follower unit of group

0001 : Header unit of group

0099 : Unfixed

19

Louver type (Adjustment of air direction)

0000 : Not provided 0001 : Swing only 0004 : [4-way Air Discharge Cassette type] and [Under Ceiling type]

1E

Temp difference of 0000 : 0 deg to 0010 : 10 deg [AUTO] mode (For setup temperature, reversal of COOL/HEAT by ± (Data value)/2) selection COOL → HEAT, HEAT →COOL

0003 : 3 deg (Ts±1.5)

28

Automatic restart of power failure

0000 : None

0000 : None

29

Operation condition of humidifier

0000 : Usual 0001 : Condition ignored (Detection control for heat exchanger temperature)

0000 : Usual

2A

Selection of option/ error input (CN70)

0000 : Filter input 0002 : None

0001 : Alarm input (Air washer, etc.)

0002 : None

2E

HA terminal (CN61) select

0000 : Usual

0001 : Leaving-ON prevention control

0000 : Usual (HA terminal)

30

Automatic elevating grille

0000 : Unavailable

0001 : Available

0000 : Unavailable

31

Ventilating fan control

0000 : Unavailable

0001 : Available

0000 : Unavailable

32

TA sensor selection

0000 : Body TA sensor

0001 : Remote controller sensor

0000 : Body TA sensor

33

Temperature unit select

0000 : °C (at factory shipment) 0001 : °F

40

Drain pump control

0000 : None 0002 : None

5d

High ceiling selection [4-way Air Discharge Cassette type] and [Under Ceiling type] (Air volume selection) 0000 : Standard filter 0001 : Super-long life filter 0003 : High efficiency filter

0001 : Restart

According to type

0000 : °C 0001 : Pump ON 0003 : Pump OFF

0003 : Pump OFF 0000 : Standard

[Concealed Duct Standard type] 0000 : Standard static pressure (40Pa) 0001 : High static pressure 1 (70Pa) 0003 : High static pressure 2 (100Pa) 0005 : Correspond to quiet sound 0006 : Low static pressure (20Pa) 60

Timer set (Wired remote controller)

0000 : Available (Operable) 0001 : Unavailable (Operation prohibited)

0000 : Available

62

Anti-ceiling smudging control

0000 : Clear

4- way Air Discharge Cassette type only

72

TYPE Item code [10] Setup data

Type

Abbreviated Model name

0000

1-way Air Discharge Cassette

MMU-AP XXX SH

0001


MMU-AP XXX H

0002


MMU-AP XXX WH

0003

1-way Air Discharge Cassette (Compact type)

MMU-AP XXX YH

0004

Concealed Duct Standard

MMD-AP XXX BH

0005

Slim Duct

MMD-AP XXX SPH, SH

0006

Concealed Duct High Static Pressure

MMD-AP XXX H

0007

Under Ceiling

MMC-AP XXX H

0008

High Wall

MMK-AP XXX H

0010

Floor Standing Cabinet

MML-AP XXX H

0011

Floor Standing Concealed

MML-AP XXX BH

0013

Floor Standing

MMF-AP XXX H

~

—

Indoor unit capacity Item code [11] Setup data

Model

0001

007

0003

009

0005

012

0007

015

0009

018

0011

024

0012

027

0013

030

0015

036

0017

048

0018

056

0021

072

0023

096

~

—

73

7-1-2. How to Set Up the Cooling Only Indoor Unit When connecting an indoor unit for use in cooling only. A flow selector unit is not connected. It is necessary to setup the unit. Perform setup as per the following procedure. Setup of the indoor unit is performed by use of a wired remote controller. If a wired remote controller is not used, for setup purposes a wired controller must be temporarily connected. When using the air conditioner with a wireless remote controller, select “Cooling Only” on the wireless remote controller after the below setup. Use of the wireless remote controller can be referred to in the manual supplied with the wireless remote controller. Change the setup during off status. CODE No.

UNIT No.

R.C.

No.

TEMP.

4 1 6 Procedure

FILTER RESET TEST

ON / OFF

TIMER SET

FAN

MODE

TIME

SWING/FIX

VENT

SET

CL

3 2 5

UNIT

Description SET

CL

TEST

Push + + buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds or more and display part will flashes as shown in the figure.

CODE No. SETTING

1

UNIT No.

Check that the displayed item code is [10].

R.C.

TEST

No.

• If the item code displayed is not [10], push button to erase the display and restart the operation from the first step. TEST button, the operation of the remote (After pushing the controller will not function for a short period.) (* The display changes according to the indoor unit model.) In group control, the firstly displayed indoor unit No. becomes the header unit.

2

Each pushing of the [UNIT] button, changes the indoor unit number within the group. Select the indoor unit that requires setup. The indoor unit selected can be confirmed at this time as the louver and fan will operate.

3

Use Use

and

buttons of the set temperature to specify the item code [0F].

and

4

buttons on the timer time to select the setup data [0001]. CODE No.

Setup data

0000

0001

Cooling Only setup

Heat pump

Cooling Only

UNIT No.

∗∗ ∗∗ R.C.

Push

SET

No.

button at this time, if the display changes from flashing to lit this confirms setup is complete.

• To change the setup of a different indoor unit other than the selected unit restart operation from Procedure

5

• In a group control, setup change of all the indoor units in the group is necessary. To change the setup of the group other than the selected one, restart operation from Procedure CAUTION • Pushing

Cooling Only and Heat pump cannot be connected in the same group.

CL

button clears the set up contents which has been previously set.

• In this case, restart from Procedure 2 . When the setup has completed, push

6

TEST

button. (The setup is determined.)

TEST

Pushing the button deletes the display and returns to the normal stop TEST button has been pushed, the operation of status. (For some time after the remote controller will not function for a short period.)

74

2.

2.

7-1-3. Setting When Connecting Multiple Indoor Units to a FS unit Cautions to connection of indoor unit • When connecting multiple indoor units to a single FS unit, it is necessary to set up the Item code. This should be done after the addressing of the units. • When connecting multiple indoor units to a single FS unit, only group control is available. Remote controllers cannot be connected to individual units. FS unit Piping

Indoor unit

Control wiring between indoor unit and FS unit

Remote controller Group control

n Usage/Features It is not possible to group control indoor units that are connected to more than one FS unit. Piping

FS unit

Indoor units off of a single FS unit cannot be individually controlled.

FS unit

FS unit

Piping

Indoor unit

Control wiring between indoor unit and FS unit Remote controller

Piping

Indoor unit


NG

Remote controller

Group control

NG

How to set up Item code

1

VENT

TEST

Push + buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds or more. • is displayed in the UNIT No. window. • At this time, the fans of all the indoor units in the group control start the fan operation.

CODE No. SET DATA SETTING UNIT No.

R.C.

2 3 4 5

Using the set temperature buttons , select the Item code “- ”.

/

2

Change SET DATA to “ ” using the timer / . buttons Push

SET

5 4

button.

TEST

Push button. This confirms the setup has finished.

75

No.

TEMP.

FILTER RESET TEST

ON / OFF

TIMER SET

FAN

MODE

TIME

SWING/FIX

VENT

SET

CL

UNIT

1 3

n In case of not setting 01 to Item code “0E” When more than one indoor unit has been set up as a group to one FS unit and you have forgotten to set 01 on Item code “0E” on all the indoor units, the following may occur: 1) When AUTO operation is selected on the remote controller and cooling operation and heating operation are required, hot air may be discharged from the cooling operation unit or cool air may be discharged from the heating operation unit (or fan stops). However in case of 2 , “L18” error code is output and the air conditioner stops.

1 High-pressure gas

FS unit

High-pressure gas

High-pressure gas

Suction gas pipe Highpressure

Discharge gas gas pipe

SVS

Highpressure gas

SVSS SVDD

Liquid

Liquid

Highpressure gas

Highpressure gas Liquid

SVD

Liquid pipe

Liquid Indoor unit SVD SVDD SVS SVSS


ON OFF OFF OFF

Heating operation

Cooling operation

Cooling operation

Hot air

Hot air

Hot air

Low-pressure gas

Low-pressure gas

Low-pressure gas

2 FS unit Suction gas pipe Discharge gas pipe

Lowpressure gas

SVS SVSS SVDD

Liquid

Liquid pipe Liquid SVD SVDD SVS SVSS

Liquid

Liquid

SVD

Indoor unit Control wiring between indoor unit and FS unit

OFF OFF ON ON

Cooling operation

Heating operation

Heating operation

Cool air

Cool air

Cool air

2) When the cooling thermostat of the indoor unit that is connected to the FS unit has been off, the refrigerant will not flow and cooling air may not discharge evenly if the thermostats of the other cooling operation units are on.

3 FS unit Suction gas pipe SVS SVSS

Discharge gas pipe

SVDD

SVD

Liquid pipe

Indoor unit SVD SVDD SVS SVSS

OFF OFF OFF ON


Cooling operation Thermo OFF

76

Cooling operation Thermo ON

Cooling operation Thermo ON

7-1-4. Applied Control in Indoor Unit n Remote location ON/OFF control box (TCB-IFCB-4E) [Wiring and setup] • Use the exclusive connector for connection with the indoor control P.C. board. • In a group control, the system can operate when connecting with any indoor unit (Control P.C. board) in the group. However when taking out the operation/error signal from the other unit, it is necessary to take out from each unit individually.

(1) Control items 1) Start/Stop input signal : Operation start/stop in unit 2) Operation signal : Output during normal operation 3) Error signal : Output during alarm (Serial communication error or indoor/outdoor protective device) operation

(2) Wiring diagram using remote control interface (TCB-IFCB-4E) Input Output

IFCB-4E : No voltage ON/OFF serial signal No voltage contact for operation, error display Contact capacity: Below Max. AC240V 0.5A


Start/Stop input COM (GND) Remote controller prohibition/clear input Operation signal output COM (+12V) Error signal output

Remote location ON/OFF control box (TCB-IFCB-4E)

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4

ON/OFF serial signal input COM

CN06

1 2 3 4 5 6

CN61 T10 (YEL)

Operation signal output

CN13

Error signal output

Power supply 220–240V, ~50Hz

77

n Ventilating fan control from remote controller [Function] • The start/stop operation can be operated from the wired remote controller when air to air heat exchanger or ventilating fan is installed in the system. • The fan can be operated even if the indoor unit is not operating. • Use a fan which can receive the no-voltage A contact as an outside input signal. • In a group control, the units are collectively operated and they can not be individually operated.

(1) Operation Handle a wired remote controller in the following procedure. ∗ Use the wired remote controller during stop of the system. ∗ Be sure to set up the wired remote controller to the header unit. (Same in group control) ∗ In a group control, if the wired remote controller is set up to the header unit, both header and follower units are simultaneously operable.

1 2 3 4

SET

CL

TEST

Push concurrently + + buttons for 4 seconds or more. The unit No. displayed firstly indicates the header indoor unit address in the group control. In this time, the fan of the selected indoor unit turns on. UNIT

Every pushing button, the indoor unit numbers in group control are displayed successively. In this time, the fan of the selected indoor unit only turns on. Using the setup temp

or

Using the timer time or The setup data are as follows: Setup data

button, specify the item code

button, select the setup data. (At shipment: )

Handling of operation of air to air heat exchanger or ventilating fan

5

Unavailable (At shipment) Available

SET

Push button. (OK if display goes on.) • To change the selected indoor unit, go to the procedure ). • To change the item to be set up, go to the procedure ).

3

6

!.

Pushing

TEST

2

returns the status to the usual stop status.

(2) Wiring Relay (DC12V, procured locally) CN32 1 1 FAN DRIVE (2P WHI) 2 2

Outside control input of fan To terminal

Indoor control P.C. board Note) Determine the cable length between the indoor control P.C. board and the relay within 2m.

78

4-way Air Discharge Cassette type 1-way Air Discharge Cassette type (2 series) Concealed Duct Standard type model : Slim Duct type Under Ceiling type High Wall type Corresponds up to a relay in which rated current of the operation coil is approx. 75mA Other type models: Correspond up to a relay in which rated current of the operation coil is approx. 16mA (Does not correspond to a terminal block type relay on the market.)

  

n Leaving-ON prevention control [Function] • This function controls the indoor units individually. It is connected with cable to the control P.C. board of the indoor unit. • In a group control, it is connected with cable to the indoor unit (Control P.C. board), and the item code - is set to the connected indoor unit. • It is used when the start operation from outside if unnecessary but the stop operation is necessary. • Using a card switch box, card lock, etc, the forgotten-OFF of the indoor unit can be protected. • When inserting a card, start/stop operation from the remote controller is allowed. • When taking out a card, the system stops if the indoor unit is operating and start/stop operation from the remote controller is forbidden.

(1) Control items 1) Outside contact ON : The start/stop operation from the remote controller is allowed. (Status that card is inserted in the card switch box) 2) Outside contact OFF : If the indoor unit is operating, it is stopped forcedly. (Start/Stop prohibited to remote controller) (Status that card is taken out from the card switch box) ∗ When the card switch box does not perform the above contact operation, convert it using a relay with b contact.

(2) Operation Handle the wired remote controller switch in the following procedure. ∗ Use the wired remote controller switch during stop of the system.

1 2 3 4 5

Push concurrently

SET

CL

+

Using the setup temp

or

Using the timer time Push Push

SET

TEST

+

or

TEST

buttons for 4 seconds or more. button, specify the item code

-.

button, set to the setup data.

button. button. (The status returns to the usual stop status.)

(3) Wiring

Relay (procured locally) CN61 T10 1 1 (YEL) 2 2 3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

* In the figure, the contact indicates a status that the card is taken out.


Power supply Outside contact (Card switch box, etc: Procured locally)

Note) Determine the cable length between the indoor control P.C. board and the relay within 2m.

n Demand control from indoor unit When the relay is turned on, a forced thermostat-OFF operation starts. • Wiring example CN73

Relay (procured locally) Note) Determine the cable length between the indoor or outdoor control P.C. board and the relay within 2m.

1 1

EXCT 2 2 (2P plug: RED)

Relay coil signal


79

7-2. Outdoor Unit 7-2-1. Applied Control in Outdoor Unit The following functions become available by setting the switches on the outdoor interface P.C. board. Function

No. 1

Outdoor fan high static pressure shift

Switch No.

Bit

SW10

2

Interface P.C. board of outdoor unit

Switch position detail

SW10 Bit 2

For setup of outdoor fan high static pressure shift

7-2-1-1. Outdoor fan High Static Pressure Shift n Usage/Features This function is set when connecting a duct to the discharge port of the outdoor unit.

n Setup Turn “Bit 2” of the dip switch [SW10] on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit to ON.

n Specifications The outdoor fan high static pressure shift function increases the fan speed on the outdoor unit to enable a discharge duct to be installed on the discharge port - the design of the ducting should be such that a static pressure of 35 Pa is not exceeded. This function should be executed where the discharge ducting static pressure exceeds 15 Pa. 45Pa or more : For detail of adjustment, consult with the sales subsidiary. The discharged air volume from each outdoor unit is shown in the table below: Capacity rank (MMY-MAP) Standard air volume of outdoor unit (m³/min.)

80

0801 type

1001, 1201 type

165

175

7-2-2. Applied Control in Outdoor Unit The following functions are available by using a separately supplied P.C. board. Set up the switches on the outdoor unit (U1). No.

Function

Switch No.

Bit

Connector No.

Used control P.C. board

1

Power peak-cut control (Standard)

SW07

1

CN513

TCB-PCDM2E

2

Power peak-cut control (Expansion)

SW07

1,2

CN513

TCB-PCDM2E

3

Snowfall fan control

—

—

CN509

TCB-PCMO2E

4

External master ON/OFF control

—

—

CN512

TCB-PCMO2E

5

Night operation control

—

—

CN508

TCB-PCMO2E

6

Operation mode selection control

—

—

CN510

TCB-PCMO2E

Connector position detail

Outdoor unit interface P.C. board

CN508 Red

CN509 Black

CN510 White

CN513 Blue

CN511 Green


SW07

81

Bit 1

For power peak-cut control selection

Bit 2

For power peak-cut control (expansion) selection

7-2-2-1. Power Peak-cut Control (Standard) Operation

Header outdoor unit interface P.C. board SW07 Set up Bit 1.

CN513 (BLU)

The upper limit capacity of the outdoor unit is restricted based on the demand request signal from outside. L1 : Display lamp during power peak-cut control SW1 : Power peak-cut ON switch (ON during demand, OFF in normal time) ∗1 SW2 : Power peak-cut OFF switch (OFF during demand, ON in normal time) ∗1

(Setup to header unit only)

Connection cable Power peak-cut control board

PJ17 (4P WHI)

*1 Input signals of SW1 and SW2 are acceptable even if they are longer then pulse input (100mm.sec.) or serially made. However do not turn on SW1 and SW2 simultaneously. ∗ Be sure to prepare a contact for each terminal.

DC 1.2V

OFF

ON

SW2

SW1

Operation

Relay contact capacity of “operation” port

L1

In case of serial signal

In case of pulse signal

Below AC240V 0.5A (COSØ = 100%) Below DC24V 1A (Non-inductive load) Note) When connecting non-inductive load such as relay coil to L1 load, insert the noise surge absorber CR (In case of AC) or counter electromotive-proof diode (In case of DC) into the bypass circuit.

Display

Power supply Max. AC240V

Power peak-cut control board: TCB-PCDM2E Outdoor unit destination to be connected becomes the header outdoor unit (U1).

Procured locally

Setup when Power peak-cut control requested Power peak-cut control board (TCB-PCDM2E)

Outdoor unit interface P.C. board

SW1

SW2

L1

SW07: Bit 1 OFF

SW07: Bit 1 ON

Power peak-cut ON signal is input.

ON

OFF

ON

0% (Forced stop)

Capacity 60% (Upper limit restriction)

Power peak-cut OFF signal is input.

OFF

ON

OFF

100% (Normal operation)


Setup positions of header outdoor unit interface P.C. board

Connector position detail CN513 Blue


OFF

Operation stop to 100%

ON

ON 60% to 100%

SW07 Bit 1

82

7-2-2-2. Power Peak-cut Control (Expansion) Header outdoor unit interface P.C. board

Operation SW07 Set up Bit 1. ON Bit 2.

CN513 (BLU)

(Setup to Header unit only)

Connection cable Power peak-cut control board

*1

PJ17 (4P WHI)

Input signals of SW1 and SW2 are acceptable even if they are upper than pulse input (100mm. sec.) or serially made. ∗ Be sure to prepare a contact for each terminal.

DC 1.2V OFF

ON

SW2

SW1

The upper limit capacity of the outdoor unit is restricted based on the demand request signal from outside. L1 : Display lamp during Power peak-cut control SW1 : Power peak-cut ON switch ∗1 SW2 : Power peak-cut OFF switch ∗1

Operation

Display

L1 Power supply MAX AC240V

Relay contact capacity of “operation” port Below AC240V 1A (COSØ = 100%) Below DC24V 2A (Non-inductive load) Note) When connecting non-inductive load such as relay coil to L1 load, insert the noise surge absorber CR (In case of AC) or counter electromotive-proof diode (In case of DC) into the bypass circuit. Power peak-cut control board: TCB-PCDM2E Outdoor unit destination to be connected becomes the header outdoor unit (U1).

Procured locally

Setup at power peak-cut control (expansion) request Outside power peak-cut request SW1

Display lamp

Power Peak-cut request Outdoor wire interface P.C. board (SW07/ Bit 2 ON)

SW2

L1

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

80% (Upper limit restriction)


OFF

ON

ON



ON

ON

ON

Setup positions of header outdoor unit interface P.C. board

SW07 : Bit 1 OFF

SW07 : Bit 1 ON



0% (Forced stop)


Connector position detail CN513 Blue


Bit 1

SW07 Bit 2

83

OFF Operation stop to 60%, 80%, 100% ON

ON 60% to 60%, 75%, 85%, 100%

ON

Power peak-cut (expansion) ON

7-2-2-3. Snowfall Fan Control Header outdoor unit interface P.C. board

Operation The outdoor unit fan operates when a Snowfall signal is received. Input signal

Terminal

Operation

CN509 (4P BLK)

ON Connection cable External master ON/OFF control board

PJ17

OFF COOL (SMC)

(4P WHI)

ON OFF

HEAT COOL

COM

Snowfall fan control (Operates outdoor unit fan.)

Usual operation (Releases control.)

The control contents are accepted during leading and trailing of the input signal. (The status of leading and trailing should be held for 100mm. sec. or more.) External master ON/OFF control board : TCB-PCMO 2E Outdoor unit destination to be connected becomes the header outdoor unit (U1).

SMC

SMC: Snowfall detection switch Procured locally (Snow sensor)

7-2-2-4. External master ON/OFF control Header outdoor unit interface P.C. board

Operation The outdoor unit starts or stops the system. Input signal

Terminal CN512 (4P BLU) Connection cable External master ON/OFF control board

PJ17

COOL (SMC)

ON

Heat (SMH)

ON

Operation

Starts collectively indoor units. OFF

(4P WHI)

Stops collectively indoor units. OFF

The control contents are accepted during trailing of the input signal. (The status of trailing should be held for 100mm. sec. or more.) HEAT COOL

COM

SMC

NOTES 1) Do not turn on COOL and HEAT terminals concurrently. 2) Be sure to prepare a contact for each terminal. Outside signal: No voltage pulse contact External master ON/OFF control board : TCB-PCMO 2E Outdoor unit destination to be connected becomes the header outdoor unit (U1).

SMH

Procured locally

SMC: Input signal for start. SMH: Input signal for stop.

84

7-2-2-5. Night Operation Control

Header outdoor unit interface P.C. board

CN508 (4P RED)

Operation Reduce emitted noise during night by resting the compressor and fan speed. Terminal ON

Night (sound reduction) operation control

Connection cable External master ON/OFF control board

PJ17

(4P WHI)

COOL (SMC)

Operation

Input signal

OFF ON

Usual operation

OFF

HEAT COOL

COM

The control contents are accepted during leading and trailing of the input signal. (The status of leading and trailing should be held for 100mm. sec. or more.) Capacity criterion during night operation control Capacity during control indicates values as described in the following table.

Procured locally

Capacity

Night operation sound reduction dB (A)

COOL

HEAT

1201 type

50

Approx. 55%

Approx. 45%

1001 type

50

Approx. 65%

Approx. 55%

0801 type

50

Approx. 80%

Approx. 70%

SMC

SMC : Input signal for night operation. External master ON/OFF control board : TCB-PCMO 2E Outdoor unit destination to be connected becomes the header outdoor unit (U1).

(Against Max. capacity)

7-2-2-6. Operation Mode Selection Control Header outdoor unit interface P.C. board

CN510 (4P WHI) Connection cable External master ON/OFF control board

PJ17

HEAT COOL

(4P WHI)

COM

SMC SMH

Operation This control can be operated with the operation mode which is permitted by SMC or SMH. The indoor unit operating by operation mode without permission is as follows: 1) Display on remote controller (Mode select controlled)” goes on. “ 2) Indoor fan In FAN mode: Fan normally operates. In COOL mode: Fan normally operates. In HEAT mode: Fan operates with ultra low speed. * Be sure to prepare a contact for each contact terminal. Outside signal: No voltage serial contact SMC: COOL mode designated input switch SMH: HEAT mode designated input switch External master ON/OFF control board : TCB-PCMO 2E Outdoor unit destination to be connected becomes the header outdoor unit (U1).

Procured locally

85

8. TEST OPERATION

2. In case that a central control system is connected (Before address setup)

8-1. Procedure and Summary of Test Operation A test operation is executed in the following procedure. When a trouble or an error occurs in each step, remove causes of a trouble or an error referring to the section “9. Troubleshooting”.

Central control units

Check the basic items, mainly the installation work. Be sure to enter the check results in the check list 1 and 2.

Check before test operation

Check the main power supply is turned on.

U1 U2 U3 U4

4

Other refrigerant line

It is the check after the power has been turned on. Check the refrigerant circuit system is normally turned on.

2

5

Header unit (A)

U3 U4


3 Follower unit (B)

U3 U4

Follower unit (C)

U3 U4

U3 U4

Outdoor unit

Start the address setup in the outdoor/indoor units. (NOTE) The operation does not start by only power-ON.

Set up the addresses.

U1 U2

U1 U2

1

U5 U6

U1 U2

U5 U6

U1 U2

To indoor unit 3-phase 380-415V Leak interception

6

6

END

Main switch

8-2. Check Items before Test Operation

U1 U2

Main check items for electric wiring

86

The communication system differs from that of R22 or R407 refrigerant “Modular Multi system” air conditioner. Check again cautious points on wiring.

2

4

Follower unit (B)

U3 U4

1

Follower unit (C)

U3 U4

No. U1 U2

U5 U6

U1 U2

U5 U6

U1 U2

5

5

Main switch U1 U2

Indoor unit

A B

U1 U2

U1 U2

A B

A B

U1 U2

A B

Remote controller

Main check items

Are indoor and outdoor communication lines of the header unit connected to U1/U2 terminals?

Is the relay connector between U1/U2 terminal and U3/U4 terminal removed? (Set up at shipment from the factory)

Is the communication line between each outdoor units connected to U5/U6 terminal?

Is the terminal resistance (SW30-2) on the interface P.C. board of the header unit turned on? (Set up at shipment from the factory)

Is the end terminal of the shield cable grounded?

Note)

A B

A B

Remote controller

Remote controller

Remote controller

A B

Main check items

Are indoor and outdoor communication lines of the header unit connected to U1/U2 terminals?

Is the relay connector between U1/U2 terminal and U3/U4 terminal removed? (Set up at shipment from the factory) (Before address setup, remove the relay connector.)

Is the communication line between outdoor and indoor units connected to U5/U6 terminal?

Is the communication line of the central control system connected to the header unit U3/U4 terminals of each refrigerant line? (The communication line of the central control system may be connected to the communication lines of the indoor/outdoor communication lines.)

Is the terminal resistance (SW30-2) on the interface P.C. board of the header unit turned on? (Set up at shipment from the factory) (After address setup, turn off SW30-2 of the header unit except the smallest unit after check of trial operation.)

Is the end terminal of the shield cable grounded?

When the refrigerant line and the central control system of the custom air conditioner are connected: → Are TCC-LINK adaptors correctly connected? → When the digital inverter air conditioner operates with group operation, twin, or triple operation, are the adopters connected to the header unit of the indoor unit?

1-phase 230V Leak interception

Main switch

A B

Check

U5 U6

Earth

3-phase 380-415V Leak interception

U1 U2

U3 U4

Outdoor unit

1. In case that a center control system is not connected:

U1 U2

1-phase 230V Leak interception

3

Main switch Header unit (A)

U1 U2

Indoor unit

Prior to the test operation, check the following items so that there is no trouble in the installation work.

No.

U5 U6

Earth

Carry out a test operation. Check air blowing and cooling/heating operation in the indoor unit.

Test operation

U5 U6

Check

The above figure does not show all the electric cables. For details, refer to the installation manuals for outdoor unit, indoor unit, remote controller, or optional devices.

Note)

The above figure does not show all the electric cables. For details, refer to the installation manuals for outdoor unit, indoor unit, remote controller, or optional devices.

3. Connection check between Flow Selector Unit (FS Unit) and indoor unit

Check list 2 Calculate the additional amount of refrigerant from the following:

1

Remote controller

Indoor unit

A

B

B

Earth terminal

Control wiring

N

3

CN01

L

B

N

Earth terminal

Earth terminal

A

B Control wiring

CN81

CN02 Power line

A

Earth terminal

FS unit

CN81 L

U1/U2

Earth terminal

B

B

Control FS unit wiring

Earth terminal

FS unit

CN81

CN02 Power line

A

A U1/U2

CN01

L

CN02

N

Earth terminal

Power line

Earth terminal

Earth terminal

No.

Note)

Pull Box

2

Pull Box

(A) (B) Firstly enter the total length for each liquid pipe in the following table and then calculate the additional amount of refrigerant by pipe length.

Additional amount of refrigerant by pipe length Pipe dia at liquid side

4

Main check items Are indoor/outdoor communication lines connected to U1/U2 terminals? Is the signal line of the FS unit connected to connector CN81? Is the power supply cable of the FS unit connected to R (L) and S (N) terminals? Is the power supply cable of the FS unit connected to the closed end connector? When the indoor unit is a Wall type (1 Series) or Concealed Duct High Static Pressure type?

Standard amount of refrigerant kg/m

Total pipe length at each liquid side

Additional amount of refrigerant pipe dia at each liquid side kg

Ø6.4

0.025 ×

=

kg

Ø9.5

0.055 ×

=

kg

Ø12.7

0.105 ×

=

kg

Ø15.9

0.160 ×

=

kg

Ø19.0

0.250 ×

=

kg

Ø22.2

0.350 ×

=

kg

Check

Additional amount of refrigerant by pipe length (A)

The above figure does not cover all the electric wirings. For details, refer to the Installation Manual of Flow selector unit.

kg

Next, refer to the following table for the corrective amount of refrigerant (B) by system capacity.

87

Corrective amount of refrigerant by system capacity

Check list 1 • Using the “Check list 1”, check there is no trouble in the installation work. Is capacity of the leak breaker appropriate?

Corrective amount of 1.3 + refrigerant by system capacity

CN01

Power supply Single phase 220-240V, 50Hz Earth leakage breaker Power switch

Additional amount Actual liquid Additional amount of = × × of refrigerant (B) pipe length refrigerant per liquid pipe 1m

             

A

Remote controller

Indoor unit

                   

U1/U2

Remote controller

Indoor unit

Outdoor total capacity XXXX A

Is the diameter of the power cable correctly wired?

Is the control communication line correctly wired?

Normal type

Header unit (A) Follower unit (B) Follower unit (C)

XXXX A XXXX A XXXX A

Indoor unit XXXX A

Header unit (A) Follower unit (B) Follower unit (C)

XXXX mm² XXXX mm² XXXX mm²

Indoor unit XXXX mm²

Indoor –outdoor connection terminals (U1, U2) Outdoor–outdoor connection terminals (U5, U6) Central control system connection terminals (U3, U4)

XXXX XXXX XXXX

Is the power of the indoor units supplied collectively? Is the earth grounded

System horse power HP Unit 1

Unit 2

Unit 3

Corrective amount of refrigerant (B) kg

8

8

2.0

10

10

2.5

12

12

16

8

18

10

8

0

20

10

10

2.0

3.0 8

–1.5

24

8

8

8

–4.5

Is the insulation good? (10MΩ or more)

XXXX MΩ or more

26

10

8

8

–3.0

Is the main power voltage correct? (Within 200V ± 10%)

XXXX V

28

10

10

8

–1.5

30

10

10

10

0

Is the diameter of the connecting pipe correct? Is the branch kit correct?

Finally add the additional amount of refrigerant by pipe length (A) to the corrective amount of refrigerant by system capacity (B). This is the final additional amount of refrigerant. If the result is indicated as a negative, do not add any refrigerant. Do not add the refrigerant (= 0kg).

Does the indoor unit condensate drain adequately? Is the thermal insulation of pipes good? (Connecting pipes, Branch kit) For both indoor and outdoor units, ensure air is not short-circuited from discharge to inlet ports. After pressure test, check that the pipework and indoor units have been vacuumed and the correct amount of additional gas has been charged. Are valves of all the outdoor units fully opened? Suction gas side XXXX Header unit (A) XXXX Follower unit (B) XXXX Follower unit (C)

• Check the additional amount of refrigerant.

Discharge gas side XXXX XXXX XXXX

Liquid side XXXX XXXX XXXX

Balance side XXXX XXXX XXXX

Additional amount of refrigerant Additional amount of refrigerant by pipe length (A)

kg

Corrective amount of refrigerant by system HP (B)

kg

Additional amount of refrigerant

kg

8-3. Check at Main Power-ON

8-4. Address Setup

After turning on the main power of the indoor units and outdoor unit in the refrigerant line to be executed with a test operation, check the following items in outdoor and each indoor unit.

After power-ON, set up the indoor address from the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit.

(After turning on the main power, be sure to check in order of indoor unit → outdoor unit.) If the power supply of the outdoor unit has been firstly turned on, [E19] appears on the 7-segment display on the interface P.C. board until the power supply of the indoor unit is turned on. However it is not an error.

Check on outdoor unit 1. Check that all the rotary switches, SW01, SW02, and SW03 on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit are set up to “1”. 2. If other error code is displayed on 7-segment [B], remove the cause of trouble referring to “9. Troubleshooting”. 3. Check that [L08] is displayed on 7-segment display [B] on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit. (L08: Indoor address unset up) (If the address setup operation has already finished in service time, etc, the above check code is not displayed, and only [U1] is displayed on 7-segment display [A].) 7-segment display [A]

7-segment display [B]

Interface P.C. board

(The address setup operation cannot be performed by power-ON only. )

8-4-1. Cautions 1. It requires approx. 5 minutes usually for 1 line to automatically set up address. However in some cases, it may require maximum 10 minutes. 2. It is unnecessary to operate the air conditioner for address setup. 3. Manual address setup is also available besides automatic setup. Automatic address: Setup from SW15 on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit Manual address: Setup from the weird remote controller. (For details, refer to section “8-4-3. Address setup procedure”)

8-4-2. Address Setup and Check Procedure Procedure

Item

Operation and check contents

88

1

Indoor unit power-ON

Turn on power of indoor unit in refrigerant line to which address is set up.

2

Outdoor unit power-ON

Turn on power of all the outdoor units in refrigerant line to which address is set up.

3

7-segment display check

Check that [L08] is displayed on 7-segment display [B] on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit in the system to which address is set up.

4

Address setup start

Confirm the corresponding items in “8-4-3 Address setup procedure”, and then set up address according to the operation procedure. (Be sure that the setup operation may differ in group control or central control.) Note) Address cannot be set up if switches are not operated.

5

Display check after setup

• After address setup, [U1] [ ] are displayed in 7-segment display section. • If an error code is displayed in 7-segment display [B], remove the cause of trouble referring to “9. Troubleshooting”. Using 7-segment display function, check the system information of the scheduled system. (This check is executed on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit.)

SW01

SW02

SW03 Rotary switch setup

Check on indoor unit 1. Display check on remote controller (In case of wired remote controller) Check that a frame as shown in the following left figure is displayed on LC display section of the remote controller.

TEMP.

FILTER RESET TEST

ON / OFF

TIMER SET

FAN

MODE

TIME

SWING/FIX

VENT

SET

CL

UNIT

Normal status (Power and operation stop)

System information check after setup

SW01

7-segment display

SW02 SW03

[A]

[B]

System capacity

1

2

3

[No. of HP]

[HP]

No. of connected outdoor unit

1

3

3

[Connected No. of units]

[ P]

No. of connected indoor units

1

4

3

[Connected No. of units]

After the above checks, return rotary switches SW01, SW02, SW03 to 1/1/1.

NO GOOD

GOOD

6

TEMP.

FILTER RESET TEST

ON / OFF

TIMER SET

FAN

MODE

TIME

SWING/FIX

VENT

SET

CL


7-segment display [A]

Push-switch SW04

Push-switch SW05

Push-switch SW15

UNIT


Abnormal status (Power is not normally turned on.)

If a frame is not displayed as shown in the above right figure, the power of the remote controller is not normally turned on. Therefore check the following items. • Check power supply of indoor unit. • Check wiring between indoor unit and remote controller. • Check whether there is cutoff of cable around the indoor control P.C. board or not, and check connection failure of connectors. • Check failure of transformer for the indoor microcomputer. • Check indoor control P.C. board failure.

SW01 SW02 SW03 Rotary switches

8-4-3. Address Setup Procedure

REQUIREMENT

In this air conditioner, it is required to set up address to the indoor unit before starting operation. Set up the address according to the following setup procedure. CAUTION 1. Set up address after wiring work. 2. It requires maximum 10 minutes (Usually, approx. 5 minutes) to set up automatically an address to 1 line. 3. To set up an address automatically, the setup at outdoor side is necessary. (Address setup cannot be performed by power-ON only.) 4. To set up an address, it is unnecessary to operate the air conditioner. 5. Manual address setup is also available besides automatic setup. Automatic address : Setup from SW15 on the interface P.C. board of the header unit Manual address : Setup from the wired remote controller ∗ It is temporarily necessary to set the indoor unit and wired to 1 : 1. (In group operation and in time without remote controller)

Cabling systematic diagram

Outdoor

SW11

89

(Example)

In case of central control in a single refrigerant line

In case of central control over refrigerant lines

Address setup procedure

To procedure 1

To procedure 2

Cable systematic diagram Outdoor


Outdoor

Indoor

Indoor

Indoor

Remote controller

Remote controller

Remote controller


Indoor

Address setup procedure 1 1. Turn on power of indoor/outdoor units. (In order of indoor → Outdoor) 2. After approx. 1 minute, check that U. 1. L08 (U. 1. flash) is displayed in 7-segment display section on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit. 3. Push SW15 to start the setup of the automatic addressing. (Max. 10 minutes for 1 line (Usually, approx. 5 minutes)) 4. When the count Auto 1 → Auto 2 → Auto 3 is displayed in 7-segment display section, and it changes from U. 1. - - - (U. 1. flash) to U. 1. - - - (U. 1. light) , the setup finished. 5. When performing an automatic address setup on a single refrigerant line with central control, connect relay connected between [U1, U2] and [U3, U4] terminals in the header unit.

Outdoor

Outdoor

Indoor

Indoor

Indoor

Remote controller

Remote controller

Remote controller


Indoor

Header unit interface P.C. board SW04 SW05 SW15

3 2, 4

D600 D601 D602 D603 D604 SW01 SW02 SW03 1

1

1

5 U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 For internal wiring of For internal wiring between For wiring between central control indoor and outdoor units system outdoor

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

1

SW13 2 3

4

1

× × × × × × × × × × × × × ×

× ¡

×

¡

×

¡

×

¡

×

¡

×

¡

×

¡

SW14 2 3

× × ¡ ¡

× ×

¡ ¡

× ×

¡ ¡

× ×

× × × × ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡

× × × ×

¡ ¡

4

× × × × × × × × ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡

SW12

ON ON 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

Be careful not to duplicate addresses with the other refrigerant line.

Line address

Indoor

Header unit interface P.C. board

SW13

SW14

ON ON ON 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

SW07 SW08

SW09

SW10

(¡: Switch ON, × : Switch OFF)

Line address switch on outdoor interface P.C. board

(However, go to the procedure 1 when the central control is performed in a single refrigerant line.)

Indoor

ON ON ON ON 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

SW06

Without central control : To the address setup procedure 1 With central control : To the address setup procedure 2

Indoor

Remote controller

Address setup procedure 2

Note)

Outdoor

Indoor

1. Using SW13 and 14 on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit in each system, set up the address for each system. (At shipment from factory: Set to Address 1)

Automatic Address Setup

Group control over multiple refrigerant lines

(Example)

• When a group control is performed over the multiple refrigerant lines, be sure to turn on the power supplies of all the indoor units connected in a group at the time of address setup. • If turning on the power for each refrigerant line to set up address, a header indoor unit is set for each line. Therefore, an alarm code “L03” (Duplicated header indoor units) is output in operation after address setup. In this case, change the group address from the wired remote controller for only one header unit is set up.

Line address

1

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

SW13 2 3

4

1

× ×

×

¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡

¡

×

¡

×

¡

×

¡

×

¡

×

¡

×

¡

SW14 2 3

4

¡ ¡

¡ ¡

× ×

¡ ¡

× ×

¡ ¡

× ×

¡ ¡

¡ ¡

× × × ×

¡ ¡ ¡ ¡

× × × ×

× × × × × × × ×

¡ ¡ ¡ ¡

: Is not used for setup of system address. (Do not change setup.) 2. Check that the relay connectors between [U1, U2] and [U3, U4] terminals are not connected in all the outdoor units to which the central control is connected. (At shipment from factory: Connector not connected) 3. Turn on power of indoor/outdoor. (In order of indoor → outdoor) 4. After approx. 1 minute, check that 7-segment display is U.1.L08 (U.1. flash) on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit. 5. Push SW15 to start the setup of automatic addressing. (Max. 10 minutes for 1 line (Usually, approx. 5 minutes)) 6. When the count Auto 1 → Auto 2 → Auto 3 is displayed in 7-segment display section, and it changes from U. 1. - - - (U. 1. flash) to U. 1. - - - (U. 1. light) , the setup finished. 7. Procedure 4. to 6. are repeated in other refrigerant lines.

2

U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 For internal wiring of For internal wiring between For wiring between central control indoor and outdoor units system outdoor

8. How to set up the terminal resistance When all the address setups have finished in the same refrigerant circuit system, put the terminal resistance in the same central control line into one. • Remain only SW30-2 of the header outdoor unit with address 1 as ON. (With end terminal resistance) • Set up SW30-2 of the other header outdoor units to OFF. (Without terminal resistance) 9. Connect the relay connector between [U1, U2] and [U3, U4] of the header unit for each refrigerant line. 10. Then set up the central control address. (For the central control address setup, refer to the Installation manual of the central control devices.) 1 Follower unit

U3 U4

U5 U6

SW30

ON ON ON ON 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

SW11

SW12

ON ON 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

SW06

U1 U2

U5 U6

U1 U2

U3 U4

U5 U6

U1 U2

SW09

SW10

U1 U2

U5 U6

U1 U2

A B

2

(Wiring example in 2 lines)

3

#1

#2

Outdoor

Outdoor

Indoor Indoor Indoor

Indoor Indoor

Header unit U3 U4

U1 U2

Line address Indoor address Group address

U1 U2

A B

1 2 2

1 1 1 Remote controller

A B

1 3 2

2 1 2

Remote controller

Remote controller

Individual

5

Follower

90

Header unit

Follower unit

U3 U4

U3 U4

1 2

U1 U2

After address setup

OFF

U5 U6

U1 U2

OFF

U5 U6

U1 U2

OFF

U5 U6

U1 U2

U1 U2

Individual : 0000 Header unit : 0001 Follower unit : 0002

U1 U2

A B

A B

A B

Remote controller

Remote controller

Remote controller

U1 U2

A B

9

Remote controller

Group

Follower unit

Header unit

Follower unit

Header unit

Setup at shipment from factory

1

(Setup is unnecessary.)

2


3

1

ON


OFF after address setup


OFF after address setup

ON

Connect short after address setup

Open


Open


Open

SW30-2 Terminal-end resistance of indoor/outdoor communi cation line/central control communication line

Relay connector

8

} In case of group control

A B

Header unit

Using the setup temp. set ! to the item code. Using the timer time the indoor address.

Operation procedure

1®2®3®4®5®6® 7 ® 8 ® 9 ® 10 ® 11 End

R.C.

2 1 1

2 2 2

3 1 0

Note Never connect a relay connector until address setup for all the refrigerant lines has been completed ; otherwise address cannot be correctly set up.

buttons, set up

FAN

MODE

TIME

SWING/FIX

VENT

SET

CL

buttons,

11

Push TEST button. Setup operation finished. (Status returns to normal stop status.)

ON / OFF

TIMER SET

/

Push SET button. (OK when display goes on.)

Item code TEMP.

FILTER RESET TEST

buttons,

10

No.

Data

2, 5, 8 4, 7, 10 11

/

Using the timer time / buttons, set Individual = , Header unit = , Follower unit = .

CODE No.

Indoor side (Automatic setup) 1 2 0

/

Using the setup temp. set " to the item code.

UNIT No.

1 1 0

buttons,

Using the timer time / buttons, set up the line address. (Match it with the line address on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit in the identical refrigerant line.)

SET DATA SETTING

Refrigerant line address Indoor unit address Group address

buttons

Push SET button. (OK when display goes on.) (Group address)

Group address

Relay connector

U1 U2

Individual

OFF

U5 U6

TEST

7

ON SW30

Relay connector U1 U2

SW13, 14 (Refrigerant line address)

U1 U2

1 2

ON SW30

6

In the above example, under condition of no inter-unit wire of the remote controller, set the address after individual connecting of the wired remote controller.

Header unit U3 U4

1 2

ON SW30

OFF

U5 U6

U3 U4

1 2

ON SW30

Relay connector

Outdoor interface P.C. board

Header unit Follower unit U3 U4

1 2

ON SW30

Remote controller

Group

/

+

Push SET button. (OK when display goes on.) (Indoor address)

2 2 2

Header Remote controller

Using the setup temp. set to the item code.

CL

4

U5 U6 Relay connector

U1 U2

A B

Turn on the power.

SW14

ON ON ON 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

SW07 SW08

Relay connector

A B

Push simultaneously SET + for 4 seconds or more. LCD changes to flashing. (Line address)

3

U3 U4

Before address setup During setup of address U1 U2

SW13

1

Arrange one indoor unit and one remote controller set to 1 by 1.

SW30

Header unit Follower unit

U3 U4

Manual address setup from remote controller In case to decide an address of the indoor unit prior to finish of indoor wiring work and unpracticed outdoor wiring work (Manual setup from remote controller)

ON 1 2

2

Header unit

U1 U2

Header unit interface P.C. board

3, 6, 9

UNIT

1

Note 1) When setting the line address from the remote controller, do not use address 29 and 30. The address 29 and 30 cannot be set up in the outdoor unit. Therefore if they are incorrectly set up, a check code [E04] (Indoor/outdoor communication circuit error) is output.

• To confirm all the unit numbers from an arbitrary wired remote controller; (Operation while the air conditioner stops) The indoor unit No. and position in the same refrigerant line can be confirmed. An outdoor unit is selected, the indoor unit numbers in the same refrigerant line are successively displayed, and then its indoor unit fan is turned on.

1 Confirmation of indoor unit address and position by using the remote controller [Confirmation of indoor unit address and the position] 1. When you want to know the indoor address though position of the indoor unit itself can be recognized;

2 3

(Operation while the air conditioner operates)

1 2

If it stops, push

ON / OFF

button. CODE No.

UNIT

Push button. The unit No. 1-1 is displayed on the LCD. (Disappears after several seconds) The displayed unit No indicates the line address and indoor address. (If there is other indoor unit connected to the same remote controller (Group control unit), other unit No. is displayed every pushing UNIT button.)

UNIT No.

TEMP.

1

Operate FILTER RESET TEST

4

ON / OFF

TIMER SET

FAN

MODE

TIME

SWING/FIX

VENT

SET

CL

UNIT

2

TEST

Push the timer time + buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds or more. Firstly, the line 1, item code )+ (Address Change) is displayed. (Select outdoor unit.) Using UNIT + SWING/FIX buttons, select the line address. CODE No.

Using SET button, determine the selected line address. • The indoor unit address, which is connected to the refrigerant pipe of the selected outdoor unit is displayed and the fan is turned on. Every pushing UNIT button, the indoor unit numbers in the identical pipe are successively displayed. • Only fan of the selected indoor unit operates.

[To select another line address]

5 6

2

Push CL button to return to procedure ). • The indoor address of another line can be successively confirmed. Push

TEST

SET DATA SETTING UNIT No.

R.C.

TEMP.

1

91

CODE No. SET DATA SETTING UNIT No.

• Unit No. is displayed. • The fans of all the indoor units in a group control are turned on.

2

3

1 2

TEST

Push + buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds or more.

Every pushing UNIT button, the indoor unit numbers in the group control are successively displayed. • The firstly displayed unit No. indicates the address of the header unit. • Only fan of the selected indoor unit is turned on. Push TEST button to finish the procedure. All the indoor units in group control stop.

R.C.

FILTER RESET TEST

TIMER SET

FAN

MODE

TIME

SWING/FIX

VENT

CL

MODE

SWING/FIX

VENT

SET

CL

UNIT

2 4 5

Operation procedure

1®2®3® 4 ® 5 ® 6 End

button to finish the procedure.

Push simultaneously SET + CL + TEST buttons for 4 seconds or more. (The firstly displayed unit No. indicates the header unit in group control.) In group control, select an indoor unit No. to be changed by (The fan of the selected indoor unit is turned on.) Using the setup temp. to the item code.

/

buttons, set

UNIT

4 5 6

2

button.

!

CODE No. SET DATA SETTING

Using the timer time / buttons, change the displayed setup data to a data which you want to change. Push

SET

button.

Using the UNIT button, select the unit No. to be changed at the next time. Repeat the procedure to and change the indoor address so that it is not duplicated.

4 6

Operation procedure

1®2®3

UNIT

UNIT No.

ON / OFF

SET

3

No.

TEMP.

1 3 End

FAN

TIME

Change of indoor address from wired remote controller • To change the indoor address in individual operation (Wired remote controller : Indoor unit = 1 : 1) or group control (When the setup operation with automatic address has finished, this change is available.) (Operation while air conditioner stops)

• To confirm the unit numbers in a group control; (Operation while the air conditioner stops) The indoor unit numbers in a group control are successively displayed, and the corresponding indoor fan is turned on. (Operation while the air conditioner stops)

1

TIMER SET

Change of indoor address from remote controller

2. When you want to know position of the indoor unit using the address

VENT

FILTER RESET TEST

ON / OFF

6 3

Operation procedure

1®2

No.

End

7 8

After the above change, push confirm the changed contents. If it is acceptable, push confirmation.

TEST

UNIT

R.C.

No.

TEMP.

3 5 8 1

FILTER RESET TEST

ON / OFF

TIMER SET

FAN

MODE

TIME

SWING/FIX

VENT

SET

CL

UNIT

button to

button to finish

Operation procedure

1®2®3®4® 5 ® 6 ® 7 ® 8 End

4 2, 6, 7

• To change all the indoor addresses from an arbitrary wired remote controller; (When the setup operation with automatic address has finished, this change is available.) Contents : Using an arbitrary wired remote controller, the indoor unit address can be changed for each same refrigerant line ∗ Change the address in the address check/change mode. (Operation while air conditioner stops)

1 2 3

4 5 6

Clearance of address (Return to status (Address undecided) at shipment from factory) Method 1 An address is individually cleared from a wired remote controller. “0099” is set up to line address, indoor address, and group address data from the remote controller. (For the setup procedure, refer to the abovementioned address setup from the remote controller.)

TEST

Push the timer time + buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds or more. Firstly, the line 1, item code AC (Address Change) is displayed. Using

UNIT

+

SWING/FIX

Method 2

buttons, select the line address.

Push SET button. • The indoor unit address, which is connected to the refrigerant pipe of the selected outdoor unit is displayed and the fan is turned on. First the current indoor address is displayed on the setup data. (Line address is not displayed.) The indoor address of the setup data moves up/down by the timer time Change the setup data to a new address. Push

SET

/

Clear the indoor addresses in the same refrigerant line from the outdoor unit. 1. Turn off the power of the refrigerant line to be returned to the status at shipment, and change the header unit to the following status. 1) Remove the relay connector between [U1U2] and [U3U4]. (If it has been already removed, leave it as it is.) 2) Turn on SW30-2 on the interface P.C. board of the header unit if it is OFF. (If it has been already ON, leave it as it is.)

buttons. Central control device

button to determine the setup data.

U1 U2 U3 U4

UNIT

Every pushing button, the indoor unit numbers in the identical pipe are successively displayed. Only fan of the selected indoor unit operates. Repeat the procedure to and change all the indoor addresses so that they are not duplicated.

Header unit

4 6

7 92

8

U1 U2

Push SET button. (All the displays on LCD go on.) Push

TEST

Follower unit

U3 U4

U5 U6

Header Center unit

U3 U4

U1 U2

Follower unit

U3 U4

U5 U6

U1 U2

U5 U6

Header Center unit

U3 U4

U1 U2

U5 U6

U3 U4

U1 U2

U5 U6

button to finish the procedure. U1 U2

U1 U2

U1 U2

A B

A B

A B

Remote controller

Remote controller

Remote controller

U1 U2 A B

U1 U2 A B

Remote controller

Unit of which address is to be returned to the initial status

CODE No.

CODE No.

SET DATA SETTING

SET DATA SETTING UNIT No.

R.C.

No.

TEMP.

1

FILTER RESET TEST

3

UNIT No.

R.C.

TIMER SET

FAN

MODE

TIME

SWING/FIX

VENT

SET

CL

UNIT

2

Cancel of line selection

Here, if the unit No is not called up, the outdoor unit in this line does not exist. Push CL button, and then select a line according to procedure .

2

No.

TEMP.

ON / OFF

4 8

FILTER RESET TEST

2. Turn on the indoor/outdoor power of which address is to be cleared. After approx. 1 minute, check that “U.1. - - -” is displayed, and then execute the following operation on the interface P.C. board of the header unit of which address is to be cleared in the refrigerant line.

ON / OFF

TIMER SET

FAN

MODE

TIME

SWING/FIX

VENT

SET

CL

UNIT

5, 7 To finish the set Operation procedure

1®2®3®4® 5 ® 6 ® 7 ® 8 End

6

SW01

SW02

SW03

SW04

Address which can be cleared

2

1

2

After checking that “A.d.buS” is displayed on 7-degment display, and then push SW04 for 5 seconds or more.

Line + Indoor + Group address

2

2

2

After checking that “A.d.nEt” is displayed on 7-degment display, and then push SW04 for 5 seconds or more.

Central address

3. After “A.d. c.L.” has been displayed on 7-degment display, return SW01/SW02/SW03 to 1/1/1. 4. When the address clearing has correctly finished, “U.1.L08” is displayed on 7-degment display after a while. If “A.d. n.G.” is displayed on 7-degment display, there is a possibility which is connected with the other refrigerant line. Check again the relay connector between [U1U2] and [U3U4] terminals. NOTE) Be careful that the other refrigerant line address may be also cleared if clearing operation is not correctly executed. 5. After clearing of the address, set up an address again.

In case of increase the address-undefined indoor units (Extension, etc.) If set up the indoor address of which address is undefined accompanied with extension of indoor units, replacement of P.C. board, etc, follow to the methods below.

8-4-4. Check after Address Setup When Central Control System is Connected When the central control system is connected, check the following setup has finished after address setup.

Method 1 Set up an address individually from a wired remote controller. (Line address, Indoor address, Group address, Central address) For the setup method, refer to the above “Manual address setup from remote controller”.

Central control units U1 U2 U3 U4

Method 2

Line address = 2

Set up an address from the outdoor unit. ∗ Leave the address of the unit of which address has been already set up as it is. Set up an address only to the unit of which address is undefined. The addresses are allocated from the low number.


Line address = 1

Center unit Header unit(A) (A)

U3 U4

3

5

Header unit (A)

4


2 Follower unit (B)

U3 U4

Follower unit (C)

U3 U4

U3 U4

1 Outdoor unit U1 U2

Setup procedure

U5 U6

U1 U2

U5 U6

U1 U2

U5 U6

U1 U2

U5 U6

Earth

Arrange the outdoor header units in the refrigerant line to which indoor units are added. (Figure below) 1. Remove the relay connector between [U1U2] and [U3U4]. 2. Turn on SW30-2 on the interface P.C. board at outdoor header unit side if it is OFF. ∗ Turn off the power, and then execute the operation.

5

3-phase 380–415V, 50Hz Leak interception

Main switch

Central control device U1 U2 U3 U4

Header unit

Follower unit

U3 U4

93

U1 U2

Header Center unit

U3 U4

U5 U6

U1 U2

Follower unit

U3 U4

U5 U6

U1 U2

U5 U6

U1 U2

U1 U2

Header Center unit

U3 U4

U5 U6

U1 U2

U5 U6

U1 U2

U1 U2

A B

A B

A B

Remote controller

Remote controller

Remote controller

U1 U2 A B

U1 U2

A B

A B

A B

U1 U2

Remote controller

Remote controller

Remote controller

A B

1-phase 220–240V, 50Hz Leak interception

Main switch

U1 U2

U1 U2

Indoor unit

U3 U4

U1 U2 A B

Main check items

Remote controller

Check

1) Is relay connector of the header unit connected after address setup? Added indoor unit

Relay connector 2) Is relay connector of the follower unit removed?

3. Turn on the indoor/outdoor power of which address is to be set up. After approx. 1 minute, check that “U.1. - - -” is displayed on 7-segment display. 4. Execute the following operation on the interface P.C. board of the header unit. SW01

SW02

SW03

2

14

2

Terminal resistance

SW04 After checking that “ ” is displayed on 7-segment display, and then push SW04 for 5 seconds or more.

“AUTO1” → “AUTO2” → “AUTO3” → … → “AUTO9” … is counted and displayed on 7-degment display. • Return the SW01, 02, 03 setup as before. 5. When “U.1. - - -” is displayed on 7-segment display, the setup operation finished. Turn off the indoor/outdoor power. 6. Return the following setup as before. • Relay connector • SW30-2

Line address

Note)

3) Is the end resistance (SW30-2) of the header unit with the least refrigerant line address number (in the central control line) turned on? (Setup is unnecessary for follower unit.) 4) Are the terminal resistance (SW30-2) of the header units except for the line of which central control refrigerant line address is the smallest, turned off? (Setup is unnecessary for follower unit.) 5) Are not addresses in the line address (SW13, SW14) duplicated in each refrigerant line?

The above table does not describe all the electric cablings. For details, refer to each installation manual for outdoor unit, indoor unit, remote controller, and optional devices.

8-5. Troubleshooting in Test Operation If the phenomena appear, such as a check code is output or the remote controller is not accepted in power-ON after cabling work or in address setup operation, the following causes are considered.

8-5-1. A check Code is Displayed on the Remote Controller Check code Outdoor unit displayed on 7-segment remote controller display E04

E19-00

Cause

Countermeasures

Outdoor power is formerly turned on.

Turn on the power again. (In order of Indoor → Outdoor)

There is none of outdoor terminator resistor, or there Check SW30 bit 2 of the outdoor unit. are two or more resistances. No connection between multiple refrigerant lines: (After address setup) SW30 bit 20N Connection between multiple refrigerant lines: SW30 bit 2 of the connected outdoor unit is turned on only in one line. After address was decided, all the indoor units do not correctly response after power-ON in outdoor unit.

ON 1 2

SW30 L08

E08-XX

E07

E06

Check and modifies disconnection of indoor/outdoor communication line.(Communication line between outdoor unit and the leading indoor unit) Check influence of communication noise.

Address setup error Set up address again. • Only line addresses of the connected indoor units are undefined. • The outdoor line address and the line addresses in all indoor units do not match. • The indoor addresses are duplicated. (Units except those displaying E04 are duplicated.) • A header unit is not set up in a group. (Except group displaying E04) Duplication of indoor addresses. (Address No in which sub-code of the check code are duplicated)

Set up address again.

There is none of outdoor terminal resistance, or there are two or more resistances. (After address setup, when terminal resistance setup is changed after power-ON.)

Check SW30 bit 2 of the outdoor unit. No connection between multiple refrigerant lines: SW30 bit 20N Connection between multiple refrigerant lines: SW30 bit 2 of the connected outdoor unit is turned on only in one line.

ON 1 2

SW30

Transmission circuit error at interface side (P.C. board failure)

Replace the interface P.C. board.

After address setup, communication from all the indoor units interrupted under condition that a normal operation can be performed.

Check and correct disconnection of indoor/outdoor communication line.(Communication line between outdoor unit and the leading indoor unit) Check influence of communication noise.

Exceeded No of connected indoor units or exceeded capacity.

Adjust No of connected indoor units or capacity.

E16

E16-XX

E25

E25

Duplication of outdoor addresses. (Only when outdoor address was manually set up)

Do not use a manual setup for outdoor address.

L04

L04

Duplication of outdoor line addresses • Line address setup error, occurred after connection between U1, U2 and U3, U4 connectors

Modify line address setup of the outdoor unit between lines. (Set up SW 13 and 14 on the interface P.C. board.)

L05 (∗)

L06

Duplicated of indoor units with priority

The Heat Recovery Multi is not set up on priority.

L06 (∗) L08

There are two or more indoor units set up with priority. L08

Address setup error • Only indoor addresses of all the connected indoor units are undefined.

(∗) [L05]: Displayed on the indoor unit set up with priority [L06]: Displayed on the indoor unit except one set up with priority

94


8-5-2. Operation from remote controller is not accepted and a check code is displayed on 7-segment display of the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit. Remote controller status

7-segment display of outdoor unit

No response

L08

E19-00

Cause

Countermeasures

Line addresses and indoor addresses of all the connected indoor units are unset.

Set up addresses.

There is no outdoor unit of group control.

Set up group address.

Indoor unit power is not turned on.

Turn on the power again. (In order of indoor → outdoor)

Indoor/outdoor communication line is not correctly connected to the outdoor unit. (Fig. 1) (Indoor/outdoor cannot communicate before address setup.)

Correct wiring.

There is none of outdoor terminator resistor, or there are two or more resistances. (Before address setup)

Check SW30 bit 2 of the outdoor unit. No connection between multiple refrigerant lines: SW30 bit 2 0N Connection between multiple refrigerant lines: SW30 bit 2 of the connected outdoor unit is turned on only in one line.

ON 1 2

SW30

E20-01

Address setup is performed with connecting indoor/outdoor communication line between outdoor units. (Fig. 3)

Correct wiring.

Address setup is performed under condition of connecting between multiple refrigerant lines. (Fig. 3)

Correct wiring.

8-5-3. There is no display of a check code on 7-segment display on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit though there is indoor unit which does not accept the operation from the remote controller. Remote controller status

7-segment display of outdoor unit

No response

None

No display on remote controller (No line is output.)

None

Countermeasures

Cause Communication line is not connected between indoor and outdoor.

Modify wiring.

Line and indoor addresses are unset. (Unit which does not response to remote controller)

Set up address.

The power of the header unit of the group is not turned on in indoor group control. (Unit which does not response to remote controller)

Turn on the power.

Group address is set up to follower unit in the individual control. (Unit which does not response to remote controller)

Set [0] to group address in case of individual control.

The power is not turned on. (Unit which is not displayed on remote controller)

Turn on the power.

Remote controller is not connected with cable. (Unit which is not displayed on remote controller)

Correct wiring.

Miscabling of remote controller (Unit which is not displayed on remote controller)

Correct wiring.

Remote controller communication circuit error (Unit which is not displayed on remote controller) If 230V is incorrectly applied to the remote controller terminal, the remote controller communication circuit fails.

Remove FASTON terminal connected to remote controller terminals (A/B), and check the voltage. If voltage is not applied, replace P.C. board. (15 to 18V usually)

8-5-4. In check for No. of connected outdoor units and connected Indoor units after address setup, diminished No. of connected units displayed. (There are outdoor/indoor units which do not operate in a test operation.) Status

Cause

Number of connected outdoor units is short.

Miswiring of communication line between outdoor units or unconnected cable (Fig. 4) (Address setup operation has finished without recognition of miswired follower unit.)

After modification of wiring, set up address again and check No. of the connected outdoor units.

Countermeasures

Number of connected indoor units is short.

Miswiring of communication line between indoor units or unconnected cable (Fig. 5) (Address setup operation has finished without recognition of miswired indoor unit.)

After modification of wiring, set up address again and check No. of the connected indoor units.

Number of outdoor units connected to group is short in group operation from remote controller.

Remote controller is not connected with wire. Miscabling of remote controller

Using the main remote controller connected to a group, start a test operation, specify the unit which does not operate (Unit unconnected to group), and then check wiring.

Remote controller communication circuit error If 230V is incorrectly applied to the remote controller terminal, the remote controller communication circuit fails.

Using the main remote controller connected to a group, start a test operation, specify the unit which does not operate (Unit unconnected to group). Remove Fasten receptacle connected to remote controller terminals (A/B), and check the voltage. If voltage is not applied, replace P.C. board. (15 to18V in normal time)

95

Incorrect wiring example (Fig. 1) Remote controller status

Header unit 7-segment display

No response

E19-00

Incorrect example

Header unit

Header unit

U3/U4

U5/U6

Indoorunit

Indoorunit

Indoorunit

Indoorunit

(Fig. 2) Remote controller status


No response

E19-02

Incorrect example U5/U6 Header unit

Follower unit

U1/U2 Indoorunit

(Fig. 3) Remote controller status


No response

E20-01

Incorrect example

Header unit

Follower unit

Header unit

Follower unit

Header unit

Follower unit

U1/U2

U1/U2

U1/U2

U5/U6

Line 1

Line 2 U1/U2

Indoorunit

Indoorunit

Indoorunit

(Fig. 4) Status

Incorrect example

Number of connected outdoor units is short. Header unit

Follower unit

Header unit

U1/U2

U3/U4

U3/U4

Follower unit

Indoorunit

U1/U2 U1/U2 U3/U4 U5/U6

(Fig. 5) Status

Incorrect example

Number of connected outdoor units is short. Header unit

Header unit

U1/U2

U1/U2

Indoorunit

A/B Indoorunit

Indoorunit

96

Follower unit

U5/U6

U1/U2 Indoorunit

Header unit

Indoorunit

Indoorunit

U1/U2 U3/U4

8-6. Test Operation Check 8-6-1. Fan Operation Check START

Push [START/STOP] button.

When an error code has been displayed on the remote controller, refer to Section 8-5-1.

Select the operation mode [FAN].

Is air discharged from the discharge port of the indoor unit?

NO

Check indoor fan, fan motor and fan circuit. (Ensure power has been isolated before removing any covers.)

NO

Check for items in contact with fan. (Ensure power has been isolated before removing any covers.)

YES Is there any abnormal noise? YES Normal Check all indoor units in turn.

8-6-2. Cooling/Heating Test Operation Check The cooling/heating test operation check can be performed on both remote controller and outdoor interface P.C. board.

1. Test operation start/stop operation Test operation from remote controller Wired remote controller

1

When pushing TEST button for 4 seconds or more, [TEST] is displayed in the display section and the mode enters the test operation mode.

TEST

2 3

4 5

Push

ON / OFF

TEMP.

1, 5

FILTER RESET TEST

ON / OFF

TIMER SET

FAN

MODE

TIME

SWING/FIX

VENT

SET

CL

UNIT

3

button.

Using MODE button, select an operation mode either [COOL] or [HEAT]. • Do not use any other operation modes, only [COOL] or [HEAT]. • Temperature adjustment is unavailable during test operation. • Errors are detected as usual. When the test operation has finished, push The same display as that in procedure 1 appears.

ON / OFF

97

TEST

button to stop the operation.

Push TEST button to clear the test operation mode. [TEST] display disappears and the status returns to the normal stop status.

2, 4

Wireless remote controller (Except 4-way Air Discharge Cassette type, Under Ceiling type and 1-way Air Discharge Cassette type (2 Series))

1 2

3 4

Remove the screw which fixes the name plate to the receiver part on the wireless remote controller. Remove the nameplate of the receiver section by inserting a minus screwdriver, into the notch at the bottom of the plate, and set the Dip switch to [TEST RUN ON]. ON / OFF Execute a test operation with button on the wireless remote controller. • , , and LED flash during test operation. • Under status of [TEST RUN ON], the temperature adjustment from the wireless remote controller is not available. Ensure that this is not used for normal operation as equipment damage may occur.

Use either COOL or HEAT operation mode for a test operation. Receiver unit Note) The outdoor unit does not operate for approx. 3 minutes. Spacer After power-ON and after operation has stopped. M4 × 25 screw (2 pieces)

After the test operation finished, stop the air conditioner using the wireless remote controller, and return the Dip switch to its original setting. (A 60-minute timing function is designed into the sensor section in order to prevent a continuous test operation.)

Notch

Nameplate

Small screw

Wireless remote controller (4-way Air Discharge Cassette type)

1

2 3

4 5

Turn OFF the power to the air conditioner. Remove the adjust corner cap and the attached with sensor section from the ceiling panel. For removal method, follow to the installation instructions attached to the ceiling panel. (Be careful to handling the sensor section because cables are connected to the sensor.) Remove the sensor cover from the adjust corner cap. (1 screw) Change Bit [1: TEST] of the switch [S003] on the sensor P.C. board from OFF to ON. Mount the sensor cover and attach the adjust corner cap with sensors to the ceiling panel. Turn on power of the air conditioner. Push ON / OFF button of the wireless remote controller, and select an operation mode [COOL] or [HEAT] with MODE button. (All the display lamps of the wireless remote controller sensor section flash during the test operation.) • Do not use operation mode other than [COOL] or [HEAT]. • Errors are detected as usual. S003

When the test operation has finished, push button to stop the operation.

ON / OFF

ON

Bit 1 : OFF 4

3

2

1 ON

Turn off the power to the air conditioner. Sensor cover Change Bit [1] of the switch [S003] on the sensor P.C. board from ON to OFF. Adjust corner cap Attach the adjust corner cap with sensors to the ceiling panel.

Sensor P.C. board

Test operation from outdoor unit Refer to “8-7-2. Function of Start/Stop the Indoor Unit from Outdoor Unit” in “8-7. Service Support Function”. NOTE) The test operation returns to normal operation after 60 minutes have passed.

98

In case of wireless remote controller (for Under Ceiling type and 1-way Air Discharge Cassette type (2 Series)) Procedure

Description Turn on power of the air conditioner.

1 2

The operation is not accepted for 5 minutes when power has been turned on at first time after installation, and 1 minute when power has been turned on at the next time and after. After the specified time has passed, perform a test operation. Push [Start/Stop] button and change the operation mode to [COOL] or [HEAT] with [Mode] button. Then change the fan speed to [High] using [Fan] button. Test cooling operation

Test heating operation

Set temperature to [18°C] using [Temperature set] button.

Set temperature to [30°C] using [Temperature set] button.

4

After checking the receiving sound “Pi”, immediately push [Temperature set] button to set to [19°C]

After checking the receiving sound “Pi”, immediately push [Temperature set] button to set to [29°C].

5



3

Then repeat the procedure

6

4→5→4→5.

After approx. 10 seconds, all the display lamps on the sensor part of wireless remote controller, [Operation] (Green), [Timer] (Green), and [Ready] (Yellow) flash and the air conditioner starts operation. If the lamps do not flash, repeat the procedure

7

2 and after.

After the test operation, push [Start/Stop] button to stop the operation.

Outline of test operation from the wireless remote controller Test cooling operation: Start → 18°C → 19°C → 18°C → 19°C → 18°C → 19°C → 18°C → (Test operation) → Stop Test heating operation: Start → 30°C → 29°C → 30°C → 29°C → 30°C → 29°C → 30°C → (Test operation) → Stop

Be sure to set the air speed to [High]

2

3, 4, 5, 6 2, 7

99

2. Test operation

START

Refer to “Test operation procedure” of indoor remote controller.

Test operation for one indoor unit YES

Operation start

NO

YES

The operation does not start approx. 3 minutes after power-ON or after operation stopped. (NOTE) After power-ON, it may require Max. 10 minutes to start the operation due to the initial communication of the system.

Is cold air or hot air discharged?

Check operation status of the compressor.

YES Check direction of the louver.

Is air circulation good? YES Test operation for all units in turn

Execute a test operation using “Function of start/stop the indoor unit from outdoor unit” in “Service support function”.

Operate all the indoor units at once.

(NOTE 1) Is the temperature difference between suction and discharge good?

NO

YES Is the operating voltage correct? (Rated voltage ±10%)

NO

YES

• Check power voltage of the main power supply. • Check cable size of the power supply.

(NOTE 2) Is the operating current normal?

NO

YES (NOTE 3) Is the operating pressure normal?

NO

YES Normal

100

• Check temperature load of the indoor room/ outdoor ambient. • Check pipe length and refrigerant charge amount. • Check operating Hz of compressor. • Check abnormal sound in the outdoor unit. (Abnormal sound, etc of compressor and others)

(NOTE 1) Criteria for judging difference between suction and discharge temperature 1. Cooling After operation for a minimum of 30 minutes in [COOL] mode, check the dry bulb temperature difference. Temperature difference: 8°C or more between suction and discharge air of the indoor unit. (In Max-Hz operation) 2. Heating After operation for a minimum of 30 minutes in [HEAT] mode, check the dry bulb temperature difference. Temperature difference: 15°C or more between suction and discharge air of the indoor unit. (In Max-Hz operation) ∗ The temperature difference may diminish in cases of systems in which the connected indoor capacity exceeds 100%, or with long pipe length, etc.

(NOTE 2) Criteria for operating current For a test operation (with all the indoor units operating), normal operating current is shown in the following table. Outdoor unit

8HP

10HP

12HP

Current value

18

21

22

(Unit: A)

(NOTE 3) Criteria for cycle status 1. Refrigerating cycle under standard condition The refrigerating cycle under standard cooling and heating condition is as follows:

Pressure

(MPa)

Pipe surface temp

Number of compressor rotations Air temp condition

(°C)

(rps) (DB/WB) (°C)

High Low Discharge Suction Indoor heat exchanger Outdoor heat exchanger Liquid temp Compressor Compressor Indoor Outdoor

(Pd) (Ps) (TD) (TS1) (TC) (TE1) (TL) 1 2

10HP MMY-MAP1002FT8 Cool standard Heat standard 3.1 2.9 0.8 0.7 86 90 6 3 8 46 43 1 36 36 79 75 79 75 27/19 20/– 35/– 7/6

∗ This compressor is driven with 4-pole motor. The value of the compressor frequency (Hz) measured by a clamp meter is two times the rotation count (rps) of the compressor. ∗ This data is the cycle data under condition of standard pipe length and two 4-way Air Discharge Cassette type air conditioners connected. Data changes according to installed pipe length, combination of indoor units or connected indoor capacity. ∗ For a compressor, the left side is 1 and the right side is 2 viewed front the front of the unit. Even if two compressors operate, the frequency difference may set as a measures against resonance. ∗ The temperature of indoor heat exchanger (TC) indicates TCJ sensor temperature in cooling time, and TC2 sensor temperature in heating time respectively.

2. Criteria for operating pressure General criteria is as follows: All cooling operaton

All heating operation

High pressure : 2.0 to 3.2MPa

Indoor

:18 to 32°C

Low pressure : 0.5 to 0.9MPa

Outdoor :25 to 35°C

High pressure : 2.5 to 3.3MPa

Indoor

Low pressure : 0.5 to 0.7MPa

Outdoor : 5 to 10°C

When all the units operate in cooling mode

:15 to 25°C When all the units operate in heating mode

Using the rotary switch on the outdoor unit I/F, the operating pressure, cycle temperature, and compressor rotation count can be checked on the 7-segment display. Refer to “Outdoor refrigerant circuit system data display” and “Indoor cycle data display” in Section 9. Troubleshooting.

101

8-7. Service Support Function 8-7-1. Function to Start/Stop (ON/OFF) Indoor Unit from Outdoor Unit The following functions enables the start and stop of the indoor units using the switches on the interface P.C. board of the header unit. No.

Function

Outline

1

All cooling test operation

Changes the mode of all the connected indoor units collectively to cooling test operation. Note) Control operation same as test operation for remote controller.

[Setup] Push SW04 for 2 seconds or more with SW01”2”, SW02”5”, SW03”1”. [Release] Return SW01, SW02, SW03 to “1”.

Section A [C ]

Section B [ –C]

2

All heating test operation

Changes the mode of all the connected indoor units collectively to heating test operation. Note) Control operation same as test operation for remote controller.


Section A [H ]

Section B [ –H]

3

Batch start

Starts all the connected indoor units collectively. Note) The contents follow the setup of remote controller.


Section A Section B [CH] [ 11] [ 11] is displayed on Section B for 5 seconds.

Batch stop

Stops all the connected indoor units collectively.


Section A Section B [CH] [ 00] [ 00] is displayed on Section B for 5 seconds.

Individual start

Starts the specified indoor unit. Notes) • Control operation same as test. • The other indoor units keep existing status.

[Setup] Push SW04 for 2 seconds or more set SW01 “16” and set SW02 and SW03 to address No. (1 to 64) to be started. [Release] Return SW01, SW02, SW03 to “1”.

Section A Section B [ ] [ ] Section A: Displays the corresponding indoor address. Section B: Displays [ 11] for 5 seconds from operation-ON.

Individual stop

Stops the specified indoor unit. Note) The other indoor units keep existing status.

[Setup] Push SW05 for 2 seconds or more set SW01 “16” and set SW02 and SW03 to address No. (1 to 64) to be stopped. [Release] Return SW01, SW02, SW03 to “1”.

Section A Section B [ ] [ ] Section A: Displays the corresponding indoor address. Section B: Displays [ 00] for 5 seconds from operation-OFF.

[Setup] Push SW04 for 10 seconds or more set SW01 “16” and set SW02 and SW03 to address No. (1 to 64) to be operated. [Release] Return SW01, SW02, SW03 to “1”.

Section A Section B [ ] [ ] Section A: Displays the corresponding indoor address. Section B: Displays [ FF] for 5 seconds from test operation-ON.

4

Individual test Operates the specified indoor unit. operation Note) The other indoor units keep existing status.

NOTE 1) This start/stop function only sends the command signals from the outdoor unit to the indoor unit, such as start, stop, operation mode, etc. Once it does not resend the signals even if the indoor unit does not follow the sent signals. NOTE 2) The above controls are not available when an error has caused the system to stop.

Setup/Release


7-segment display

7-segment display [A] SW04

7-segment display [B] SW05

SW01 SW02 SW03 Rotary switch

102

1. All cooling test operation function This function is provided to change collectively the mode of all the indoor units connected to the same system for cooling test operation mode, using switches on the interface P.C. board of the header unit.

Operation procedure Power ON

Be sure to turn on power at the indoor side before power-ON of outdoor unit.

Set SW01 on the interface P.C. board of the header unit to [2], Sw02 to [5], and SW03 to [1] respectively. ([C ] is displayed on the 7-segment display [A].)

Push SW04 on the interface P.C. board of the header unit for 2 seconds or more.

Start

[TEST] is displayed on the remote controller of the indoor unit to be operated. Check that “ – C ” is displayed on the 7-segment display [A] [B] [B] on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit. [C ] [ –C]

Operation check

Return SW01, SW02, SW03 on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit to [1], [1], [1] respectively or push the push-switch SW05 for 2 seconds or more.

Stop/End

2. All heating test operation function This function is provided to change collectively the mode of all the indoor units connected to the same system for heating test operation mode, using switches on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit.


Be sure to turn on power at the indoor side before power-ON of outdoor unit.

Set SW01 on the interface P.C. board of the header unit to [2], Sw02 to [6], and SW03 to [1] respectively. ([H ] is displayed on the 7-segment display [A].)


Start

[TEST] is displayed on the remote controller of the indoor unit to be operated. Check that “ – H ” is displayed on the 7-segment display [A] [B] [B] on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit. [H ] [ –H]

Operation check

Return SW01, SW02, SW03 on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit to [1], [1], [1] respectively or push the push-switch SW05 for 2 seconds or more.

Stop/End





NOTE) The test operation returns to normal operation after 60 minutes.

103

3. Batch start/stop (ON/OFF) function This function is provided to start/stop collectively all the indoor units connected to the same system by using switches on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit.

Operation procedure

Power ON

Be sure to turn on power at the indoor side before power-ON of outdoor unit. If an error is already displayed under condition of SW01 [1], SW02 [1], SW03 [1], resolve the problem using the troubleshooting guide and then execute the test operation. If the operation is set “heat”, indoor unit which is set to “cool priority” will not operate or will be displayed. If the operation is set to “cool”, indoor unit which is set to “heat priority” will not operate or will be displayed.

Set up the operation mode of the remote controller. (If it is not set up, the operation continues in the current mode.) (FAN/COOL/HEAT)

Set on the interface P.C. board of the header unit SW01 to [2], Sw02 to [7], and SW03 to [1] respectively. ([CH ] is displayed on 7-segment display [A].)


Start

The indoor unit to be started operates.

Push the push-switch SW05 on the interface P.C. board of the header unit for 2 seconds or more.

Stop

After test operation, return the rotary switches SW01, SW02, and SW03 on the interface P.C. board of the header unit to [1], [1], [1] respectively.

End

104

4. Individual start/stop (ON/OFF) individual test operation function This function is provided to start/stop (ON/OFF) individually each indoor unit connected to the same system by using switches on the interface P.C. board of the header unit. Set SW01 [16] and set SW02, SW03 to indoor address No. (1 to 64) to be started (Refer to the following table∗) - only the setup indoor unit starts operation. (In the rotary switches of the indoor unit which operates in a group by the remote controller, the follower unit cannot be individually started or stopped. In this case, [ – – ] is displayed on 7-segment display [B] on the interface P.C. board of the header unit.)


Be sure to turn on power at the indoor side before power-ON of outdoor unit. If an error is already displayed under condition of SW01 [1], SW02 [1], SW03 [1], return the status to normal one according to troubleshooting and then execute a test operation. The unit which is not given with priority by heating priority control, cooling priority control, and selection of cooling or heating mode is not operated. In this case, or is displayed on the remote controller.

Set up the operation mode of the remote controller. (If it is not set up, the operation starts with the current mode.)

Match the rotary switch on the interface P.C. board of the header unit * with in the following table. (7-segment display) [A] [

[B] ]

Address display of corresponding indoor unit

[

]

[ 00] is displayed for 5 seconds after operation-ON.

Push the push-switch SW04 on the interface P.C. board of the header unit for 2 seconds or more. (If pushing this switch continuously for 10 seconds or more, the operation changes to the individual test operation.)

(7-segment display)

[A] [

]

[

[B] ]

Address display of [ 11] is displayed for corresponding indoor unit 5 seconds after operation-ON. (For individual test operation,[ FF] is displayed.)

Start

The indoor unit to be started operates.

*


SW01

SW02

SW03

16

1 to 16

1

Address 1 to Address 16

16

1 to 16

2


16

1 to 16

3


16

1 to 16

4


(7-segment display) [A] [

[B] ]

Address display of corresponding indoor unit

[

Units to be operated

]

[ 00] is displayed for 5 seconds after operation-ON.

After test operation, return the display select switches SW01, SW02, and SW03 on the interface P.C. board of the header unit to [1], [1], [1] respectively. End

NOTE) The individual test operation returns to the normal operation after 60 minutes.

105

} } } }

individually

individually

individually

individually

In individual start/stop

8-7-2. Error Clearing Function 1. Clearing from the main remote controller [Error clearing in outdoor unit] Error of the outdoor unit is cleared by the unit of one refrigerant circuit system to which the indoor units operated by the remote controller. (Error of the indoor unit is not cleared.) For clearing errors, the service monitor function of the remote controller is used.

1 2

Change the mode to service monitor mode by pushing seconds or more. Using

/

CL

+

TEST

buttons simultaneously for 4

buttons, set “FF” to item code.

The display in Section A in the following figure is counted with interval of 5 seconds as “# ” → “" ” → “! ” → “ ” → “ ” → “ ”. When the count arrives “ ”, the error is cleared. ∗ However, counting from “# ” is repeated on the display.

3

When

TEST

button is pushed, the status returns to the normal status.

Operation procedure

1®2®3

The status returns to the normal status.

CODE No.

UNIT No.

Section A

R.C.

No.

TEMP.

3 FILTER RESET TEST

ON / OFF

TIMER SET

FAN

MODE

TIME

SWING/FIX

VENT

SET

CL

2

UNIT

1

[Error clearing in indoor unit] Error in the indoor unit is cleared by

ON / OFF

button on the remote controller.

(Only error of the indoor unit connected with operating remote controller is cleared.)

106

2. Clearing from the interface P.C. board Using the switches on the interface P.C. board, this function is to clear the currently detected error for each refrigerant circuit system without resetting the power supply. (→ Restart of error detection) Errors in both outdoor and indoor units are once cleared.

(7-segment display)

Set the rotary switches on the interface P.C. board of the header unit to the following setting.

[A]

[B]

[ E

SW01=[2] SW02=[16] SW03=[1]

]

[

]


(7-segment display)

[ C L] is displayed in 7-segment display [B] on the P.C. board (for 5 seconds), and the error is completely cleared.

[A] [ E

[B] ]

[

7-segment display [A] Interface P.C. board

Push switch SW04

CL ]

7-segment display [B] Push switch SW05

SW01 SW02 SW03

3. Clearing of error check code by power reset This function is provided to clear error in a refrigerant circuit system by resetting the power of all the outdoor and the indoor units. (→ Restart of error detection) As same as the clearing method on the interface P.C. board, errors of both the outdoor and the indoor units are once cleared.

Method 1. Be sure to reset power of both the outdoor and the indoor units. NOTE) After power reset, it requires usually 3 minutes to power-on due to the initial communication of the system. In same cases, it requires Max. 10 minutes.

107

8-7-3. Remote Controller Distinction Function This function is provided to distinguish the remote controller connected from the outdoor unit to the indoor unit for a refrigerant circuit system using switches on the interface P.C. board of the header unit.

Distinction procedure

Be sure turn on the power of the indoor unit prior to the power of the outdoor unit.

Power ON

Set the display select switches on the interface P.C. board of the header unit as follows: SW01 [2]

® ® [4] SW03 ® [1]

[

(7-segment display) [A] [B] A1 ] [ ]

SW02

Operation


(7-segment display) [

TEST

display of the connected remote controller flashes.

[A] A1 ]

[

[A] FF ]

Check the connected remote controller.


End Other end conditions: 1. 10 minutes passed for sending operation 2. SW01, SW02, or SW03 changed to other position.





108

8-7-4. Pulse Motor Valve (PMV) Forced Open/Close Function in Indoor Unit This function is provided to fully open or close forcibly the PMV for 2 minutes in all indoor units, using the switch operation on the interface P.C. board of the header unit. This function is also used to open the PMV fully when turning off the power and executing an operation, for example, vacuuming.

Operation [Open fully] Set the switch SW01 on the interface P.C. board of the header unit to [2], SW02 to [3], SW03 to [1] and push SW04 for 2 seconds or more. (Display shown on 7-segment display for 2 minutes as follows.) [P ] [ FF]

[Close fully] Set the switch on the interface P.C. board of the header unit SW01 to [2], SW02 to [3], SW03 to [1] and push SW05 for 2 seconds or more. (Display shown on 7-segment display for one minute as follows.) [P ] [ 00]

[Clear] After 2 minutes (1 minutes for “Close fully”) have passed when setup has finished, the PMV automatically returns to the normal operation.

8-7-5. Pulse Motor Valve (PMV) Forced Open Fully/Close fully Function in Outdoor Unit This function is provided to fully open or close fully the P.M.V. (PMV1/PMV2/PMV3) used in the outdoor unit for 2 minutes.

[Open fully]

[Operating method]

Short-circuit CN30 on the interface P.C. board of the header unit.

Select one of PMV1 or PMV2 to open. Turn SW12 bit 1 to OFF when handling (PMV1/PMV2), and turn it to ON when selecting PMV3.

[Close fully] Short-circuit CN31 on the interface P.C. board of the header unit.

Enlarged diagram of switch position

[Clear] After 2 minutes, the opening returns to the normal operation. Be sure to remove the short circuit after confirmation. SW12 I/F P.C. board

Bit 1 Check connector CN30

Check connector CN31

109

OFF PMV1, PMV2 ON PMV3

8-7-6. Solenoid Valve Forced Open/Close Function in Outdoor Unit This function is provided to forcibly open/close each solenoid valve mounted in the outdoor unit by use of the switches provided on the outdoor unit interface P.C. board. This function confirms the operation of each solenoid valve.

[Operation] 1. On the interface P.C. board set SW01 to [2], SW02 to [1] and SW03 to [3]. 2. Confirm [H, ] is displayed on the 7-segment display [B]. Push switch SW04 for 2 seconds or more. 3. Confirm [2] is displayed on the 7-segment display - this indicates that solenoid SV2 has been switched on. 4. Each solenoid can be operated by selecting the appropriate SW02 position as shown in the table below. (ON/OFF output pattern of each solenoid valve is as below.) NOTE 1) Be aware that there is a 5 second delay in the operation of the selected solenoid valve after SW02 has been set. NOTE 2) The mark [¡] in the table indicates the selected solenoid valve is forced on. NOTE 3) The mark [—] in the table indicates the selected solenoid mode will depend on the specifications of the air conditioner. NOTE 4) The mark [ ] in the table indicates the selected solenoid valve has been turned off. NOTE 5) The case heater relay output operates both compressor and accumulator heaters.

×

Operation pattern of solenoid valve


SV2

SV5

1

[ ... 2 ...]

¡

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

¡

¡

2

[ ... 5 ...]

—

¡

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

¡

¡

3

[ ... 6 — ]

—

—

¡

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

¡

¡

4

[ ... 1 1 ]

—

—

—

¡

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

¡

¡

5

[ ... 1 2 ]

—

—

—

—

¡

—

—

—

—

—

—

¡

¡

6

[ ... 4 1 ]

—

—

—

—

—

¡

—

—

—

—

—

¡

¡

7

[ ... 4 2 ]

—

—

—

—

—

—

¡

—

—

—

—

¡

¡

8

[ ... 4 — ]

—

—

—

—

—

¡

¡

—

—

—

—

¡

¡

9

[ ... 3 A ]

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

¡

—

—

—

¡

¡

10

[ ... 3 b ]

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

¡

—

—

¡

¡

11

[ ... 3 C ]

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

¡

—

¡

¡

12

[ ... 3 d ]

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

¡

¡

¡

13

[ ... 3 E ]

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

×

¡

14

[ ... 3 — ]

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

¡

¡

¡

—

¡

¡

15

[ ... ... ... ]

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

¡

¡

16

[A L L]

¡

¡

¡

¡

¡

¡

¡

¡

¡

¡

¡

¡

¡

SW02

Case heater SV6 SV11 SV12 SV41 SV42 SV3A SV3B SV3C SV3D SV3E

[Clear] Return settings on SW01, SW02, and SW03 to (1/1/1) on the Interface P.C. board. NOTE) Ensure this function is cleared to return the air conditioner to normal operation.

110

8-7-7. Fan Operation Check in Outdoor Unit This function is provided to check the fan operation on the interface P.C. board in the outdoor unit. The frequency of the fan speed can be controlled. Therefore utilize this function to check the operation or abnormal sound in the fan system. NOTE) Do not use this function during operation of the compressor. It may damage the compressor.

[Operation] 1. 2. 3. 4.

Set the switch on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit SW01 to [2], SW02 to [1], SW03 to [4]. When [F. d] is displayed in 7-segment display [A], keep pushing the switch SW04 for 2 seconds or more. From when fan step [ 31] is displayed in 7-segment display [B], the fan starts operation. (Max. step operation) After then, 7-segment display [B] and the fan step are changed by changing the setup number of the switches SW02 and SW03. (Output pattern of the fan is as follows.)

SW01

SW02

SW03


Fan step

1

[ 31 ]

31

2

[ 30 ]

3


Fan step

1

[ 15 ]

15

30

2

[ 14 ]

14

[ 29 ]

29

3

[ 13 ]

13

4

[ 28 ]

28

4

[ 12 ]

12

5

[ 27 ]

27

5

[ 11 ]

11

6

[ 26 ]

26

6

[ 10 ]

10

7

[ 25 ]

25

7

[

9 ]

9

[ 24 ]

24

[

8 ]

8

8 2

SW01

SW02

SW03

8

4

2

5

9

[ 23 ]

23

9

[

7 ]

7

10

[ 22 ]

22

10

[

6 ]

6

11

[ 21 ]

21

11

[

5 ]

5

12

[ 20 ]

20

12

[

4 ]

4

13

[ 19 ]

19

13

[

3 ]

3

14

[ 18 ]

18

14

[

2 ]

2

15

[ 17 ]

17

15

[

1 ]

1

16

[ 16 ]

16

16

[

0 ]

0

[Clear] This function is cleared by one of the following operations. 1. When SW01 setting number was changed to other number. 2. Push-switch SW05 was pushed for 2 seconds or more.

111

8-7-8. Abnormal Outdoor Unit Discrimination Method This function is provided to forcedly operate the fan of the outdoor unit in which an error occurred or the fan of the normal outdoor unit by the switch operation on the interface P.C. board in the header unit. To specify which one of the follower units connected to the system was faulty, use this function for the system stop due to a follower unit fault (Check code [E28]).

[Operation] In case to operate the fan in the erroneous outdoor unit only 1. Check all the switches, SW01, SW02, and SW03 on the interface P.C. board in the header unit are set to [1]. 7-segment display [A] [B]

Outdoor unit No.

Error code display

2. Push the push-switch SW04 for 2 seconds or more. 3. “E 1” is displayed on 7-segment display [A]. 4. The fan of the outdoor unit in which error occurred starts operation within approx. 10 seconds when “E 1” was displayed.

In case to operate the fans in all the normal outdoor units 1. 2. 3. 4.

Check all the switches, SW01, SW02, and SW03 on the interface P.C. board are set to [1/1/1]. Push the push-switches SW04 and SW05 at the same time for 2 seconds or more. “E 0” is displayed on 7-segment display [A]. The fans of all the normal outdoor units start operation with the Max. fan speed within approx. 10 seconds when “E 0” was displayed.

[Release] Push the push-switch SW05 on the interface P.C. board in the header unit for 2 seconds or more. The outdoor fan which was operated stops. * Check [U. 1] is displayed on 7-segment display [A], and then finish the work.

112

8-7-9. Manual Adjustment Function of Outside Temp (TO) Sensor This function is provided to fix TO sensor value manually by the switch operation on the interface P.C. board in the outdoor unit. When the unit stops abnormally due to TO sensor failure, etc, an emergent operation is available by set up the value manually to position near the current outside temperature.

[Operation] 1. Set the rotary switches on the interface P.C. board to numbers as follows. • SW01 [2] / SW02 [1] / SW03 [15] • 7-segment display: [t o] 2. Keep pushing the push-switch SW04 on the interface P.C. board for 1 second or more. The mode changes to the TO sensor value fix manual mode. 3. As shown in the following table, TO sensor value can be fixed by setting the rotary switch SW02 on the interface P.C. board. SW01 SW02 SW03 7-segment display [B] TO sensor value

SW01 SW02 SW03 7-segment display [B] TO sensor value

1

[

10

]

10°C

9

[

45

]

45°C

2

[

15

]

15°C

10

[

– 15

]

–15°C

3

[

20

]

20°C

11

[

– 10

]

–10°C

[

25

]

25°C

[ – 5

]

–5°C

4 2

12

15

2

15

5

[

30

]

30°C

13

[

0

]

0°C

6

[

35

]

35°C

14

[

2

]

2°C

7

[

40

]

40°C

15

[

5

]

5°C

8

[

43

]

43°C

16

[

7

]

7°C

NOTE) Emergent operation should be restricted to one day or so on. If operating TO sensor fixed with this function, the system control operation of the air conditioner may not become one based upon the specification of the product. Therefore an emergent operation should be restricted to a day or so on.

[Clear] Return numbers of SW01, SW02, and SW03 on the interface P.C. board in the header unit to [1/1/1] each.

Service support function list SW01 SW02 SW03 7-segment display [A] 1

[

J

C

]

Refrigerant circuit and control communication line check function (Cooling operation)

2

[

J

H

]

Refrigerant circuit and control communication line check function (Heating operation)

3

[

P

]

Indoor PMV forced full open function

[

A

]

Indoor remote controller discriminating function

5

[

C

]

Cooling test operation function

6

[

H

]

Heating test operation function

7

[

C

H

]

Indoor collective start/stop (ON/OFF) function

16

[

E

r

]

Error clear function

[

H

r

]

Solenoid valve forced open/close function

[

F

d

]

Fan forced operation function

[

t

o

]

Outside temp sensor manual adjustment function

4 2

1 to 16 4 to 5 15

16

1

1

3 2

Function contents

1

[ 0 1 ] to [ 1 6 ]

Indoor No. 1 to 16 unit

2

[ 1 7 ] to [ 3 2 ]

Indoor No.17 to 32 unit

3

[ 3 3 ] to [ 4 8 ]


4

[ 4 9 ] to [ 6 4 ]


1 to 16

Indoor individual start/stop (ON/OFF) function

113

8-7-10. Indoor Fan Operation Check Function This function is provided to check operation of single indoor unit without using communication with the remote controller or outdoor unit. This function can be used regardless operating or stopping of the system. However, if this function is used for a long time, a trouble of the air conditioner may be caused. Therefore using of this function should be restricted to several minutes.

[Operation] 1. Short-circuit CHK pin (CN71 on the indoor P.C. board). If short-circuiting DISP pin (CN72 on the indoor P.C. board) while short-circuiting CHK pin (CN71 on the indoor P.C. board), the indoor PMV only becomes the minimum opening (30 pulse). When opening DISP pin, it becomes the maximum opening again.

[Clear] Open CHK pin. If the system is operating, it stops once but automatically restart after several minutes. ∗ For the details of CHK pin (CN71 on indoor P.C. board) and DISP pin (CN72 on indoor P.C. board), refer to 11. Control circuit configuration, Indoor unit 2, Indoor P.C. board MCC-1402 and MCC-1403.

8-7-11. Indoor Fan Only Operating Mode When operating an air conditioner with indoor units and remote controller only in fan operation etc., this function can be used. A group operation is also available.

[Operation] 1) Short circuit DISP pin (CN72 on the indoor P.C. board). However, if CHK pin (CN71 on the indoor P.C. board) has been previously short circuited, this function is unavailable. 2) In a group operation, set up a group as usual. 3) While DISP pin is short circuited, all the sensor error judgment operation and communication with the outdoor unit are not performed. PMV is fixed to the Max. opening.

[Clear] Open DISP pin.

114

8-7-12. Monitor Function of Remote Controller Switch When using a remote controller with the model name RBC-ATM21E, the following monitor functions can be used.

Calling of display screen [Contents] The temperature or the operation status of the remote controller, indoor unit, or each sensor of the outdoor unit can be known by calling up the service monitor mode from the remote controller.

[Procedure]

2 3 4

Push CL + TEST buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds or more to call up the service monitor mode. The service monitor goes on, and temperature of the item code is firstly displayed.

Push UNIT button to change the item to one to be monitored. Then monitor the indoor unit and sensor temperature or operation status in the corresponding refrigerant line. Pushing display.

Indoor unit data (NOTE 2)

Item code

System data

CODE No.

UNIT No.

TEMP.

Push the temperature setup / buttons to select the item number (Item code) to be monitored. For displayed codes, refer to the table below.

TEST

button returns the display to the normal

4 1

FILTER RESET TEST

ON / OFF

TIMER SET

FAN

MODE

TIME

SWING/FIX

VENT

SET

CL

2 3

UNIT

Operation procedure

1®2®3®4

Returns to the normal display

Data name

Unit

00

Room temp (During control)

°C

01

Room temp (Remote controller)

°C

Display format

02

Indoor suction temp (TA)

°C

×1

03

Indoor coil temp (TCJ)

°C

×1

04

Indoor coil temp (TC2)

°C

×1

05

Indoor coil temp (TC1)

°C

×1

06

Indoor discharge temp (Tf) (NOTE 1)

°C

×1

08

Indoor PMV opening

pulse

× 1/10

0A


unit

0b

Total HP of connected indoor units

HP

0C


unit

0d

Total HP of outdoor units

HP

Item code

Outdoor unit individual data (NOTE 4, 5)

1

× 10

× 10

Data name

Unit

Display format

10

Compressor 1 discharge temp (Td1)

°C

×1

11

Compressor 2 discharge temp (Td2)

°C

×1

12

High-pressure sensor detention pressure (Pd)

MPa

× 100

13

Low-pressure sensor detention pressure (Ps)

MPa

× 100

14

Suction temp (TS)

°C

×1

15

Outdoor heat exchanger temp (TE)

°C

×1

16

Temp at liquid side (TL)

°C

×1

17

Outside ambient temp (TO)

°C

×1

18

Low-pressure saturation temp (TU)

°C

×1

19

Compressor 1 current (I1)

A

× 10

1A

Compressor 2 current (I2)

1b

PMV1 + 2 opening

1d

A

× 10

pulse

× 1/10

Compressor 1, 2 ON/OFF

—

(NOTE 3)

1E

Outdoor fan mode

—

0 to 31

1F

Outdoor unit HP

HP

×1

(NOTE 1) Only a part of indoor unit types is installed with the discharge temperature sensor. This temperature is not displayed for other types. (NOTE 2) When the units are connected to a group, data of the header indoor unit only can be displayed. (NOTE 3) 01 : Compressor 1 only is ON. 10 : Compressor 2 only is ON. 11 : Both compressor 1 and 2 are ON. (NOTE 4) The item codes are described as the example of the header unit. (NOTE 5) The upper digit of an item code represents the outdoor unit number. 1 : Header unit (A) 2 : Follower unit (B) 3 : Follower unit (C)

115

9. TROUBLESHOOTING 9-1. Troubleshooting Summary 1. Before troubleshooting 1) Applied models Super Heat Recovery Multi type models (Indoor unit: MMX-APXXX, Outdoor unit: MMY-MAPXXXFT8) 2) Required tools / measuring devices • Screwdrivers (Philips, Flat), spanner, longnose pliers, nipper, push pin for reset switch, etc. • Digital multimeter, thermometer, pressure gauge, etc. 3) Confirmation before check (The following items are not troubles.) No.

Operation

1

Compressor does not operate.

• • • •

2

Indoor fan does not work.

• Is cold draft prevention control operating at heating mode?

3

Outdoor fan does not rotate, or fan speed changes.

• Is it in low ambient cooling control? • Is a defrost operation being performed?

4

Indoor fan does not stop.

• Is the fan operating to remove residual heat after heating operation?

5

Start/stop operation on remote controller is unavailable.

• Is an auxiliary unit or remote controller being operated?

6

None

Check items Is it delayed for 3 minutes? (3 minutes after compressor-OFF) Is thermostat OFF? Is the fan operating or timer? Is the system initially communicating? Heating operation cannot be performed under the condition that the outside temperature is 21°C or higher. Cooling operation cannot be performed under the condition that the outside temperature is –5°C or lower.

• Are the wire connections on the indoor units and remote controllers correct?

2. Troubleshooting procedure When a fault has occurred, follow the procedure detailed below.

Trouble

Check the check display on the interface P.C. board of the header unit.

Check position or part in which trouble occurred.

NOTE) A malfunction of the microprocessor may be caused by power supply inconsistencies and external noise. If there are any noise sources, move remote controller and signal wires away from the noise sources or shield them.

116

9-2. Check Method If an trouble occurs, the error code can be retrieved from the main remote controller/central remote controller (LCD display) or the header unit interface P.C. board (7-segment display). Using this self diagnostic function, the trouble can be identified using the table below.

Check code list The following list shows all fault codes. • If check code is from indoor remote controller: See “Main remote controller display” in the list. • If check code is from outdoor unit: See “Outdoor 7-segment display” in the list. • If check code is from AI-NET central control remote controller: See “AI-NET central control display” in the list. • If check code is from indoor unit with wireless remote controller: See “Sensor display of receiving unit” in the list. IPDU: Intelligent Power Drive Unit ¡ : Lighting, : Flashing, l : Goes off ALT.: Flashing is alternately when there are two flashing LED. SIM: Simultaneous flashing when there are two flashing LED

¤

Check code Main remote controller display

Outdoor 7-segment display Auxiliary code

Wireless remote controller Sensor block display of receiving unit AI-NET central control display Operation Timer Ready Flash

E01

—

—

—

E02

—

—

—

l l l

l l l

Communication error between indoor and remote controller (Detected at remote controller side)

Remote controller

Remote controller transmission error

Remote controller

Communication error between indoor and remote controller (Detected at indoor side)

Indoor

¤ ¤ ¤

Communication circuit error between indoor/outdoor (Detected at indoor side)

Indoor

—

—

97

E04

—

—

04

l

l

No. of indoor units in which E06 sensor has been normally received

04

l

l

E07

—

l

l l l l

— E08

—

E08 Duplicated indoor addresses

96

E09

—

—

99

E10

—

—

CF

E12

01: Indoor/Outdoor communication E12 02: Communication between outdoor units

42

E15

E15

42

E16

00: Capacity over E16 01 ~: No. of connected units

—

Detecting device

¤ ¤ ¤

E03

E06

Check code name

¤ ¤ ¤ ¤

l l l

l

l

l

l

89

l

l

¤ ¤

Decrease of No. of indoor units

I/F

Communication circuit error between indoor/outdoor (Detected at outdoor side)

I/F

Duplicated indoor addresses Duplicated main remote controllers Communication error between indoor MCU

Indoor / I/F Remote controller Indoor

Automatic address start error

I/F

Indoor is nothing during automatic addressing

I/F

Capacity over / No. of connected indoor units

I/F

97, 99

¤

l

l

Communication error between indoor units

E19

00: Header is nothing E19 02: Two or more header units

96

l

l

¤

Outdoor header units quantity error

I/F

E20

E20

01: Outdoor of other line connected 02: Indoor of other line connected

42

l

l

Other line connected during automatic address

I/F

E23

E23

—

15

—

15

Duplicated follower outdoor addresses

I/F

E26

of outdoor units which E26 No. received signal normally

15

Decrease of No. of connected outdoor units

I/F

E28

E28 Detected outdoor unit number

d2

l l l l

I/F

E25

l l l l

Sending error in communication between outdoor units

E25

¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤

Follower outdoor unit error

I/F

E31

01: 02: 03: E31 04: 05: 06: 07:

CF

l

l

¤

IPDU communication error

I/F

E18

—

—

IPDU1 error IPDU2 error IPDU1, 2 error Fan IPDU error IPDU + Fan IPDU error IPDU2 + Fan IPDU error All IPDU error

117

Indoor




F01

—

—

0F

F02

—

—

0d

¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤

F03

—

—

93

F04

F04

—

19

F05

F05

—

A1

F06

F06

—

18

F07

F07

—

18

F08

F08

—

1b

F10

—

—

OC

F12

F12

—

A2

F13

F13

01: Comp. 1 side 02: Comp. 2 side

43

F15

F15

—

18

F16

F16

—

43

F23

F23

—

43

F24

F24

—

43

F29

—

—

12

F31

F31

—

1C

H01

01: Comp. 1 side H01 02: Comp. 2 side

IF

l

H02

H02


1d

l

H03

H03


17

l

H04

H04

—

44

H06

H06

—

20

H07

H07

—

d7

H08

01: 02: H08 03: 04:

H14

H14

H16

01: 02: H16 03: 04:

TK1 sensor error TK2 sensor error TK3 sensor error TK4 sensor error — TK1 oil circuit system error TK2 oil circuit system error TK3 oil circuit system error TK4 oil circuit system error

d4

l

44

l

d7

l

L03

—

—

96

L04

L04

—

96

L05

—

—

96

L06

L06 No. of indoor units with priority

l l l

96

¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤

—

—

99

L08

L08

—

99

L09

—

—

46

L10

L10

—

88

L17

L17

—

46

L18

L18

—

8A

L20

L20

—

98

L28

L28

—

46

L29

01: 02: 03: L29 04: 05: 06: 07:

IPDU1 error IPDU2 error IPDU3 error Fan IPDU error IPDU1 + Fan IPDU error IPDU2 + Fan IPDU error All IPDU error

CF

¤

¡

L30 Detected indoor address

b6

¤

¡

L31

—

—

—

Detecting device

ALT

Indoor TCJ sensor error

Indoor

ALT

Indoor TC2 sensor error

Indoor

ALT


Indoor

ALT

TD1 sensor error

ALT

TD2 sensor error

I/F

ALT

TE1 sensor error

I/F

ALT

TL sensor error

I/F

ALT

TO sensor error

ALT

Indoor TA sensor error

¡

ALT

TS1 sensor error

I/F

¡

ALT

TH sensor error

IPDU

¡ ¡ ¡ ¡

ALT

Outdoor temp. sensor miscabling (TE, TL)

I/F

ALT

Outdoor pressure sensor miscabling (Pd, Ps)

I/F

ALT

Ps sensor error

I/F

ALT

Pd sensor error

¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡

l

l ¡

SIM Indoor other error SIM Indoor EEPROM error

l

Compressor break down

l

Magnet switch error Overcurrent relay operation Compressor trouble (lock)

l

Current detect circuit system error

l l l

I/F

I/F Indoor

I/F Indoor I/F IPDU MG-SW Overcurrent relay IPDU IPDU

Comp 1 case thermo operation

I/F

Low pressure protective operation

I/F

Oil level down detective protection

I/F

l

Oil level detective temp sensor error

I/F

l

Comp 2 case thermo operation

I/F

l

Oil level detective circuit error Magnet switch error Overcurrent relay operation

¤ l ¤ ¤ ¡ ¤ ¤ l ¤ ¤ l ¤ ¤ l ¤ ¤ l ¤ ¤ l ¤ ¤ ¡ ¤ ¤ ¡ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¡ ¤ ¤ ¡ ¤

L07

L30

l l l

Check code name

SIM Indoor center unit duplicated

I/F MG-SW Overcurrent relay Indoor

SIM Outdoor line address duplicated

I/F

indoor units with priority SIM Duplicated (Displayed in indoor unit with priority)

I/F

indoor units with priority SIM Duplicated (Displayed in unit other than indoor unit with priority)

I/F

SIM Group line in individual indoor unit SIM Indoor group/Address unset SIM Indoor capacity unset

Indoor Indoor, I/F Indoor

SIM Outdoor capacity unset

I/F

SIM Inconsistency error of outdoor units

I/F

SIM FS unit error

FS unit

SIM Duplicated central control addresses

AI-NET, Indoor

SIM Over No. of connected outdoor units

I/F

¤

SIM No. of IPDU error

I/F

¤

SIM Indoor outside interlock

—

Extended I/C error

118

Indoor I/F




P01

—

—

11

P03

P03

—

1E

P04

01: Comp. 1 side P04 02: Comp. 2 side

21

P05

P05

01: Phase-missing detection 02: Phase error

AF

P07

P07


IC

P10

P10 Detected indoor address

Ob

P12

—

—

11

P13

P13

—

47

P15

01: TS condition P15 02: TD condition

AE

P17

P17

P19

P19 Detected outdoor unit number

O8

P20

P20

22

—

[ [

C

[

3

D E

[

P22

1

[

P22

[

— 0

: IGBT short : Fan motor position detective circuit error : Fan motor trouble : TH sensor temp. error (Heat sink overheat) : TH sensor error : Vdc output error

bb

1A

¤ ¤ ¤ ¤

¤ ¤ l ¤ l ¤ l ¤ l ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ l ¤ l ¤ l ¤ l ¤

¤

l

¤

¤ ¤ ¤

l

¤ ¤ ¤

l

¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ l l l

P26

P26


14

P29

P29


16

P31

P31

—

47

—

—

—

b7

By alarm device

—

—

—

97

—

—

—

99

l l

Check code name

Detecting device

ALT

Indoor fan motor error

ALT

Discharge temp. TD1 error

Indoor

ALT

High-pressure SW system operation

IPDU

ALT

Phase-missing detection /Phase error

I/F

ALT

Heat sink overheat error

I/F

IPDU, I/F

ALT

Indoor overflow error

Indoor

ALT


Indoor

ALT

Outdoor liquid back detection error

I/F

ALT

Gas leak detection

I/F

ALT

Discharge temp. TD2 error

I/F

ALT

4-way valve inverse error

I/F

ALT

High-pressure protective operation

I/F

ALT

Outdoor fan IPDU error

IPDU

ALT

G-TR short protection error

IPDU

ALT

Comp position detective circuit system error

IPDU

ALT

Other indoor unit error (Group terminal unit error)

Indoor

ALT

Error in indoor group

AI-NET

—

AI-NET communication system error

AI-NET

—

Duplicated network adapters

AI-NET

Error detected by TCC-LINK central control device Check code Central control device indication



Check code name

Detecting device

C05

—

—

—

—

Sending error in TCC-LINK central control device

TCC-LINK

C06

—

—

—

—

Receiving error in TCC-LINK central control device

TCC-LINK

C12

—

—

—

—

Batch alarm of general-purpose equipment General-purpose equipment control interface I/F

P30

Differs according to error contents of unit with occurrence of alarm —

—

(L20 is displayed.)

119

Group control branching unit error Duplicated central control addresses

TCC-LINK

New check code 1. Difference between the TCC LINK and AI-NET check code The displaying method of the check code changes in this model and onwards. AI-NET check code Used characters

Hexadecimal notation, 2 digits

Characteristics of code classification

Few classification of communication/ incorrect setup system

Block display

Indoor P.C. board, Outdoor P.C. board, Cycle, Communication

Display in wired remote controller

TCC Link Alphabet + Decimal notation, 2 digits

| | Many classification of communication/incorrect setup system | | | Communication/Incorrect setup (4 ways), Indoor protection, | Outdoor protection, Sensor, Compressor protection, etc. | | |→ Display Classification A

Unused

C

Central control system error

E

Communication system error

F

Each sensor error (Failure)

H

Compressor protective system error

Display on 7-segment in outdoor unit

J

Unused

• Unit No. and check code are displayed. • In a case of error with auxiliary code, the check code and the auxiliary code are displayed alternately.

L

Setup error, Other errors

P

Protective device operation

• [ ] is displayed. • [UNIT No.] + Check code + Operation lamp (Green) flash

Display on sensor part in wireless remote controller • Block display of combination of [

][

][

]

2. Special mention 1) If this model is connected to AI-NET by network adaptor, the different check codes are displayed on the main remote controller and AI-NET central control remote controller. Example) Indoor TA sensor error

AI-NETWORK BUS

Network adaptor

Indoorunit

OC

F10

AI-NET central control remote controller


2) The check code of the remote controller is displayed only while the air conditioner is operating (remote controller start button ON). When the air conditioner has stopped and the error has been cleared, the check code display on the remote controller also disappears. However, if the error continues after the unit has stopped, the check code is immediately displayed when the unit is restarted.

120

9-3. Troubleshooting by Check Display on Remote Controller In case of wired remote controller (RBC-AMT31E) 1. Confirmation and check When a trouble occurs in the air conditioner, the check code and the indoor unit No. are displayed on the of the remote controller. The check code is displayed while the air conditioner operates. If the display has disappeared, operate the air conditioner and check the error based upon the following “Confirmation of error history”.

CODE No.

UNIT No.

R.C.

Check code

No.

Indoor unit No. in which an error occurred

2. Confirmation of error history If a trouble occurs in the air conditioner, the error history can be found with the following procedure. (Up to 4 error histories are stored in the memory.) This history can be confirmed from either operating status or stop status.

TEMP.

2 FILTER RESET TEST

ON / OFF

TIMER SET

FAN

MODE

TIME

SWING/FIX

VENT

SET

CL

UNIT

1

3 Procedure

Description When pushing

SET

and

TEST

buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds or more, the below display appears.

If [Service Check] is displayed, the mode enters the error history mode.

1

• [01: Error history order] is displayed in code number window. UNIT No.

• [Indoor unit address with error] is displayed in UNIT No.

R.C.

Each successive push of the temp. set displayed in order.

2

/

The numbers in item code indicates item code [01] (most recent) to [04] (Oldest). CAUTION

After confirmation, push

TEST

button to return to the usual display.

121

No.

buttons, the error histories stored in the memory are

If [CL] button is pushed all of the error histories of the indoor unit will be deleted.

3

CODE No.

• [Check Code] is displayed in code number window.

In case of central remote controller (TCB-SC642TLE)

ZONE ALL ZONE GROUP


R.C.

UNIT No.

TEST

No.

GROUP SELECT

ZONE

CL

SET

1. Confirmation and check When a trouble occurred on the air conditioner, the check code and the indoor unit No. are displayed on the display section of the remote controller. The check code is displayed while the air conditioner operates. If the display disappeared, operate the air conditioner and check the error based upon the following “Confirmation of error history”. Unit No display

Alarm display

UNIT No. Alternate flashing display R.C

No.

2. Confirmation of error history When a trouble occurred on the air conditioner, the error history can be confirmed with the following procedure. (Up to 4 error histories are stored in memory.) This history can be confirmed from either operating or stop. 1) Push

and

SET

buttons in succession for 4 seconds or more.

2) SERVICE CHECK

goes on and Item code 01 goes on.

3) When selecting (flash) the group number if there is the alarm history, the UNIT number and the latest alarm history are displayed alternately. * In this time, the temperature cannot be set up. 4) To confirm the alarm history other than the latest one, push temp. set code (01 to 04).

/

to select Item

GROUP

5) To confirm the alarm in the other group, push Do not push

CL

ZONE

and

to select the group number

button because all the alarm histories of the currently selected group are deleted.

6) To finish the service check, push

button.

Unit No display

Alarm display

UNIT No. Alternate flashing display R.C

No.

122

In case of AI-NET central remote controller 1. Operation for CHECK display When pushing the CHECK switch, the indoor unit No. (Network address No.) including the check data is displayed in the UNIT No. display section, and the check code is displayed in the set up temp. display section.

CHECK switch

ON MONITOR ZONE SET ALL

ON OFF

UNIT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 MONITOR/SET ALL/ZONE

ZONE

UNIT

ZONE SET/ENTER SELECT

CENTER LOCKED MODE FAN ONLY COOL DRY HEAT AUTO

ON CENTER/LOCKED MODE OFF

TIMER ON

Push for 0.5 seconds to display CHECK code. Push for 3 seconds to reset indoor microprocessor. (While indoor microprocessor is locked by ALL STOP alarm) Push for 10 seconds to clear check data.

AUX. TYPE STANDBY TIMER No. FILTER FAN TEMP. CHECK AUTO 1 ˚C HIGH 2 MED. LOW LOUVER FIX MANUAL TEMP. FILTER RESET CHECK

FAN

RESET switch

LOUVER

Push the switch in the hole with pin. The remote controller resets initialized. (All data is cleared.)

2. Reading of CHECK monitor display

7 segment display Hexadecimal notation 0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

Decimal notation

Display on CHECK monitor Unit line No. (Network address No.)

MONITOR ZONE SET ALL

UNIT

ON OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64

CENTER LOCKED MODE FAN ONLY COOL DRY HEAT AUTO

AUX. TYPE STANDBY TIMER No. FILTER FAN TEMP. CHECK AUTO 1 ˚C HIGH 2 MED. LOW LOUVER FIX MANUAL

(Example) There is no check data.

Check code detected at first Check code detected at last

UNIT TEMP. CHECK

CHECK data

(Example) In No.1 unit, first the interconnection wire (bus communication line) of indoor/outdoor has failed. Next, the room temp. sensor is defective. For No.16 unit, the high pressure switch at the inverter unit side operates. UNIT

UNIT

UNIT

TEMP. CHECK 1

TEMP. CHECK 2

123

TEMP. CHECK 1

9-4. Check Code and Check Position Displayed on the Remote Controller and Outdoor Unit (7-Segment Display of Interface) Check code Detected Outdoor 7-segment display Main AI-NET position remote central control controller Check code remote controller Sub-code

Check code name

Status

Error detection condition

Check item (position)

• • • • •

Check remote controller inter-unit cable (A/B). Check disconnection, connector contact error. Check indoor power supply. Check indoor P.C. board error. Check remote controller address setup. (When two remote controllers operate) • Check remote controller P.C. board.

124

E01

—

—

—

Remote Communication error between Corresponding Communication interrupted unit only stops. between indoor P.C. board controller indoor and remote controller and remote controller. (Detected at remote controller side)

E02

—

—

—

Remote Remote controller sending error controller

E03

—

—

97

Indoor unit Communication error between indoor and remote controller (Detected at indoor side)

• Check remote controller and communication adapter wiring. Corresponding No communication from unit only stops. remote controller (including wireless) and communication adapter.

E04

—

—

4

Indoor unit Indoor/outdoor communication circuit error (Detected at indoor side)

Corresponding Indoor unit does not receive unit only stops. communication from outdoor unit.

E06

E06

No. of indoor units which received signal normally

4

I/F

Decreased number of indoor units

All stop

When signal is not sent for a certain period from the indoor unit which has been used to send signals, [E06] is normally displayed.

—

E07

—

—

I/F

Indoor/outdoor communication circuit error (Detected at outdoor side)

All stop

Transmission from outdoor to • Check outdoor terminator resistor setup (SW30-2). indoor cannot continue for 30 • Check the communication connection between indoor and outdoor. seconds.

E08

E08

96

Indoor I/F

Duplicated indoor addresses

All stop

Multiple indoor unit address setup are duplicated.

E09

—

—

99

E10

—

—

CF


Remote Duplicated master remote controller controllers

Indoor unit Communication error between indoor P.C. board assembly

Corresponding Signal could not be sent from • Check the communication wire of remote controller: Exchange remote controller. unit only stops. remote controller to indoor unit.

• • • •

Check power-ON order of indoor/outdoor. Check indoor address setup. Check inter-unit cabling between indoor and outdoor. Check outdoor end terminal resistance setup (SW30-2).

• • • • • •

Check the power supply of indoor unit. (Power-ON) Check connection of communication line between indoor and outdoor. Check connector connection for communication in indoor P.C. board. Check connector connection for communication in outdoor P.C. board. Check indoor P.C. board failure. Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) failure.

• Check indoor address. • Check the change of remote controller connection (Group / individual) after setup of indoor address.

Corresponding In 2-remote controller control • Check remote controller setup. unit only stops. (including wireless), both are • Check remote controller P.C. board. setup as master (Header indoor unit stops and other indoor unit is operating.) Corresponding There is any trouble in power unit only stops. line.

• Indoor P.C. board failure

Check code Main Outdoor 7-segment display remote Sub-code controller Check code E12

E12

E15

E15

E16

E16

01: Indoor/outdoor communication 02: Between outdoors communication —

00: Capacity over 01 to: No. of connected units

Detected AI-NET central control position remote controller

Check code name

Status



42

I/F


All stop

• When indoor automatic address started, other refrigerant circuit system was setting automatic address. • When outdoor automatic address started, indoor automatic address was executed.

• Setup the address again after disconnecting communication connection with other refrigerant circuit system.

42

I/F

No corresponding indoor unit during automatic address

All stop

Indoor unit is not found when indoor automatic address • Check the communication line connection between indoor and outdoor. start was set up. • Check the electric power line error in indoor. • Check the noise of surrounding devices. • Power failure • Check indoor P.C. board error.

89

I/F

No. of connected indoor units / Capacity over

All stop

• Total capacity of indoor units exceeded 135% of total • Check the connection capacity of indoor unit. outdoor capacity. • Check the HP capacity of indoor unit. • No. of connected indoor units are more than 48 units. • Check the indoor/outdoor capacity setup • Check the No. of connected indoor units. [Note] If this code appears after backup setup of outdoor unit • Check the outdoor I/F P.C. board error trouble, set up “No. capacity-over detection”. Setup method of “No. capacity-over detection” Turn on SW09/Bit 2 on I/F P.C. board of outdoor header unit.

125

E18

—

—

97, 99

Indoor unit

Communication error between indoor header and follower units

Corresponding Regular communication between indoor header and unit only stops. follower units

E19

E19

00: No header unit 02: Two or more header units

96

I/F

Outdoor unit quantity error

All stop

• There are multiple outdoor units in 1 line. • There is none of outdoor unit in 1 line.

E20

E20

01: Connection of outdoor of other line 02: Connection of indoor of other line

42

I/F

Other line unit connected during automatic address

All stop

Unit of other line was connected when indoor automatic Separate the cable between lines according to automatic address started. address setup method in “Address setup”.

E23

E23

—

15

I/F

Communication sending error between outdoor units

All stop

Transmission of other outdoor unit was unavailable for 30 seconds or more.

In this model, only one outdoor unit is provided to one refrigerant line. Be sure to check there is no communication connection with outdoor unit in the other refrigerant line.

E25

E25

—

15

I/F

Duplicated outdoor follower address setup

All stop

Outdoor addresses manually set up are duplicated.

Note) Do not set up the outdoor address manually.

E26

E26

No. of normally received outdoor units

15

I/F

Decreased number of connected outdoor units

All stop

The signal was not returned for constant from the outdoor unit which was receiving signal.

In this model, only one outdoor unit is provided to one refrigerant line. Be sure to check there is no communication connection with outdoor unit in the other refrigerant line.

E28

E28

No. of detected outdoor units

d2

I/F

Outdoor follower unit error

All stop

Outdoor header unit received error code from outdoor follower unit.

• Check the check code of outdoor follower unit.

• Check cable of the remote controller. • Check power cabling of indoor. • Check P.C. board of indoor. The outdoor unit connected with communication cable between indoor and outdoor (U1.U2) is the outdoor unit. • Check connection of communication line between indoor and outdoor. • Check outdoor P.C. board(I/F) error.

Convenient functions Convenient functions When pushing SW04 for 1 second or more under condition that [E28] is displayed on 7-segment display of outdoor header unit, the fan of outdoor unit which stopped abnormally starts rotating. If pushing SW04 and SW05 simultaneously, the fan of normal outdoor unit operates. When pushing SW05 singly, the operation of fan is cleared.

Check code Outdoor 7-segment display Main remote controller Check code Sub-code 01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06: 07:

IPDU1 error IPDU2 error IPDU1, 2 errors Fan IPDU error IPDU1 + Fan IPDU error IPDU2 + Fan IPDU error All IPDU error or communication error between IPDU and I/F P.C. board or outdoor I/F P.C. board error


Detected position

Check code name

I/F


Status


All stop

Communication of each IPDU (P.C. board) in inverter box interrupted.


126

E31

E31

F01

—

—

OF

Indoor unit Indoor TCJ sensor error

Corresponding • Resistance value of sensor is • Check connection/cabling of TCJ sensor connector. unit only stops infinite or zero. (Open/Short) • Check characteristics of TCJ sensor resistance value. • Check indoor P.C. board error.

F02

—

—

Od

Indoor unit Indoor TC2 sensor error

Corresponding • Resistance value of sensor is • Check connection/cabling of TC2 sensor connector. unit only stops. infinite or zero (Open/Short). • Check characteristics of TC2 sensor resistance value. • Check indoor P.C. board error.

F03

—

—

93

Indoor unit Indoor TC1 sensor error

Corresponding • Resistance value of sensor is • Check connection/cabling of TC1 sensor connector. unit only stops. infinite or zero (Open/Short). • Check characteristics of TC1 sensor resistance value. • Check indoor P.C. board error.

F04

F04

—

19

I/F

TD1 sensor error

All stop

• Resistance value of sensor is • Check connection of TD1 sensor connector. infinite or zero (Open/Short) • Check characteristics of TD1 sensor resistance value. • Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error.

F05

F05

—

A1

I/F

TD2 sensor error

All stop

• Resistance value of sensor is • Check connection of TD2 sensor connector. infinite or zero (Open/Short) • Check characteristics of TD2 sensor resistance value. • Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error.

F06

F06

—

18

I/F

TE1 sensor error

All stop

• Resistance value of sensor is • Check connection of TE1 sensor connector. infinite or zero (Open/Short). • Check characteristics of TE1 sensor resistance value. • Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error.

F07

F07

—

18

I/F

TL sensor error

All stop

• Resistance value of sensor is • Check connection of TL sensor connector. infinite or zero (Open/Short). • Check characteristics of TL sensor resistance value. • Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error.

F08

F08

—

1b

I/F

TO sensor error

All stop

• Resistance value of sensor is • Check connection of TO sensor connector. infinite or zero (Open/Short). • Check characteristics of TO sensor resistance value. • Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error.

F10

—

—

OC

Indoor


F12

F12

A2

I/F

TS1, TS2 sensor error

01: TS1 02: TS2

CF

• Check connection of communication connector and disconnection between IPDU and I/F P.C. board. • Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F, IPDU, Fan IPDU) error. • Check external noise. • Check power supply P.C. board for fan error.

Corresponding • Resistance value of sensor is • Check connection/cabling of TA sensor connector. unit only stops. infinite or zero (Open/Short). • Check characteristics of TA sensor resistance value. • Check indoor P.C. board error. All stop

• Resistance value of sensor is • Check connection of TS1 or TS2 sensor connector. infinite or zero (Open/Short). • Check characteristics of TS1, TS2 sensor resistance value. • Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error.

Check code Outdoor 7-segment display Main remote controller Check code Sub-code F13

F13

F15

F15

F16

01: Compressor 1 side 02: Compressor 2 side

Detected AI-NET position central control remote controller IPDU

—

18

F16

—

F23

F23

F24

Status



TH sensor error

All stop

• Resistance value of sensor is • IGBT built-in temp sensor error infinite or zero (Open/Short). → Exchange IPDU P.C. board.

I/F

Outdoor temp sensor miscabling (TE1, TL)

All stop

• Check installation of TE1 sensor and TL sensor. During operation of compressor in HEAT mode, the • Check characteristics of TE1 and TL sensor resistance value. TE1 detection temp was higher • Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error. than that of TL by the specified value continued for 3 minutes or more.

43

I/F


All stop

High-pressure Pd sensor and low-pressure Ps sensor were exchanged, or output voltages of both sensors are zero.

• • • • •

Check connection of high-pressure Pd sensor connector. Check connection of low-pressure Ps sensor connector. Check pressure sensors Pd and Ps error. Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error. Check compression error of compressor.

—

43

I/F

Ps sensor error

All stop

Output voltage of Ps sensor was zero.

• • • • • • •

Misconnection of Ps sensor and Pd sensor connectors Check connection of Ps sensor connector. Check Ps sensor error. Check compression error of compressor. Check 4-way valve error. Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error. Check SV4 circuit error.

F24

—

43

I/F

Pd sensor error

All stop

Output voltage of Pd sensor • Check connection of Pd sensor connector. was zero. (Sensor Open) • Check Pd sensor error. Pd > 4.15MPa during stop of • Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error. compressor

F29

—

—

12

Indoor

F31

F31

—

1C

I/F

Outdoor EEPROM error

All stop (*1)

H01

H01


1F

IPDU

Compressor breakdown

All stop

Inverter current detection circuit • Check power voltage. (AC220–240V ± 10%). detected over-current and • Check compressor error. stopped. • Check cause of abnormal overload operation. • Check outdoor P.C. board (IPDU) error.

H02

H02


1d

IPDU

Compressor error (lock) MG-SW error OCR operation

All stop

Over-current was detected several seconds after header compressor had started.

127

43

Check code name

(*1) All stop only in case of the header unit

Indoor other error

The follower unit continues operation.

Corresponding Indoor P.C. board did not unit only stops. operate normally.

• Check indoor P.C. board error (EEPROM error).

Outdoor P.C. board (I/F) did not • Check power voltage. operate normally. • Check power noise. • Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error.

• • • • •

Check compressor error. Check power voltage. (AC380–10%, 415V +10%). Check cable of compressor and phase-missing. Check connector/terminal connection on IPDU P.C. board. Check conduction of case heater. (Check activation error due to liquid stagnation in compressor.) • Check outdoor P.C. board (IPDU) error. • Check outdoor MG-SW or OCR.

MG-SW : Magnet Switch, OCR : Over-current Relay

Check code Outdoor 7-segment display Main remote controller Check code Sub-code H03

H04

H04

H06

H06


Detected position

Check code name

Status



• Check cabling of current detection circuit system. • Check outdoor P.C. board (IPDU) error.

17

IPDU

Current detection circuit system error

All stop

While header compressor stopped, current flowed more than the specified amount.

—

44

I/F

Compressor 1 case thermo operation

All stop

Compressor 1 case thermostat • Check compressor 1 case thermo circuit. (Connector, cable, P.C. board) performed protective operation. • Check full opening of service valve. (Gas and liquid side) • Check outdoor PMV clogging. (PMV1, 2, 3) • Check SV41 circuit leakage. • Check miscabling/misinstallation of SV41 and SV42. • Check valve open status of indoor PMV. • Check 4-way valve error. • Check refrigerant shortage. • Check SV5 leak. • Check SV11 circuit. (Wiring, OFF at one side only) • Check mispiping of discharge gas/suction gas main pipe. • Check Flow selector unit. Check leakage of SVD valve and SVS valve. (Check leakage of SVDD valve and SVSS.) Check mispiping of FS unit connecting pipe (Suction gas/Discharge gas), wiring between FS unit and indoor unit, and connection of connectors. Check miswiring of SVS/SVD valves.

—

20

I/F

Low-pressure protective operation

All stop

Low-pressure Ps detected • Check full opening of service valve. operation lower than 0.02MPa. (Discharge gas, suction gas and liquid side) • Check outdoor PMV clogging. (PMV1, 2) • Check SV2 circuit and SV4 circuit error. • Check low-pressure Ps sensor error. • Check indoor air filter clogging. • Check valve open of indoor PMV. • Check refrigerant pipe clogging. • Check outdoor fan operation. (All heating, mainly heating, part cooling operation) • Check refrigerant shortage. • Check clogging of circuit at auxiliary heat exchanger side. (PMV3, SV12, check valve) • Check 4-way valve error. (Reversal error) • Check mispiping of discharge gas/suction gas main pipe. • Check Flow selector unit. Check miswiring of discharge gas/suction gas pipe to FS unit. Check wiring between FS unit and indoor unit. Check miswiring of SVD/SVS valves, misinstallation of coil. Check opened status of SVS valve.

128

H03



H07

—

Detected Check code name Status Error detection condition AI-NET position central control remote controller d7

I/F


Protection for oil All stop The operating compressor Check all the outdoor units in the corresponding line. level drop detection detected oil shortage • Check full opening of service valve of balance pipe. continuously for 2 hours. • Check connection and installation of TK1, TK2, TK3, and TK4 sensors. • Check characteristics of TK1, TK2, TK3, and TK4 resistance values. • Check gas leak and oil leak in the same line. • Check refrigerant stagnation in compressor. • Check error of SV3A, SV3B, SV3C, SV3D, and SV3E valves. • Check clogging of oil separator oil return circuit. • Check clogging of oil-equation circuit. • Check TS1, TS2 sensors (Miswiring and misinstallation of TS1 and TS2) • Check leakage of SV6 circuit. • Check FS unit. Leakage of check valve of bypass between liquid pipe and discharge gas pipe Mispiping of discharge/suction gas connection Miswiring of SVD/SVS valve/Misinstallation of coil • Check whether there is no setup missing of indoor unit in all cooling operation mode

H08

H08

129 H14

H14

01: 02: 03: 04:

TK1 sensor error TK2 sensor error TK3 sensor error TK4 sensor error

—

d4

44

I/F

I/F

Oil level detective temp sensor error


All stop • Resistance value of sensor is infinite or zero. (Open/Short)

• Check connection of TK1 sensor connector. • Check characteristics of TK1 sensor resistance value. • Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error.







All stop Compressor 2 case thermostat operated.

• • • • • • • • • • •

Check compressor 2 case thermo circuit. (Connector, cable, P.C. board) Check full opening of service valve. (Gas and liquid side) Check outdoor PMV clogging. (PMV1, 2) Check SV42 valve leak. Check miscabling/misinstallation of SV41 and SV42. Check valve opening of indoor PMV. Check 4-way valve error. Check refrigerant shortage. Check SV11 circuit. (Wiring, OFF at one side only) Check mispiping of discharge gas/suction gas main pipe. Check Flow selector unit. Check leakage of SVD valve and SVS valve. (Check leakage of SVDD valve and SVSS.) Check mispiping of FS unit connecting pipe (Suction gas/Discharge gas), wiring between FS unit and indoor unit, and connection of connectors. Check miswiring of SVS/SVD valves.


H16

01: TK1 oil circuit system error 02: TK2 oil circuit system error 03: TK3 oil circuit system error 04: TK4 oil circuit system error

Detected AI-NET position central control remote controller d7

I/F

Status


Oil level detective circuit system error MG-SW error OCR operation

All stop

Temperature change of TK1 could not be detected after compressor 1 started operation.

• • • • •

Temperature change of TK2 could not be detected after compressor 2 started operation.

• • • • •

Temperature change of TK3 could not be detected after compressor started operation.

• • • • •

Temperature change of TK4 could not be detected after compressor started operation, or the difference from other TK sensor changed for a constant time only within the specified range.

• • • • •

130

Check code name

Duplicated indoor center units

Corresponding There are multiple header unit only stops. units in a group.


Check TK1 sensor coming-off. Check characteristics of TK1 sensor resistance value. Check TK1, TK2, TK3, and TK4 misconnection. Check operation error of SV3E valve. Check capillary clogging of oil-equation circuit and operation error of stop valve. • Check refrigerant stagnation in compressor. • Check MG-SW or OCR. Check TK2 sensor coming-off. Check characteristics of TK2 sensor resistance value. Check TK1, TK2, TK3, and TK4 misconnection. Check SV3E valve operation. Check capillary clogging of oil equalization circuit and check stop valve operation. • Check refrigerant stagnation in compressor shell. • Check MG-SW or OCR. Check TK3 sensor coming-off. Check characteristics of TK3 sensor resistance value. Check TK1, TK2, TK3, and TK4 misconnection. Check SV3E valve operation. Check capillary clogging of oil-equalization circuit and check valve operation. • Check refrigerant stagnation in compressor shell. • Check MG-SW or OCR. Check TK4 sensor coming-off. Check characteristics of TK4 sensor resistance value. Check TK1, TK2, TK3, and TK4 misconnection. Check SV3E valve operation. Check capillary clogging of oil-equalization circuit and check valve operation. • Check refrigerant stagnation in compressor shell. • Check MG-SW or OCR.

• Check indoor address. • Check the change of remote controller connection (Group/individual) after indoor address setup.

L03

—

—

96

Indoor

L04

L04

—

96

I/F

Duplicated outdoor line address

All stop

Line address setup is duplicated against the outdoor unit in different refrigerant pipe system.

L05

—

—

96

I/F

Duplicated indoor units with priority (Displayed on indoor unit with priority)

All stop

Indoor units with priority were • Check display of indoor unit with priority. duplicated.

• Check line address.

MG-SW : Magnet Switch, OCR : Over-current Relay

Check code Main Outdoor 7-segment display remote controller Check code Sub-code L06

L06

L07

—

L08

L08

No. of indoor units with priority

Detected AI-NET central control position remote controller

Check code name

Status

Duplicated indoor units with priority (Displayed on the unit other than indoor unit with priority)

All stop

—

99

Indoor

Group line in individual indoor unit.

Corresponding At least one indoor unit connected unit only stops. to a group existed in the individual indoor units.

• Check indoor address.

—

99

Indoor

Indoor group / address unset

Corresponding Address was not yet set up. unit only stops.

• Check indoor address.

Indoor capacity unset

Corresponding Indoor unit capacity was unset. unit only stops.

Set up indoor capacity. (DN=11)

—

46

Indoor

L10

L10

—

88

I/F

Outdoor capacity unset

L17

L17

—

I/F

Inconsistent models of outdoor units

L18

L18

8A

I/F

FS unit system error

L20

—

—

98

AI-NET, Indoor

L28

L28

—

46

L29

L29

CF

Corresponding indoor address

131 L30

L30

• Check display of indoor unit with priority and outdoor unit.

I/F

—

IPDU1 error IPDU2 error IPDU1, 2 errors Fan IPDU error IPDU1 + Fan IPDU error IPDU2 + Fan IPDU error All IPDU error or communication error between IPDU and I/F P.C. board, or outdoor I/F P.C. board error

Detected indoor address

All stop

Indoor units with priority were duplicated.


96

L09

01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06: 07:


Note) After installation, this code is displayed when the power is first turned on.

Check model setup on outdoor I/F P.C. board A’ssy for service. On the I/F P.C. board for service, jumper line was not cut according to the model. 1 and 2 series outdoor units have been mixed.

Corresponding An indoor unit which is not unit only stops. connected with a FS unit is operating without setup of cooling only mode.

• Check outdoor units. • Check setup of remote controller (DN=[OFF]). • Check FS unit. Check pipe connection to FS unit. (Mispiping between discharge gas and suction gas) Check miswiring/misinstallation of SVS/SVD valves. • Check central control address. • Check network adaptor P.C. board. (In case of AI-NET)

Duplicated central control addresses

All stop


I/F

Quantity over of connected outdoor units

All stop

There were more than four outdoor • Check No. of connected outdoor units. (Max. 4 units per 1 system) units. • Check communication line between outdoor units. • Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error.

I/F

IPDU quantity error

All stop

No. of IPDU units detected when power was turned on were less.

• Check model setup for outdoor I/F service P.C. board. • Check connection of UART communication connector. • Check IPDU, fan IPDU, and I/F P.C. board error. Note) UART: Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter

b6

Indoor

Interlock in indoor unit from outside

Corresponding • Outside error input terminal unit only stops. Detected signal to (CN80) for more than 1 minute

n Outside device is connected to connector (CN80): 1) Check outside device error. 2) Check indoor P.C. board error. n Outside device is not connected to connector (CN80): 1) Check indoor P.C. board error.

—

L31

—

—

I/F

Extended IC (Integrated Circuit) error

Operation continues.

P.C. board (I/F) parts error

Check indoor (I/F) P.C. board.

Check code Outdoor 7-segment display Main remote controller Check code Sub-code

Detected AI-NET position central control remote controller

Check code name

Status



• Check the lock of fan motor (AC fan). • Check cabling.

132

P01

—

—

11

Indoor


Corresponding unit only stops.

P03

P03

—

1E

I/F

Discharge temp TD1 error

All stop

Discharge temp (TD1) exceeded 115°C.

• • • • • • • • • • •

Check full opening of outdoor service valves (Gas side, Liquid side). Check clogging of outdoor PMV. (PMV1,2) Check characteristics of TD1 sensor resistance value. Check refrigerant shortage. Check 4-way valve error. Check leakage of SV41 circuit. Check SV4 circuit. (Miswiring and misinstallation of SV41 and SV42) Check leakage of SV5 circuit. Check leakage of SV6 circuit. (Capillary clogging, valve operation error) Check mispiping of discharge gas/suction gas main pipe. Check Flow selector unit. Check leakage of SVD valve and SVS valve. (Check leakage of SVDD valve and SVSS.) Check mispiping of FS unit connecting pipe (Suction gas/Discharge gas), wiring between FS unit and indoor unit, and connection of connectors. Check miswiring of SVS/SVD valves.

P04

P04


21

I/F

Actuation of high-pressure SW

All stop

High-pressure SW actuated.

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Check Pd pressure sensor error. Check full opening of outdoor service valves (Gas side, Liquid side). Check outdoor fan error. Check outdoor fan motor error. Check clogging of outdoor PMV. (PMV1,2) Check clogging of indoor/outdoor heat exchangers. Check short-circuiting of outdoor suction/discharge air. Check clogging of SV2 circuit. Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error. Check indoor fan system error. (Cause of air volume decrease) Check opening of indoor PMV. Check miscabling of communication line between indoor and outdoor. Check operation error of check valve of discharge pipe. Check SV4 valve circuit. Check SV5 valve circuit. Check refrigerant overcharge. Check mispiping of discharge gas/suction gas main pipe. Check circuit clogging at auxiliary heat exchanger side. (PMV3, SV12, check valve) Check FS unit. Check clogging of SVD valve and operation error. Check wiring inside of FS unit. (SVD/SVS coil miswiring, etc.) Check wiring between FS unit and indoor unit. (Miswiring, Disconnection, Wiring missing)

P05

P05

01: Power supply missing phase 02: Power supply phase order (reversed phase)

AF

I/F

Phase missing or reversed phase order

All stop

• Missing phase was detected • Check outdoor power line. when the power turned on. • Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error. • Reversed phase was detected when the power turned on.

Check code Detected Check code AI-NET Main Outdoor 7-segment display name central control position remote Sub-code remote controller controller Check code

Status



P07

P07


1C

IPDU I/F


All stop

IGBT built-in temp sensor (TH) • Check power voltage. was overheated. • Check outdoor fan system error. • Check clogging of heat sink cooling duct. • Check fixation between IGBT and heat sink. (Check screwing and contact.) • Check IPDU error.(IGBT built-in temp sensor (TH) error).

P10

P10

Indoor address with trouble

Ob

Indoor


All stop

• Float switch operated. • Float switch circuit disconnected or the connector came off.

• • • • •

Check the float switch connector. Check operation of drain pump unit. Check the drain pump circuit. Check clogging of drain pipe. Check indoor P.C. board error.

Corresponding • The value of motor speed unit only stops. deviated from target value was detected for certain time. The standard ducted unit air conditioner utilizes a direct current (DC) indoor fan motor that features current • Over-current protection limiting protection. In the event power is not isolated prior to service, the protective control circuit will activate operated. and stop the unit operating. The check code “P12”will be displayed on the remote controller-once service work has been completed, this code can be cleared by switching off then on the electrical isolation device of the indoor unit and pressing the operation stop button on the remote controller to reset the system

• • • • •

Check connection of fan connector and wiring. Check fan motor error. Check indoor P.C. board error. Check influence of outside air control. Check indoor type code (DN=10) and the capacity code (DN=11).

• • • • • • •

Check full close operation of outdoor PMV (1, 2). Check Pd and Ps sensor error. Check clogging of SV2 circuit. Check clogging of 4-way valve error circuit. Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error. Check capillary clogging of oil return circuit from oil separator. Check TS1, TS2 sensor error.


—

—

11

Indoor

P13

P13

—

47

I/F

Outdoor liquid back detection error

All stop

In heating While the system is operating in HEAT mode, outdoor PMV of which opening degree was 100 pulse or less for a certain time.

P15

P15

01: TS condition

AE

I/F

Gas leak detection (TS1 condition)

All stop

• Check refrigerant shortage. Suction temp exceeded the judgment standard temp for 10 • Check full open of outdoor service valves (gas side, liquid side). minutes or more. • Check outdoor PMV clogging (PMV1, 2). TS error judgment standard • Check characteristics of TS1 sensor resistance value. • Check 4-way valve error. temperature • Check leakage of SV4 circuit. In cooling operation: 60°C or higher • Check leakage of SV5 circuit. • Check mispiping of discharge gas/suction gas main pipe. In heating operation: 40°C or higher • Check Flow selector unit. Check leakage of SVD valve and SVS valve. (Check leakage of SVDD valve and SVSS.) Check mispiping of FS unit connecting pipe (Suction gas/Discharge gas), wiring between FS unit and indoor unit, and connection of connectors. Check miswiring of SVS/SVD valves.

02: TD condition

AE

I/F

Gas leak detection (TD condition)

All stop

Discharge temperature TD1 or • Check refrigerant shortage. TD2 was continuously 108°C • Check outdoor PMV clogging (PMV1, 2). or higher for 10 minutes. • Check characteristics of TD1, TD2 sensor resistance value. • Check indoor air filter clogging. • Check pipe clogging. • Check SV4 circuit (Valve leakage, misinstallation) • Check mispiping of discharge gas/suction gas main pipe. • Check Flow selector unit. Check leakage of SVD valve and SVS valve. (Check leakage of SVDD valve and SVSS.) Check mispiping of FS unit connecting pipe (Suction gas/Discharge gas), wiring between FS unit and indoor unit, and connection of connectors. Check miswiring of SVS/SVD valves.

133

P12

Check code Outdoor 7-segment display Main remote controller Check code Sub-code

Detected AI-NET position central control remote controller

Check code name

Status



P17

—

bb

I/F

Discharge All stop Discharge temperature • Check full opening of outdoor service valves (gas side, liquid side). temp TD2 error (TD2) exceeded 115°C. • Check clogging of outdoor PMV (PMV1, 2). • Check characteristics of TD2 sensor resistance value. • Check 4-way valve error. • Check leakage of SV42 circuit. • Check SV4 circuit. (Miscabling and misinstallation of SV41 and SV42) • Check leakage of SV5 valve circuit. • Check SV6 circuit. (Clogging, Valve operation error) • Check mispiping of discharge gas/suction gas main pipe. • Check Flow selector unit. Check leakage of SVD valve and SVS valve. (Check leakage of SVDD valve and SVSS.) Check mispiping of FS unit connecting pipe (Suction gas/Discharge gas), wiring between FS unit and indoor unit, and connection of connectors. Check miswiring of SVS/SVD valves.

P19

P19

Detected outdoor unit No.

8

I/F

4-way valve operation error

• Error of 4-way valve error All stop When abnormal refrigerating cycle data • Check coil error and connector connection of 4-way valve. was detected in heating • Check characteristics of TS1/TE1 sensor resistance value. • Check characteristics of Pd, Ps pressure sensor output voltage. • Check misconnection of TE1 and TL sensors. • Check Flow selector unit. Check leakage of SVD valve and SVS valve. (Check leakage of SVDD valve and SVSS.) Check mispiping of FS unit connecting pipe (Suction gas/Discharge gas).

P20

P20

—

22

I/F


All stop Pd sensor detected 3.6MPa or more.

134

P17

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Check Pd pressure sensor error. Check full opening of service valves (Gas side, Liquid side). Check outdoor fan error. Check outdoor fan motor error. Check clogging of outdoor PMV. (PMV1,2) Check clogging of indoor/outdoor heat exchangers. Check air short-circuiting in outdoor unit. Check clogging of SV2 circuit. Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error. Check indoor fan system error. (Cause of air volume decrease) Check valve opening of indoor PMV. Check miscabling of communication line between indoor and outdoor. Check operation error of check valve of discharge pipe. Check circuit of gas balance SV4 valve. Check mispiping of discharge gas/suction gas main pipe. Check operation error of check valve of discharge gas pipe. Check circuit of SV11 valve. (Clogging, OFF at one side only) Check clogging of circuit at auxiliary heat exchanger side. (Miswiring, Disconnection, Wiring missing) Check Flow selector unit. Check leakage of SVD valve and operation error. Check wiring inside of FS unit. (SVD/SVS coil miswiring, etc.) Check wiring between FS unit and indoor unit. (Miswiring, Disconnection, Wiring missing) • Check circuit of SV5 valve. • Check refrigerant overcharge.

Check code Outdoor 7-segment display Main remote controller Check code Sub-code P22

P22

0: IGBT shortage 1: Position detection circuit error 3: Motor lock error 4: Motor current error detection C: TH sensor temp. error D: TH sensor error E: Vdc error

Detected Check code name AI-NET position central control remote controller 1A

FAN-IPDU Outdoor fan IPDU error

Status



(Sub-code: 0) • Check fan motor. (Interphase short-circuit) • Short-circuit current was detected at start • Check fan IPDU error. time. • Short-circuit current was detected when checking IGBT short-circuit before start time.

All stop

(Sub-code: 1) • The standard value of detection circuit of fan IPDU current fluctuated at start time.

• Check fan IPDU error.

All stop

(Sub-code: 3) • Abnormal current was detected within 30 seconds after start time.

• Check fan motor. (Lock, phase missing) • Check cause of abnormal overload at start time. • Check connection of connector to fan motor.

All stop

(Sub-code: 4) • Check power supply voltage. • Check fan IPDU error. • Short-circuit current was detected when 2 seconds or more passed after start time. • Over-current was detected when 30 seconds or more passed after start time.

All stop

(Sub-code: C) • Heat sink sensor (TH) of fan IPDU detected 95°C error.

• Check outdoor fan system. • Check fan IPDU error. • Check fixation between fan IPDU and heat sink.

All stop

(Sub-code: D) • Heat sink sensor (TH) of fan IPDU detected short-circuiting or open.

• Check fan IPDU error.

All stop

(Sub-code: E) • Check input power supply voltage of the fan IPDU. • Check power supply P.C. board error of the fan IPDU. • Input power supply voltage of the fan IPDU over the setup value was detected. • Check error of external electrolytic condenser. • Input power supply terminal of the fan IPDU was unconnected. • Power supply P.C. board error of the fan IPDU

135

All stop

P26

P26


14

IPDU

G-Tr short-circuit protection error

All stop

Instantaneous over-current was detected when • Check connector connection and wiring on IPDU P.C. board. compressor started. • Check compressor error and defect of compressor coil. • Check outdoor P.C. board (IPDU) error.

P29

P29


16

IPDU

Compressor position detection circuit error

All stop

Position detected was not normal.

P31

—

—

47

Indoor

Corresponding E07/L07/L03/L08 was detected when other Other indoor error (Group follower unit unit only stops. indoor unit in the group was defective. error)

• Check connector connection and wiring. • Check compressor error and defect of compressor coil. • Check P.C. board (IPDU) error. • Check indoor P.C. board.

Error detected by TCC-LINK central control device Check code Outdoor 7-segment display Display on central control device Check code Sub-code


Detected position

TCC-LINK

C05

—

—

C06

—

—

C12

—

—

P30

Differs according to error contents of the with alarm

Check code name

Status



TCC-LINK central control Operation Signal is not transmit from • Check central control device error. device transmission error continued. central control device. • Check communication line error of central control device. • Check setup of terminator resistor. TCC-LINK central control Operation Signal is not received from • Check central control device error. device receiving error continued. central control device. • Check communication line error of central control device. • Check setup of terminator resistor. • Check the power of connecting destination connected device. • Check P.C. board error of the connected device.

HA control interface Interface batch alarm of HA control interface TCC-LINK

Follower unit error of group control

Operation Error was input in HA continued. control interface

• Check error input.

• Check the error code of the unit with alarm. Operation An error occurred in continued. follower unit of the group control. ([P30] is displayed only on the central remote controller.)

136

Duplicated central control Operation Central control addresses • Check the address setup. address continued. were duplicated.

(L20 is displayed.)

Error detected by AI-NET central control device Check code Outdoor 7-segment display

Detected position

Check code name

Status



Check code

Sub-code


—

—

—

97

AI-NET

AI-NET communication system error

Operation E07/L07/L03/L08 was continued. detected when other indoor unit in the group was defective.

• Check multiple network adapters. • Check wire and miscabling of remote controller: Only one network adapter can be connected to communication line of remote controller.

—

—

—

99

AI-NET

Duplicated network adapters

Operation Multiple network adapters continued. were connected to communication line of remote controller. (Detected at central controller side)

• • • •

—

—

—

b7

AI-NET

Error in indoor group

Operation Error of follower unit in the • Check follower unit in the group. continued. group

Main remote controller

Check communication line, miscabling, and power of indoor unit. Check communication. (X, Y terminals) Check network adapter P.C. board. Check the central controller (Central control remote controller, etc.)

* These errors are concerned to communication of remote controllers (A, B) and central system [AI-NET X, Y], and the main remote controller displays [E01], [E02], [E03], [E09], or [E18] in some cases and displays none in other cases according to the error.

Cautions when servicing for compressor 1. Removing wires of both compressors check output of the inverter as described below.

How to check inverter output 1. Turn off the power supply. 2. Remove the compressor lead cables from the compressors. (Be sure to remove lead cables of both compressors.) 3. Turn on the power supply and start cooling or heating operation. In this time, pay attention to touch the fasten receptacle terminal lug of the compressor leads so that they do not contact with other fasten receptacle terminal lug or other position (unit cabinet, etc.). 4. Check output voltage of compressor lead cable at inverter side. When the output voltage does not satisfy the criteria in the following table, replace IPDU P.C. board. No.

Measured position

Criteria

1

Between Red and White

400 V to 650 V

2

Between White and Black

400 V to 650 V

3

Between Black and Red

400 V to 650 V

∗ After checking the output, when connecting the compressor lead again to the compressor terminal, check surely there is no distortion on the fasten terminal lug. If it is loosened, caulk it with pinchers, etc and then connect lead to the terminal.

How to check resistance of compressor winding 1. Turn off the power supply. 2. Remove the compressor lead cables from the compressors. In each compressor, check the winding resistance between phases and resistance of the outdoor cabinet using a tester. • Is not it earthed? → Normal if 10MΩ or more are measured • Is not shorted between windings? → Normal if 0.7Ω to 0.9Ω are measured (Use a precise digital tester.)

How to check the outdoor fan motor 1. Turn off the power supply. 2. Take off three connectors (U.V.W) from the fan IPDU P.C. board. 3. Turn the fan with hands. If the fan does not turn, it is a fan motor error (Lock). Replace the fan motor. If the fan turns, measure the winding resistance between the phases of the connector (Motor winding) with a tester. If 13 to 33Ω are measured, it is normal. (Use a digital tester.)

137

9-5. Diagnosis Procedure for Each Check Code Check code name

Check code

[E01] / [–]

Cause of operation

Check code

Check code name

[E03] / [97]

Communication error between indoor and remote controller (Detected at indoor side)

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Communication error between 1. Remote controller interconnecting cable error indoor and remote controller (Detected at remote controller side) 2. Indoor power supply error

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

3. Indoor P.C. board error 4. Remote controller address setup error 5. Remote controller P.C. board error

NO

Correct interconnection cable of remote controller.

YES

Correct connection and check circuit cabling.

Is the interconnection cable of remote controllers (A/B) normal?

Cause of operation No communication from remote controller and communication adaptor

This error is detected when the indoor unit cannot receive a signal from the remote controller. Check communication wiring of the remote controllers A and B. As communication is impossible, this fault code [E03] is not displayed on the main remote controller. It is displayed on TCC-LINK central controller.

YES Is there no disconnection or connector contact error on harness out of terminal block of indoor unit?

Check code

Check code name

[E04] / [04]

Indoor/Outdoor communication circuit error (Detected at indoor side)

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

NO NO

Is a group control operation?

Cause of operation 1. Power of outdoor unit was firstly turned on. 2. Connection error of communication line between indoor and outdoor 3. Terminal resistance setup error on outdoor header unit. 4. Address setup error

YES NO

Is power of each indoor unit turned on?

Check power connection status of indoor unit. (Turn on power again.)

YES

®

Was power turned on in order of indoor unit outdoor unit?

NO

®

Turn on power again in order of indoor unit outdoor unit.

YES

138

NO

Is power applied to remote controller? AB terminals: Approx. DC18V

®

Check indoor P.C. board. Defect Replace

Is connection (U1/U2 terminals) of indoor/outdoor interconnection cable normal?

YES

NO

Correct interconnection cable.

YES

Are two remote controllers used without the correct identification?

YES

Change one to main/other to sub. (Remote controller address connector)

NO

Is the end terminal resistance setup of outdoor unit normal?

NO

Correct the end terminal resistance setup.

YES

®

Check remote controller P.C. board. Defect Replace Is address setup correct?

NO


YES

Check code

Check code name

[E02] / [–]

Remote controller sending error

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Cause of operation Signal could not be sent to indoor unit. Check the communication wire of the remote controller.

Is power applied to fuse (F03) on indoor P.C. board?

YES

®

Sending circuit error of the remote controller Replace remote controller.

NO

Check connection of interconnection cable between indoor and outdoor is correct, and then connect communication line connector on indoor P.C. board (CN40) to CN44 (EMG).

YES

Is there no noise, etc?

* It is not displayed on 7-segment display of the central control controller. Is communication wiring between remote controller and indoor unit correct?

NO

YES

Check noise etc. and eliminate it if any.

NO

Correct the communication wiring.

®


For details, refer to “Troubleshooting in test operation”.

Check code name

Check code

[E06] / [04]

Cause of operation

Decreased number of indoor units 1. Communication lines (U1, U2) connection error between indoor and outdoor 2. Connector connection error of communication for indoor P.C. board 3. Connector connection error of communication for outdoor I/F P.C. board 4. Power supply of indoor unit (Is power turned on?)

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Check code

Check code name

Cause of operation

[E07] / [–]

Indoor/Outdoor communication circuit error (Detected at outdoor side)

1. Outdoor communication terminal resistance setup error 2. Indoor/outdoor communication connection error

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Is setup of terminal resistance of outdoor unit normal?

NO

YES Sub-code: No. of indoor units which received signals normally

Is there no mis-wiring/ disconnection on communication line betweenindoor and outdoor?

Is interconnection cable (U1, U2) between indoor and outdoor short-circuited?

YES Correct communication line.

NO

NO Is connection of CN40 connector on indoor P.C. board normal?

Correct setup of terminal resistance.

YES

NO NO

Is connection of interconnection cable between indoor and outdoor correct?

Correct short-circuit.

YES

YES Is connection of CN01 connector on outdoor I/F P.C. board normal?

Correct communication line.

NO

Correct wiring of the connector.

YES

139

Is power of indoor turned on?

YES NO

Is there an error on power cable to an outdoor unit?

Turn on power of indoor unit.

NO YES

Did a power failure occur?

NO

Is F400 (fuse) on I/F P.C. board failed?

YES * Check conduction with tester.

Correct power cable.

NO

Clear the fault code.

Turn on power to start operation.

YES

YES YES

Is there noise source?

Check noise etc. and eliminate it if any.

Is there no noise, etc?

NO NO

®


Eliminate noise.

(NOTE) 1. When signal is not sent for a certain period from the indoor unit which has been sending signals normally, [E06] is displayed.

®

Outdoor I/F P.C. board failure Replace

I/F P.C. board failure However an emergent operation is available by inserting connector from CN01 to CN33.

Check code

Check code name

[E08] / [96]


Cause of operation Indoor addresses are duplicated.

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Check code

Check code name

[E12] / [42]


(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Sub-code: Duplicated indoor address

Using a main remote controller (RBC-AMT21E), check the setup item codes (DN code) 12, 13, and 14. When there is no address duplication, check to the following flowchart.

Is cable connection to communication line normal?

NO Correct cable connection.

Cause of operation 1. When indoor automatic address started, other refrigerant circuit system was setting automatic address. (Sub code : 01) 2. When outdoor automatic address started, the indoor automatic address was being set. (Sub-code: 02)

Sub-code: 01: Communication between indoor and outdoor 02: Communication between outdoor units

NO

Are U1, U2, U3, and U4 connectors connected? YES

YES Is communication line connected to the different outdoor unit?

Turn on power of outdoor unit again.

Disconnect relay connector of U1, U2, U3, and U4.

YES

Set up address again. (Refer to “Address setup procedure”.)

NO Is indoor unit quantity connected to outdoor unit correct?

NO Correct communication line.

YES

Check code

Check code name

[E15] / [42]

No corresponding indoor unit during automatic address

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Set up indoor address again.

140 Check code

Check code name

[E09] / [99]

Duplicated master remote controller

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Are two remote controllers set up as two master remote controllers?

YES

Cause of operation Setup of master remote controller is duplicated.

Correct setup of remote controllers one as a master, and the other as sub (remote controller address connector).

Is communication line between indoor and outdoor normal?

Cause of operation 1. Communication line connection error between indoor and outdoor. 2. Indoor power system error 3. Noise from surrounding devices 4. Power failure 5. Indoor P.C. board error

NO Correct communication line.

YES Is connection of CN40 connector on indoor P.C. board correct?

NO

Correct connection.

YES

NO

®

Check remote controller P.C. board. Failure Replace

Is connection of CN01 connector on I/F P.C. board of header outdoor unit correct?

NO Correct connection.

YES Is there any connection error of power cable? Check code

Check code name

[E10] / [CF]

Communication error in indoor P.C. board assembly

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Cause of operation Indoor P.C. board error failure

YES Correct power cable.

NO Did a power failure occur?

YES

Set up address again after resetting power supply.

NO Is there any fault on power line?

YES

Check power voltage on line. Eliminate noise, etc.

Is there a noise source? NO

NO

®

Check indoor control P.C. board. Failure Replace

Set up address again after resetting power supply.

YES

Eliminate noise.

Check code

Check code name

[E16] / [89]

Connected indoor units capacity over

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Sub-code: 00 : Capacity over

Cause of operation 1. There are 48 or more connected indoor units. 2. Capacity over of total connected indoor units. 3. Incorrect setup of indoor/outdoor capacity

Check code

Check code name

Cause of operation

[E18] / [97/99]

Communication error between indoor header and follower

Regular communication between indoor header and follower is unavailable.

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Are remote controller interconnection wires (A/B) normal?

01 : ~ : Number of connected indoor units

NO

Correct remote controller interconnection wires.

YES

Correct connection. Check circuit wire.

NO

Check power connection status of indoor unit.

YES YES Is backup operation of outdoor unit being set up?

Perform setup of no detection for over capacity.

Is there any disconnection of connector or wiring from terminal block of indoor unit?

NO

NO NO Is No. of connected indoor units correct?

Excessive indoor units are connected. Correct miswiring.

NO Is a group control operation?

YES

YES NO

Is setup of indoor unit HP correct?

Correct HP setup.

Is the power of all indoor units turned on?

YES

Is total capacity of connected indoor units within 135%? (*1)

YES NO

Ensure capacity of connected indoor units within 135% of outdoor units.

®

Check indoor P.C. board. Failure Replace

Check indoor address.

YES

141

Correct indoor address. For a service P.C. board, check outdoor HP setup. (Set up jumper 9, 10, 11, and 12.)

OK

Set up outdoor HP. (Refer “How to exchange interface P.C. board”.)

NG

Check outdoor interface P.C. board.

(∗ ∗1) When capacity of the outdoor unit is 12HP, up to a maximum capacity 120% of indoor units can be connected.

Check code name

Check code

[E19] / [96]

Cause of operation

Header outdoor units quantity error 1. Misconnection of interconnection cable between indoor and outdoor 2. Outdoor I/F P.C. board error

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Sub-code: 00: No header unit 02: Two or more header units

Are communication lines (U1, U2) between indoor and outdoor connected to multiple outdoor units?

YES

Connect communication line between indoor and outdoor to one unit per 1 system.

NO

Connect communication line between indoor and outdoor.

NO Is communication line between indoor and outdoor connected to one unit per 1 system? YES

Check I/F P.C. board.

Reference) When the power supply of the outdoor unit is first turned on, the check code [E19 00] is displayed until the power supply of the indoor units are turned on. However is not an error. When the power supply of the indoor units are this turned on, the check code is automatically reset.

Check code

Check code name

[E20] / [42]

Unit connected to other line during automatic address

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Cause of operation When starting automatic indoor address, a device in another refrigerant system is connected.

Sub-code: 01: Connection of outdoor of another system 02: Connection of indoor unit of another system

Check code

Check code name

Cause of operation

[E25] / [15]

Duplicated address setup of terminal outdoor units

Addresses are duplicated by manual setting of outdoor address

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Never set up the outdoor address manually.

Separate the wire between systems according to address setup method.

Check code

Check code name

Cause of operation

[E23] / [15]

Communication sending error between outdoor units

1. Interconnection cable error between outdoor unit 2. Communication error between outdoor units, I/F P.C. board error 3. Terminal resistance setup error between outdoor units

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Is there miscabling or disconnection on communication line between outdoor units?

YES Correct communication line.

Check code name

[E26] / [15]

Decrease of connected outdoor units

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Cause of operation 1. Outdoor unit backup setup 2. Outdoor power error 3. Communication line connection error between outdoor units 4. Connector error for communication 5. Outdoor I/F P.C. board error

Sub-code: No. of outdoor units which received signals normally YES

Is outdoor unit setting backup?

Clear the error and then start operation. (*1)

NO NO

NO

142

Is connection of CN03 connector on outdoor I/F P.C. board normal?

Check code

Is main power of follower unit turned on?

Turn on the main power supply.

YES

NO Correct wiring of cable connector.

YES

NO

Is communication line between outdoor units connected normally?

Correct connection of communication line.

YES Is main power of outdoor unit turned off?

YES Turn on main power of outdoor unit.

Is communication connector (CN03) between follower outdoor units connected?

Correct connection. (Communication connector: CN03)

YES

NO

(∗ ∗1) How to clear the error

Check I/F P.C. board. Is the terminal resistance between outdoor units turned on? (SW30 Bit 1)

NO

Set SW01/SW02/SW03 on I/F P.C. board of header unit to 2/16/1, and push SW04 for 5 seconds or more. (7-segment display: [Er.] [CL])

NO Turn the terminal resistance to ON.

YES YES Did power failure occur?

Clear fault code.

Check code

Check code name

[E28] / [d2]

Terminal outdoor unit error

Cause of operation

NO

Terminal unit error

(TCC-L / AI-NET) Is there no noise source, etc? NO

®

Check outdoor I/F P.C. board. Defect Replace

YES Check and eliminate noise, etc

Sub-code: Detected outdoor unit number

An error occurred on the terminal unit. Confirm the check code of the terminal unit using 7-segment display on the I/F P.C. board of the terminal unit and check it according to the diagnostic procedure for each fault code. How to identify the terminal outdoor unit on which error occurred Under condition that [E28] is displayed on the 7-segment display on the header unit, when pushing SW04 for 1 second or more, the fan on the faulty outdoor unit will rotate. Pushing SW05 alone, stops the fan rotation.

Check code

Check code name

[E31] / [CF]


Cause of operation

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

1. Connection error of communication line between IPDU and I/F P.C. board 2. I/F P.C. board error 3. IPDU P.C. board error 4. External noise

Check code

Check code name

[F01] / [0F]

Indoor TCJ sensor error

Cause of operation TCJ sensor Open/Short

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Is TCJ sensor connector (CN102: Red) on indoor P.C. board normally connected?

NO

Correct connection.

YES

Sub-code: 01: IPDU1 error 03: IPDU1, 2 error 05: IPDU1, fan IPDU error 07: All IPDU error or communication line error

02: IPDU2 error 04: Fan IPDU error 06: IPDU2, fan IPDU error between IPDU-I/F P.C. boards, or outdoor I/F P.C. board error

NO

Are characteristics of TCJ sensor resistance value normal? ∗ YES

∗ If the fan IPDU is abnormal, be sure to check the voltage output on the fan power P.C. board.

Replace TCJ sensor.

* Indoor unit temperature sensor characteristics See Characteristics-2.

®

Check indoor main P.C. board. Defect Replace Is jumper lead setup on the outdoor I/F P.C. board correct? (Jumper 7, 8, 9 ON)

NO

Connect the jumper lead.

YES Are communication connectors between I/F fan power P.C. board, and IPDU connected?

YES Correct connection.

Check code

Check code name

[F02] / [0d]


Cause of operation TC2 sensor Open/Short

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

NO

143

Is there disconnection on communication line between IPDU and I/F P.C. board?

YES Connect the communication line.

Is TC2 sensor connector (CN101: Black) on indoor P.C. board normally connected?

NO Correct connection.

YES

NO Is there voltage between pin 4 and pin 5 of CN600 on I/F P.C. board? (Measure with tester: DC0 to 5 V)

NO

I/F P.C. board error

NO

Are characteristics of TC2 sensor resistance value normal? * YES


YES Is there voltage deflection between pin 3 and pin 5 of CN600 on I/F P.C. board? (Measure with tester: DC 0 to 5V, 5 pin GND)

NO

IPDU P.C. board error

Replace TC2 sensor.

Check indoor main P.C. board. Defect ® Replace

YES

® ®

On the fan power supply P.C. board, 1) CN503: Between pins 1 and 5 12V 2) CN503: Between pins 2 and 5 7V 3) Between +5V and GND of CN505: 5V

NO

Replace fan power P.C. board.

Check code

Check code name

[F03] / [93]


Cause of operation TC1 sensor Open/Short

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

YES Replace P.C. board according to auxiliary code.

Auxiliary code

P.C. board to be replaced

01

IPDU1

02

IPDU2

03

IPDU1, 2

04

Fan IPDU

05

IPDU1, fan IPDU

06

IPDU2, fan IPDU

07

IPDU1, 2, fan IPDU, I/F

Is TC1 sensor connector (CN100: Brown) on indoor P.C. board normally connected?

NO

Correct connection.

YES

Are characteristics of TC1 sensor resistance value normal? * YES Check indoor main P.C. board. Defect ® Replace

NO

Replace TC1 sensor.


Check code

Check code name

[F04] / [19]

TD1 sensor error

Cause of operation TD1 sensor Open/Short

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Check code

Check code name

[F10] / [0C]


Cause of operation TA sensor Open/Short

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

This check code means detection of Open/Short of TD1 sensor. Check disconnection of connector (TD1 sensor: CN502, White) and characteristics of sensor resistance value. (Refer to Outdoor unit temperature sensor characteristics.) If sensor is normal, replace outdoor I/F P.C. board.

Check code

Check code name

[F05] / [A1]

TD2 sensor error

Cause of operation TD2 sensor Open/Short

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

This check code means detection of Open/Short of TA sensor. Check disconnection of connector (TA sensor: CN104, Yellow) and characteristics of sensor resistance value. (Refer to Outdoor unit temperature sensor characteristics.) If sensor is normal, replace indoor P.C. board.

Check code

Check code name

[F12] / [A2]

TS sensor error

Cause of operation TS1, TS2 sensor Open/Short

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

This check code means detection of Open/Short of TD2 sensor. Check disconnection of connector (TD2 sensor: CN503, Pink) and characteristics of sensor resistance value. (Refer to Outdoor unit temperature sensor characteristics.) If sensor is normal, replace outdoor I/F P.C. board.

Check code

Check code name

[F06] / [18]

TE1 sensor error

144 [F07] / [18]

TL sensor error

Cause of operation TL sensor Open/Short

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

This check code means detection of Open/Short of TL sensor. Check disconnection of connector (TL sensor: CN521, White) and characteristics of sensor resistance value. (Refer to Outdoor unit temperature sensor characteristics.) If sensor is normal, replace outdoor I/F P.C. board.

Check code

Check code name

[F08] / [1b]

TO sensor error

This check code means detection of Open/Short of TS sensor. Check disconnection of connector (TS1 sensor: CN504, White TS2 sensor: CN522, Black) and characteristics of sensor resistance value. (Refer to Outdoor unit temperature sensor characteristics.) If sensor is normal, replace outdoor I/F P.C. board.

TE1 sensor Open/Short

This check code means detection of Open/Short of TE1 sensor. Check disconnection of connector (TE1 sensor: CN505, Green) and characteristics of sensor resistance value. (Refer to Outdoor unit temperature sensor characteristics.) If sensor is normal, replace outdoor I/F P.C. board.

Check code name

02 : TS2 sensor

Cause of operation

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Check code

Sub-code: 01: TS1 sensor

Cause of operation TO sensor Open/Short

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

This check code means detection of Open/Short of TO sensor. Check disconnection of connector (TO sensor: CN507, Yellow) and characteristics of sensor resistance value. (Refer to Outdoor unit temperature sensor characteristics.) If sensor is normal, replace outdoor I/F P.C. board.

Check code

Check code name

[F13] / [43]

TH sensor error

Cause of operation IGBT built-in sensor error in A3-IPDU

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Sub-code: 01: Compressor 1 side 02: Compressor 2 side

This check code means IGBT built-in temperature sensor error. Check connection of connectors CN06 on IPDU P.C. board and CN600 on I/F P.C. board. If sensor is normal, replace IPDU P.C. board.

Check code

Check code name

[F15] / [18]

Outdoor temp sensor miscabling (TE1, TL)

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Cause of operation 1. Misinstallation and misconnection of TE1 sensor and TL sensor 2. Resistance characteristics error of TE1 sensor and TL sensor 3. Outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error

NO

Are installed positions of TE1 sensor and TL sensor correct?

Outdoor I/F P.C. board TE1 sensor : CN505, Green TL sensor : CN521, White

YES Are connection of TE1 sensor connector and TL sensor connector normal?

NO

Check code

Check code name

[F23] / [43]

Ps sensor error

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Is connection of Ps sensor connector correct? YES

Correct installed positions of TE1 sensor and TL sensor.

Are output voltage characteristics of Ps sensor normal? YES Correct connection.

YES Are resistance characteristics of TL sensor and TE1 sensor normal?

NO

YES

Correct connection.

Is there no leakage from SV4 valve?

* Outdoor unit temperature sensor characteristics See TE1 sensor : Characteristics-5. See TL sensor : Characteristics-3.

NO

Correct connection.

Connector: CN500, White NO

Sensor error

* 1 Pressure (Check joint) by pressure gauge 2 Pressure display on 7-segment display 3 Output voltage of I/F P.C. board If 1 and 2, 3 are different, an error of pressure sensor itself is considered. If 2 and 3 are different, check interface P.C. board.

NO

Is not refrigerant by passed from discharge to suction of 4-way valve?

YES

NO Check compressor.

YES Check 4-way valve.

Replace SV4 valve.

Check outdoor I/F P.C. board. Defect ® Replace

Cause of operation Output voltage error of Ps sensor

* TE1 sensor : Outdoor heat exchanger temp sensor TL sensor : Temp sensor between liquid tanks of outdoor P.M.V. 1/2

145

Check code

Check code name

[F24] / [43]

Pd sensor error

Cause of operation Output voltage error of Pd sensor

(TCC-L / AI-NET) Check code

Check code name

[F16] / [43]


(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Are connection of Pd sensor and Ps sensor connectors correct?

NO

Cause of operation 1. High-pressure Pd sensor and lowpressure sensor Ps are exchanged. 2. Output voltage of each sensor is zero.

Correct connection of connectors. Pd sensor: CN501, Red Ps sensor: CN500, White

YES Are output voltage characteristics of Pd sensor and Ps sensor normal? YES

Are Pd/Ps output values Pd > Ps during compressor operation? YES

NO

Sensor error

Replace

1 Pressure (Check joint) by pressure gauge 2 Pressure display on 7-segment display 3 Output voltage of I/F P.C. board If 1 and 2, 3 are different, an error of pressure sensor itself is considered. If 2 and 3 are different, check interface P.C. board. NO

Check compressor.

* Value can be confirmed by 7-segment display function on outdoor I/F P.C. board.

It is output voltage error of Pd sensor. Check disconnection of connection of connector (Pd sensor: CN501) circuit and output voltage of sensor. If the sensor is normal, replace outdoor I/F P.C. board.

Check code

Check code name

[F29] / [12]

Indoor other error

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Indoor P.C. board error EEROM error

This error is detected during operation of air conditioner of IC10 non-volatile memory (EEPROM) on indoor unit P.C. board. Replace service P.C. board. ∗ If EEPROM was not inserted when power was turned on or it is absolutely impossible to read/write EEPROM data, the automatic address mode is repeated. In this case, [97 error] is displayed on AI-NET central controller. (Approx. 3 minutes) (Power ON)

(Approx. 1 minute)

[SET DATA] is displayed on main remote controller.

[SET DATA] disappears.

Pd SW01/02/03=1/1/2 Ps SW01/02/03=1/2/2 (Repetition)

Check outdoor I/F P.C. board. Replace Defect

Cause of operation

LED (D02) 1Hz flashes for approx. 10 seconds on indoor unit P.C. board.

Reboot (Reset)

Check code

Check code name

[F31] / [1C]

Outdoor EEPROM error

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Is there any trouble of outdoor unit power supply?

Cause of operation 1. Outdoor unit power error (Voltage, noise, etc.) 2. Outdoor I/F P.C. board error

Check code

Check code name

[H02] / [1d]

Compressor error (Lock)

Cause of operation 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Check power voltage and line. Correct power line. Check external noise, etc.

YES

NO

Outdoor unit power line error Compressor circuit system error Compressor error Refrigerant stagnation in compressor shell IPDU P.C. board error


Check I/F P.C. board. NO

Is power voltage of outdoor unit normal? 1

1 380 – 415V ± 10%

YES

Check code

Check code name

[H01] / [1F]

Compressor breakdown

(TCC-L / AI-NET)


Does voltage drop occur when other compressor starts?

Outdoor unit power line error Compressor circuit system error Compressor error Cause of abnormal overload operation IPDU P.C. board error

YES

Correct power line.

NO YES Does OCR of MG-SW operate?

Reset OCR manually. 3

NO Is wiring or connector connection on IPDU P.C. board normal?


NO

Correct connector connection or wiring.

YES Is power voltage of outdoor unit normal?

YES

NO

Is not it an abnormal overload?

146

380 – 415V ± 10%

NO

YES Does voltage drop occur when other compressor starts?

Correct cause of overload.

Is there no refrigerant stagnation in compressor shell?

YES Correct power line.

YES

Is case heater output normal?

Operation starts. Is connection of wiring or connection of connector on IPDU P.C. board normal?

Check case heater.

NO Correct connector connection or wiring.

NO

Is compressor normal? 2

YES

YES Is winding resistance between phases of corresponding compressor normal? (Note 1)

NO

Compressor error (Motor burning, etc.)

YES Is not it an abnormal overload? Take off lead cable of compressor. 1. Check resistance between windings: It is normal if there are 0.7 to 0.9 . 2. Check insulation between outdoor cabinet and terminal: It is normal if there are 10M or more.

Compressor error

2 Check the following items mainly. 1. Existence of abnormal sound and abnormal vibration during operation or starting 2. Abnormal overheat of case during operation or stop time (Never touch with hands.) 3. Current of compressor lead during operation or starting time (No varied change of current) change 3 If OCR operates even after manual reset of OCR, check whether the wiring to the current sensor (T02) of Comp-IPDU is correct or not.

Check IPDU P.C. board.

YES

NO

Correct refrigerant stagnation in compressor shell.

NO

NO

NO

YES


S

C

Check code

Check code name

Cause of operation

[H03] / [17]

Current detective circuit system error

1. Cabling or connector connection error on IPDU P.C. board 2. IPDU P.C. board error

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Sub-code: 01: Compressor 1 side 02: Compressor 2 side Check IPDU P.C. board.

Note 1 * After checking the output, when connecting the compressor lead again to the compressor terminal, check surely there is no distortion on the Fasten receptacle terminal. If it is loosened, caulk it with pinchers, etc and then connect lead to the terminal firmly.

R

Wiring or connector connection on IPDU P.C. board normal?

NO

Correct connector connection or cabling.

YES

Details of compressor power connecting section


Check code

Check code name

[H04] / [44]


(TCC-L / AI-NET)

[H14] / [44]


(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Is case thermo circuit normal? 1. Connector connection 2. Wiring 3. I/F P.C. board (Note 1) YES Are service valves of gas pipe and liquid pipe of outdoor unit fully opened?

Cause of operation 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Case thermo circuit error I/F P.C. board error Service valve closed Outdoor PMV clogging SV4 valve leak, Coil misinstallation 4-way valve error Compressor error Refrigerant shortage

NO

Repair case thermo circuit.

(Note 1) 1. Case thermo is usually closed. 2. Operation temperature of case thermo is 120˚C. NO

Check code

Check code name

[H06] / [20]

Low-pressure protective operation

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

5. 6. 7. 8.

Open service valves fully.

YES NO

Are characteristics of low-pressure sensor normal? YES


NO

YES

Is there mispiping of discharge gas and suction gas main pipes?

Connector CN300, 301, White

Correct SV2 and SV4 circuits.

Check wiring, installation and connection.

YES

Repair outdoor PMV.

Exchange low-pressure sensor.

* 1 Pressure by pressure gauge (Check joint) 2 Pressure display on 7-segment display 3 Output voltage of I/F P.C. board If 1 and 2, 3 are different, an error of pressure sensor error is considered. If 2 and 3 are different, check I/F P.C. board.

Are SV2 and SV4 circuits normal?

NO

Service valve close Ps sensor error SV2, SV4 circuit error Miscabling of communication between indoor and outdoor Indoor/outdoor fan and condenser error Indoor/outdoor PMV clogging Indoor/outdoor heat exchanger clogging Refrigerant shortage

NO

Are service valves of gas and liquid pipe of outdoor unit fully opened?

YES Are outdoor PMV1/2/3 normal? 1. Connector connection 2. Wiring 3. Coil 4. Valve body 5. I/F P.C. board

Cause of operation 1. 2. 3. 4.

Correct piping.

NO Is indoor unit connected to different refrigerant systems?

YES

YES

147

Start operation.

Correct cabling.

(Check with miswiring check function of outdoor unit.)

NO NO

Is flow selector normal?

Check flow selector.

YES In cooling season, go to (A), In heating season, go to (B)

Are SV41 and SV42 Valve circuits normal? 1. Incorrect installation and connection of SV41 and SV42 2. Leakage from SV41, 42 circuit

NO SV4 valve: Connector CN311, Blue

(A) Cooling

Correct SV4, SV5, SV11 valve circuits. Does indoor fan operate normally in cooling season?

YES

NO

YES YES

Does not refrigerant bypass from discharge to suction through 4-way valve?

YES

Cleaning

Check 4-way valve.

NO

YES

NO

YES

Check piping.

Repair faulty parts.

Is connection or coil normal?

Check indoor P.C. board. Failure ® Replace NO Repair faulty parts.

YES YES

Refrigerant shortage or, clogging or pipe deformed

Replace PMV body.

Is there clogging of the valve? NO

NO NO Is compressor normal? (Note 2) YES

NO

YES

Is there clogging of indoor air filter or heat exchanger?

Is indoor PMV normal?

NO Is not refrigerant bypassed from discharge to suction?

Are following items normal? 1. Connection 2. Condenser 3. Motor 4. Fan

(B) Heating

Compressor error Is outdoor fan operating normally in heating season?

(Note 2) Check the following items mainly. 1. Existence of abnormal sound and abnormal vibration during operation or when starting 2. Abnormal overheat of case during operation or stop (Do not touch.) 3. Current of compressor during operation or starting (No rapid current change) YES

Is flow selector unit normal?

YES YES Cleaning

Check flow selector unit.

NO

Is indoor fan system normal? • Fan cracked • Fan loose

NO

Check outdoor I/F P.C. board. Failure ® Replace

YES

Is there clogging of outdoor heat exchanger?


NO

NO Refrigerant shortage, clogging, pipe breakage

Is outdoor PMV normal?

(After checking there is no slogging or pipe breakage, charge refrigerant again.)

YES

NO Refrigerant shortage, clogging, pipe deformed

Check code

Check code name

[H07] / [d7]

Low oil level protection

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Are TK1, TK2, TK3, and TK4 sensors connected correctly? Is sensor fitted correctly or mis-installed.

Cause of operation 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Valves of balance pipes closed. Miscabling or misinstallation of TK1 to TK4 sensors TK1 to TK4 sensor error Gas leak or oil leak of all outdoor units Refrigerant stagnation of compressor case SV3A, 3B, 3D, 3C, 3E valve error Clogging of oil return circuit from oil separator Clogging of oil-equation circuit system

NO

Correct miswiring. CN514, TK2: CN515 ( TK1: TK3: CN516, TK4: CN523 )

YES Are TK1 and TK2 sensors connected correctly? Is sensor fitted correctly or mis-installed. Are sensor characteristics normal?

NO

Correct miswiring. (TS1: CN504, TS2: CN522) Sensor error ® Replace

* Characteristics-2

YES Abnormal Check leakage of SV6 circuit.

Replace defective parts.

Normal

(*1) a) Leakage check for SV3A valve (for multiple outdoor unit system) • Turn off the power supply, take off connector of SV3A valve, and then start a test operation after power-ON. • Check the temperature change at secondary side of SV3A valve during operation (1 in the figure on the next page). • If temperature is increased, it is a leakage of SV3A valve. Replace SV3A valve.

b) Leakage check for SV3C valve • Turn off the power supply, take off connector of SV3C valve, and then start a test operation after power-ON. • After operation for several minutes, check temperature at secondary side of SV3C valve (2 in the figure on the next page). • If temperature is high (equivalent to discharge temperature TD), it is a leakage of SV3C valve. Replace SV3C valve. (Even if there is leakage from SV3C valve does not occur, temperature of SV3C valve at secondary side rises during operation. When the checked temperature is equivalent to TD temperature, it is a leakage of SV3C valve. Replace SV3C valve.)

c) Clogging check for SV3B valve (for multiple outdoor unit system) Abnormal

Check setup of cooling only indoor units is correct.

Set up cooling only operation mode. Item code (DN) OF Cooling only operation mode: 0001

Normal NO Are characteristics of TK1 to TK4 normal?

148

YES

Sensor error ® Replace

* Characteristics-4

Abnormal

Determine position where gas leaked and repair. (Recharge, refill oil.)

Check gas leak of outdoor unit. (Check oil leak at the outdoor unit.) Normal NO

Repair the flow selector unit.

Is the flow selector unit normal? YES Check accumulation of refrigerant in compressor case.

In some cases, it may be difficult to check for leakage or clogging of refrigerant in low ambient temperature condition. In this case, it may take longer for the system to warm up before commencing checks. (Criteria: Discharge temperature of TD1 and TD2 are 60°C or higher)

NO

(*1) Check leakage of solenoid valve. (SV3C) Check clogging. (SV3E)

YES Replace defective parts

• While outdoor unit is operating, set up SW01/02/03 = [2] [1] [3] to 7-segment display [Hr], and push SW04 for 2 seconds or more, [Hr] [2] is displayed. • Set up SW02 = [9], and turn on SV3A, SV3B, SV3C valves (7-segment display [Hr] [ 3-]). • While outdoor unit is operating, check temperature change at secondary side of SV3B valve (3 in the figure on the next page). • If temperature does not rise (equivalent to suction temperature), it is a clogging of SV3B valve. Replace SV3B valve.

d) Clogging check for SV3E valve • While the outdoor unit is operating, set up SW01/02/03 = [2] [1] [3] the 7-segment display A displays [Hr], and push SW04 for 2 seconds or more, [Hr] [ 2] is displayed. • Set up SW02 = [10], and turn on SV3E valve (7-segment displays [Hr] [ ]). • After operating for several minutes, check the pipe temperature at the secondary side of the SV3E valve. If it is the equivalent to the outside temperature, SV3E valve may be clogged. Replace SV3E valve. • Note: If SV3E valve is clogged, the temperature of all TK1 to TK4 sensors do not change.

Refrigerant accumulation No leakage or clogging Correct accumulation of refrigerant in compressor case, reset power supply and start operation.

(*2) Check clogging in oil recovery circuit of the oil separator. (Capillary, Strainer) Check clogging of SV3D valve.

Check oil level judgment of each compressor.

(*2) Clogging check for SV3D valve of oil return circuit from oil separator a) Oil return circuit YES Replace defective parts

No clogging SW01/02/03=1/16/1 are displayed on 7-segment display.

b) Clogging check for SV3D valve

Are all the oil levels appropriate? NO YES Eliminate cause of stagnation.

Check clogging of oil-equalization circuit. (*3)

• While outdoor unit is operating, check temperature (secondary side of capillary) on oil return circuit (5 in the figure on the next page). If temperature is equivalent to suction temperature, a clogging of strainer of oil return circuit or capillary is considered. Repair the clogged part.

Clogging

Indoor/outdoor PMV error (Cause of refrigerant stagnation) Discharge check valve error, etc.

(Note) When refrigerant stagnates in compressor shell, there may appear to be a low oil level.

Replace defective parts

• While outdoor unit is operating, set up SW01/02/03 = [2] [1] [3] to 7-segment display [Hr], and push SW04 for 2 seconds or more, [Hr] [2] is displayed. • Set up SW02 = [7], and turn on SV3D valve (7-segment display [Hr] [ 3d]). • If temperature is low at secondary side of the valve or it does not change, clogging of valve, capillary, or strainer is considered ( 6 in the figure on the next page).

(*3) Check for solenoid valve of outdoor unit (for multiple outdoor unit system) a) Clogging check for SV3A valve • While outdoor unit is operating, set up SW01/02/03 = [2] [1] [3] to 7-segment display [Hr], and push SW04 for 2 seconds or more, [Hr] [2] is displayed. • Set up SW02 = [4], and turn on SV3A valve (7-segment display [Hr] [ 3A]). • If temperature is low at secondary side of the valve or it does not change, clogging of valve or check valve is considered (1 in the figure).

b) Clogging check for SV3C valve • While outdoor unit is operating, set up SW01/02/03 = [2] [1] [3] to 7-segment display [Hr], and push SW04 for 2 seconds or more, [Hr] [2] is displayed. • Set up SW02 = [6], and turn on SV3C valve (7-segment display [Hr] [ 3C]). • If temperature does not increase, clogging of valve or strainer is considered (2 in the figure).

Check code

Check code name

[H08] / [d4]

Oil level detective temperature sensor error

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Cause of operation TK1 to TK4 sensor Open/Short

Sub-code: 01: TK1 sensor error 02: TK2 sensor error 03: TK3 sensor error 04: TK4 sensor error This error is an oil level temperature sensor error. Check for disconnection of the wiring and resistance value of the sensor. If the sensors are normal, replace the outdoor I/F P.C. board.

Circuit

Connector

TK1

CN514 (Black)

TK2

CN515 (Green)

TK3

CN516 (Red)

TK4

CN523 (Yellow)

(*4) a) Clogging check for oil-equalization circuit • Operate the outdoor unit (drive both compressors in the unit). • After operating for 10 minutes, check temperature of TK1 and TK2 sensors and temperature of oil equalization circuit capillary (7 in the figure) have increased.

Check code

Check code name

[H16] / [d7]

TK1 temperature detective circuit error (Sub-code: 01)

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

(Criteria)

Cause of operation

TK1, TK2=Td1, Td2 temperature - Approx. 10 to 30°C Oil-equalization capillary tubes should be significantly higher than outside air temperature and suction temperature. • If temperature is low, a malfunction of capillary, strainer, or check valve is to be considered. Repair the defective parts.

149

High-pressure sensor

5

Has TK1 sensor become detached?

1. Connection of TK1 sensor. Error in resistance value of TK1 sensor 2. Oil-equalization circuit error (Check valve, capillary clogging, strainer clogging) 3. Refrigerant stagnation in case of compressor shell

YES

Correct installation of sensor.

Check joint

NO

(SV2) Oil separator

Is there incorrect wiring or installation on TK1/TK2/TK3/TK4 sensors?

(

* Characteristics-4

NO

(SV3D) Solenoid valve (SV42)


High-pressure SW

High-pressure SW

Sensor (TD2)

(TD1)


Are characteristics of TK1 sensor resistance value normal?

Sensor (TK3) Strainer

Strainer

(TK1)

NO

Sensor error

* Outdoor unit temp sensor characteristics-4 Error Replace clogged part.

Start a test operation in COOL or HEAT mode.

2

TK1 sensor temp is displayed on 7-segment display with SW01/02/03=[1] [11] [2]. Check TK1 sensor temp. approx. 10 minutes after compressor 1 has operated. If low temperature continues (approximately outside ambient temp.) or temperature does not change, a clogging of strainer of oil-equalization circuit, clogging of capillary tube, or malfunction of check valve is to be considered.

Compressor 1

Strainer

No error

(TK2) Oil tank

(SV3E)

)

YES


6

Correct wiring/installation. TK1: CN514 TK2: CN515 TK3: CN516 TK4: CN523

YES

Capillary tube

(TK4)

7

TK1

4 7 1

Solenoid valve (SV3B)

Strainer Balance pipe Packed valve

Check the clogging of SV3E valve. (Note 1)

(SV3A)

3

Check valve

Oil tank

Error (Note 1) Refer to item [H07] error.

No error Check I/F P.C. board

Replace SV3E valve.

Check code

Check code name

Cause of operation

Check code

Check code name

Cause of operation

[H16] / [d7]

TK2 detective circuit system error (Sub-code: 02)

1. Connection of TK2 sensor. 2. Error in resistance value of TK2 sensor (see 9-7 Sensor characteristics). 3. Oil-equalization circuit error (check valve, capillary clogging, strainer clogging). 4. Refrigerant stagnation in case of compressor shell.

[H16] / [d7]


1. Connection of TK3 sensor. 2. Error in resistance value of TK3 sensor (see 9-7 Sensor characteristics). 3. Error of SV3C valve circuit periphery (check capillary clogging, strainer clogging). 4. Refrigerant stagnation in case of compressor shell.

(TCC-L / AI-NET)


YES


(TCC-L / AI-NET)


NO


YES



Sensor error


(

NO * Outdoor unit temp sensor characteristics-4

)

YES

Does OCR of MG-SW operate?


NO

NO


YES


YES

(

NO NO

Sensor error

* Outdoor unit temp sensor characteristics-4

)

® Replace

YES YES

Reset OCR manually.(*2)

After power reset, check capillary choke of SV3C valve bypass. Error Replace clogged part (Capillary).

Start a test operation in COOL or HEAT mode. NO

TK3 sensor temp is displayed on 7-segment display with SW01/02/03=[1] [13] [2].

150

After power reset Error Replace clogging part.

Start a test operation in COOL or HEAT mode. TK2 sensor temp is displayed on 7-segment display with SW01/02/03=[1] [12] [2].

Check TK3 sensor temp. approx. 10 minutes after compressor 2 has operated. If low temperature continues (approximately outside ambient temp.) or temperature does not change, a clogging of parallel capillary is considered.

Strainer

No error

Check TK2 sensor temp approx. 10 minutes after compressor 2 has operated. If low temperature continues (approximately outside temp) or temperature does not change, a clogging of strainer of oil-equalization circuit, clogging of capillary or malfunction of check valve is considered.

SV3E valve Compressor 2

TK3

No error Strainer

Check the clogging of SV3E valve. (Note 1)

Capillary tube TK2 Check the clogging of SV3E valve. (*1)

Error

Oil tank

*1 Refer to item [H07] error.

No error

Check I/F P.C. board

Replace SV3E valve. *2 If OCR operates even after manual reset of OCR, check whether the wiring to the current sensor (T02) of Comp-IPDU is correct or not.

No error


Error (Note 1) Refer to item [H07] error.

Replace SV3E valve.

Check code

Check code name

Cause of operation

Check code

Check code name

Cause of operation

[H16] / [d7]


1. Connection of TK4 sensor. 2. Error in resistance value of TK4 sensor (see 9-7 Sensor characteristics). 3. Check clogging and malfunction of SV3E valve circuit. 4. Oil-equalization circuit error (check capillary clogging, strainer clogging). 5. Refrigerant stagnation in case of compressor shell.

[L04] / [96]

Duplicated setup of outdoor line address

Outdoor line addresses are duplicated.

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

YES Are there duplicate line address setups?

Are communication wire connections of [U1.U2], [U3.U4], and [U5, U6] normal? Has TK4 sensor become detached?

YES

Correct the line address setup.

NO


NO

Correct the wire connection.

YES

NO



YES

(

NO


NO

)

Repeat the address setup. (Refer to “Address setup”.)

Sensor error ® Replace

YES

Does OCR of MG-SW operate?

®

Check outdoor I/F P.C. board. Failure Replace

YES

Reset OCR manually.(*2)

Check code

Check code name

Cause of operation

[L05] / [96]

Duplicated indoor units with priority (Displayed on indoor unit with priority)

1. Two or more prior indoor units exist.

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

NO

151

Check the clogging of SV3E valve. (*1) Error

No error


This check code is displayed on the set indoor unit when setup of indoor unit with priority is duplicated. • Priority setup with two or more units is not available. Choose one prior unit in one refrigerant circuit system.

*1 Refer to item [H07] error. *2 If OCR operates even after manual reset of OCR, check whether the wiring to the current sensor (T02) of Comp-IPDU is correct or not.

Replace SV3E valve.

Check code name

Check code

Cause of operation

Check the clogging of SV3E valve.

[L06] / [96] (TCC-L / AI-NET)

Check code

Check code name

Cause of operation

[L03] / [96]

Duplicated indoor header units

There were two or more indoor header units within the same remote controller group.

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

1) Check the connection of the remote controller after the connection has been changed. 2) If the group configuration and address are normal when power has been turned on, the mode automatically shifts to address setup mode. (Re-setup of address) → Refer to “Address setup”.

Duplicated indoor units with priority Two or more indoor units with priority (Displayed on the indoor unit other than are duplicated. one with priority and on the outdoor unit)

Sub-code: No. of indoor units with priority

When indoor unit with priority is duplicated, this fault code is displayed on the unit other than the setup indoor unit and outdoor unit. • As only one indoor unit with priority is valid, change the setup.

Check code

Check code name

[L07] / [99]

Group line in individual indoor unit

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Is there group wiring?

YES

Cause of operation The group line is connected in the individual indoor unit.

Item code (D1) 12: Line address Item code (D2) 13: Indoor address Item code (D3) 14: Group address

Check setup item code DN 12, 13, and 14 addresses.

NO

Check code

Check code name

[L10] / [88]

Outdoor capacity unset

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Cause of operation The model selection jumper of the outdoor I/F P.C. board does not match the model.

Service I/F P.C. board for the outdoor unit is common to all outdoor units. The service I/F P.C. board will need to be set up for the correct model based upon the faulty I/F P.C. board, which it is replacing. Set up the model based upon the I/F P.C. board assembly change procedure.

YES Is there an individual indoor unit.

Correct indoor group address.

NO

®


Check code

Check code name

[L17] / [46]

Inconsistent models of outdoor units

(TCC-L / AI-NET) Check code

Check code name

[L08] / [99]*

Indoor group / address unset

Cause of operation

Cause of operation There are outdoor units on the communication line other than Super Module Multi Flex type such as Super Module Multi or Super Module Multi ice regenerative type

Indoor address unset

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Is the power on all the indoor units turned on?

Are the connected outdoor units those for flex on 1 system? (Check model name.)

NO

NO

Replace outdoor units of other models with specified models

Turn on the power of indoor units.

YES

YES

152

Is the check code [L17] displayed even if turning power on again of all the connected outdoor units on 1 system alone?

Disconnect connectors between [U1, U2] and [U3, U4]. Turn on the power of outdoor unit again.

NO

Correct communication line between outdoor units.

YES

Clear addresses. (Refer to “Address clear”.)

Are all the connected outdoor I/F P.C. board's on 1 system P.C. board's of outdoor units for Super Module Multi Flex?

Re-execute address setup. (Refer to “Address setup”.)

Change the incorrectly built-in outdoor I/F P.C. board's with I/F P.C. board's for Super Module Multi Flex.

YES

Note) This code is displayed when the power is turned on at the first time after installation. (Because the address is not yet set up)

Check code

Check code name

[L09] / [46]

Indoor capacity unset

Cause of operation Indoor capacity unset

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Are capacity setups of indoor units unset?

NO

YES

Set up capacity data of indoor unit. (Setup item code (DN) = 11)

NO Check indoor P.C. board. Replace Defect

Check again whether there is any other outdoor unit or not on the communication line in 1 system. If any, turn off power of the corresponding outdoor unit and then check once more.

∗ Using 7-segment on I/F P.C. board, check the model name on each outdoor unit. For check, when putting the rotary switch on SW01/02/03=16/16/16, it is an outdoor I/F P.C. board, for Super Module Multi Flex if “F” is displayed at the left side of 7-segment [A] part.

Check code

Check code name

Cause of operation

Check code

Check code name

[L18] / [8A]

Flow selector unit system error

An indoor unit which has been operated in cooling only mode is operated in heating mode without setup for cooling only mode.

[L29] / [CF]

IPDU quantity error

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

NO

Is every indoor unit been set up for cooling only mode?

Set up All cooling mode. Item code (DN)=OF Cooling only operation mode=0001

YES Check flow selector unit.

Cause of operation

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

1. Incorrect model setup in service for I/F P.C. board 2. Communication error between IPDU, fan IPDU and I/F 3. IPDU, fan IPDU, I/F P.C. board error

Sub-code: 01: IPDU1 error 02: IPDU2 error 03: IPDU1, 2 error 04: Fan IPDU error 05: IPDU1, fan IPDU error 06: IPDU2, fan IPDU error 07: All IPDU error or disconnection of communication line between IPDU-I/F P.C. board or outdoor I/F P.C. board error

Is jumper setup of outdoor I/F P.C. board correct? (Jumpers 7, 8, 9 ON)

NO

Correct connection.

YES

Check code

Check code name

[L20] / [98]


(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Cause of operation Central control addresses are duplicated.

YES

Is communication connector between IPDU and I/F P.C. board connected?

Correct connection.

NO

Are two or more central control system with identical network addresses connected?

YES

Correct the network address of the central control system.

YES

Is the communication line between IPDU and I/F P.C. board disconnected?

Reconnect communication line.

NO

NO

153

Check the network adaptor on the indoor P.C. board.

Is there voltage fluctuation between pin 4 and pin 5 of CN600 on I/F P.C. board (measure by tester: DC 0 to 5 V).

NO

I/F P.C. board error

YES

Check code

Check code name

[L28] / [46]

Quantity over of connected outdoor units

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Is No. of connected outdoor units below 3 units?

Cause of operation 1. Quantity over of connected outdoor units 2. Connection error of communication line between outdoor units 3. Outdoor I/F P.C. board error

NO Max. 3 units are allowed for flex system.

YES Check outdoor I/F P.C. board.

YES

NO

IPDU P.C. board error

Both IPDU (No.1, No.2) and fan IPDU did not return the communication.

® ®

On the fan power supply P.C. board, 1) CN503: Between 1 and 5 pins 12V 2) CN503: Between 2 and 5 pins 7V 3) Between +5V and GND at the side of CN505: 5V

NO

Replace fan power supply on P.C. board.

YES

YES

Is the communication line between outdoor units correct?

Is there voltage fluctuation between pin 3 and pin 5 of CN600 on I/F P.C. board (measure by tester: DC 0 to 5 V).

Replace IPDU P.C. board with trouble.

NO Correct connection of the communication line.

Auxiliary code

P.C. board to be replaced

01

IPDU1

02

IPDU2

03

IPDU1, 2

04

Fan IPDU

05

IPDU1, fan IPDU

06

IPDU2, fan IPDU

07

IPDU1, 2, fan IPDU, I/F

Check code

Check code name

[L30] / [b6]

Interlock in indoor unit from outside

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Is outside device connected to connector CN80?

Cause of operation Outside error was input.

Check code

Check code name

[P03] / [1E]


(TCC-L / AI-NET)

NO

Check indoor P.C. board. Replace Failure

NO

Check outside device. Failure Replace

YES

Does outside device correctly operate?

Cause of operation 1. Service valve of outdoor unit closed. 2. Outdoor PMV1, 2 error 3. TD sensor error 4. Refrigerant short, clogging in pipe 5. 4-way valve error 6. SV4 circuit leakage, misinstallation 7. SV5 circuit leakage 8. SV6 circuit clogging 9. Discharge gas/Suction gas pipes mispiping 10. Flow selector unit error

YES Are service valves of outdoor discharge gas, suction gas, and liquid pipe fully opened?

Check cause of the operation.

NO Open service valves fully.

YES

Check code

Check code name

[L31] / [–]

Extended IC error

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

YES

154

Are there any faults with the outdoor unit power supply?

Cause of operation 1. Outdoor unit power error 2. Outdoor I/F P.C. board error

Are outdoor PMV1 and PMV2 normal? 1. Connector connection 2. Wiring 3. Coil 4. Valve itself 5. Outdoor P.C. board

NO Repair outdoor PMV. * Connector CN300, 301 White

YES

Check power voltage and line. Check auxiliaty noise, etc.

NO

Is resistance characteristic of TD1 sensor normal? YES Is there any refrigerant leakage on discharge gas to suction side on the 4-way valve?

Check outdoor I/F P.C. board.

NO * Refer to Outdoor unit temperature sensor characteristics-4.

Replace TD1.

NO Check 4-way valve.

YES SV4 circuit 1. Are not coils of SV41 and SV42 valves mounted reversely? 2. Is no leakage from SV41?

NO

Correct mounting of valve coils or replace SV41 valve.

YES Check code

Check code name

[P01] / [11]


(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Cause of operation

Abnormal Replace defective parts.

Check leakage of SV5 circuit.

1. Cabling error 2. Check fan motor.

Normal Abnormal

∗ For the models installed with AC fan motor only


Check clogging of SV6 circuit. Normal

Is there a connection error or disconnection of CN076 connector?

YES

Correct cabling circuit for the connector connection.

NO

Check mispiping of discharge gas / suction gas main pipes.

Correct piping.

Normal NO

YES Is not there mechanical lock of fan motor?

Abnormal

Replace fan motor.

Repair flow selector unit.

Is the flow selector unit normal? YES

NO

®


Is not indoor unit in other refrigerant line connected?

NO Correct wiring.

YES Refrigerant short, clogging, pipe breakage

(Check there is no pipe breakage, and then recharge refrigerant.)

Check code

Check code name

[P04] / [21]

Actuation of high-pressure SW

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Cause of operation


NO Is SV4 circuit normal?


Refrigerant overcharge, clogging,pipe breakage, abnormal overload condition

YES

NO Is indoor PMV normal? YES

YES

Check and correct cabling.

YES

®

Check I/F P.C. board. Failure Replace NO

Is connector connection, coil normal?

NO

YES Repair faulty parts.

Are there any obstructions in the operation of the indoor heat exchanger? 1 Air filter clogging 2 Heat exchanger clogging 3 Air short circuit

NO

Are connector connection, heat exchanger, fan, and fan motor normal? YES

Eliminate the interfered causes.

YES

Does heating indoor fan normally operate?

NO

NO

®

Check parts. Failure Replace

Are parts of high-pressure SW normal?

Repair SV4 circuit.

Coil error, clogging, ( disconnection of wiring, etc. )

YES

NO Is circuit cabling normal?

YES

C All heating operation

Note) High-pressure SW is normally closed. (B contact)

NO Does high-pressure SW operate?

A

1. High-pressure SW error 2. Service valve closed 3. Pd sensor error 4. Indoor/outdoor fan error 5. Indoor/outdoor PMV choke 6. Indoor/outdoor heat exchanger clogging, air short circuit 7. SV2 circuit error 8. SV4 circuit error 9. SV5 circuit error 10. Discharge line check valve malfunction 11. Refrigerant overcharge


NO Is service valve fully opened?

Open service valve fully.

NO Is 4-way valve normal?

YES

155

Check for mispiping of discharge/suction gas main pipes.

Abnormal

Are characteristics of TC2 and TCJ sensor resistance value normal?

YES

Correct piping.

Replace 4-way valve.

Normal

YES

Abnormal

NO


Check operation of PMV3 SV12 valve.

Replace TC2 or TCJ sensor.

Is SV11 circuit normal?

Normal Abnormal

Reset power supply, and start a test operation corresponding to the season.

® To All heating operation ® To All cooling operation

Repair faulty position.

Is there clogging NO of the valve?

B C

NO

Are indoor units of different refrigerant circuit connected?

Replace the high-pressure sensor.

YES

All cooling operation NO YES

Is there no crack or coming-off of fan?

Refrigerant overcharge, clogging, pipe breakage, abnormal overload condition

NO Repair faulty parts. Connector connection, fan IPDU, fan motor, wiring

YES

Are there any obstructions in the operation of the indoor heat exchanger? 1. Air filter clogging 2. Heat exchanger clogging 3. Air short circuit

YES Eliminate the interfered causes.

Check code

Check code name

[P05] / [AF]

Open phase, negative phase

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

NO NO Repair SV2 circuit.

Is SV2 circuit normal? YES A

Replace PMV body.

with miscabling check ( Check ) function of outdoor unit.

Check and correct the cabling.

Does cooling outdoor fan normally operate?

®


YES

Are characteristics of high-pressure sensor normal?

B

YES


Is the flow selector normal? Normal

NO

(

Coil error, clogging, disconnection of wiring, etc.

)

• Check the phase power line of outdoor unit. • Check error of outdoor I/F P.C. board. • Check there is no looseness, etc of terminal.

Cause of operation 1. Power supply open phase 2. Power supply negative phase

Check code

Check code name

[P07] / [1C]


Cause of operation

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Power voltage error Outdoor fan system error Heat sink installation error Clogging of hear sink cooling duct IPDU P.C. board error (TH sensor error)

Check code

Check code name

[P12] / [11]


(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Turn off power supply. Sub-code: 01: Compressor 1 side 02: Compressor 2 side NO

Is power voltage normal?*

Correct power line.

* 380–415V ± 10% YES NO

Is wiring of IPDU normal?

* Detectable only in models with DC fan motor 4-way Air Discharge Cassette, or Concealed Duct Standard type Under Ceiling, or High Wall type

(

YES

)

Correct connector connection.

NO

Correct wiring such as cable to compressor.

YES

Remove connectors CN333 and CN334 on indoor P.C. board (MCC-1402).

NO

Is indoor fan normal?

Is there connection error or disconnection on connector CN333, CN334 of indoor P.C. board (MCC-1402)?

Cause of operation 1. Cabling error of fan motor connector 2. Fan motor error 3. Indoor P.C. board error

Check fan and fan motor.

YES Is fixing between IPDU and heat sink loose?

YES

Does fan turn without trouble when turning it with hands?

Tighten screws.

NO Clear blocking.

Is resistance value between each phase at motor side of fan motor connector CN333 on indoor P.C. board (MCC-1402) correct? *1

NO

156


YES

Check code

Check code name

[P10] / [0b]


(TCC-L / AI-NET)


Float SW operation error Drain pump operation error Clogging of drain pipe Indoor P.C. board error

YES

NO

Correct connector connection.

YES NO

Does float SW operate?

NO Is wiring normal?

YES

Check and correct wiring.

YES

®


YES

Check drain pipe, etc.

NO

Is power supply to drain pump normal?

NO

CN333

• Check there is 220–240 V voltage of 1-3 pin of CN68 on indoor P.C. board.

NO

Replace indoor fan motor.

NO


*3 Check fan motor position detective signal. • Measure voltage with tester between CN334 1 and 5 on indoor P.C. board (MCC-1402) under condition of CN333 and CN334 installed and power-ON. ® Turn fan slowly with hands so that pin voltage fluctuates between 0 and 5V. • Between 4 and 5: 5V

®

Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1402). Failure Replace

®


YES Replace drain pump, and check cabling.


*2 Check insulation resistance value of fan motor position detective circuit. • Is winding 1 (Yellow lead) to 4 (Pink lead) opened/shorted? ® Resistance should be 5 to 20kW

Is output of indoor fan motor position detective signal correct? *3

YES

NO

*1 • Is not winding 1 (Red lead) to 3 (White lead), 3 (White lead) to 5 (Black lead), 5 (Black lead) to 1 (Red lead) opened/shorted? ® Resistance value should satisfy the follows. [4-way Air Discharge Cassette type] MMU-AP0091H, AP0301 ® Approx. 70 to 100W MMU-AP0361H, AP0561 ® Approx. 35 to 50W [Concealed Duct Standard, Under Ceiling, High Wall type] 15 to 35W • Check insulation resistance between the cabinet and 1, 3, 5? ® Should be 10W or more

Is resistance value at motor side of fan motor connector CN334 on indoor P.C. board (MCC-1402) correct? *2

Sub-code: Indoor address with trouble

Does drain pump operate?


YES YES

Is there blocking of heat sink cooling duct?

Is float SW connector (Indoor control P.C. board CN34) connected normally?

NO

CN334

Check code name

Check code

[P13] / [47]

Cause of operation

Outdoor liquid back detection error 1. PMV1/PMV2 error

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Are connections of outdoor PMV1/PMV2 connectors correct?

NO

Pd sensor, Ps sensor error Clogging of SV2 circuit Clogging of SV3B circuit, balance pipe Leakage on main discharge pipe Outdoor I/F P.C. board error

Correct connector connection. (CN300, CN301)

YES

Are operations of outdoor PMV1/PMV2 normal?

Check code name

Gas leak detection TS condition (Sub-code: 01)

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Are service valves at gas and liquid side fully opened?


Outdoor unit service valve closed Outdoor PMV error TS1 sensor error Refrigerant shortage, clogging refrigerant circuit 5. 4-way valve error 6. SV4 circuit error

NO


YES

NO

PMV error

YES

Are characteristics of Pd sensor/Ps sensor output voltage normal?

Check code

[P15] / [AE]

NO

Is outdoor PMV1, 2 normal? 1. Connector connection 2. Wiring 3. Coil 4. Valve body 5. Outdoor I/F P.C. board

NO

Repair outdoor PMV.

Connectors CN300, 301 White

Pd sensor/Ps sensor error YES

YES NO Is SV2 valve coil correctly connected?

Correct connector connection. (CV2: CN302)

YES

YES

157

Is there any miswiring or misinstallation on TS1 and TS2 sensors? NO

Check I/F P.C. board.

Are characteristics of TS2 sensor resistance normal?

YES Correct miswiring/installation

Does not discharge refrigerant gas bypass to suction side through 4-way valve?

NO

Replace TS2 sensor.

Refer to outdoor unit temperature sensor characteristics-3.

YES

Check and replace 4-way valve and coil.

NO

Is there no leakage of SV41 and 42 valve circuits?

NO

valve body, ( Coil, disconnection of cable, etc )

YES

Check mispiping of discharge gas/ suction gas main pipes.

Repair SV41 and SV42 circuits.

Abnormal

Correct piping.

Normal

Is the flow selector unit normal?

Abnormal


Normal

Refrigerant shortage, clogging, pipe breakage.

(Check there is no clogging and pipe breakage, and then recharge refrigerant.)

Check code

Check code name

[P15] / [AE]

Gas leak detection TD condition (Sub-code: 02)

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Are service valves on gas and the liquid sides fully opened?

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Cause of operation

Check code

Check code name

Cause of operation

Outdoor unit service valve closed Outdoor PMV error TD sensor error SV4 circuit error Refrigerant shortage, clogging refrigerant circuit

[P17] / [bb]


1. Outdoor unit service valve closed 2. Outdoor PMV error 3. TD sensor error 4. Refrigerant shortage, clogging of refrigerant circuit 5. 4-way valve error 6. SV4 circuit leakage, misinstallation 7. SV5 circuit leakage 8. SV6 circuit clogging 9. Mispiping of discharge gas/suction gas pipes 10. Flow selector unit error

NO

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Open the service valves fully.

YES

Is outdoor PMV1, 2 normal? 1. Connector connection 2. Cabling 3. Coil 4. Valve body 5. Outdoor I/F P.C. board

Are service valves of gas and liquid sides fully opened? NO

Repair outdoor PMV.

* Connectors CN300, 301 White

Is outdoor PMV normal? 1. Connector connection 2. Cabling 3. Coil 4. Valve body 5. Outdoor I/F P.C. board

YES

158

Is SV4 valve circuit normal? (Coil misinstallation, valve leakage)

NO

NO

Repair outdoor PMV.

* Connectors CN300, 301 White

Replace TD1 or TD2 sensor.

* Refer to outdoor unit temperature sensor characteristics-4.

YES Are characteristics of TD2 sensor resistance normal?

NO

YES

Repair SV41 and SV42 circuits.

(

YES


YES

YES Are characteristics of TD1, TD2 sensor resistance normal?

NO

Coil, valve body, coil installation, disconnection of cable, etc.

)

Does not discharge refrigerant gas by pass to suction sidethrough 4-way valve?

NO

Replace TD2 sensor.

* Refer to outdoor unit temperature sensor characteristics-4. NO

Check 4-way valve.

YES Are there indoor units connected in different refrigerant circuit?

NO

Correct cabling.

YES

Check leakage of SV5 and SV11 circuits.

Abnormal


SV4 circuit 1. Are not SV41 and SV42 valve coils installed reversely? 2. Is there no leakage through SV42 circuit?

NO

Correct installation of valve coil. Replace SV42 valve.

YES NO Check leakage of SV5 circuit.


Normal YES Check for mispiping of discharge gas/suction gas main pipes.

Abnormal

NO Correct piping.


YES

Normal Abnormal Is the flow selector unit normal?

Check clogging of SV6 circuit.



NO

Correct piping.

YES Normal

NO Is the flow selector unit normal?

Refrigerant shortage, clogging, pipe breakage.

(Check there is no clogging and pipe breakage and then recharge refrigerant.)


YES Are there indoor units connected in different refrigerant circuit? YES Refrigerant shortage, clogging, pipe breakage.

NO

Correct cabling.

the mis-wiring check ( Use function of outdoor unit. ) there is no clogging and pipe leakage, ( Check ) and then recharge with refrigerant.

Check code

Check code name

[P19] / [08]

4-way valve operation error

Cause of operation

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

1. 2. 3. 4.

4-way valve error TS1 sensor/TE1 sensor error Pd sensor/Ps sensor error TE sensor/TL sensor misconnection

Check code

Check code name

[P20] / [22]


Cause of operation

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Sub-code: Detected outdoor unit No.

NO

Is 4-way valve coil connector connected?

Correct connector connection. (4-way valve coil: CN317)

YES Correct connector connection. TS1 sensor: CN504 TE1 sensor: CN505 Pd sensor: CN501 Ps sensor: CN500

NO

Are TS1, TE1, Pd, Ps sensor connectors connected? YES

NO


NO

NO

®

Check parts. Failure Replace

YES

Normal

Are output voltage characteristics of Pd and Ps sensors normal?


YES

Replace sensor.

YES

Abnormal Correct piping. Abnormal

Check operation of PMV3 SV12.

Replace sensor.

Normal

Replace defective parts. Abnormal

159


YES

Pd sensor error Service valve closed. Indoor/outdoor fan error Indoor/outdoor PMV clogging Indoor/outdoor heat exchanger clogging SV2 circuit error SV4 circuit error SV5 circuit error Outdoor I/F P.C. board error Operation error of check valve of main discharge pipe 11. Refrigerant overcharge

NO Are service valves fully opened?

Are characteristics of high-pressure sensor normal?

Are characteristics of resistance value of TS1 and TE1 sensors normal?

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.


Normal

Are connection and installation of TE1 and TL sensors correct?

NO

Correct connection and installation.

Reset power supply, and start a test operation corresponded to the season.

YES B

Reset the power supply and start heating test operation.

All cooling operation

Does cooling outdoor fan normally operate? YES

All cooling operation ® To B All heating operation ® To C * 1. Pressure by pressure gauge (Check joint) 2. Pressure display on 7-segment display 3. Output voltage of I/F P.C. board If 1 and 2, 3 are different, an error of pressure sensor is considered. If 2 and 3 are different, check I/F P.C. board.

NO Correct faulty parts. YES

Is there no fan crack or coming-off?

NO

Replace the FS unit.


Correct faulty parts. (Connector connection, fan IPDU, fan motor, wiring)

NO NO

YES

Is outdoor PMV1, 2 normal?

YES Does 4-way valve operate? NO

Does refrigerant gas discharge to suction side through 4-way valve? *1

NO

If an error did not occur in test operation, restart the operation.

YES

Correct faulty position.

YES Are there any obstructions to the operation of the heat exchanger? 1. Blocked heat exchanger 2. Air short circuit NO

(Connector connection wiring, coil mounting, valve clogging, etc) YES Eliminate the interfered causes.

NO


4-way valve error

Check 4-way valve.

Repair SV2 circuit.

YES

(Coil error, clogging, disconnection of cable, etc.) NO


*1 Check TS and TE temperature of the outdoor unit which compressors is operated. (I/F) SW01=[1], SW02=[6], SW03=[2] ® TS sensor temperature SW01=[1], SW02=[7], SW03=[2] ® TE sensor temperature

Judgment criteria TE sensor: Normal if TE ≤ 20˚C except summer season (Outside temp 20˚C or lower) TS sensor: Normal if TS ≤ 40˚C except summer season (Outside temp 20˚C or lower)

Repair SV4 circuit. (Coil error, clogging, disconnection of cable, etc.)

YES Does the check valve of the main discharge pipe operate normally? YES Refrigerant overcharge, clogging, pipe breakage, abnormal overload condition

NO

Repair check valve. ® Replace

C

Check code

Check code name

[P22] / [1A]

Outdoor fan IPDU error

(TCC-L / AI-NET)


Is connector connection of indoor heat exchanger fan or fan motor normal?

NO

Does heating indoor fan normally operate? YES

Sub-code:

YES NO Repair faulty parts.

0 ∗ : IGBT short circuit 3 ∗ : Motor lock error C∗ : TH sensor error (Heat sink overheat) E ∗ : Vdc error

YES NO

Are characteristics of sensor TC2 and TCJ resistance normal?

YES

Are wire connections on the fan IPDU and the power P.C. board assembly normal?

NO

NO

1 ∗ : Position detect circuit error 4 ∗ : Motor current error detected D∗ : TH sensor error

Correct cable connector connection.

YES

YES Repair faulty parts.

Fan lock Fan IPDU P.C. board error Overload External cause such as power surge Fan IPDU power P.C. board error

NO

Is indoor PMV normal?

Is connector connection coil normal?


Replace TC2 or TCJ sensor.

Is the outdoor fan motor locked?

YES

NO

NO Is there a clogging?

®

Check indoor P.C. board. Faulty Replace

Is winding resistance of the motor correct? 13 to 33W (Between R and S, R and T, S and T)

YES Replace PMV body .

160

Is check valve of main discharge pipe normal?

NO

Repair check valve.

Repair check valve.

® Replace ® Replace

Retightening of screws, etc.

YES

Eliminate the interfered causes. Is there no problem such as stuffing or blast blowing to discharge port of outdoor fan? NO

Repair SV5 circuit.


(

YES Abnormal Check operation of 4-way valve.

Coil error, choke, disconnection of cable, etc. Replace 4-way valve.

Normal Abnormal Check clogging of SV11 circuit.


Normal

Refrigerant overcharge, clogging, pipe breakage, abnormal overload condition

YES

Replace fan IPDU.

NO

YES

NO

YES

Is the fan IPDU firmly attached to the heat sink.

Is sub-code of outdoor I/F P.C. board [0d]?

NO

Are there indoor units connected to different refrigerant circuits?

Replace motor.

YES

YES

YES Are there any obstructions to the operation of the heat exchanger? 1. Air filter clogging 2. Blocked heat exchanger 3. Air short circuit

NO

NO the mis-wiring check function ( Use ) of outdoor unit.

Check and correct cabling.

Check fan IPDU.

)

YES


Check code

Check code name

[P26] / [14]

G-Tr short-circuit protection error

(TCC-L / AI-NET)


Outdoor unit power error IPDU error/Cable connection error Compressor error IPDU P.C. board error

Check code

Check code name

[P29] / [16]

Compressor position detective circuit error

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Cause of operation 1. Wire connection error. 2. Compressor error 3. IPDU P.C. board error

Sub-code: 01: Compressor 1 side 02: Compressor 2 side Sub-code: 01: Compressor 1 side 02: Compressor 2 side

Is the power supply voltage to the outdoor unit normal?

NO Correct power line.

Are the connectors and wiring to the compressor normal?

NO

Check and correct circuit and wires, i.e. to the compressor, etc.

YES

Compressor error ® Replace

YES


YES


YES YES

Is wire connector connection on the IPDU P.C. board normal?

NO

Is it grounded? Correct the wire connections.

NO

YES NO Is compressor operation normal?

Replace compressor.

Is there a winding short? (Is winding resistance 0.1 to 0.3W?) NO

YES

Is smoothing condenser normal? (1500µF, 350V)

NO

Is the winding open circuit? Check capacity valve external appearance.

NO

YES

161

Replace IPDU P.C. board.

Check IPDU P.C. board. Failure ® Replace

Check code

Check code name

[P31] / [47]

Other indoor error (Group follower unit error)

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Cause of operation Other indoor unit in the group has a error.

When the header unit of the group detects [E03, L03, L07, L08 error], the follower unit(s) in the group display [P31] error and stop. There are no check code displays or alarm record on the main remote controller.

Check code

Check code name

[–] / [97]

AI-NET communication line error

Cause of operation AI-NET communication line error

(TCC-L / AI-NET)

Are AI-NET X and Y communication lines normal?

NO

Correct communication line.

YES Are connections of CN01, CN02, and CN03 connectors on network adaptor P.C. board (MCC-1401) and CN309 and CN41 connectors on indoor P.C. board normal?

NO

Correct connection of connectors.

YES Are remote controller communication lines (A, B) normal?

NO

Check connection of A, B terminal. Correct communication line of remote controller.

YES Is there no connection error on the power line?

YES

Correct power line.

NO

162

Is not main power supply turned on?

YES

Turn on the main power supply.

NO Did a block-out occur?

YES

Clear check code.

NO Is the network address changed by the main remote controller?

YES

NO YES

Eliminate noise, etc.

Is there any noise etc.? NO Can other indoor units be controlled from AI-NET central remote controller, or is the operation status of indoor unit the same?

Unavailable (Others are same.)

®

Check central controller. Failure Replace

YES Does the network adaptor P.C. board LED (D01) turn on?

NO

Can the NO indoor unit be controlled from the main remote controller?

®


YES YES Check power transformer of the network adaptor P.C. board (MCC-1401). Failure Replace

®

9-6. 7-Segment Display Function n 7-segment display on the outdoor unit (Interface P.C. board) On the interface control P.C. board, a 7-segment LED is provided to check the operating status. The displayed contents are changed by combining the setup numbers of the rotary switches (SW01, SW02 and SW03) on the I/F P.C. board.

Interface P.C. board SW06

7-segment display A

7-segment display B

SW06

SW07

SW08

SW09

D600

3rd. place

2nd. place

SW05

CN32 SW04 D601 D602 D603

D600

1st. place

SW08

CN30 CN31

CN30 CN31

2nd. place

SW07

SW05

CN32 SW04 D601 D602 D603

SW15

D604

SW15

D604

Display A

Display A

1st. place

SW09

SW01

SW02

SW03

Display B

SW01

SW02

Display B

SW03

u Check procedure when the system has stopped due to an trouble When the system has stopped due to an trouble in the outdoor unit, execute the following check procedure. 1. Open the panels of the outdoor unit, and then check the 7-segment display. The check code is shown on the right side of 7-segment display B. [U1] [¡¡¡] ([¡¡¡]: Check code) ∗ Rotary switch setup for confirming the check code: SW01 [1], SW02 [1], SW03 [1]. However the check code [OOO] is displayed for 3 seconds and the sub-code [OOO] for 1 second are alternately displayed if a sub-code is provided. 2. Confirm the check code, and then follow the check procedure detailed for the diagnosis of the fault. 3. [U1] [E28] on the 7-segment display means an error on the follower unit. change. Push and hold switch SW04 on the header unit for 2 seconds or more. Only the fan of the outdoor unit with a fault will operate. Open the panel of the corresponding unit, and then confirm the ceck code shown on the 7-segment display. 4. Perform the check procedure based on each check code diagnosis.

How to read the check display 7-segment display

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

b

C

d

E

a

c

e

G

h

i

n

o

r

S

t

V

y

–

u

163

F

H

J

L

P

1. Data display of system information (Displayed on the header outdoor unit only) SW01 SW02 SW03 1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

3

Display contents Refrigerant name

System capacity

No. of outdoor units

No. of connected indoor units/ No. of units with cooling thermo ON No. of connected indoor units/ No. of units with heating thermo ON Compressor command correction amount Release control

Oil-equalization control

Oil-equalization request

Displays refrigerant name.

A

Model with refrigerant R410A

r4

10A

Model with refrigerant R407C

r4

07C

A

[ 5] to [48]

B

[HP]

A

[ 1] to [ 4]

B

[ P]

: 5 to 48HP

: 1 to 4 units

A

[ 0] to [48]

B

[C0] to [C48] : 0 to 48 units (No. of units with cooling thermo ON)

: 0 to 48 units (No. of connected units)

A

[ 0] to [48]

B

[H0] to [H48] : 0 to 48 units (No. of units with heating thermo ON)

: 0 to 48 units (No. of connected units)

A

Data is displayed with hexadecimal notation

B A

Normal time : [ r], During release control: [r1]

B

—

A

Normal time : [oiL-0]

B

During oil equation : [oiL-1]

A

Displays with segment LED lighting pattern

B

Display A

Display B

A F G B E

C D Dp

10

11

12

13

Refrigerant/oil recovery operation

Automatic address

Demand operation

Optional control (P.C. board input)

U2

U3

U4

F in the left figure goes on: Header requests oil equalization. C in the left figure goes on: Follower requests oil-equalization. (Outdoor unit number)

A

During sending of cooling refrigerant oil recovery signal : [C1]. Normal time : [C ]

B

During sending of heating refrigerant oil recovery signal : [H1]. Normal time : [H ]

A

[Ad]

B

Automatic addressing : [FF], Normal time : [ ]

A

[dU]

B

Normal time : [ ]. In 50% to 90% : [ 50 to 90] When controlling by communication line input : [E50 to E90]

Displays optioned control status

A

B

h.∗

∗.∗.∗.

Priority on cooling

c.∗

∗.∗.∗.

Heating only

H.∗

∗.∗.∗.

Cooling only

C.∗

∗.∗.∗.

Priority on No. of operating indoor units

n.∗

∗.∗.∗.

Operation mode selection : In heating with priority (Normal)

U.∗

∗.∗.∗.

∗.… .

∗.∗.∗.

Start input

∗.1.

∗.∗.∗.

Stop input

∗.0.

∗.∗.∗. ….∗.∗.

Priority on specific indoor unit Batch start/stop

: Normal

∗.∗.

Night low-noise operation : Normal

∗.∗.

Operation input Snow fan operation : Normal Operation input 14

Option control (BUS line input)

15

Unused

16

—

B

∗.∗.

1.∗.∗. ∗.….∗.

∗.∗.

∗.1.∗.

Same as above

A

—

B

—

∗ mark: Indicates none on display 164

2. Data display of outdoor unit information (Displayed on each outdoor unit) SW01 SW02 SW03 1

1

1

Display contents Error data

A

Displays outdoor unit number: [U1] to [U4]

B

Displays check code (Latest code only is displayed.) There is no check code: [– – –] There is sub-code: Check code [∗ ∗ ∗] for 3 seconds, sub-code [– ∗ ∗] for 1 second alternately

push function : Fan of unit with error only drives. 7-segment A: [E1] push function : Fan of normal unit only drives. 7-segment A: [E0] push function : Interruption of fan operation function 2

3

—

Operation mode

A

—

B

—

A

Stop: [ ] Normal cooling: [ C], Normal heating: [ H], Normal defrost: [ J]

B 4

5

Outdoor unit HP

Compressor operation command

—

A

5HP: [ 5], 6HP: [ 6], 8HP: [ 8], 10HP: [10], 12HP: [12]

B

[HP]

A

No.1 compressor operation command is displayed. Data display with Hexadecimal notation: [00 to FF]

B

No.2 compressor operation command is displayed. Data display with Hexadecimal notation: [00 to FF]

push function 7-segment display (A/B) 6

7

8

9

Outdoor fan step

Compressor backup

—

Control valve output data

10

11

12

A

[FP]

B

Step 0 to 31: [ 0 to 31]

A

Displays No.1 compressor setup status Normal: [ ], Backup setup: [C1]

B

Displays No.2 compressor setup status Normal: [ ], Backup setup: [C2]

A

—

B

—

Displays control output status of solenoid valve

A

B

4-way valve: ON

H. 1

………

4-way valve: OFF

H. 0

………

SV2: ON / SV5: OFF

2. 1

… 5. 0

SV2: OFF / SV5: ON

2. 0

… 5. 1

SV3A: ON / SV3B: OFF / SV3C: OFF /SV3D: OFF

3. 1

0 0 0

SV3A: OFF / SV3B: ON / SV3C: OFF /SV3D: OFF

3. 0

10 0

SV3A: OFF / SV3B: OFF / SV3C: ON /SV3D: OFF

3. 0

0 1 0

SV3A: OFF / SV3B: OFF / SV3C: OFF /SV3D: ON

3. 0

0 0 1

SV41: ON / SV42: OFF

4. …

10…

SV41: OFF / SV42: ON

4. …

0 1…

—

……

………

—

……

………

∗∗

∗ ∗. P

…∗

∗ ∗. P

13

14 15 16

PMV1 /PMV2 opening

Displays opening data (Decimal) (Total opening)

— Oil level judgment status

: Inverter frequency is exchanged to decimal notation. : [∗ ∗ ] [∗ ∗ H] (Normal display by pushing )

— A

[oL] [SW05] push SW function: The following data is displayed for 2 seconds. * During oil shortage in compressor 1: [L …], during oil shortage in compressor 2: [… L]

B

Initial display: [… … …], Oil level judgment result: [A. #. ∗] Judgment result of compressor 1 in [#], compressor 2 in [∗] (0: Normal, 1, 2: Shortage) is displayed.

165

3. Data display of outdoor cycle (Displayed on each outdoor unit) SW01 SW02 SW03 1

1

2

Display contents Pd pressure data

Pd pressure (MPaG) is displayed with decimal data. (MPaG: Approx. 1/10 value of kg/cm2G data)

2

Ps pressure data

3

PL pressure conversion data Estimated pressure of liquid line (MPaG) is displayed with decimal data.

4

TD1 sensor data

5

Ps pressure (MPaG) is displayed with decimal data.

TD2 sensor data

7 8

TS1 sensor data

B ∗. ∗ ∗

P S.

∗. ∗ ∗

P L.

∗. ∗ ∗

Temperature sensor data (°C) is displayed with decimal notation.

Symbol

td

111

Data

• Symbol display for 1 sec. and data display for 3 sec. are alternately displayed.

∗

∗ ∗. ∗

Symbol

td

211

Data

∗

∗ ∗. ∗

Symbol

tS

111

Data

∗

∗ ∗. ∗

Symbol

tS

211

Data

∗

∗ ∗. ∗

Symbol

tE

—

Data

—

—

tL

• Data is displayed in [∗]. 6

A P d.

• Negative data is displayed as [– ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗].

TS2 sensor data TE sensor data

9

TL sensor data

Symbol Data

∗

10

TO sensor data

Symbol

to

Data

∗

Symbol

F1

11

TK1 sensor data

Data

∗ F2

12

TK2 sensor data

Symbol Data

∗

13

TK3 sensor data

Symbol

F3

Data

∗

Symbol

F4

Data

∗

14

TK4 sensor data

15

—

A

—

B

—

16

—

A

—

∗ ∗. ∗ ∗ ∗. ∗ ∗ ∗. ∗ ∗ ∗. ∗ ∗ ∗. ∗ ∗ ∗. ∗

B

4. Data display of indoor unit information (Displayed on the header unit only) SW01 SW02 SW03 4

1 to 16 1 to 3 Receiving status of indoor BUS communication

B

Display contents Receiving time: [… … 1], Not received: [… … …]

5

Indoor check code

B

6

Indoor capacity (HP) horse power

B

7

Indoor request command (S code)

B

No check code: [– – –] 0. 2, 0. 5, 0. 8, … 1, 1. 2, 1. 7, … 2, 2. 5, … 3, 3. 2, … 4, … 5, … 6, … 8, 1 0, 1 6, 2 0 Data is displayed with Hexadecimal notation [… … 0 to … … F] : Heating

8

Indoor PMV opening data

B

Data is displayed with Hexadecimal notation

9

Indoor TA sensor data

B


10

Indoor TF sensor data

B


11

Indoor TCJ sensor data

B


12

Indoor TC1 sensor data

B


13

Indoor TC2 sensor data

B


NOTE) Indoor address No. is chosen by changing SW02 and SW03. SW03 SW02

Indoor address

7-segment display A

1

1 to 16 SW02 setup number

[01] to [16]

2

1 to 16 SW02 setup number + 16

[17] to [32]

3

1 to 16 SW02 setup number + 32

[33] to [48]

166

5. Outdoor EEPROM check code display (Displayed on the header unit only) ∗ The latest check code written in EEPROM on each outdoor unit is displayed. (It is used when confirming the check code after power supply has been reset.) Set SW01 to 03 as shown in the following table and the push SW04 for 5 seconds or more to display an check code. W01 1

SW02 SW03 1

16

7-segment display

Display contents

A

B

The latest check code of the header unit 1 (U1)

E. r

1. – –

2

The latest check code of the follower unit 1 (U2)

E. r

2. – –

3

The latest check code of the follower unit 2 (U3)

E. r

3. – –

n 7-segment display A, B

Display A

D600

Display B

D601

D602

D603

9-7. Sensor Characteristics 9-7-1. Outdoor Unit

Characteristic-3 40

n Temperature sensor characteristics

Outdoor TS1, TS2, TO, TL sensors

Resistance [k ]

30

20

10

0 -10

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

Temperature [˚C] Characteristic-4 200

10

Outdoor TD1, TD2, TK1, TK2, TK3, TK4 sensors

5

Resistance [k ] (65˚C or higher)

100

50

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90 100 110 120 130 140 150

0

Temperature [˚C] Characteristic-5 20

Outdoor TE1 sensor

150

15

100

10

50

5

0 -30 -20 -10

0 0

10

20

30

40

50

Temperature [˚C]

167

60

70

80

90 100


200 Resistance [k ] (10˚C or lower)

Resistance [k ]

150

D604

n Pressure sensor characteristics • I/O cable connection table High pressure side (Pd)

Pin No.

Low pressure side (Ps)

Input/Output name

Lead wire color

Input/Output name

Lead wire color

1

OUTPUT

White

—

—

2

—

—

OUTPUT

White

3

GND

Black

GND

Black

4

+5V

Red

+5V

Red

• Output voltage — Pressure High pressure side (Pd)

Low pressure side (Ps)

0.5 to 3.9 V DC

0.5 to 3.5 V DC

0 to 3.33 MPa

0 to 0.98 MPa

5 Output at low pressure side (V)

Output at high pressure side (V)

5

3.9

0.5

3.5

0.5

0

3.33 Pressure (MPa)

4.41

0

5.1

0.98

1.47

5.1 Pressure (MPa)

9-7-2. Indoor Unit n Temperature sensor characteristics

Resistance [k ]

30

20

10

0

10

20

30 40 50 Temperature [˚C]

200 Resistance [k ] (10˚C or lower)

Indoor TA sensor

20 Indoor TC1, TC2, TCJ sensors

Characteristic-2 150

15

100

10

50

5

0 -30

0 -20 -10

0

168

10

20

30 40 50 60 Temperature [˚C]

70

80

90 100


Characteristic-1

40

9-8. Pressure Sensor Output Check 9-8-1. Outdoor Unit n Pd sensor characteristics 0 to 4.41MPa (0.5 to 5V output with 0 to 4.41MPa) Voltage check between CN501 and pins on the outdoor unit I/F P.C. board (Tester Pd Pd VOLT (MPa) (kg/cm²) 0.00 0.00 0.0 0.02 0.00 0.0 0.04 0.00 0.0 0.06 0.00 0.0 0.08 0.00 0.0 0.10 0.00 0.0 0.12 0.00 0.0 0.14 0.00 0.0 0.16 0.00 0.0 0.18 0.00 0.0 0.20 0.00 0.0 0.22 0.00 0.0 0.23 0.00 0.0 0.25 0.00 0.0 0.27 0.00 0.0 0.29 0.00 0.0 0.31 0.00 0.0 0.33 0.00 0.0 0.35 0.00 0.0 0.37 0.00 0.0 0.39 0.00 0.0 0.41 0.00 0.0 0.43 0.00 0.0 0.45 0.00 0.0 0.47 0.00 0.0 0.49 0.00 0.0 0.51 0.01 0.1 0.53 0.03 0.3 0.55 0.05 0.5 0.57 0.07 0.7 0.59 0.08 0.9 0.61 0.10 1.1 0.63 0.12 1.3 0.65 0.14 1.4 0.66 0.16 1.6 0.68 0.18 1.8 0.70 0.20 2.0 0.72 0.22 2.2 0.74 0.24 2.4 0.76 0.26 2.6 0.78 0.28 2.8 0.80 0.30 3.0 0.82 0.31 3.2 0.84 0.33 3.4 0.86 0.35 3.6 0.88 0.37 3.8 0.90 0.39 4.0 0.92 0.41 4.2 0.94 0.43 4.4 0.96 0.45 4.6 0.98 0.47 4.8

Pd Pd VOLT (MPa) (kg/cm²) 1.00 0.49 5.0 1.02 0.51 5.2 1.04 0.53 5.4 1.06 0.54 5.5 1.07 0.56 5.7 1.09 0.58 5.9 1.11 0.60 6.1 1.13 0.62 6.3 1.15 0.64 6.5 1.17 0.66 6.7 1.19 0.68 6.9 1.21 0.70 7.1 1.23 0.72 7.3 1.25 0.74 7.5 1.27 0.76 7.7 1.29 0.77 7.9 1.31 0.79 8.1 1.33 0.81 8.3 1.35 0.83 8.5 1.37 0.85 8.7 1.39 0.87 8.9 1.41 0.89 9.1 1.43 0.91 9.3 1.45 0.93 9.5 1.47 0.95 9.6 1.48 0.97 9.8 1.50 0.99 10.0 1.52 1.00 10.2 1.54 1.02 10.4 1.56 1.04 10.6 1.58 1.06 10.8 1.60 1.08 11.0 1.62 1.10 11.2 1.64 1.12 11.4 1.66 1.14 11.6 1.68 1.16 11.8 1.70 1.18 12.0 1.72 1.20 12.2 1.74 1.21 12.4 1.76 1.23 12.6 1.78 1.25 12.8 1.80 1.27 13.0 1.82 1.29 13.2 1.84 1.31 13.4 1.86 1.33 13.6 1.88 1.35 13.8 1.90 1.37 13.9 1.91 1.39 14.1 1.93 1.41 14.3 1.95 1.43 14.5 1.97 1.44 14.7


169


rod at pin side) Pd Pd VOLT (MPa) (kg/cm²) 3.98 3.42 34.8 4.00 3.44 35.0 4.02 3.45 35.2 4.04 5.48 35.4 4.06 3.49 35.6 4.08 3.51 35.8 4.10 3.53 36.0 4.12 3.55 36.2 4.14 3.57 36.4 4.16 3.59 36.6 4.18 3.61 36.8 4.20 3.63 37.0 4.22 3.65 37.2 4.24 3.67 37.4 4.26 3.69 37.6 4.28 3.70 37.8 4.30 3.72 38.0 4.32 3.74 38.2 4.24 3.76 38.4 4.36 3.78 38.6 4.38 3.80 38.8 4.40 3.82 38.9 4.41 3.84 39.1 4.43 3.86 39.3 4.45 3.88 39.5 4.47 3.90 39.7 4.49 3.92 39.9 4.51 3.93 40.1 4.53 3.95 40.3 4.55 3.97 40.5 4.57 3.99 40.7 4.59 4.01 40.9 4.61 4.03 41.1 4.63 4.05 41.3 4.65 4.07 41.5 4.67 4.09 41.7 4.69 4.11 41.9 4.71 4.13 42.1 4.73 4.15 42.3 4.75 4.16 42.5 4.77 4.18 42.7 4.79 4.20 42.9 4.81 4.22 43.0 4.82 4.24 43.2 4.84 4.26 43.4 4.86 4.28 43.6 4.88 4.30 43.8 4.90 4.32 44.0 4.92 4.34 44.2 4.94 4.36 44.4 4.96 4.38 44.6 4.98 4.39 44.8

n Ps sensor characteristics 0 to 1.48MPa (0.5 to 5V output with 0 to 1.48MPa) Voltage check between CN500 and pins on the outdoor unit I/F P.C. board (Tester Ps Ps VOLT (MPa) (kg/cm²) 0.00 0.00 0.0 0.02 0.00 0.0 0.04 0.00 0.0 0.06 0.00 0.0 0.08 0.00 0.0 0.10 0.00 0.0 0.12 0.00 0.0 0.14 0.00 0.0 0.16 0.00 0.0 0.18 0.00 0.0 0.20 0.00 0.0 0.22 0.00 0.0 0.23 0.00 0.0 0.25 0.00 0.0 0.27 0.00 0.0 0.29 0.00 0.0 0.31 0.00 0.0 0.33 0.00 0.0 0.35 0.00 0.0 0.37 0.00 0.0 0.39 0.00 0.0 0.41 0.00 0.0 0.43 0.00 0.0 0.45 0.00 0.0 0.47 0.00 0.0 0.49 0.00 0.0 0.51 0.00 0.0 0.53 0.01 0.1 0.55 0.02 0.3 0.57 0.02 0.2 0.59 0.03 0.3 0.61 0.03 0.4 0.63 0.04 0.4 0.65 0.05 0.5 0.66 0.05 0.5 0.68 0.06 0.6 0.70 0.07 0.7 0.72 0.07 0.7 0.74 0.08 0.8 0.76 0.09 0.9 0.78 0.09 0.9 0.80 0.10 1.0 0.82 0.11 1.1 0.84 0.11 1.1 0.86 0.12 1.2 0.88 0.12 1.3 0.90 0.13 1.3 0.92 0.14 1.4 0.94 0.14 1.5 0.96 0.15 1.5 0.98 0.16 1.6

Ps Ps VOLT (MPa) (kg/cm²) 1.00 0.16 1.7 1.02 0.17 1.7 1.04 0.18 1.8 1.06 0.18 1.8 1.07 0.19 1.9 1.09 0.19 2.0 1.11 0.20 2.0 1.13 0.21 2.1 1.15 0.21 2.2 1.17 0.22 2.2 1.19 0.23 2.3 1.21 0.23 2.4 1.23 0.24 2.4 1.25 0.25 2.5 1.27 0.25 2.6 1.29 0.26 2.6 1.31 0.26 2.7 1.33 0.27 2.8 1.35 0.28 2.8 1.37 0.28 2.9 1.39 0.29 3.0 1.41 0.30 3.0 1.43 0.30 3.1 1.45 0.31 3.2 1.47 0.32 3.2 1.48 0.32 3.3 1.50 0.33 3.3 1.52 0.34 3.4 1.54 0.34 3.5 1.56 0.35 3.5 1.58 0.35 3.6 1.60 0.36 3.7 1.62 0.37 3.7 1.64 0.37 3.8 1.66 0.38 3.9 1.68 0.39 3.9 1.70 0.39 4.0 1.72 0.40 4.1 1.74 0.41 4.1 1.76 0.41 4.2 1.78 0.42 4.3 1.80 0.42 4.3 1.82 0.43 4.4 1.84 0.44 4.5 1.86 0.44 4.5 1.88 0.45 4.6 1.90 0.46 4.6 1.91 0.46 4.7 1.93 0.47 4.8 1.95 0.48 4.8 1.97 0.48 4.9


170


rod at pin side) Ps Ps VOLT (MPa) (kg/cm²) 3.98 1.14 11.6 4.00 1.15 11.7 4.02 1.15 11.7 4.04 1.16 11.8 4.06 1.17 11.9 4.08 1.17 11.9 4.10 1.18 12.0 4.12 1.18 12.1 4.14 1.19 12.1 4.16 1.20 12.2 4.18 1.20 12.3 4.20 1.21 12.3 4.22 1.22 12.4 4.24 1.22 12.5 4.26 1.23 12.5 4.28 1.24 12.6 4.30 1.24 12.7 4.32 1.25 12.7 4.34 1.25 12.8 4.36 1.26 12.9 4.38 1.27 12.9 4.40 1.27 13.0 4.41 1.28 13.0 4.43 1.29 13.1 4.45 1.29 13.2 4.47 1.30 13.2 4.49 1.31 13.3 4.51 1.31 13.4 4.53 1.32 13.4 4.55 1.32 13.5 4.57 1.33 13.6 4.59 1.34 13.6 4.61 1.34 13.7 4.63 1.35 13.8 4.65 1.36 13.8 4.67 1.36 13.9 4.69 1.37 14.0 4.71 1.38 14.0 4.73 1.38 14.1 4.75 1.39 14.2 4.77 1.39 14.2 4.79 1.40 14.3 4.81 1.41 14.3 4.82 1.41 14.4 4.84 1.42 14.5 4.86 1.43 14.5 4.88 1.43 14.6 4.90 1.44 14.7 4.92 1.45 14.7 4.94 1.45 14.8 4.96 1.46 14.9 4.98 1.47 14.9

9-8-2. Flow Selector Unit (FS Unit) Leakage of SVD valve or SVS valve, etc; Positions to be checked and check code when a trouble such as miswiring occurred. Phenomenon which appears as result (Corresponding indoor unit or flow selector unit) Part name

Trouble mode

Operation mode

Correspon ding indoor unit

Clogging

All heating operation All Mainly cooling, part heating operation Heating unit Mainly heating, part cooling operation Heating unit

Leakage

All cooling operation (SV11 ON) All Mainly cooling, part heating operation Cooling unit Mainly cooling, part heating operation Cooling unit All cooling operation (SV11 OFF)

SVD valve

May become Not Not almost normal cooled heated capacity

171 SVS valve

All cooling operation All Mainly cooling, part heating operation Cooling unit Mainly heating, part cooling operation Cooling unit All heating operation

All

Leakage

¡SVD circuit – SVS circuit

¡

¡

¡ ¡

¡ SVD circuit

• Temperature of TCJ and TC1 become high similar to heating. (All heating circuit) • Discharge gas pipe at outdoor unit side of the flow selector unit is rather hot. • Refrigerant circulating sound is not heard from SVS valve, but it is heard from SVD valve.

B

¡ SVS circuit

• Gas pipe at indoor side of the flow selector unit is cold. (Cooling L18 “Flow circuit, Liquid pack) selector unit • Refrigerant circulating sound is not heard from SVD valve, but it is error” heard from SVS valve.

C

¡ SVS circuit

• TCJ is higher than normal indoor unit. • Gas pipe at indoor side of the flow selector unit is not cold. • Refrigerant circulating sound is heard from SVSS valve. P19 “4-way valve reversal • Compared with normal indoor unit, TCJ is low. • Temperature of suction gas pipe at outdoor side of the flow error” selector unit is higher than that of normal flow selector unit. • Refrigerant circulating sound is heard from SVS valve circuit.

¡

l Indoor unit, flow selector unit

• In start time, when exchanging mode from cooling to heating after defrost operation, refrigerant shock sound may be heard.

All All cooling operation (SV11 ON) Mainly cooling, part heating operation Cooling unit Mainly heating, part cooling operation Cooling unit

¡

¡ SVDD circuit

• Refrigerant circulating sound may be heard from SVDD valve circuit. • Suction gas pipe at outdoor unit side of the flow selector unit may be hot.


¡

¡ SVDD circuit

• Refrigerant circulating sound may be heard from SVDD valve circuit.

Miswiring/ All All cooling operation (SV11 ON) Misinstallation Mainly cooling, part heating operation Cooling unit of coil SVD ↔ SVS Mainly heating, part cooling operation Cooling unit

¡

¡ SVDD circuit

• Refrigerant circulating sound may be heard from SVDD valve circuit. • Suction gas pipe at outdoor unit side of the flow selector unit may be hot.


¡

l Indoor unit, flow selector unit

• In start time, when exchanging mode from cooling to heating after defrost operation, refrigerant shock sound may be heard.

Leakage

A

• Refrigerant circulating sound is heard from SVD valve circuit. • TCJ is high and SH is little. (Liquid pack)

¡ SVSS circuit

¡

• Compared with normal indoor unit, TCJ is higher. • Suction gas pipe at outdoor side of the flow selector unit is hot. • Refrigerant circulating sound is heard in bypass from SVD valve to SVS valve.


Clogging

Example of refrigerant flow

¡ SVD circuit

Mainly cooling, part heating operation Heating unit Mainly heating, part cooling operation Heating unit

SVDD valve

Judgment and position to be checked

• TC1 is lower than normal indoor unit. • Temperature of suction gas pipe at indoor side of the flow selector unit is lower than that of normal FS unit.

¡

All All heating operation Mainly cooling, part heating operation Heating unit Mainly heating, part cooling operation Heating unit Clogging

cooling sound Detection of check code ¡ Circulating sound

¡

All

All All cooling operation (SV11 ON) Miswiring/ Misinstallation Mainly cooling, part heating operation Cooling unit Mainly cooling, part heating operation Cooling unit of coil SVD ↔ SVS

l Abnormal

Phenomenon which appears as result (Corresponding indoor unit or flow selector unit) Part name

Trouble mode

Clogging SVSS valve

Leakage

Operation mode

Correspon ding indoor unit

Judgment and position to be checked

lIndoor unit,

• Operation is changed from heating to cooling.

Single heating Simultaneous cooling (Indoor heating) Simultaneous heating (Indoor heating)

¡

lIndoor unit,

• Refrigerant impact sound is heard at defrost time.

Single heating Simultaneous cooling (Indoor heating) Simultaneous heating (Indoor heating)

¡

¡SVSS circuit

Single cooling (SV11 OFF)

172

Incorrect piping Single cooling Discharge pipe ↔ Simultaneous cooling (Indoor cooling) Suction gas pipe Simultaneous heating (Indoor cooling)

Disconnection Signal line Contact error Power supply line Miswiring

cooling sound Detection of check code ¡ Circulating sound

¡

Selector unit

Selector unit

¡

Check valve Discharge–Liquid Capillary clogging Single heating bypass capillary, Simultaneous cooling (Indoor heating) Check valve Simultaneous heating (Indoor heating)

Piping Discharge pipe Liquid pipe Gas pipe

l Abnormal

Single cooling Simultaneous cooling (Indoor cooling) Simultaneous heating (Indoor cooling)

Single cooling (SV11 ON) Simultaneous cooling (Indoor cooling) Simultaneous heating (Indoor cooling)

Check valve leakage

May become Not Not almost normal cooled heated capacity

P15 [Gas leak detection]

¡ ¡

• Refrigerant sound may be heard from SVSS valve circuit. • Temperature of suction gas pipe at outdoor side of the selector unit is higher than that of normal selector unit.

¡Check valve circuit

• Gas short is observed and PD and PS may be lower than those in normal time. • TD and TS may be higher than those in normal time.

• Refrigerant sound may be heard from check valve. • Discharge gas pipe is cold or it may be frozen. • TCJ and TC1 are heated same as heating. (Heating circuit) • Discharge gas pipe at outdoor side of selector unit is fairly heated.

¡

In some cases, phenomena such as above occur.

Example of refrigerant flow

Suction gas pipe

Suction gas pipe

Discharge gas pipe

Discharge gas pipe

Discharge gas pipe

Liquid pipe

Liquid pipe

Liquid pipe

SVS

SVDD

SVD

SVS

SVDD

SVD

SVS

SVDD

SVD

SVSS

SVSS

SVSS

173 PMV

PMV TC1

TC2

TCJ

PMV TC1

TC2

TCJ

TCJ

A • SV11 ON • SVD leakage • SVS ON

TC1

TC2

B • SVD ON • SV11 ON

C • SVS ON

Reference Refrigerant circulating example of flow selector unit when a trouble occurred

Suction gas pipe

CPU

Key switch

Remote controller communication circuit

Indoor unit #1

A

174

Central control X remote controller (Option) Y (In case of AI-NETWORK)

AI-NET communication circuit

Key switch DC5V

Power circuit

B

Power circuit

#2

Secondary battery

A

B

#3

A

B

Max. 8 units are connectable. *1 Indoor control P.C. board (MCC-1402) Remote controller communication circuit

DC20V DC12V

CPU H8/3687

*1 However in a case that the network adaptor is installed when 2 remote controllers are connected, maximum 7 units are connectable.

EEPROM

TA sensor

DC5V

DC5V

Power circuit

CN1

*3

DC5V

Network adaptor (Option) Network Remote adaptor controller P.C. board communication (MCC-1401) circuit

Function setup

CPU CN2

Switch setup

TCI sensor

CPU H8/3039

Driver

Transformer

TC2 sensor

Same as left

Same as left

TCJ sensor

*2

*2

*4 PMV

Float input CPU TMP88CH 47FG (TMP88PH 47FG)

None for Concealed Duct type

*4

Drain pump

Power circuit

Indoor fan motor

Fan motor control circuit

Outside output Start Alarm Ready Thermostat ON COOL HEAT FAN

AC BUS synchronous communication signal input circuit circuit U1 U2 L

N

U1 U2 L

N

DC280V

Power supply L

N U1

U2

U1

U2

Indoor/Outdoor communication

Outdoor unit Power supply 1Ø220-240V, 50Hz

*3 The weekly timer cannot be connected to the simple wired remote controller. *4 Nome for high wall spearate sold parts for under ceiling.

HA

Louver motor

*2 The network adaptor is installed to only one unit.

Outdoor unit

Power supply Outdoor unit

10. CONFIGURATION OF CONTROL CIRCUIT

Display LED

LCD driver

10-1. Indoor Unit

Display LCD Function setup

10-1-1. Indoor Controller Block Diagram

Display LCD

4-way Air Discharge Cassette Type, Concealed Duct Standard Type, Under Ceiling Type, High Wall Type, 1-way Air Discharge Cassette Type (2 Series), Slim Duct Type

Weekly timer

1. Connection of wired remote controller

Wired remote controller (Up to 2 units)

Weekly timer

Display LCD

Display LCD

Display LED

Function setup

CPU

Key switch


Indoor unit #1

A

175

(In case of AI-NETWORK)

Key switch DC5V

Power circuit

B

Power circuit

#2

Secondary battery

A

B

#3

A

B

Max. 8 units are connectable. *1 Indoor control P.C. board (MCC-1403) Remote controller communication circuit

DC20V

*1 However in a case that the network adaptor is installed when 2 remote controllers are connected, maximum 7 units are connectable.

EEPROM

DC12V


CPU H8/3687

DC5V

TA sensor

DC5V

Power circuit

CN1

*3

DC5V


Central control X remote controller (Option) Y

Function setup

CPU CN2

Network Remote adaptor controller P.C. board communication (MCC-1401) circuit

LCD driver

Switch setup

Power circuit

CPU H8/3039

Driver


TCI sensor

*6

Transformer

TC2 sensor

Same as left

Same as left

TCJ sensor

*2

*2

*5 PMV

*4 Nome for concealed duct, Floor standing cabinet Floor standing concealed

Float input None for Concealed Duct

Louver motor

*4 Drain pump


*5 Indoor fan motor


HA

*5 Nome for concealed duct, Floor standing cabinet Floor standing concealed Floor standing


N

L

N U1

U2

U1

U2



U1 U2 L

Power supply

Transformer

*3 The weekly timer cannot be connected to the simple wired remote controller.

Outdoor unit

*6 Nome for 1-way discharge cassette YH type.

N


2-way Air Discharge Cassette Type, 1-way Air Discharge Cassette Type (1 Series), Concealed Duct High Static Pressure Type, Floor Standing Cabinet Type, Floor Standing Concealed Type, Floor Standing Type

Wired remote controller (Up to 2 units)

B Wireless remote controller kit Sensor P.C. board

Network Remote adaptor controller P.C. board communication (MCC-1401) circuit



Indoor control P.C. board (MCC-1402) Remote controller communication circuit

DC20V DC12V DC5V

CPU H8/3687

Power circuit TA sensor

DC5V

Power circuit

EEPROM

Switch setup

TCI sensor

CPU H8/3039

Driver

TC2 sensor TCJ sensor *3 Float input

Transformer PMV

Buzzer


CPU

Sensor circuit

#2

A

B

#3

A

B

Emergent operation SW Function setup SW

Display LED

Same as left

Same as left

*2

*2

None for Concealed Duct

HA

Louver motor

176

CPU TMP88CH 47FG (TMP88PH 47FG)


*3 Drain

pump

Power circuit

Indoor fan motor




N

U1 U2 L

N

DC280V

Power supply L

N U1

U2

U1

U2


Outdoor unit



Max. 8 units are connectable. *1 *1 However in a case that the network adaptor is installed when 2 wireless remote controller kits are connected, maximum 7 units are connectable. *2 The network adaptor is installed to only *3 Nome for high wall spearate sold parts for under ceiling. one unit.

2. Connection of wireless remote controller kit

A



Indoor unit #1

A

B

#2




B

#3

A

B


DC20V

EEPROM Wireless remote controller kit

DC12V

CPU H8/3687

DC5V

TA sensor

DC5V

Power circuit

A

Switch setup

Power circuit

TCI sensor *5 TC2 sensor

CPU H8/3039

Driver

TCJ sensor *4

Transformer


Sensors

Display section

Same as left

Same as left

*2

*2

Float input

PMV


Louver motor

177

*3 Drain pump


*4 Indoor fan motor


HA AC BUS synchronous communication signal input circuit circuit U1 U2 L

N

Power supply

Transformer L

N U1

U2

U1

U2


U1 U2 L

Outdoor unit

N



Max. 8 units are connectable. *1 *1 However in a case that the network adaptor is installed when 2 wireless remote controller kits are connected, maximum 7 units are connectable. *2 The network adaptor is installed to only one unit.

*3 Nome for concealed duct, Floor standing cabinet Floor standing concealed *4 Nome for concealed duct, Floor standing cabinet Floor standing concealed Floor standing *5 Nome for 1-way discharge cassette YH type.


Indoor unit #1

Display LCD

Display LCD

Display LED

LCD driver

Function setup

CPU

Key switch

CPU CN2


Indoor unit #1

A

CN1

Key switch DC5V

*3

DC5V

Power circuit

Power circuit

Secondary battery

B Wireless remote controller kit Sensor P.C. board


178




DC20V DC12V DC5V

CPU H8/3687 Switch setup

TCI sensor TC2 sensor TCJ sensor *4 Float input

Transformer PMV

DC5V

Buzzer

CPU

Sensor circuit

#2

A

B

#3

A

B

Emergent operation SW Function setup SW

Display LED

Same as left

Same as left

*2

*2


HA

Louver motor

CPU TMP88CH 47FG (TMP88PH 47FG)


*4

Power circuit

CPU H8/3039

Driver


EEPROM

TA sensor

DC5V

Power circuit

Function setup

Drain pump

Power circuit

Indoor fan motor




N

U1 U2 L

N

DC280V

Power supply L

N U1

U2

U1

U2



Max. 8 units are connectable. *1

Outdoor unit


*1 However in a case that the network adaptor is installed, maximum 7 units are connectable. *2 The network adaptor is installed to only one unit. *3 The weekly timer cannot be connected to the simple wired remote controller. *4 Nome for high wall spearate sold parts for under ceiling.

3. Connection of both remote controller and wireless remote controller kit

Weekly timer



Weekly timer

Display LCD

Display LCD

Display LED

LCD driver

Function setup

CPU

Key switch


Indoor unit #1

A

Function setup

CPU CN2

CN1

Key switch DC5V

*3

DC5V

Power circuit

Power circuit

Secondary battery

B

#2


179



B

#3

A

B


DC20V

EEPROM Wireless remote controller kit

DC12V

CPU H8/3687

DC5V

TA sensor

DC5V

Power circuit

A

Switch setup

Power circuit

TCI sensor *6 TC2 sensor

CPU H8/3039

Driver

TCJ sensor *5 Float input

Transformer PMV


Sensors

Display section

Same as left

Same as left

*2

*2


Louver motor

*4 Drain pump


*5 Indoor fan motor

HA



L

Max. 8 units are connectable. *1


N U1 U1

U2 U2



*3 The weekly timer cannot be connected to the simple wired remote controller.

*4 Nome for concealed duct, Floor standing cabinet Floor standing concealed *5 Nome for concealed duct, Floor standing cabinet Floor standing concealed Floor standing

U1 U2 L

Power supply

Transformer

*1 However in a case that the network adaptor is installed, maximum 7 units are connectable.

N

Outdoor unit

N


*6 Nome for 1-way discharge cassette YH type.



EEPROM

DC fan output Power supply

Optional power supply

PMV output

180

Remote controller power supply LED DC fan return

*1 Drain pump output

*1 Float SW

Fan output HA (T10) TA sensor Optional output Flap (Used only for 4-way Air Discharge Cassette Type,Under ceiling type)

TCJ sensor EXCT DISP Used for CHK servicing

Remote controller inter-unit cable TC1 sensor Indoor/Outdoor communication (Also used for communication of the central control system)

TC2 sensor

*1 Indoor/Outdoor communication (Spare)

*1 Nome for under ceiling, high wall

10-1-2. Indoor P.C. Board

Filter/Option error input

MCC-1402 4-way Air Discharge Cassette Type, Concealed Duct Standard Type, Under Ceiling Type, High Wall Type, 1-way Air Discharge Cassette Type (2 Series), Slim Duct Type

Microcomputer operation LED

Indoor/Outdoor communication (Spare) PMV output

Microcomputer operation LED

Indoor/Outdoor communication (Also used for communication of the central control system)

EEPROM

Power transformer (Primary side) (AC200V) *1 Flap

Remote controller power supply LED

HA (T10)

181 Optional output

Remote controller inter-unit wire

Drain pump output Optional power supply

EXCT AC fan output

TA sensor

TCI sensor

Outside error input

TC2 sensor

Filter/Option error input

DISP Used for CHK servicing

TCJ sensor Float SW * Short plug is inserted in Concealed Duct High Static Pressure type, Floor standing cabinet type, Floor standing type, Floor stabding conceded type.

*1 2-way Air discharge cassette, 1-way Air discharge cassette, Floor standing only.

MCC-1403 2-way Air Discharge Cassette Type, 1-way Air Discharge Cassette Type (1 Series), Concealed Duct High Static Pressure Type, Floor Standing Cabinet Type, Floor Standing Concealed Type, Floor Standing Type

Power transformer (Secondary side) (AC11V, 14V, 20V)

Power supply

MCC-1520 2-way Air Discharge Cassette Type, 1-way Air Discharge Cassette Type (1 Series), Concealed Duct High Static Pressure Type, Floor Standing Cabinet Type, Floor Standing Concealed Type, Floor Standing Type

C03

+

CN01 1

C90

IC01

+

CN02

6

+

IGO GND

1

+

+15V

6

MCC-1520-01 COMPONENT SIDE

Power supply trans side (Input)

Control P.C. board side (Output)

10-1-3. Flow Selector Unit P.C. Board MCC-1431-01

182

10-1-4. Optional Connector Specifications of Indoor P.C. Board Function Humidifier output

Fan output

—

Option output

Outside error input

Connector No.

Pin No.

CN66

DC12V

Output

DC12V

Output

ON/OFF input

0V (COM)

Operation output

CN32

CN61

CN60

CN80

Remarks

Specifications

In heating, thermo ON, Fan ON, Humidifier output ON * Humidifier provided, Drain pump ON is set up by CN70 short-circuit or from remote controller. (DN=40) Shipment setup: ON with indoor unit operation and OFF with stop are linked. * Single operation by FAN button on remote controller is set up from remote controller (DN=31) HA ON/OFF input (J01: YES/NO=Pulse (At shipment) / Static input select)

Main prohibition input Operation stop of main remote controller is permitted / prohibited by input. ON during operation (Answerback of HA)

DC12V (COM) Alarm output

ON during alarm output

DC12V (COM) Defrost output

ON when outdoor unit is defrosted

Thermo ON output

ON during Real thermostat ON (Compressor ON)

COOL output

ON when operation mode is cooling system (COOL, DRY, Cool/Heat Auto cooling)

HEAT output

ON when operation mode is heating system (HEAT, Cool/Heat Auto cooling)

Fan output

ON when indoor fan is ON (During use of air cleaner/Interlock cabling)

DC12V (COM)

Generate check code “L30” (for 1 minute continuously) to stop forcedly the operation.

DC12V (COM) Outside error input

—

CN20

—

—

—

—

CN70

—

—

—

CHK operation check

CN71

Check mode input

0V

Display mode input

0V

Exhibition mode enables to communicate by indoor unit and remote controller only. (When power has been turned on.) Timer short (Usual)

Demand input

Indoor unit forced thermostat OFF operation

DISP exhibition mode

EXCT demand

CN72

CN73

0V

183

Used for indoor operation check. (Outdoor does not communicate with remote controller, and outputs specified operation such as indoor fan “H”, drain pump ON, etc.)

10-2. Outdoor unit Positions to be checked on the interface P.C. board (MCC-1429)

CN03 backup CN01 For inter-unit cable between indoor and outdoor units

For outdoor unit cable between outdoor units CN03 Pressure sensor (Ps) Pressure sensor (Pd)

CN01 backup BUS terminal Terminator resistor select SW30

UART communication CN600

RMV CN300,301

Option input/output CN508,509,510, 515,501,512 Jumper select

SV61 CN309

Sensor input TD1 , CN502 TD2 , CN503 TK1 , CN514 TK2 , CN515 TK3 , CN516 TK4 , CN523 TE1 , CN505 TL , CN521 TS1 , CN504 TO , CN507 TS2 , CN522

SW41/42 CN311

SV51 CN310 SV2 CN312

5V GND

SV3A CN324

12V

SV3B CN313

3.3V

SV3C CN314

Connection of power supply transformer CN100

SV11 CN322

Option input/output CN511 High pressure swith1

Dina-doctor connecting terminal CN800

High pressure swith2

SV12 CN319

For transformer power supply CN401,402

Case heater 1 Case heater 2 Accumulator heater For expansion BUS power supply CN325

SV3D SV3E CN323 4-way valve CN317

SW06 to 14

SW01,02,03

Comp. case thermo 2 input CN307 SW04,05,15

7-segment LED

184

Comp. case thermo 1 input CN305

L1, L2, L3, N-phase input CN400

Inverter P.C. board (MCC-1502) [IPDU1, IPDU2]

Compressor output

Power supply input (AC400V)

+12V

GND Input current sensor (T02)

+5V

Communication between I/F and Comp. IPDU

Reactor 2 (IPDU2 only is connected.)

AC230V input

DC330V output (IPDU1 only is connected.) DC330V input

Electrolytic condenser (+, -)

Connection between IPDU1 and 2 Reactor 1 (IPDU1 only is connected.)

185

Power supply P.C. board for fan (MCC-1439)

Communication between I/F and fan IPDU

+12V AC230V input

GND

Judgement +12V terminal 1 – 5 +7V terminal 2 – 5 Communication between fan IPDU

(

)

+7V output

DC330V output (For Comp. IPDU) Electrolytic condenser

CN500 DC330V output for fan IPDU (Judgemant : DC 180–370V)

186

10-2-1. Outdoor Interface P.C. Board Dip switch function exchange setup list Part type

Initial setup at shipment

Exchange contents

SW01 Rotary SW 4bit 16 step Display / Operation switch (1)

For 7-segment display / service operation

[1]



[1]



[1]

SW04 Push SW

For service [Operation/Start]

[Operation/Start] by pushing

—

SW05 Push SW

For service [Stop/End]

[Stop/End] by pushing

SW06 SW 4bit

—

(Based on the following setup)

Bit 1

Backup setup

Bit 2

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 3

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Normal

OFF

Bit 4

—

—

OFF

ON

No.1 COMP backup

OFF

—

—

ON

OFF

Bit 1 Power peak-cut control exchange

OFF OFF

No.2 COMP backup OFF: 0 – 100%, ON: Middle – 100%

OFF

Bit 2 Power peak-cut control exchange (Expansion) (For 4-steps exchange)

OFF

Bit 3

—

—

OFF

Bit 4

—

—

OFF

Bit 1 Outdoor address setup exchange

OFF: Auto setup (Normal), ON: Manual setup

OFF

Bit 2 Judge indoor capacity over

OFF: YES (Normal), ON: NO

OFF

Bit 3 Correction of installed pipe size

OFF: Normal, ON: Size UP (For outdoor expansion)

OFF

SW07 SW 4bit

n Header unit

SW09 SW 4bit

Bit 4 Judge abnormal No. of connected indoor units OFF: No error judgment, ON: Error

OFF

Bit 1

OFF

—

—

Bit 2 Outdoor fan high-static pressure shift

OFF : Normal, ON: High-static pressure shift

OFF

Bit 3

OFF: Normal, ON : INV frequency upper limit restriction

OFF

OFF: Normal, ON: Fan rpm upper limit restriction

OFF

SW10 SW 4bit Sound reduction control Bit 4

SW11 SW 4bit

SW12 SW 4bit

Bit 2

—

—

OFF

Bit 3

—

—

OFF

Bit 4 Operation when indoor overflow detected

OFF: System stop, ON : System operation continues

OFF

Bit 1 PMV manual operation selected

OFF: PMV1, PMV2 ON : PMV3

OFF

Bit 2

—

—

OFF

Bit 3

—

—

OFF

Bit 4

—

—

OFF

Bit 1

—

—

OFF

Bit 2

—

—

OFF

Bit 3

—

—

OFF

SW13 SW 4bit Bit 4 Line address setup SW14 SW 4bit

Bit 1, 2, 3, 4

SW30 SW 2bit

OFF Line address setup

Refer to item “Address setup procedure”

OFF

Bit 2 Terminator resistor between outdoor units

OFF: No Terminator resistor ON : Exists

ON

CN30 Check connector

Manual full opening setup of PMV

Opened: Normal, Short: Opened fully

Open


Manual full closing setup of PMV

Opened: Normal, Short: Opened fully

Open


Check for assembly line in factory.

Opened: Normal, Short: Check mode

Open

* The outdoor unit connected with indoor/outdoor communication line becomes automatically the master unit. No manual setting is necessary.

187

11. BACKUP OPERATIONS (EMERGENCY OPERATION) When a trouble occurs in an outdoor unit or in one of the compressors in an outdoor unit, the malfunctioning unit or compressor stops and a backup operation (emergency operation) is available through the other functioning outdoor units and compressors. A backup operation can be set up following the procedure below.

11-1. Before Backup Operation The method of the backup operation will differ depending on the type of trouble. Refer to the following table. Trouble contents

Setup procedure

Backup operation method

When a trouble occurs on one of the compressors in the same unit (Note 1)

Compressor backup

To item 2

Outdoor unit backup or outdoor unit backup during cooling season (Note 2)

To item 3 or item 4

When a trouble occurs on the both compressors in the same unit Trouble of the compressor coil (Such as defect of compressor coil) When a trouble occurs on the refrigerating system parts, fan system parts, or electric system parts When a trouble occurs on the temperature sensor or pressure sensor

When a trouble of the compressor coil etc has occurred, deterioration of the oil will be high. Therefore do not perform a backup operation, as other units within the system may be damaged. (Note 2) Only one outdoor unit within a given system can be subjected to the backup procedure. (Note 1)

11-2. Compressor Backup Setup Outline When a trouble occurs on one of the two compressors, follow the procedure below. If it is necessary perform a backup operation on the other normal compressor.

Procedure 1. Turn off the main power supplies to all the units connected to the system. 2. As shown below set up the switch SW06 on the interface P.C. board on the outdoor unit on which the compressor has failed.

SW06 Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

No.1 compressor (Left side) is defective.

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

No.2 compressor (Right front side) is defective.

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

Initial setup at shipment from factory

3. Turn on the main power supplies of all of the units connected to the system. After the backup set up for the outdoor unit in cooling season is complete, check the system operates.

188

11-3. Backup Setup for Outdoor Unit Outline In this model, setup of the backup operation is available in either the header unit or the follower unit in a situation where the outdoor units are defective. In a system in which two or more outdoor units are connected, carry out the backup operation on the outdoor unit if the error modes described below occur. • Compressor error (Rare short error or when one compressor cannot operate, etc.) • Pressure sensor (Pd, Ps) / Temperature sensor (TD1, TD2, TS1, TE1, TK1, TK2, TK3, TK4, TL) error Note only one outdoor unit within a given system can be subjected to the backup procedure.

Procedure 1. Turn off the main power supplies to all the units connected to the system.

[Set up procedure for the malfunctioning outdoor unit] (The following work is common to the header unit and follower units in the system.) 2. Turn on both bit 1 and 2 of the SW06 on the interface P.C. board. 3. Fully close the liquid service valve when the outdoor PMV is suspected to be leaking (i.e. when the PMV will not close fully). 4. Turn on the main power supplies of all of the units connected to the system. If the fault is a compressor insulation error, remove the wiring to the compressor before turning the power supply on. After the backup set up for the outdoor unit in cooling season is complete, check the system operates.

Turn on bit 1 and bit 2 of dip SW06.

189

12. OIL LEVEL JUDGMENT DISPLAY The judgment result of the current oil level of the compressor can be confirmed by the switch setup on the interface P.C. board on the outdoor unit. Confirm the result using the following procedure.

1. Operation procedure Interface P.C. board on the outdoor unit which displays oil level judgment

1) Operation starts. 3) Result of oil level judgment is displayed.

2) Set SW01/SW02/SW03 to 1/16/1.

4) After confirmation, return SW01/SW02/SW03 to 1/1/1.

1) Start the operation. 2) Set the rotary switches SW01/02/03 on the interface P.C. board to 1/16/1. 3) The result of the oil level judgement is displayed on the 7-segment display. 7-segment display [oL] [A00] The right 3 digits indicate the judgment result. The judgment results of the oil level in compressor 1 and compressor 2 are displayed. (Example: A ¡ o = ¡ : Oil level result of compressor 1, o : Oil level result of compressor 2

Display example 7-segment display

[oL] [A00] : Oil level is good in compressor 1 and 2. [oL] [A01] : Oil level is good in compressor 1 and short in compressor 2 [oL] [A20] : Oil shortage in compressor 1 and good in compressor 2

Judgment result in compressor 2 Judgment result in compressor 1 For the contents of judgment result, refer to the following table.)

7-segment display oil level results 7-segment display

Judgment result

Contents

0

Appropriate

1 2

Shortage

A

TK1 circuit error

TK1 circuit error is found. If this judgment continues, the system stops for protection.

B

TK2 circuit error


C

TK3 circuit error


D

TK4 circuit error


Oil level inside of the compressor is appropriate. Shortage of oil level in the compressor (Both A1 and A2 indicate shortage.) If this judgment continues, the system stops for protection.

4) After confirmation, return SW01/SW02/SW03 to (1/1/1).

190

13. REFRIGERANT RECOVERY WHEN REPLACING THE COMPRESSOR 13-1. Refrigerant Recovery in the Malfunctioning Outdoor Unit A pump-down function is available in this system. For multiple outdoor unit systems, execute pump-down by using the normal outdoor units and the refrigerant can be recovered from the outdoor unit, which is to be repaired.

13-1-1. Before Refrigerant Recovery Operation Pay attention to the following items during pump-down operation. 1. The refrigerant recovery rate changes with the outside temperature in the pump-down operation. When the pump-down operation has finished, recover the remaining gas using a recovery device and measure the amount of recovered refrigerant. 2. Executing the pump-down operation when heating the accumulator of the malfunctioning outdoor unit improves refrigerant recovery rate. 3. While both outdoor PMVs are closed the refrigerant in the heat exchanger cannot be recovered. If executing brazing after pump-down operation, recover the refrigerant in the heat exchanger before starting.

13-1-2. Refrigerant Recovery Procedure (If no backup operation for the outdoor unit has been implemented) Procedure Turn on the power supply to the system, and ensure system operation is stopped. If the fault is an insulation error in the compressor, remove the wiring to the compressor before turning on the power supply.

[Set up the malfunctioning outdoor unit as follows] 1. Using a charge hose, connect the check joint of the liquid pipe and the check joint at the low pressure side, then purge the air in the hose (to recover refrigerant in the heat exchanger and the liquid tank). 2. Fully close the service valve of the liquid pipe of the malfunctioning outdoor unit. Keep service valves of the gas pipe and the balance pipe open. 3. If it is thought that the oil has deteriorated due to a faulty compressor, take off the SV3A valve connector of the malfunctioning outdoor unit, so that the oil does not flow in the other outdoor units. 4. Set the rotary switches SW01/02/03 to 2/11/1 on the interface P.C. board of the malfunctioning outdoor unit, [rd] [ ] is displayed on the 7-segment display. 5. Press SW04 for 5 seconds or more, [rd][ FF] is displayed on 7-segment display and then pump down starts. ∗ When interrupting the operation, turn off the power supplies to all of the outdoor units or push SW05 on the interface P.C. board. Malfunctioning outdoor unit 3 If oil deteriorates due to a faulty compressor, remove SV3A connector.

2 Close fully service valve at liquid side. (Keep gas and balance side opened.)

4 Set rotary SW01/02/03 to 2/11/1. [rd] [ ] are displayed. ¯ Push the push SW04 for 5 seconds or more. 5 [rd] [ FF] are displayed.

P.C. board of the malfunctioning outdoor unit

Operation during pump down operation Outdoor unit Outdoor unit with trouble Other outdoor units

1 Connected with check joint of the liquid pipe and check joint at low pressure side by a charge hose and purge.

Operation contents Compressor stops. Outdoor fan ON PMV1 and PMV2 open. SV3A/3B/3C/3D/3E ON Operates in test COOL operation

191

6. Fully close the service valve in the gas pipe of the malfunctioning outdoor unit approximately 10 minutes after the system has started. 7. Push SW04 of the malfunctioning outdoor unit, to display the pressure data (MPa). For each successive push of SW04, the data display changes as shown in the example below.

Display Example [rd] [ 11] Initial display

[Pd] [1.20] High pressure

[Ps] [1.20] Low pressure

[Select an outdoor unit for pressure adjustment as follows] 8. When operating the pump down mode, the outdoor unit which has the lowest unit number is selected as the outdoor unit for the pressure adjustment. Unit No. When SW01/02/03 are set to 1/1/1, the number displayed on the 7-segment display indicates the unit number ([U#][---]: # indicates the unit number)

[Set up all other outdoor units as follows] 9. Fully close the service valves of all the other outdoor unit balance pipes. Only keep the service valves of the balance pipes of the unit in which the pressure adjustment will be made and the malfunctioning unit fully open.

[Setup for outdoor unit for adjustment of pressure] 10. Set up the rotary SW01/02/03 to 1/2/2 on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit in which the pressure adjustment will be made. 11. The low pressure (Ps) data is displayed on the 7-segment display. Slowly close the service valve of the gas pipe and adjust so that a pressure of 0.12 MPa is displayed. 12. When the low pressure (Ps) of the malfunctioning outdoor unit is almost the same as that of the unit in which the pressure adjustment has been made, fully close the service valve of the gas pipe in the unit which the pressure adjustment was made.

[Set up the malfunctioning outdoor unit as follows] 13. When the pressure of the malfunctioning outdoor unit is below 0.1 MPa, fully close the service valve of the balance pipe and push SW05 on the interface P.C. board to finish the pump down operation. 14. Turn off the power supplies to all of the outdoor units and use a refrigerant recovery device to recover the remaining refrigerant in the outdoor unit, in which the pump down operation has been completed. Be sure to measure the recovered refrigerant, as the same amount of refrigerant will be required to be recharged after the repair. 9 Fully close the balance pipes of the outdoor units except the unit for pressure adjustment and unit with the malfunction.

6 Fully close the service valve of the gas pipe approx. 10 minutes after the system has started. Malfunctioning outdoor unit 7 The low pressure is displayed by pushing SW04. [Ps] [###]

13 When low pressure of the malfunctioning outdoor unit is below 0.10 MPa, fully close the service valve of the balance pipe.

8 The lowest number outdoor unit is selected as the outdoor unit for pressure adjustment. 10 The low pressure is displayed by setting SW01/02/03 to 1/2/2. [Ps] [###]

11 Close service valve of the gas pipe gradually while checking the low pressure, and then adjust the pressure to 0.12 MPa. 12 When low pressure of the malfunctioning outdoor unit and low pressure of the outdoor unit for pressure adjustment becomes almost same, fully close the service valve of gas pipe on the outdoor unit for pressure adjustment

14 Turn off the power of all the outdoor units. Using a recovery device, reclaim the remaining refrigerant in the outdoor unit in which pump-down operation has finished and measure the amount.

Return all rotary switches SW01/02/03 to 1/1/1.

192

(Refrigerant recovery procedure (backup)) If the power of the malfunctioning unit cannot be turned on, the PMV cannot be opened, therefore the amount of recovered refrigerant decreases compared with the usual pump down operation. Using a refrigerant recovery device, recover the remaining gas in the unit and measure the recovered refrigerant, as the same amount of refrigerant will be required to be recharged after the repair.

Procedure [Set up the malfunctioning outdoor unit as follows] 1. Using a gauge manifold, connect the check joint of the liquid pipe and the low pressure side, and then purge air in the hose (to recover refrigerant in the heat exchanger and the liquid tank). 2. Fully close the service valve of the liquid pipe in the malfunctioning outdoor unit (keep the service valves of the gas pipe and the balance pipe open).

[Set up the unit selected as the header unit as follows] 3. Set up the rotary SW01/02/03 to 2/5/1 on the interface P.C. board of the selected header outdoor unit, [C.] [ ] is displayed on 7-segment display. 4. Push SW04 for 5 seconds or more, the system operates in the test cooling operation when [C.] [ C] is displayed on the 7-segment display. Set up the rotary SW01/02/03 to 1/2/2 on the interface P.C. board of the selected header outdoor unit to display the low pressure data (MPa) on the 7-segment display. 5. Push the SW04 for 2 seconds, the low pressure (MPa) is displayed on 7-segment.

1 Connect check joint of the liquid pipe and low pressure side by the gauge manifold, and then purge air inside of the hose.

Header unit with trouble

Unit selected as the header unit

2 Close fully service valve of the liquid pipe. (Keep gas valve of pipe and balance pipe opened.) Interface P.C. board 4 Set rotary SW01/02/03 to 2/5/1. [C. ] [ ] are displayed.

¯

Push SW04 for 5 seconds or more. 5 [C. ] [ –C] are displayed (Test cooling operation starts.)

® ®

®

¯ ® ® ®

6 Low pressure (MPa) is displayed by pushing the push SW04. Pd Ps Td1 Td2 TS TE C—C

6. Fully close the service valve of the gas pipe on the malfunctioning outdoor unit approximately 10 minutes after the system has started.

[Select an outdoor unit for pressure adjustment as follows] 7. Select the header unit as the unit for pressure adjustment.

[Set up all other outdoor units as follows] 8. Fully close the service valves of the other outdoor unit balance pipes. Only keep the service valves of the balance pipes of the header unit and the malfunctioning unit fully open.

193

[Setup for header unit] 9. The low pressure (Ps) data is displayed on the 7-segment display. Slowly close the service valve of the gas pipe and adjust so that a pressure of 0.12 MPa is displayed. 10. When the manifold gauge pressure of the malfunctioning outdoor unit is almost the same as that of the header unit in which the pressure adjustment has been made, fully close the service valve of the gas pipe in the header unit.

[Set up the malfunctioning outdoor unit as follows] 11. When the manifold gauge pressure of the malfunctioning outdoor unit becomes below 0.1 MPa, fully close the packed valve of the balance pipe and then push SW05 on the interface P.C. board to finish the pump down operation. 12. Turn off the power supplies of all of the outdoor units, and use a refrigerant recovery device to recover the remaining refrigerant in the outdoor unit, in which the pump down operation has been completed. Be sure to measure the recovered refrigerant, as the same amount of refrigerant will be required to be recharged after the repair.

8 Fully close the balance pipes of the outdoor units other than the master unit and the malfunctioning unit.

6 Fully close the service valve of the gas pipe approx. 10 minutes after the system has started. Outdoor unit with trouble

7 The header unit is selected as the outdoor unit for pressure adjustment.

11 When the low pressure of the malfunctioning outdoor unit is below 0.10 MPa, fully close the service valve of the balance pipe. Push the switch SW05 to finish the pump-down operation. 10 Turn off the main power supplies of all the outdoor units. Using a recovery device, recover the remaining refrigerant in the outdoor unit in which pump-down operation has finished and measure the amount.

Return all SW01/02/03 of the header unit to (1/1/1) to complete the work.

194

9 Close service valve of the gas pipe while checking the low pressure, and then adjust the pressure to 0.12 MPa. 12 When the pressure of the malfunctioning outdoor unit (manifold gauge) and pressure of the header unit become almost same, close valve of the gas pipe fully.

13-2. How to Operate the System During Repair of the Malfunctioning Outdoor Unit Procedure 1. Follow the aforementioned “13-1. Refrigerant Recovery in the Malfunctioning Outdoor Unit”. 2. Recover the refrigerant in the system by using a recovery device. The refrigerant amount to be recovered is determined based upon the capacity of the malfunctioning outdoor unit (see the following table). Example) In a case of backup for 10 hp-outdoor unit in 30 hp system: in the original system hp (30 hp system) = 37.5 kg Refrigerant amount in system hp (20 hp system) after backup = 28.0 kg Refrigerant amount to be recovered = 37.5 – 28.0 = 9.5 kg 3. For the unit which the refrigerant has been recovered, execute “Outdoor Unit Backup Setup” of another section. System HP

Combination of outdoor units

Refrigerant amount (kg)

8

8

13.5

10

10

14.0

12

12

14.5

16

8

8

21.5

18

10

8

23.0

20

10

10

25.0

24

8

8

8

30.0

26

10

8

8

31.5

28

10

10

8

33.0

30

10

10

10

34.5

195

13-3. Process after Repair After completion of the repair work, perform vacuuming of the outdoor unit using the following procedure.

Procedure 1. Short CN30 on the interface P.C. board on the outdoor unit for which the repair work has been completed, to open the PMV fully. (Confirm that Bit 1 of SW12 is OFF.) Note) The PMV opening by using short CN30 returns the PMV to fully closed after 2 minutes. To continue to fully open status, turn off the power supply of the outdoor unit within 2 minutes after using short CN30. 2. Be sure to perform vacuuming from the following three check joints. (Liquid pipe, discharge pipe, and suction pipe)

Propeller fan

FM Fan motor Sensor (TE1) Strainer

(Right side)

Pulse motor valve

(Left side)

Solenoid valve (SV12) (PMV2)

Main heat exchanger

Strainer Strainer

Check valve

Sub heat exchanger (Right side) Sub heat exchanger (Left side)

(PMV3)

4-Way valve



Check High-pressure valve sensor Solenoid Capillary Check joint tube valve (SV6) Capillary tube Strainer

Sensor (TL)



Check valve


Capillary tube

Capillary tube


Check valve


Sensor (TK3)

Strainer Strainer Check valve

Check valve

Capillary tube

Capillary tube

Sensor (TK1)

Strainer



Sensor (TK4)

Capillary tube

Capillary tube

Strainer

Solenoid valve (SV3A) Strainer

Check valve





Check joint

Strainer


Check joint

LowSensor pressure (TS1) sensor Sensor (TS2)

Oil separator


Liquid tank

Capillary tube


(PMV1)

Sensor (TO)

Main heat exchanger


196

Accumulator

14. LEAKAGE/CLOGGING OF OIL-EQUALIZATION CIRCUIT Check code list for leakage, clogging of outdoor refrigerant circuit and oil circuit parts Trouble by clogging Position with trouble (See next page.)

Unit issuing check code

Outdoor PMV

A

Corresponding unit

High-pressure protective operation Low-pressure protective operation Discharge temp. error

Check valve of main discharge pipe collective section

B

Corresponding unit

High-pressure protective operation High-pressure SW system error

P20 Abnormal high-pressure up P04-XX

Check valve of discharge pipe

C

Corresponding unit

High-pressure SW system error

P04-XX Abnormal high-pressure up

Check valve of oil-equalization circuit Capillary Strainer

D

Corresponding unit

Oil level detective circuit error Oil level down error

H16-XX Oil-equalization circuit error or H07 oil-shortage judgment

SV3A valve

E

Other connected unit

Oil level down error

H07

Excessive oil amount

SV3B valve

F

Corresponding unit


H07

Shortage of oil amount

SV3C valve

G

Other connected unit


H07

Excessive oil amount

SV3D valve SV3D valve circuit capillary Strainer

H

Corresponding unit


H07


SV3E valve

I

Corresponding unit

Oil level detective circuit error Oil level down error

Oil return capillary

J

Corresponding unit


SV3C bypass capillary

K

Corresponding unit

Oil level detective circuit error

Position with trouble (See next page.)

Unit issuing check code

Outdoor PMV

A

Corresponding unit

Outdoor liquid back error Oil level down error

Check valve of main discharge pipe collective section

B

Corresponding unit

Oil level down error Compressor breakdown Compressor error (Lock)

H07 Refrigerant stagnation H01-XX H02-XX

Check valve of discharge pipe

C

Corresponding unit

Oil level down error Compressor breakdown Compressor error (Lock)

H07 Refrigerant stagnation H01-XX H02-XX

Check valve of oil-equalization circuit

D

Corresponding unit


H07

Excessive oil amount (Leaked side) Shortage of oil amount (Normal side)

SV3A valve

E

Corresponding unit


H07


SV3C valve

G

Corresponding unit


H07

Judgment of oil shortage

Part name

Phenomena (Corresponding unit)

Check code to be detected P20 H06 P03 P17

H16-04 H07

H07 H16-03

High-pressure up Low-pressure down Discharge temp. up

Oil-equalization circuit error Judgment of shortage Shortage of oil amount Shortage of oil amount Oil-equalization circuit error

Trouble by leakage Part name

Phenomena (Corresponding unit)

Check code to be detected

NOTE) XX: Error on sub-code

197

P13 H07

Refrigerant stagnation

Propeller fan

FM Sensor (TE1) Strainer

Fan motor

(Right side) Sensor (TO)

Main heat exchanger

Pulse motor valve (Left side) Solenoid valve (SV12)

Main heat exchanger

(PMV2) Strainer

A Strainer

Check valve

Auxiliary heat exchanger (Right side) Auxiliary heat exchanger (Left side)

(PMV3)

4-Way valve



High-pressure sensor

H

Solenoid Capillary Check joint tube valve (SV6) Capillary tube Strainer

Sensor (TL)


K


I

Check valve



Check valve


Sensor (TK3)

Check valve

Check valve

Capillary tube

Capillary tube

Strainer

F


Capillary tube

Solenoid valve (SV3A)

Check valve





198

Accumulator

D

J

Sensor (TK4)

Strainer


C

G



Capillary tube

Strainer

Check joint

Capillary tube

Strainer Strainer

Sensor (TK1)

E

LowSensor pressure (TS1) sensor Sensor (TS2)

Oil separator

Capillary tube


Check joint

Check valve

B

Strainer


Liquid tank

Capillary tube


(PMV1)

15. REPLACING COMPRESSOR 15-1. Compressor Replacing Procedure (Outline) WARNING Never recover the refrigerant into outdoor unit. Be sure to use a refrigerant recovery device for refrigerant recovery for reinstallation or repair work. Recovery into the outdoor unit is unavailable; otherwise a serious accident such as rupture or ingury could occur.

START

NOTE) Full opening operation of PMV by CN30 short-circuiting rwill return to fully closed after 2 minutes have passed. To continue full-opening status, turn off power to the outdoor unit within 2 minutes.

Recover refrigerant from outdoor unit, using a suitable device.

Turn off power to the troubled outdoor unit.

Remove the troubled compressor.

Measure oil amount in the troubled compressor.

(

Check oil color of the troubled compressor. ASTM: Is 4 or more? Judge the oil status based on the oil color, and then decide to exchange the troubled compressor only or both compressors.

NO

)

Exchange the malfunctioning compressor only.

YES Replace both the malfunctioning compressor and the normal compressor.

Measure the oil amount in the normal compressor.

Adjust oil amount based upon the measured oil amount.

Install two compressors.

Check for leakage in the malfunctioning outdoor unit.

Vacuum the malfunctioning outdoor unit.

* This flowchart is the standard for replacing compressors. Each case must be considered on individual circumstances. Replace the compressors based on the following conditions of judgement. 1. Oil of 1900 cc is charged in a compressor for service. 2. The amount of oil is 3800 cc in an outdoor unit at shipment. 3. When a compressor is removed, it usually contains 800 to 1400 cc of oil. Oil separator usually holds 0 to 1000 cc of oil.

Charge the refrigerant.

END

199

15-2. Replacing Compressor Exchanging a compressor When changing the compressor, extract oil from the defective compressor and based on the quality of the oil, make the decision of whether to change one or both compressors. If oil colour ASTM is 4.0 or more, both compressors should be replaced.

CAUTION The compressor can weigh in excess of 20kg. One person should not attempt to lift it alone.

M5 screws (2 positions)

Removal of defective compressor • • • •

Turn off the power supply to the defective unit. Remove the front panel. (M5 × 7) Remove the cover on the electric parts box. (M4 × 2) Remove the screws (M5 × 2) that fix the electric parts box to the outdoor unit. • Remove the tabs for temporary hooking the lower part of the electric parts box. Note) Due to the center of gravity of the electrical box, pay careful attention as the box may fall out.

Claw for temporary hooking

• Remove the tabs from the upper part of the electric parts box and move it to the valve side. Note) The electrical parts box may become unstable. If it does, disconnect all cables and completely remove the electrical parts box. • • • •

Remove the lower duct. (M4 × 4) Remove the sound-insulation mat. Remove the crank case heater. Remove the terminal cover of the compressor, the wiring to the compressor and the case thermostat unit. Note) Remove the cables from the compressor side only.

Hooks

WARNING Be aware that if oil is present when brazing a fire could occur.

Ensure the cable ends are insulated with electrical tape. • Remove the discharge pipe, suction pipe, and oil-equation pipe. • Remove the hexagonal bolts fixing the compressor. (One side of hexagon: 13mm × 2 pcs. a compressor) Note) Only two hexagonal bolts are provided per compressor. • Remove the compressor.

Measurement of the quantity of oil in the defective compressor • Place the defective compressor on a scale, and use the weight to calculate the oil quantity. Oil amount in the defective compressor: A [cc] = (Removed compressor mass (kg) –23.5) × 1042 (Specific gravity of oil: 1042 cc/kg) Note)

Positions to be removed (3 positions) (In case of right side) * Left side is same as right side

• When compressor holds no oil, mass is 23.5 kg.

Lower duct

Compressor/ Sound-insulation mat

200

M4 screws (4 positions)

Color check of oil in the defective compressor • Lay the defective compressor down, extract a little oil from the oil-equalization pipe and then check the oil colour based on the oil colour sample. • Determine the number of compressors to replace based on the oil colour: • ASTM below 4: Replace the defective compressor • ASTM above 4: Replace both compressors

Compressor

Oil-equation pipe

When replacing only the defective compressor Adjustment of oil amount in the service compressor (Oil amount 1900cc at shipment) • Adjust the oil amount in the service compressor based on the amount of oil found in the defective compressor by following instructions below. 1. If the amount of oil in the defective compressor is 0 < A < 1000 1) Adjust the amount of oil in the service compressor to 1000 cc. Lay the service compressor down, and extract 900 cc of oil from the oil-equalization pipe. Note) Do not extract more than 900 cc as a compressor fault may be caused. • If the amount of oil in the defective compressor is below 500 cc, a fault in the oil-equalization circuit is possible. Check the compressor using “15-3. Procedure to Identify the Cause of Compressor Oil Shortage”. 2. If the amount of oil in the defective compressor is 1000 < A < 1900 1) Adjust the amount of oil in the service compressor to A cc. Lay the service compressor down and extract (1900 - A) cc of oil from the oil-equalization pipe. 3. If the amount of oil in the defective compressor is 1900 < A 1) Adjust the amount of oil in the service compressor to A cc. Insert a hose into the discharge pipe or oil equation pipe of the service compressor and then add (A 1900) cc of oil using a funnel.

Compressor

201

When replacing both the defective and normal compressors Removal of normal compressor • Remove the normal compressor in the same way as the defective compressor. Note) • Be sure to apply insulation to the removed cable terminals with insulating tape, etc.

WARNING Be aware that if oil is present when brazing, a fire eruption could occur.

Measurement of oil amount in the normal compressor • As with measurement of oil amount in the defective compressor, place the defective compressor on a scale, and use the weight to calculate the oil quantity. Oil amount of the normal compressor: B [cc] = (Removed compressor mass (kg) –23.5) × 1042 (Specific gravity of oil: 1042 [cc/kg]) Note) • When the compressor holds no oil, the compressor mass is 23.5kg.

Adjustment of oil amount in the service compressor • Adjust the oil amount in the service compressors based on the amount of oil found in the defective compressor (A cc) and normal compressor (B cc) by following instructions below. 1. If the total amount oil in both the compressors is 0 < (A + B) < 2000 1) Adjust the amount of oil in the two service compressors to 1000 cc each. Lay the two service compressors down, and extract 900 cc of oil from each of the oil-equalization pipes. • If the amount of oil in the defective compressor is below 500 cc, a fault in the oil-equalization circuit is possible. Check the compressor using “15-3. Procedure to Identify the Cause of Compressor Oil Shortage”. 2. If the total amount of oil in both the compressors is 2000 < (A + B) < 3800 1) Adjust oil amount in the two service compressors to A + B [cc] each. 2 • Lay the two service compressors down and extract 3800 – (A + B) [cc] of oil from each oil-equalization pipe. 2 3. If the total amount of oil in both the compressors is: 3800 < A 1) Adjust the amount of oil in both the service compressors to A + B [cc] each. 2 (Insert a hose into the discharge pipe or oil equation pipe of the service compressor and then add  A + B – 1900 [cc] of oil using a funnel.)  2 

Compressor

202

Installation of compressor • Install the compressor in the reverse procedure of removal. • When removing the compressor, the terminals may become loose. If this happens crimp them with pliers and then check there are no looseness. Note) • Only two hexagonal bolts are provided to fix the compressor. • The tightening torque of the hexagonal bolt to fix the compressor is 200kg/cm. • If oil has been extracted from the accumulator, braze the cutoff pipe after pinching.

Vacuuming In case of single outdoor system • Connect vacuum pump to the valve charge ports on the liquid, gas pipes and the check joint on the highpressure side and then vacuum. • Vacuum until the vacuum low-pressure gauge indicates 1 (mmHg). Note) • Before vacuuming, open PMV1, 2 fully. Vacuuming of the outdoor heat exchanger will not occur if PMV 1 and 2 are closed.

In case of multiple outdoor unit systems • In the case of conducting the refrigerant recovery at replacing the compressor, perform vacuuming as “13-3. Process after Repair ”.

Full opening of PMV1, PMV2 • • • •

Turn on the power to the outdoor unit. Confirm that Bit 1 on SW12 is OFF. Short CN30 on I/F P.C. board on the outdoor unit. Turn off the power to the outdoor unit within 2 minutes of short-circuiting.

Refrigerant charging • Add the same amount of refrigerant as the remaining refrigerant from charge port of the liquid service valve.

203

15-3. Procedure to Identify the Cause of Compressor Oil Shortage

Is there any disconnection, mis-cabling, or incorrect installation of sensors on the unit of which the compressor has been replaced?

NO

Correct miscabling or incorrect installation of the sensors: TK1: CN514/TK2: CN515 TK3: CN516/TK4: CN523

YES

NO

Are the sensor characteristics of TK1, TK2, TK3 and TK4 sensors correct?

Sensor error

® Exchange

YES

Check oil-equalization circuit in the following procedure once the compressor is removed.

Check items and procedure for the oil-equalization circuit under when the compressor has been removed

Check for refrigerant stagnation in compressor

Check for oil shortage in compressor

Check items

Position

Procedure

Outdoor PMV1, 2, 3 leakage Check valve leakage on main discharge pipe

A B

1) Pressurize with nitrogen through check joint of liquid pipe and check for pressure at check joint of discharge pipe. If pressure of check joint of discharge pipe is high, leakage from outdoor PMV 1,2, 3 and check valve of main discharge pipe are possible. Exchange the parts. 2) If the pressure cannot be found, open outdoor PMV 1,2,3 fully and recheck pressure. If the pressure from the discharge check joint is high, leakage from check valve of main discharge pipe is possible. Exchange the parts.

Check valve leakage of discharge pipe

C

3) If gas leaks from the brazed discharge pipe where compressor has been removed, when pressurized with nitrogen from the check joint of the main discharge pipes, the discharge pipe check valves is possibly leaking. Exchange the parts.

Check valve leakage of oil-equalization circuit

D

4) If gas leaks from the brazed oil-equalization pipe where compressor has been removed, when pressurized with nitrogen from the check joint of the discharge pipe, the check valve of oil-equalization circuit is a possibly leaking. Exchange the parts.

SV3A valve leakage SV3B valve clogging

E F

5) Pressurize with nitrogen with the check joint on the discharge pipe then open SV3B valve manually. If gas leaks from the brazed suction pipe where the compressor should be, there may be a leak in SV3A valve. Exchange the parts.

SV3E valve clogging. Clogging of oil-return capillary

G H

6) Open SV3E valve manually while pressurizing with nitrogen using the check joint on the discharge pipe. If there is no leakage at the brazed suction pipe where the compressor was removed, the SV3E valve or oil return capillary may be clogged. Exchange the parts.

SV3D valve capillary clogging. Clogging of oil-return capillary

I H

7) Open SV3E valve manually while pressurizing with nitrogen from the check joint of the discharge pipe. If there is no leakage at the brazed suction pipe where the compressor was removed, the SV3D valve/capillary or oil return capillary may be clogged. Exchange the parts.

204

Propeller fan

FM Fan motor Sensor (TE1) Strainer

(Right side) Sensor (TO)

Main heat exchanger

Pulse motor valve (Left side) Solenoid valve (SV12) Strainer

A Strainer

Check valve

Auxiliary heat exchanger (Right side) Auxiliary heat exchanger (Left side)

(PMV3)

4-Way valve




High-pressure sensor Solenoid Capillary Check joint tube valve (SV6) Capillary tube Strainer

Sensor (TL)


Nitrogen pressure


Nitrogen pressure

Sensor (TS2) Solenoid valve (SV2)

Oil separator

Check valve

Check valve

Sensor (TK3)

Strainer Strainer Check valve

Check valve

Capillary tube

Capillary tube

Sensor (TK1) Solenoid valve (SV3E)

Strainer



D

Solenoid valve (SV3A)

Solenoid valve (SV3B)

Check valve

Check valve Service valve at liquid side



H

C

Capillary tube

Strainer


Accumulator

Sensor (TK4)

Capillary tube

Strainer

Check joint

Capillary tube


Capillary tube


Check joint

LowSensor pressure (TS1) sensor

Strainer


Liquid tank

I

B

Main heat exchanger

(PMV2)


(PMV1)

G

E

205

F

H

16. REPLACING PROCEDURE OF PARTS No. 1

Part to be exchanged

Work procedure

Cabinet

Remarks Discharge cabinet

REQUIREMENT Wear protective clothing on your hands as other components may cause and injury etc.

2)

Disassembling 1) Stop the unit operation and turn off the power supply to the unit. Screws (4 corners)

2) Remove the screws on the discharge cabinet. (M5 × 16, 4 pcs.) 3) Remove the screws (Front/rear at lower side) on the cabinet. (M5 × 10, 7 pcs. each)

5 5) Suction cabinet (Front and rear)

4) Remove the screws on the service panel. (M5 × 10, 3 pcs.) 5) Remove the screws (Front/rear sides) on the suction cabinet. (M5 × 10, 4 pcs. each) (M4 × 10, 2 pcs. each) 6) Remove the screws (Right/left sides) on the side panel. (M5 × 10, 4 pcs. each)

3 Lower cabinet tab 3) (Front and rear)

6) Side board (Right and left)

4) Service panel

Reassembly Reassemble the cabinet in the reverse procedure ( 6) → 1) ) on the above “Disassembling Procedure”. However be sure to follow the following points when assembling the discharge cabinet. M Cautions when assembling the discharge cabinet The hooking tabs ∗ (6 positions) located on the inside edge of the discharge cabinet, are to be correctly fitted into the relevant slots on the right/left side panels. Failure to do so may result in unit vibration. 2

Propeller fan motor

* Hooking tab 2 × 3 positions each at longitudinal direction

(

)


Discharge cabinet

2)

Disassembling 1) Stop the unit operation and turn off the power supply to the unit. 2) Remove the screws on the discharge cabinet. (M5 × 16, 4 pcs.)

206

Screws (4 corners)

No. 2

Part to be exchanged Propeller fan motor

Work procedure

Remarks

3) Remove the flange nut fixing on the fan motor and propeller fan. (To tighten the nut, turn it clockwise.)

3) Flange nut

4) Remove the square washer. 5) Remove the propeller fan. NOTE Gently pull the straight upwards.

4) Square washer washer

6) Remove the connectors (3 positions) from IPDU P.C. board on the inverter fan and then pull out the fan motor lead upwards. 7) Remove the fixing screws (4 pcs.) on the fan motor.

6)

7) Scre Screws ws (4 positions) Route of the the fan an motor lead

Remo e the connector Remove and pull it out upwards upwards. upwards.

Detailed photo of connector

Signal line

M Cautions when exchange/reassembling the fan motor

Power line

D-cut face of motor shaft

1)

1) Match the D-cut surface of the motor with the mark on the fan, insert the propeller fan. (If tightening the D-cut surface when out of position, the propeller fan will melt due to friction heat, which will cause the unit to malfunction.) 2) Be sure to attach the square washer. (Failure to do so will result in abnormal sound and vibration being generated.) 3) Tighten the flange nut with 15N•m (153kg•cm). 4) Insert the hooking tabs on the discharge cabinet securely into the tab holes on the cabinet. (Refer to the photo in the previous page; 3 positions each at front and rear sides, total 6 positions)

207

®

Fan mark Positioning to D-cut face of shaft

No. 3

Part to be exchanged Heat exchanger

Work procedure

Remarks

REQUIREMENT

2) Motor base

Wear protective clothing on your hands as other components may cause and injury etc. Before beginning the procedure, ensure the refrigerant has been reclaimed from the outdoor unit, using a suitable refrigerant recovery device.

Heat exchanger exchanger (Left) Heat exchanger exchanger (Right) 3) Motor base bracket

M Disassembling (Example): Heat exchanger (Right)

5) Support

1) Remove the cabinet. 2) Remove the motor base. (M5 × 10, 4 pcs.) 3) Remove the motor base bracket. (M5 × 10, 5 pcs.)

4) Heat exchanger exchanger fixing board

4) Remove the screws on the heat exchanger fixing board. (M5 × 10, 6 pcs.)

6) Waterproof board

5) Remove the screws on the support. (M5 × 10, 3 pcs.) 6) Remove the screws on waterproof board. (M4 × 10, 3 pcs.) 7) Remove the brazing section on the connected pipe (8 positions). 8) Remove the screws on the support at the rear side, and then pull out the heat exchanger. (M5 × 10, 2 pcs.)

7) Brazing section (4 positions at header side)

7) Brazing section (4 positions at distributor side) 8) Rear side

8) Support

Draw it out it backwards. (Draw it out forwards in case of a left side heat exchanger.)

208

No. 4

Part to be exchanged HeInverter assembly M Removal of box

Work procedure

Remarks


3 Screw 3) Scre

1) Stop the unit operation and turn off the power supply to the unit. 2) Remove the inverter cover. (M4 × 10, 2 pcs.)

3 3) Screw Scre 4) Fixing claw cla

3) Remove the fixing screws on the box. (1 pc. each at upper and lower sides.) 4) Lightly push down the fixing tab at the lower side to enable the box to be removed. 5) Remove the hooking tab at the upper side while holding the ceiling board with both hands.

5)

to ard you. Pull out toward you.

Reassembly and cautions 2)

1) Hook the upper tab. 2) Push in the lower part. Be sure to check there is no pinching of the cables at the corners on the rear side. 3) Tighten the fixing screws on the upper and lower sides. (1 pc. each at upper/lower part)

2) When pushing in the lower part, be sure to check that the cable is not be stretched.

209

No. 5

Part to be exchanged Inverter assembly M Removal of P.C. board and electric parts

1. Noise filter P.C. board 2. Interface P.C. board

Remarks

Work procedure


4. IPDU P.C. board for fan 1. Noise filter P.C. boards

2. Interface P.C. board (Control P.C. board)

1) Stop the unit operation and turn off the power supply to the unit. 2) Remove the cables and then the P.C. board from the board edge spacer at the corner.

Exchange of service P.C. board For the interface P.C. board, it is necessary to set up the jumper links, etc for each model. Refer to “Exchange procedure of interface P.C. board”.

3. IPDU P.C. board

3. IPDU P.C. board (For driving of compressor 1) 3. PDU P.C. board (For driving of compressor 2)

1) Stop the unit operation and turn off the power supply to the unit. 2) Remove the heat sink (Radiator plate) fixing screws. ∗ (M4 × 16, 2 pcs.) 3) Remove the cables.

2) Screw

4) Remove the P.C. board from the card edge spacer at the corners. ∗ Heat sink fixing screw, compressor lead cables (U, V, W), etc, M4 screw tightening torque (1.47±0.1N•m)

Exchange of service P.C. board For the IPDU P.C. board, it is necessary to set up the jumper links, etc for each model. Refer to “Exchange procedure of IPDU P.C. board”.

4. IPDU P.C. board for fan

1) Stop the unit operation and turn off the power supply to the unit. 2) Remove the wires. 3) Remove the heat sink (Radiator plate) fixing screws. * (M4 × 8, 4 pcs.) ∗ Tightening torque of screw for heat sink fixing board (1.47 ± 0.1N•m)

210

3) Screw

No. 5

Part to be exchanged Inverter assembly M Removal of P.C. board and electric parts

Remarks

Work procedure


5. Reactor 6. Transformer

1) Stop operation, and then turn the power supply to the unit.

7. Electrolytic capacitor

2) Take off the screws (3 positions) on the terminal block installation board. 3) Take off the fixing screws on each part and then remove the cables. ∗ ∗ Caution when removing the electrolytic capacitor (No.7)

Reactor, transformer and electrolytic condenser are stored at the rear side of the terminal block. 2) Screw

1) Electrolytic capacitors will discharge over time. As the natural discharge by the electlytic capacitor may be unavailable and voltage may remain in some cases due to trouble conditions, be sure to confirm discharge of the capacitor.

2) Screw 2) Screw

Terminal block installation board

2) Use a suitable resistive load (100Ω/40W or equivalent) to discharge the capacitor or plug of the soldering iron, make continuity and discharge between and poles. Recommendation will check the voltage with a DC volt meter. NOTE Do not discharge using a tool (e.g. screwdriver) as the capacitor charge can cause an injury.

5. Reactor (2 pieces)

3) Screw

3) Screw

6. Transformer

7. Electrolytic condenser Plug of soldering iron

211

No. 6

Part to be exchanged Pressure sensor positions of 2-way valve coil

Work procedure

SV3C

Rear side

Remarks

SV3B

SV3A

Oil tank

Liquid tank SV3D SV2 SV6

Accumulator Oil separator

PS sensor

SV41

SV11

Compressor(2)

Compressor(1) SV42

PD sensor SV5 Front side SV12

7

Temperature sensor positions and identification

Front side of air conditioner

Front side

TS2 sensor TS1 sensor(Grasy)

TD1 sensor(Yellow)

Accumulator

Compressor(1)

212

TD2 sensor(Red)

Compressor(2)

No. 7

Part to be exchanged Temperature sensor positions and identification

Work procedure

Remarks

Rear side of air conditioner Accumulator Rear side TK3 sensor(White) TK1 sensor(Black) Accumulator side (Front side)

Oil separator

TK2 sensor(Blue) Rear side TK4 sensor(Green) Liquid tank

8

Attachment/ detachment of pipe fixing rubber

Oil tank

This air conditioner has been designed so that vibration has been reduced to a minium by incorporating in the lower section of the unit, the use of eyeglass rubber fixing brackets and SUS bands. Both of which greatly help to reduce vibration and improve unit reliability.

Used positions of SUS fixing band: Total 5 positions

Û

Ø6.35 Ø15.88 between SV3E valve and suction

Û

Ø8.0 Ø25.4 between SV2 valve and discharge

Û

Ø6.35 Ø15.88 between SV3C valve and discharge pipe

Û

Û

Ø8.0 Ø19.05 between SV42 valve and suction pipe

Ø8.0 Ø19.05 between SV41 valve and suction pipe

213

No. 8

Part to be exchanged Attachment/ detachment of pipe fixing rubber

Work procedure

REQUIREMENT

Remarks

1)

Wear protective clothing on your hands as other components may cause and injury etc.

Disassembling 1) Squeeze the band either side of the clip to release.

Compress the rubber to release the cup.

1)

2) Pushing in the tab side of SUS band the tab comes off from square hole.

Push in the band towards the arrow mark.

Assembly

Align the direction of the slits and then attach to each pipe.

1) Individually fit each rubber bracket to the relevant pipe.

1)

2) For assembly align the tab side of the SUS band to the slit side of the rubber bracket.

1)

3) Attach the rubber band so that there is no gap between the SUS band and the the fixing rubber bracket. Pay special attention no to create a gap at the hair pin of the rubber band. Matching the tabs, the slide them.

4) Squeeze the rubber bracket and band so that the hook part of the band clips into the square hole.

Align the tabs to the slit side of the rubber.

2)

Slide it. Push the band against the rubber to eliminate any gaps.

3)

Slide the square hole side towards the arrow mark.

4)

Push the tab side up against the rubber.

214

No. 9

Part to be exchanged Exchange of accumulator

Work procedure

Remarks

REQUIREMENT Wear protective clothing on your hands as other components may cause and injury etc. Before beginning the procedure, ensure the refrigerant has been reclaimed from the outdoor unit, using a suitable refrigerant recovery device. 1) Remove the lower cabinet (rear side). 2) Remove the fixing screws (M6 × 3 pcs.) from the accumulator leg ⇔ base board. 3) Remove the accumulator fixing board ∗ ⇔ fixing screws on accumulator (M6 × 2 pcs.) ∗ The accumulator fixing board is fixed to the middle partition board. (Take off only the screws, which fix the accumulator unit.) 4) Remove the pipe (brazing part) connected to the SV2 valve. 5) Remove the discharge cabinet fan and motor base. 6) Remove the accumulator cover ⇔ fixing screws (M5 × 4 pcs.) of the middle partition board and then pull it upwards. 7) Using a pipe cutter, cut off the entrance/exit pipe of accumulator at the specified position. (For the cut-off position, refer to the Manual attached to the repair parts.) 6) Accumulator cover

8) Pull the accumulator upwards.

7) Cut pipe at entrance/exit ports.

3) Accumulator fixing board

6)

6) Two screws each at front and rear 8) Middle partition par tition board

4) SV2 valve 3) Two screws

Accumulator 2) Three screws

4) Brazing part with SV2 assembly

215

No. 10

Part to be exchanged

Work procedure

Exchange of 4-way valve

Remarks

REQUIREMENT Wear protective clothing on your hands as other components may cause and injury etc. Before beginning the procedure, ensure the refrigerant has been reclaimed from the outdoor unit, using a suitable refrigerant recovery device. 1) Remove the lower cabinet (Front side). 2) Remove the inverter box according to the item “How to remove the inverter box”. 3) Remove the brazed sections on PMV assembly at 3 positions. (Refer to the figure below.) 4) Remove the brazed sections on the 4-way valve at 4 positions. ∗ When brazing, prepare a shield plate, etc. so that the brazing flames do not burn the wires.

Remove brazed sections at 2 positions on the strainer. Remove brazed sections at 3 positions on the 4-way valve. PMV assembly 4-way valve body

Remove brazed sections at 2 positions under PMV.

Remove brazed sections at 1 position under 4-way valve.

After removal of PMV assembly

Before removal of PMV assembly

216

17. P.C. BOARD 17-1. Indoor Unit 17-1-1. Exchange of P.C. Board for Indoor Service Part code

P.C. board model

Label display on P.C. board

431-6V-207

MMU-AP✻✻ ✻✻1WH series ✻✻ ✻✻ MMU-AP✻✻ ✻✻1YH series MMU-AP ✻✻ ✻✻1SH series ✻✻ MMD-AP✻✻ ✻✻1H series ✻✻ MML-AP✻✻ ✻✻1H series ✻✻ MMU-AP✻✻ ✻✻1BH series ✻✻ MMF-AP✻✻ ✻✻1H series

MCC-1403

03RD M01

431-6V-210

MMD-AP✻✻ ✻✻1BH series ✻✻

MCC-1402

03DD M02

431-6V-269

MMU-AP✻✻ ✻✻1H series ✻✻ ✻✻ MMC-AP✻✻ ✻✻1H series ✻✻ MMK-AP✻✻ ✻✻1H series ✻✻ MMD-AP✻✻ ✻✻1SPH/SH series ✻✻ MMU-AP✻✻ ✻✻2SH series

MCC-1402

03DD M03

Model type

Requirement when exchanging the P.C. board assembly for indoor service The fixed memory (herein EEPROM, IC10) stores the model type and capacity code, which are set upon shipment from the factory. Data set upon installation (i.e. line/indoor/group addresses) are also stored in the EEPROM. Proceed with the exchange of the P.C. board as shown in the procedure below. After exchange, confirm the settings for master/sub, etc. are correct and carry out a test operation.

Exchange procedure

Method 1 Before exchange, it is possible to turn on the power of the indoor unit and read out the setup contents from the wired remote controller.

Readout of EEPROM data: Procedure 1

ò Exchange of P.C. board for service & power ON: Procedure 2

ò Programming the EEPROM data: Procedure 3

ò Power supply reset (All the indoor units connected to the remote controller are reset in case of group operation control)

217

Method 2 Before exchange, it is impossible to read out the setup contents due to EEPROM error. Exchange of P.C. board for service & power ON: Procedure 2

ò

Writing-in of the setup data such as the model name, capacity code, indoor unit address high ceiling setup, connection setup of option, etc to EEPROM based upon customer’s information: Procedure 3

ò

Power supply reset (All the indoor units connected to the remote controller in case of group operation control)

Procedure 1 : Readout setup contents from EEPROM (Contents of EEPROM with setup changed at local site include setup at shipment from the factory are read out.)

1

1. Push SET + CL + TEST buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds or more. (Corresponds to number of the operation diagram of the remote controller in page 218.) ∗ In a group operation control, the firstly displayed unit No. indicates the header indoor unit No. In this case, is displayed in the item code (DN). The fan of the selected indoor unit operates, and also starts swinging in a model with flap.

2

2. Every pushing UNIT , the indoor unit Nos. in the group control are displayed successively. (Corresponds to number of the operation diagram of the remote controller in page 218.) Specify the indoor unit No. to be exchanged. ∗ The fan of the selected indoor unit operates, and also starts swinging in a model with flap. 3. Using temperature setup / buttons, the item code (DN) can be moved up/down one by one. (Corresponds to number of the operation diagram of the remote controller in page 218.) 4. First change the item code (DN) from → . (Setup of filter sign lighting time) In this time, make a note of contents of the displayed setup data. 5. In the next time, change the item code (DN) using / buttons. Make a note of contents of the setup data as same as the above. 6. Then repeat item 5., and make a note of contents of the important setup data as indicated in the attached table (Example). Item code necessary at minimum ∗ The item code (DN) is consisted with to )) . DN Contents DN No. may jump on the way.

3

7. When noting has finished, push TEST button to

6

return to the normal stop status. (Corresponds to number of the operation diagram of the remote controller in page 218.) (It requires approx. 1 minute to operate the remote controller.)

10

Type

11


12

Line address

13

Indoor address

14

Group address

SET DATA UNIT No.

R.C.

No.

TEMP.

3 5 6 1

FILTER RESET TEST

ON / OFF

TIMER SET

FAN

MODE

TIME

SWING/FIX

VENT

SET

CL

4

UNIT

2 218

Type and capacity of the indoor unit are necessary to set up the revolution frequency of the fan.

Procedure 2 : Exchange of P.C. board for service 1. Exchange P.C. board with a P.C. board for service. In this time, the jumper line (cut) setup or the (short-circuit) connecting connector setup on the previous P.C. board should be reflected on P.C. board for service. (See the blow figures.)

(MCC-1402)

JP1

(MCC-1403)

CN41

CN34

JP001

CN041

CN030 From the left CN112,111,110 When short-circuited plug is mounted to P.C. board before change, re-mount the short-circuited plug as previons.

2. It is necessary to set Indoor unit to be exchanged : Remote controller = 1 : 1 Based upon the system configuration, turn on power of the indoor unit with one of the following items. 1) Single (Individual) operation Turn on power of the indoor units and proceed to Procedure 3. 2) Group operation A) In case that power of the exchanged indoor unit only can be turned on Turn on power of the exchanged indoor unit only and proceed to Procedure 3. B) In case that power of the indoor units cannot be turned on individually (Case 1) a) Remove temporarily the group wire connected to the terminal blocks A and B of the exchanged indoor unit. b) After connecting the remote controller wire only to the removed terminal block, turn on power of the indoor units and proceed to Procedure 3. ∗ When the above methods cannot be used, follow to the two cases below. C) In case that power of the indoor units cannot be turned on individually (Case 2) a) Remove all CN41 connectors of the indoor units in the same group except those of the exchanged indoor unit. b) Turn on power of the indoor units and proceed to Procedure 3. ∗ After Procedure 3 operation has finished, be sure to return the temporarily removed group wire or CN41 connector to the original connection. Indoorunit Indoorunit P.C. board P.C. board

Indoorunit

Service P.C. board of the unit to be changed

(Case 1) A B

A B

A B

Group wire

(Case 2)

Indoorunit Indoorunit P.C. board P.C. board CN 41

A B

Remove CN41 connectors of the indoor units other than the units to be changed in the same group.

A B

Remote controller Indoorunit

Service P.C. board of the unit to be changed

A B

Group wire

219

Remove the group wire of the terminal blocks A and B of the changed indoor unit, and then install the remote controller only.

Remote controller

Procedure 3 : Writing-in of setup contents to EEPROM (The EEPROM contents which are installed on the service P.C. board have been set up at shipment from the factory.)

1

1. Push SET + CL + TEST buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds or more. (Corresponds to number of the operation diagram of the remote controller in page 218.) ( is displayed in the UNIT No box.) In this time, is displayed in the item code (DN). The fan of the indoor unit operates, and also starts swinging in a model with flap. 2. Using temperature setup / buttons, the item code (DN) can be moved one step up 1 or down one by one. (Corresponds to number of the operation diagram of the remote controller in page 218.) 3. First set up the type and capacity code of the indoor unit. (The data at shipment from the factory is written in EEPROM by changing the type and capacity code.) 1) Set to the item code (DN). (As before) 2) Using the timer time / buttons, set up the type. (Corresponds to number of the operation diagram of the remote controller in page 218.) (For example, 0001 indicates 4-way Air Discharge Cassette type.): Refer to the attached table.

3

4

5

3) Push SET button. (OK if display goes on.) (Corresponds to number of the operation diagram of the remote controller in page 218.) 4) Using temperature setup / buttons, set to the item code (DN). 5) Using the timer time / buttons, set up the capacity code. (For example, 0012 indicates 027 type.): Refer to the attached table. 6) Push SET button. (OK if display goes on.) 7) Push TEST button to return to the normal stop status. 4. In the next, the contents such as address setup, which were set up at the local site after installation are written in EEPROM. Execute again the operation in the above item 1.). 5. Using temperature setup / buttons, set to the item code (DN). (Lighting time setup for filter sign) 6. Compare the contents of the setup data which is displayed in this time with contents noted in a memo in Procedure 1 and customer’s information. 1) If data is incorrect, change it using the timer time / buttons so that it matches with contents noted in SET a memo, and then push button. (OK if display goes on.) 2) Do nothing if data is same as those in the memo. / buttons, change the item code (DN). 7. Using temperature setup Check also the contents of the setup data and then change them it to those in the memo. 8. Then repeat operations in items 6. and 7. 9. After setup operation, push TEST button to return to the normal stop status. (Corresponds to number of the operation diagram of the remote controller in page 218.) In a group operation, turn off the power supply once, return the group wires between indoor units and CN41 connectors as before, and then turn on power of all the indoor units. (It requires approx. 1 minute to operate the remote controller.) ∗ The item code (DN) is consisted with to )) . DN No. may jump on the way. Even if pushing SET button after changing the data incorrectly, the data can be returned to one before

6

change by pushing

CL

button before changing the item code (DN). P.C. board (MCC-1402)

P.C. board (MCC-1403)

EPROM (IC10)

EEPROM layout EEPROM (IC10) is attached to IC socket. To remove it, use a pair of tweezers, etc. To attach EEPROM, arrange the direction as shown in the following figures. ∗ In exchanging time, pay attention not to bend the lead wire of IC.

EPROM (IC10)

Align notch directions of IC socket and EEPROM for installation. Notch IC socket

220

Notch

EPROM

Record the contents of the following before exchanging P.C. boards. (Item code list) DN

Item

Memo

Setup at shipment from factory

01

Filter sign lighting time

According to type

02

Dirty condition of filter

0000: Standard

03

Central control address

0099: Undefined

06

Heating inlet temp. shift

0002: +2°C (Floor standing: 0)

0d

Cooling Auto mode existence

0001: No auto mode cooling/heating

0F

Cooling only/Heat pump select

0000: Heat pump

10

Type

According to model type

11


According to capacity code

12

Line address

0099: Undefined

13

Indoor unit address

0099: Undefined

14

Group address

0099: Undefined

19

Louver type (Air direction adjustment)

According to type

1E

Temp. width between cooling and heating automatic selective control points

0003: 3 deg (Ts ± 1.5)

28

Automatic restart from power failure

0000: None

HA terminal (T10) selection

0000: Normal

Sensor select

0000: Body sensor

5d

High ceiling selection

0000: Standard

60

Timer setup (Wired remote controller)

0000: Possible

(

* Automatic selection by connected outdoor unit

2A 2E 30 31 32 40

Type Item code [10] Setup data

Indoor unit capacity Item code [11] Type

Model abb. name

Setup data

Model

Setup data

Model

0000∗

Invalid

0016

—

0001

007 type

0017

048 type

0002

—

0018

056 type

0003

009 type

0019

—

0000


MMU-AP✻✻✻SH

0001∗


MMU-AP✻✻✻H

0002


MMU-AP✻✻✻WH

0003

1-way Air Discharge Cassette (Compact type)

MMU-AP✻✻✻YH

0004

—

0020

—

0004

Concealed Duct Standard

MMD-AP✻✻✻BH

0005

012 type

0021

072 type

—

0022

—

Slim Duct

MMD-AP✻✻✻SPH MMD-AP✻✻✻SH

0006

0005

0007

015 type

0023

096 type

0006

Concealed Duct High Static Pressure

MMD-AP✻✻✻H

0008

—

0024

—

0007

Under Ceiling

MMC-AP✻✻✻H

0009

018 type

0025

—

0008

High Wall

MMK-AP✻✻✻H

0010

—

0026

—

0011

024 type

0027

—

0009 0010

Floor Standing Cabinet

MML-AP✻✻✻H

0012

027 type

0028

—

0011

Floor Standing Concealed

MML-AP✻✻✻BH

0013

030 type

~

—

0012

(Floor Standing 8, 10HP)

0014

—

0034

—

0013

Floor Standing (Below 6HP)

0015

036 type

MMF-AP✻✻✻H

* The initial setup value of EEPROM installed on the service P.C. board

221

)

17-2. Outdoor Unit 17-2-1. Cautions in Service for Compressor 1. When checking the inverter output, remove the both wires of the compressor as follows.

17-2-2. How to Check Inverter Output 1. Turn off the power supply. 2. Remove the compressor lead from the compressor. (Be sure to remove lead wires of both compressors.) 3. Turn on the power supply and drive the air conditioner in cool or heat mode. In this case, be careful so that a fasten terminal of the compressor lead does not come to contact with other fasten terminal or you don’t touch other parts (Set cabinet). 4. Check the output voltage of the compressor lead at the inverter side. If the result is not accepted by the following criteria, replace IPDU P.C. board. No.

Measuring position

Criteria

1

Between Red and White

360V to 520V

2

Between White and Black

360V to 520V

3

Between Black and Red

360V to 520V

∗ After check of output, sufficiently check there is no distortion on the fasten terminals when reconnecting the compressor lead to the compressor terminals. If any distortion is found, caulk the fasten terminal with pliers, etc. and then connect it.

1. Turn off the power supply. 2. Remove the compressor lead from the compressor. 3. Using a tester, check the winding resistance between each phases of each compressor and resistance of the outdoor cabinet. • Is not grounded? → It is normal if there are 10MΩ or more. • Is not short-circuited between windings? → It is normal if there are 0.1Ω to 0.3Ω. (Use a precise digital tester.)

17-2-3. How to Check Outdoor Fan Motor 1. Turn off the power supply. 2. Remove three fasten terminals (U, V, W) of the fan motor from IPDU P.C. board for the outdoor fan. 3. Turn the fan with hands. If it is not turned, a fan motor error (Lock) is considered. Replace the fan motor with a new one. When it is turned, measure the winding resistance between each phases of the fasten terminal (motor winding) with a tester. It is normal if the winding resistance between phases are 13 to 33Ω. (Use a precise digital tester.) Procedure

Part name Outdoor fan motor

Measure resistance of each winding with a tester. Red

U Position

Resistance

Red-White

13~33Ω 13~33Ω 13~33Ω

Black-Red White-Black White V

Black W

222

(Normal temp.)

17-2-4. How to Check Fan Power Supply P.C. Board and Fan IPDU The fan power supply P.C. board supplies DC power. It supplies DC280V for the fan IPDU, and DC12V and DC7V for the control power supply respectively. If the control power is not supplied, a communication error (Error code [E31]) is out.

1. How to check fan power supply P.C. board (MCC-1439) As shown in the following table, measure the voltage of the check positions with a digital tester. No. 1 2

Check position

Criteria

Between CN500 and

DC260 to DC340V

Between CN500 and

DC12V

Between CN500 and

DC7V

Check item DC280V output Control power voltage

3

2. How to check fan IPDU 1. Check that the lead wires are correctly inserted into 250 fasten terminal of DC280V input and into the communication connector (CN01). 2. After then replace the fan IPDU if an abnormality is recognized.

MCC-1439 Front View

CN503 F500

CN505 RED

10A 250V~

CN504 BLU UART 2

J502 J504 J501

IC501 1

C520

+

R

10

R518

5

L501

T500

6 R519 D505

~

F501 T6.3A 250V~

+ R505

DB500 1

223

3

CN500

1

3

3 CAPA 1

CN502 BLU DC IN/OUT

MCC-1439-05S COMPONENT SIDE

CN500 WHI DC OUT

BLK CN506

C507

+ ~

C531

+

R503

C513

L506

–

C526

C523

6 C521

R511

L500

IC500

C508 RY500

+

C524

+

R513 GO IC503

11

1

3

C522

5

+7V

+

RED CN510

AC IN

C520

J500

6 UART 11

1 J505 J503

1

C501

C509

5

CN503 WHI

R523

5 UNIT 3 1

GND +5V

+12V

17-2-5. Interface Board Replacement Procedure This service board is commonly installed in different models. If the board assembly is to be replaced, check the displayed inspection contents and replace the board with the correct version for the model and follow this procedure.

Replacement steps 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn off the power supply of the outdoor unit. Remove the connectors, fasteners and screw terminals connected to the interface P.C. board. Remove the interface P.C. board from the six card edge spacers. Disconnect the jumper wires of the service board, as instructed in the table below. The jumper setting differs from the one to be replaced. If the model is not specified, inspection code “L10” is displayed and the equipment will not operate. No. At shipment

Model name Service P.C. board

J09

J10

J11

Yes

Yes

Yes

1

MMY-MAP0802FT8-INV

Disconnect

Disconnect

Leave intact

2

MMY-MAP1002FT8-INV

Leave intact

Disconnect

Leave intact

3

MMY-MAP1202FT8-INV

Disconnect

Leave intact

Leave intact

5. Set dip switch settings of the service board to the switch settings detailed below before replacement. Dip Switch

Setting contents

SW07

Demand setting

SW10

Outdoor fan high static pressure setting, etc.

SW13

System address setting

SW14 SW30

Terminating resistance setting

6. After setting the jumper wires of the service board, install the service board in the outdoor control unit (Confirm that it is securely fixed to the card edge spacers.) 7. Connect the connector and fasten terminals (confirm that they are correctly and securely inserted). 8. If a component part on the board is bent during board replacement, adjust it manually so that it is not in contact with other parts/components. 9. Install the cover then turn on the power supply. Check the operation.

IC02

IC01

Jumper wire replacement place (J09, 10, 11) IC300

IC301

CN314 CN311

224

17-2-6. Comp-IPDU Board Replacement Procedure Manual This service board is commonly installed in different models. If the board assembly is to be replaced, replace it properly in with the correct version for the model and follow this procedure.

Replacement steps 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Turn off the power supply to the outdoor unit. Confirm that the capacitor has been fully discharged (confirm that the voltage between CN13 and CN15 is 0 V). Remove the connectors, fasteners and screw terminals connected to the A3-IPDU board. Remove 2 screws that fix the IGBT (Q200) of the Comp-IPDU board to the heat sink. Remove the Comp-IPDU board from the four card edge spacers. Set the dip Switch (SW801) of the Comp-IPDU board, as instructed in the table below. If the model is not specified, inspection “L29” is displayed and the equipment will not operate. SW801

Comp-IPDU No. Bit 1

Bit 2

JAt shipment

ON

ON

No.1

ON

ON

No.2

ON

OFF

7. After setting the dip Switch of the service board, apply silicone grease evenly onto the IGBT and install it in the outdoor control unit (Confirm that it is securely fixed to the card edge spacers). 8. Fix the IGBT of the Comp-IPDU board to the heat sink with two screws. 9. Connect connectors/fasteners and confirm they are correctly and securely inserted. 10. If a component part on the board is bent during board replacement, adjust it manually so that it does not touch other parts or components. 11. Install the cover then turn on the power supply. Check the operation.

Board layout of the inverter

Switch layout on the P.C. board IC101

T03 Noise filter board

T01

SW801 Fan IPDU Power supply P.C. board assembly

Interface board IC222 Magnetic switch

CN26

Terminal

CN13 Comp-IPDU

Comp-IPDU

No.1

No.2

CN17

225

CN15 Q200 T02

T05

T04

17-2-7. Notice for Wiring Wiring for service shall be done according to the wiring diagram. Special caution is needed for the reactor, which has different connecting points on the COMP-IPDU1 and COMP-IPDU2.

COMP-IPDU No.1

COMP-IPDU No.2

TO REACTOR 1

TO REACTOR 2

CN20 (REACTOR 1) CN21 (REACTOR 1)

CN08 (REACTOR 2) CN07 (REACTOR 2)

P.C. board noise P.C. filter board

P.C. board interface

power

P.C. board P.C. board Comp-IPDU Comp-IPDU No.1 No.2

Inverter front view

DANGER The electrolytic capacitors in this panel are charged to 660 volts D.C. Before servicing, turn off the power supply and allow the capacitor to discharge for at least 10 minutes. (Purpose: Discharge the capacitor) Discharge to a safe level of 10 volts D.C. or LESS. Test with a D.C. Voltmeter as shown.

CN13 (CAPA–) CN15 (CAPA+)

10V, DC

Comp-IPDU No.1 & No.2

COMP-IPDU No. 1 and COMP-IPDU No.2 have the same electric potential, measure both. Never discharge the capacitor terminals with any metal implement. Personal injury or equipment damage may result.

226

Inverter Assembly Configuration

Fan IPDU Power supply P.C. board for fan

BUS terminal block

Relay connector

IPDU1

Magnet swith

IPDU2

Noise filter Interface P.C. board Power supply terminal block

Over-current relay

227

TOSHIBA CARRIER CORPORATION 2 CHOME 12-32, KONAN, MINATOKU, TOKYO, 108-0075, JAPAN Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CARRIER CORPORATION, ALL Rights Reserved.